Revision 1 Specs

Fort Benning
Georgia
US Army Corps
of Engineers
Savannah District
Task Order Request Number

W912HN-09-X-1813
Booker Range 75th Ranger Regiment
RFP Letter, Bid Schedule, Wage Decision, Proposal
Requirements and Technical Provisions
Divisions 01 through 33
PN HH80087, HH80088, HH80088, HH80090
August 2012
U.S. ARMY ENGINEER DISTRICT, SAVANNAH

CORPS OF ENGINEERS
100 WEST OGLETHORPE AVENUE
SAVANNAH, GEORGIA 31401-3640
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

SAVANNAH DISTRICT, CORPS OF ENGINEERS
100 W. OGLETHORPE AVENUE
SAVANNAH, GEORGIA 31401-3640
REPLY TO
August 31, 2012
ATTENTION OF:
Contracting Division
Execution Branch
SUBJECT: MATOC Request for Proposal for Task Order Request Number W912HN-09-X1813, Booker Range Renovation and Modernization, Ft Benning, GA
1. In accordance with Local Clause 52.216-4008, Multiple Award Fair Opportunity Task and
Delivery Order Contracts, subject project is being offered to all Offerors in the MATOC pool, as
identified below, giving each fair opportunity to compete for this action by issuance of this
Request for Proposal (RFP) letter. Any Offeror who does not wish to be considered for this
particular task order is requested to notify this office in writing, within seven (7) calendar days of
receipt of this letter, indicating reason for non-participation. Those who do wish to compete must
submit a proposal by the date and time indicated in paragraph 12 below, and in accordance with
the criteria specified herein.
Brantley Construction Services, LLC
Attn: Sidney Brantley
8300 Dorchester Road
Charleston, SC 29419-2903
Email: christina@brantleyconstruction.com & GBrantley@BrantleyConstruction.com
Phone: 843-552-0150
Leebcor Services, LLC
Attn: John Karafa
5400 Discovery Park Blvd Ste 104
Williamsburg, Virginia 23188-2882
Email: john.karafa@leebcor.com & jon@leebcor.com
Phone: 747-220-5577
Team Construction, LLC
Attn: Melissa A Leifheit
101-A Middle Street
Jacksonville, NC 28546-6798
Email: mleifheit@militaryandfederal.com & milfedestimating@earthlink.net
Phone: 910-353-3797
Triune-Beck Joint Venture
Attn: Vince Fudzie
1807 Ross Avenue, Suite 500
Dallas, TX 75201-8006
Email: vfudzie@tmvllc.us & THill@tmvllc.us
Phone: 214-503-0549
Tyler Construction Group, Inc.

Attn: Charles Tyler
433 Rabon Road
Columbia, SC 29113-5028
E-mail: ctyler@tyler-construction.com
Phone: 803-865-1404
2. Interested participants must submit a price and technical proposal for work detailed in the
scope of work, drawings and specifications posted on FedTeDs. To access the scope of work,
specifications and drawings go to the following link:
https://www.fbo.gov/fedteds/W912HN09X1813
3. Technical inquiries are to be submitted via Bidder Inquiry in ProjNet at
www.projnet.org\projnet Bidder Inquiry Key: LS34DX-7KMUNY All questions
regarding this RFP must be submitted in writing via aforementioned method no later than 5
calendar days prior to the date established for receipt of proposals as shown in paragraph 12
below. The Government reserves the right to not respond to questions/inquiries received after
this date.
4. To submit and review bid inquiry items, bidders will need to be a current registered user or
self-register into system. To self-register go to web page, click BID tab select Bidder Inquiry,
select agency USACE, enter Key for this solicitation listed below, and your e-mail address, click
login. Fill in all required information and click create user. Verify that information on next
screen is correct and click continue.
5. If an Offeror believes the requirements in this RFP contain an error, omission, or are
otherwise unsound; the offeror shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer in writing, to
include supporting rationale. Such communication may be submitted via the POC identified in
paragraph 16 below.
6. The scope of work for this project includes, but is not limited to:
Bid Schedule A:
Erosion Control and Sediment Control Plan Implementation for Booker Range and all work
required by the Design Drawings to comply with State Approved Plan.
400 M Range Renovation to existing targets and berms to allow for expansion beyond the
current treeline. New work will consist of tree removal, covered firing line, extension of current
range road, target pit and storage building downrange for targets and other equipment.
100 M Covered Range Renovation to existing targets and berms to allow for the construction of
a cover. New work will consist of covered canopy over the range as designed and a covered
firing line.
100 M Flat Range Renovation to existing targets and berms to set the conditions for new work.
New work will consist of a covered firing line and a bleacher enclosure.
50 M Flat Range Renovation to existing targets and berms to set the conditions for new work.
New work will consist of a covered firing line and a bleacher enclosure.
Bid Schedule B:
Construct a Classroom Bldg. 6,500 sf. which will have 5,000 sf to accommodate 100 soldiers in
a single classroom, a Cadre Office and Conference Room. Building shall have a separate
cleaning station / area approximately 1,500 sf with entrance doors from the inside and outside.
Building shall support infrastructure for 10 x cleaning station tables made of stainless steel
(government furnished) for standing operation. Building shall have proper industrial ventilation
and 10 x air hoses along the back wall tied into a ~ 700 gallon air compressor (placed outside of
the building and government furnished). Building shall have lighting.
Construct 25' x 50' concrete pad for Arms Room vault and ARMAGs which may be located
opposite side of road to fall in line with current communication lines.
7. This Request for Proposal has two Bid Schedules. Offerors may propose on one or both of
the Bid Schedules. Each Bid Schedule will be evaluated independently. The Contracting Officer
may award a separate task order for the work in each Bid Schedule to more than one Contractor
if it is most advantageous to the Government or the Contracting Officer may award the work in
both Bid Schedules to the same offeror through award of a single task order.
Bid Schedule A (Booker Ranges): The construction magnitude for this Bid Schedule (Booker
Ranges) is between $1.0 million and $5.0 million dollars. The Contracting Officer will award a
task order for this work to the lowest priced offeror. Award will be based on price alone.
In accordance with FAR Clause 52.217-5, Evaluation of Options, the Government will evaluate
offers for Bid Schedule A for award purposes by adding the total price for all options to the total
price for the basic requirement. Evaluation of options will not obligate the Government to
exercise the option(s).
Bid Schedule B (Booker Range Classroom/Pad): The construction magnitude for Bid Schedule B
(Booker Range Classroom/Pad) is between $500,000 and $1.0 million. :
The Government will evaluate proposals submitted for this task order using a best value trade-off
evaluation methodology. Technical representatives shall review all proposals and provide the
Contracting Officer with a written technical analysis of each Offerors proposal. The Contracting
Officer, in conjunction with the Project Delivery Team (PDT), will review these analyses for
correctness and completeness. Upon conclusion of this review, proposals and factors will be
rated by the Contracting Officer using the adjectival descriptions shown at Appendix C, Ratings
and Definitions. The following Factors are identified as applicable Bid Schedule B:
FACTOR 1: Building Function and Aesthetics.
In conduct of this evaluation process the Government has established the following relative order
of importance:
PRICE is more important than ALL NON-COST FACTORS when combined.
FACTOR 1: Building Function and Aesthetics: This factor is of less importance than Price.
BASIS OF AWARD for Bid Schedule B: Proposals must meet the criteria stated in this RFP in
order to be eligible for award, to include responsiveness and technical acceptability. In order to
determine which proposal represents the best value for award of the work in Bid Schedule B, the
Government will compare proposals to one another. The Government will award the Task Order
to the Offeror whose technical submittal and price proposal for the Task Order contains the
combination of those criteria described in this document and its associated Appendices and the
technical specifications which offers the best value to the Government. Best value will be
determined by a comparative assessment of proposals against all criteria in this RFP.
The Government reserves the right to accept other than the lowest priced offer for award of a
task order for the work in Bid Schedule B. The right is also reserved to reject any and all offers
for this Bid Schedule. After review by the Contracting Officer and Project Delivery Team, the
task order shall be awarded for the work in Bid Schedule B to the contractor whose proposal
offers the best value to the Government.
8. In accordance with FAR Clause 52.228-1, Bid Guarantee, Offerors are required to submit a
bid bond with the proposal. A separate Bid Guarantee must be submitted for each Bid Schedule.
A single Bid Guarantee may not be submitted for both Bid schedules. The Bid Guarantee shall
be 20% of the bid price or $3 Million, whichever is less. Bid bonds must be submitted in original
form and contain original signatures. Photocopied, facsimile, scanned or otherwise mechanically
reproduced bid bonds will not be accepted. Failure to submit a proper bid bond may be cause for
rejection of an Offerors proposal.
9. Wage Decision GA120179 dated 8/24/2012 GA179 (Attachment1 and 2) applies to all CLINs
of the attached Bid Schedule A and Bid Schedule B; with the exception of CLIN 0001 in Bid
Schedule A, Erosion Control and Sediment Control Plan Implementation for Booker Range.
Wage Decision GA120071 dated 8/24/2012 GA71 applies to CLIN 0001 ONLY in the
attached Bid Schedule A. Offerors are reminded that wage determinations are subject to change
prior to award. All proposed pricing shall include the most current wage rates. All offerors are
encouraged to review wage rates established by the Department of Labor prior to submitting
proposals.
10. In accordance with FAR Clause 52.237-2, Site Visit (Construction), a site visit was held on
30 Aug 2012, 1000 hours beginning at the Booker Range located on 1st Division Road near
the intersection of Ivy Road and 1st Division Road, Ft. Benning GA. POCs are Eddie
Culpepper at 706-617-4047 and John McLain 706-905-1402.
11. In accordance with FAR Provision 52.222-23, Notice of Requirement for Affirmative Action
to Ensure Equal Employment Opportunity for Construction, minority participation goals are
29.6% for each trade and female participation goal is 6.9%.
12. Proposals shall be organized and tabbed in accordance with Appendix A, General Proposal
Submission and Tabbing Requirements and Appendix B, Proposal Factors and Submission
Requirements. Proposals shall be signed by a duly authorized official of the Offerors company
and are required no later than 12:00 PM local time on Wednesday, September 12, 2012. Refer
to Appendix A for numbers of copies. Proposals shall be submitted in accordance with the
following instructions:
ELECTRONIC PROPOSAL SUBMISSION, TO INCLUDE E-MAIL AND FACSIMILE
TRANSMISSIONS, IS NOT AUTHORIZED.
HAND CARRIED PROPOSAL SUBMISSION, except for delivery by Federal Express
and United Parcel Service, IS NOT AUTHORIZED.
Proposals must be delivered by U.S. Mail, including U.S. Express Mail, Federal Express or
United Parcel Service.
All proposals must be clearly identified with the contractors name and address. To ensure
timely and proper handling, the lower left corner of the outermost wrapper should indicate the
following:
Request for Proposal No: W912HN-09-X-1813
Due Date of Proposal: 12 September 2012
Time by which Proposals are due: 12:00 pm (Local Time)
Title of Project: Booker Range, Ft Benning, GA
Proposals must be addressed as indicated below.
U.S. Army Engineer District, Savannah
ATTN: CECT-SAS-E (Shannon Anthony)
100 West Oglethorpe Avenue
Savannah, Georgia 31401-3640
The date and time of delivery established by commercial carriers is not the official time of
receipt by the Government. Security Guards posted at the loading dock entry for the building do
not receive proposals and will contact Mailroom personnel. Once Mailroom personnel are
available, the proposal will be processed by the Security Guards using established security
procedures and subsequently picked up by Mailroom personnel. After receipt by the Mailroom
personnel, a record will be made of the receipt of the proposal. Completion of these actions will
constitute delivery of the proposal by the date and time designated for receipt of proposals.
Offerors are responsible for allowing sufficient time for the proposal to be processed for
receipt and are cautioned that sufficient time may be as much as 24 hours prior to the date
and time designated for receipt of proposals.
The Government will not be responsible for proposals delivered to any location or to anyone
other than those designated to receive proposals on its behalf. Offerors are responsible for
ensuring that proposals are submitted so as to reach the office designated for receipt of proposals.
Offerors are responsible for allowing sufficient time for the proposal to be physically received
and processed by Mailroom personnel in accordance with the information provided.
13. Offerors shall acknowledge all revisions to the RFP issued prior to the due date for the
submission of proposals in writing via a cover letter accompanying the proposal, unless
instructed to do otherwise by the Contracting Officer.
For all revisions to the RFP issued after the submission of proposals, the offerors shall
acknowledge the revision in writing, at the time and place directed by the Contracting Officer in
the revision letter.
14. In accordance with FAR Clause 52.215-1, Instructions to OfferorsCompetitive
Acquisitions, the Government reserves the right to make award without discussions. Therefore,
Offerors should submit their best technical and price terms in their initial offer and not
automatically assume that they will have an opportunity to participate in discussions, if later
determined to be in the best interests of the Government, or to submit a revised offer.
Discussions, if held, may be held with only the highest rated Offerors or Offeror.
15. In accordance with clause 52.249-4001 I TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY
SEVERE WEATHER (APR 1991 OCE)
(a) This provision specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for
unusually severe weather in accordance with the contract clause entitled DEFAULT (FIXED
PRICE CONSTRUCTION). In order for the Contracting Officer to award a time extension
under this clause, the following conditions must be satisfied:
(1) The weather experienced at the project site during the contract period must be found to be
unusually severe, that is, more severe than the adverse weather anticipated for the project
location during any given month.
(2) The unusually severe weather must actually cause a delay to the completion of the project.
The delay must be beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor.
(b) The following schedule of monthly anticipated adverse weather delays is based on National
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar data for the project location and
will constitute the base line for monthly weather time evaluations. The Contractor's progress
schedule must reflect these anticipated adverse weather delays in all weather dependent
activities.
MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAY
WORKDAYS BASED ON 5-DAY WORK WEEK
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
9
8
6
4
4
6
9
7
5
3
4
8
(c) Upon acknowledgment of the Notice to Proceed and continuing through-out the contract,
the Contractor will record on the daily Contractor Quality Control report the occurrence of
adverse weather and resultant impact to normally scheduled work. Actual adverse weather delay
days must prevent work on critical activities for 50 percent or more of the Contractor's scheduled
workday. The number of actual adverse weather delay days shall include days impacted by
actual adverse weather (even if adverse weather occurred in previous month), be calculated
chronologically from the first to the last day in each month, and be recorded as full days. If the
number of actual adverse weather delay days exceeds the number of days anticipated in
paragraph (b) above, the Contracting Officer will convert any qualifying delays to calendar days,
giving full consideration for equivalent fair weather workdays, and issue a modification in
accordance with the contract clause entitled DEFAULT (FIXED PRICE CONSTRUCTION).
16. If you have any questions, please contact Shannon Anthony at (912) 652-5161.
Sincerely,
Attachments(s)
1. Bid Price Schedule A
2. Bid Price Schedule B
3. Wage Decision
Russette F. Hazelwood
Contracting Officer
Enclosure(s)
1. Appendix A
2. Appendix B
3. Appendix C
4. Appendix D
ATTACHMENT 1
BID SCHEDULE A
W912HN-09-X-1813
Booker Ranges
Fort Benning, GA
____________________________________________________________________________________
Item
Unit
Line Item
No.
Description
Quantity Unit Price
Amount______
0001
BASE - Erosion Control and Sediment Control

Plan Implementation for Booker Range
1
LS
***Wage Decision GA120071 applies to this CLIN ONLY***
XXX
$________________
0002
BASE 400 M Range Renovation
0003
BASE 400 M Range with all Ancillary

Improvements as shown per the SPECs and
Drawings (New Work)
**the statutory limit is $750,000.00**
LS
XXX
$________________
LS
XXX
$________________
LS
XXX
$________________
LS
XXX
$________________
LS
XXX
$________________
LS
XXX
$________________
LS
XXX
$________________
LS
XXX
$________________
0004
BASE 100 M Covered Range Renovation
0005
BASE 100 M Covered Range with all Ancillary

Drawings (New Work)
1
0006
OPTION 1 100 M Flat Range Renovation
0007
OPTION 2 100 M Flat Range with all Ancillary

Drawings (New Work)
1
0008
OPTION 3 50 M Flat Range Renovation
0009
OPTION 4 50 M Flat Range with all Ancillary

Drawings (New Work)
TOTAL BASE OFFER BID (Items 0001-0005)
$_______________
TOTAL OPTION OFFER BID (Items 0006-0009)

TOTAL BASE + OPTION BID (Items 0001-0009)
$__________________
NOTES FOR BID SCHEDULE A
NOTE NO. 1. The total Contract Duration for the work in this Schedule will not exceed 365
Calendar Days. There will be a separate UXO contract (separate contract action) that will be
executed concurrently with this construction contract. CLINs 0001 through 0009 will be
impacted by UXO removal. Work stoppage will be coordinated in advance and will not exceed
90 calendar days of total delay. The Contract Duration includes an additional 90 calendar days
for this delay. Work can proceed on all areas not impacted by UXO or the UXO removal
contractor. UXO clearance may take up to 180 calendar days from the date of this task order award.
NOTE NO. 2. Offers providing less than 90 calendar days for Government acceptance after the
date offers are due will not be considered and will be rejected.
NOTE NO. 3. The statutory cost limitation for Contract Line Item Numbers (CLINs) 003, 005,
007, and 0009 is $750,000. Offers that exceed this limit for the individual CLINs will be
rejected even if the total for the Schedule is within the construction magnitude.
NOTE NO. 4. All modifications to proposals are to be submitted on copies of the latest Contract
Line Item (CLIN) schedules as issued in the Request for Proposal or the latest amendment
thereto. In lieu of indicating additions/deductions to line items, all Offerors shall state revised
prices for each item.
NOTE NO. 5. Offerors must insert a price on all numbered items of the CLIN Schedule. Failure
to do so will disqualify the Offeror.
NOTE NO. 6. The Government may require the Contractor to perform the work identified as
Option 1, Option 2, Option 3 and Option 4 at the prices stated in the CLIN Schedule. The
Contracting Officer may exercise the Options upon award and/or by written notice to the
Contractor within 90 calendar days after the date issuance of the Notice to Proceed by the
Contracting Officer. The Option items will be performed within the base contract performance
period.
NOTE NO. 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES will be assessed at $662.96 per day.
NOTE NO. 8. By separate bid schedule, the Booker Range Classroom/Pad is being solicited and
awarded concurrently with this contract action. The Contractor will plan for the possibility of
coordination with the awardee of a separate task order because that contractor will be working
adjacent to the construction limits of this task order. The coordination required will included, but is
not limited to, site access, contractor lay down, material delivery, worker access, and equipment
movement. Coordination will be made through the Administrative Contracting Officer (ACO) and
Contracting Officers Representative (COR).
ATTACHMENT 2
BID SCHEDULE B
W912HN-09-X-1813
Booker Range Classroom/Pad
Fort Benning, GA
____________________________________________________________________________________
Item
Unit
Line Item
No.
Description
Quantity Unit Price
Amount______
0001
BASE - Design and Construct

Classroom (New Work)
0001A Design Classroom
LS
XXX
$________________
0001B Construct Classroom

LS
XXX
$________________
LS
XXX
$________________
LS
XXX
$________________
0002
BASE Design and Construct

Concrete Pad for Arms Vault (New Work)
0002A Design Concrete Pad for Arms

Vault
0002B Construct Concrete Pad for Arms
Vault
TOTAL BASE OFFER BID (Items 0001-0002)
10
$_______________
NOTES FOR BID SCHEDULE B
NOTE NO. 1. The total Contract Duration for this work will not exceed 270 Calendar Days.
NOTE NO. 2. Offers providing less than 90 calendar days for Government acceptance after the
date offers are due will not be considered and will be rejected.
NOTE NO. 3. The construction magnitude for SRM funded CLIN NUMBERs 0001-0002 is
between $500,000 and $1.0 million. The statutory cost limitation for Contract Line Item
Numbers (CLINs) 0001B and 0002B Combined is $750,000. Offers that exceed this limit for the
individual CLINs will be rejected even if the total for the Schedule is within the construction
magnitude.
NOTE NO. 4. To better facilitate the receipt and proposal process, all modifications to proposals
are to be submitted on copies of the latest Contract Line Item (CLIN) schedules as published in
the solicitation or the latest amendment thereto. In lieu of indicating additions/deductions to line
items, all Offerors shall state their revised prices for each item.
NOTE NO. 5. Offerors must insert a price on all numbered items of the CLIN Schedule. Failure
to do so will disqualify the Offeror.
NOTE NO. 6. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES will be assessed at $662.96 per day.
NOTE NO. 7. By separate bid schedule, the Booker Ranges contract is being solicited and awarded
concurrently with this contract action. The Contractor will plan for the possibility of coordination
with the awardee of a separate task order because that contractor will be working adjacent to the
construction limits of this task order. The coordination required will included, but is not limited to,
site access, contractor lay down, material delivery, worker access, and equipment movement.
Coordination will be made through the Coordination will be made through the Administrative
Contracting Officer (ACO) and Contracting Officers Representative (COR).
11
ATTACHMENT 3
Wage Decision
General Decision Number: GA120179 08/24/2012
GA179
Superseded General Decision Number: GA20100251

State: Georgia
Construction Type: Building
County: Chattahoochee County in Georgia.
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family
homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories).
Modification Number
0
1
2
3
Publication Date
01/06/2012
06/01/2012
08/03/2012
08/24/2012
ASBE0048-001 04/01/2012
Rates
Fringes
ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST

INSULATOR........................$ 24.82
13.26
---------------------------------------------------------------ELEC0613-001 09/01/2010
Rates
ELECTRICIAN......................$ 29.00
Fringes
8.09
FOOTNOTES: Work on bar joists, walk logs, exposed steel and

swinging scaffolds when the surface the worker stands or
sits on exceeds twenty-five (25) feet above solid floor and
the worker is subject to free fall: $1.00 per hour
additional. Work of a similar nature above fifty (50)
feet: $3.00 per hour additional.
---------------------------------------------------------------ENGI0474-014 07/01/2010
Rates
12
Fringes
Operating Engineers:
Boom (over 15 tons), Crane
(over 10 tons), Drill,
Forklift (15 tons and
over), and Hoist (two drum).$ 23.30
11.60
Bulldozer, Boom (15 tons
and under), Compactor,
Excavator, Forklift (under
15 tons), Hoist (one
drum), Loader, and Scraper..$ 21.47
11.60
Crane (over 120 tons).......$ 24.30
11.60
Crane (over 250 tons).......$ 25.30
11.60
Oiler.......................$ 19.13
11.60
---------------------------------------------------------------* IRON0387-001 08/01/2012
Rates
Fringes
IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 24.04

10.01
---------------------------------------------------------------* PAIN0193-001 08/01/2012
Rates
Fringes
PAINTER: Brush, Roller, Spray...$ 18.00

8.52
---------------------------------------------------------------SUGA2008-163 08/21/2008
Rates
Fringes
BRICKLAYER.......................$ 11.65
0.17
CARPENTER, Includes Cabinet

Installation, and Form Work
(Excludes Drywall Hanging).......$ 12.23
0.00
CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$
9.77
0.21
DRYWALL HANGER...................$ 13.50
0.00
IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 11.05
0.21
LABORER:
Common or General......$
8.74
0.00
LABORER:
Pipelayer..............$
8.00
0.00
13
METAL BUILDING ERECTOR...........$ 11.28
2.30
OPERATOR:
Backhoe...............$
9.08
0.00
OPERATOR:
Grader/Blade..........$
9.00
0.24
OPERATOR:
Mechanic..............$ 17.95
0.00
OPERATOR:
Roller................$ 10.88
0.00
PIPEFITTER, Excludes HVAC

Pipe Installation................$ 13.00
1.35
PLUMBER, Includes HVAC Pipe

Installation.....................$ 14.07
1.03
ROOFER, Excludes Installation

of Metal Roofs...................$ 10.00
0.00
SHEET METAL WORKER, Includes

Metal Roof Installation..........$ 16.52
2.27
SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire

Sprinklers)......................$ 11.00
3.18
TILE SETTER......................$ 15.00
0.00
TRUCK DRIVER.....................$ 7.25

0.00
---------------------------------------------------------------WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing
operation to which welding is incidental.
================================================================
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within
the scope of the classifications listed may be added after
award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses
(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
---------------------------------------------------------------The body of each wage determination lists the classification
and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the
14
cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage

determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical
order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular
rate is union or non-union.
Union Identifiers
An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with
characters other than "SU" denotes that the union
classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that
classification.
Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011. The
first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and
the four-digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local
union number or district council number where applicable ,
i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the
example, is an internal number used in processing the wage
determination. The date, 07/01/2011, following these
characters is the effective date of the most current
negotiated rate/collective bargaining agreement which would be
July 1, 2011 in the above example.
Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any
changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the
rate.
Non-Union Identifiers
Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived
from survey data by computing average rates and are not union
rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may
include both union and non-union data. Example: SULA2004-007
5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union rates, LA
indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the
survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the
wage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicates
the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued
as a General Wage Determination on that date.
Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change
until a new survey is conducted.
---------------------------------------------------------------WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS
1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can
15
be:
*
*
*
*
an existing published wage determination

a survey underlying a wage determination
a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on
a wage determination matter
a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests

for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour
Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted
because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the
Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial
contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)
and 3.) should be followed.
With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal
process described here, initial contact should be with the
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations
Wage and Hour Division
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an
interested party (those affected by the action) can request
review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator
(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:
Wage and Hour Administrator
The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the
interested party's position and by any information (wage
payment data, project description, area practice material,
etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.
3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an
interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative
Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:
Administrative Review Board
16

4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.
================================================================
END OF GENERAL DECISION
Wage Decision GA120071

Applies to Bid Schedule A, CLIN 0001 ONLY
Erosion Control and Sediment Control Plan Implementation for
Booker Range
General Decision Number: GA120071 08/24/2012
GA71
Superseded General Decision Number: GA20100143

State: Georgia
Construction Type: Heavy
Counties: Chattahoochee, Crawford, Houston, Marion, Monroe
and Muscogee Counties in Georgia.
17
Modification Number
0
1
Publication Date
01/06/2012
08/24/2012
ELEC0613-010 09/01/2010
Chattahoochee, Marion and Muscogee Counties
Rates
ELECTRICIAN......................$ 29.00
Fringes
8.09
FOOTNOTES:
High time on water tanks, steeples, TV or radio
towers, smoke stacks & silos, where the electrical work
performed extends twenty-five (25) feet above the base of
these specified structures: $3.00 per hour additional. Work
performed above three hundred (300) feet of the above
described structures: $4.00 per hour additional. Work on
the above structures above twenty-five (25) feet from a
spider or bosun chair: $6.00 per hour additional. Work on
bar joists, walk logs, exposed steel & swinging scaffolds
when the surface the worker stands or sits on exceeds
twenty-five (25) feet above solid floor & the worker is
subject to free fall: $1.00 per hour additional. Work of a
similar nature above fifty(50) feet: $3.00 per hour
additional.
---------------------------------------------------------------ELEC1316-007 09/01/2011
Crawford, Houston and Monroe Counties
Rates
Fringes
ELECTRICIAN......................$ 22.60
9.14
---------------------------------------------------------------ENGI0474-006 07/01/2011
Chattahoochee, Houston and Marion Counties
Rates
Fringes
Bulldozer...................$ 21.97
11.80
Forklift, 15 tons and over..$ 23.80
11.80
Forklift, under 15 tons.....$ 21.97
11.80
---------------------------------------------------------------ENGI0926-008 07/01/2010
18
Crawford, Monroe, and Muscogee Counties

Rates
Fringes
Bulldozer and Forklift......$ 22.45
11.18
---------------------------------------------------------------* PAIN0193-003 08/01/2012
Rates
Fringes
PAINTER: Brush, Roller and

Spray............................$ 22.35
8.52
---------------------------------------------------------------* SUGA2008-055 08/06/2008
Rates
Fringes
CARPENTER........................$ 13.02
1.49
CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 11.75
1.08
IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 11.50
2.04
LABORER:
Common or General......$
9.00
0.00
LABORER:
Pipelayer..............$ 10.07
0.00
OPERATOR:
Backhoe/Excavator.....$ 12.63
0.00
OPERATOR:
Crane.................$ 17.05
3.44
OPERATOR:
Grader/Blade..........$ 14.16
0.27
OPERATOR:
Loader................$ 13.65
1.78
OPERATOR:
Piledriver............$ 10.63
0.48
OPERATOR:
Roller................$
9.75
0.19
OPERATOR:
Trackhoe..............$ 11.00
1.10
TRUCK DRIVER.....................$ 9.50

1.05
---------------------------------------------------------------WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing
19
operation to which welding is incidental.

================================================================
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within
the scope of the classifications listed may be added after
award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses
(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
---------------------------------------------------------------The body of each wage determination lists the classification
and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the
cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage
determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical
order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular
rate is union or non-union.
Union Identifiers
An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with
characters other than "SU" denotes that the union
classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that
classification.
Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011. The
first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and
the four-digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local
union number or district council number where applicable ,
i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the
example, is an internal number used in processing the wage
determination. The date, 07/01/2011, following these
characters is the effective date of the most current
negotiated rate/collective bargaining agreement which would be
July 1, 2011 in the above example.
Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any
changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the
rate.
Non-Union Identifiers
Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived
from survey data by computing average rates and are not union
rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may
include both union and non-union data. Example: SULA2004-007
20
5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union rates, LA

indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the
survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the
wage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicates
the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued
as a General Wage Determination on that date.
Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change
until a new survey is conducted.
---------------------------------------------------------------WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS
1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can
be:
*
*
*
*
an existing published wage determination

a survey underlying a wage determination
a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on
a wage determination matter
a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests

for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour
Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted
because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the
Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial
contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)
and 3.) should be followed.
With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal
process described here, initial contact should be with the
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations
Wage and Hour Division
2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an
interested party (those affected by the action) can request
review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator
(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:
21
Wage and Hour Administrator

The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the
interested party's position and by any information (wage
payment data, project description, area practice material,
etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.
3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an
interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative
Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:
Administrative Review Board
4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.
================================================================
END OF GENERAL DECISION
22
ENCLOSURE 1
APPENDIX A
GENERAL PROPOSAL SUBMISSION AND TABBING REQUIREMENTS
W912HN-09-X-1813
Booker Range
Fort Benning, GA
1. VOLUME I: Shall be submitted in hardcopy only (One original).
TAB A Schedule A, Bid Price Schedule.
Schedule B, Bid Price Schedule
TAB B- Bid Bonds (original only)
2. VOLUME II: Shall be submitted in hardcopy and electronic copy (CD-ROM) (Original,
plus two (2) copies and one (1) copy on CD-ROM).
Electronic Requirements: Written portions of the proposal should be in MS Word, or
Adobe Acrobat PDF. The electronic version shall be a single file tabbed in the same order as the
hard copy. Drawings should be in Adobe Acrobat PDF. Any portion of the proposal not available
in electronic format, i.e. cut sheets, should be scanned in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. The CDROM must be clearly labeled by solicitation number, project name, installation, and Offerors
name. In the event of any conflict between the electronic submission and the hard copy
submission, the hard copy submission will govern and will be the material upon which the
Government bases its evaluation and ultimately, its decision.
TAB C - FACTOR 1: BUILDING FUNCTION AND AESTHETICS applies to only to
items on Bid Schedule B (Booker Range Classroom/Pad) only as a Design Build approach
applies to these CLINs.
The technical data criteria specified for each factor identified herein and as desribed in
Appendix B shall be submitted as part of the proposal. All alternate designs shall be graphically
described on separate drawings from the basic proposal.
Manufacturers catalog sheets that are submitted, as part of the proposal, will be used to
evaluate offers based on their qualitative features and risk to the Government. It is expected that
some specific models and capacities may not be indicated at the time of proposal submission.
However, manufacturers, product features, product lines, and models can be proposed and
qualitative and risk evaluations can and will be made by the Government. Those manufacturers,
product features, product lines, and models are to be included in the final design documents and
will be incorporated into the construction contract.
Failure to submit all the data required by the RFP, this Appendix and Appendix B may be
cause for determining a proposal incomplete and, therefore, not considered for award.
23
ENCLOSURE 2
Appendix B
Proposal Factors and Submission Requirements
W912HN-09-X-1813
Booker Range, Ft. Benning
Offerors are reminded that this Appendix is intended to provide a comprehensive list of potential
factors and corresponding submission and evaluation criteria. However, as the Government
identifies the need for other potential factors, this list is subject to revision as needed. Please
refer to the RFP letter for identification of the specific factors that may apply to the instant task
order under consideration.
FACTOR 1: BUILDING FUNCTION AND AESTHETICS (Applies to Bid Schedule B
(Booker Range Classrooms/Pad) Only.
SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS:
1.1 Presentation Drawings:
1.1.1 Presentation Exterior Elevations of each facility clearly noting proposed materials and
colors.
1.1.2 At least one (1) Exterior Perspective Rendering (may be CADD rendering) for each facility
type included in the contract. Rendering should be at least 11 x 17 in order to show a detailed
perspective view of the building.
1.1.3 Schematic floor plans for each floor of each facility.
1.2 Technical Approach Narratives.
1.2.1 Provide technical approach narratives, both qualitative and quantitative, defining the
elements of the proposal. Preface the narratives with a design concepts narrative, providing the
design rationale and basis of the proposal.
1.2.2 Minimum Space and Facility Size. Describe the spaces provided for each facility, in
accordance with the Statement of Work. As a minimum, include a tabulation of the net square
footage for rooms, zones, or other areas, the total gross square footage for each floor of each
facility, and the total gross square footage for each facility to clearly demonstrate compliance
with the project requirements and/or specifications. See the sample Format for Table of Facilities
and Format for Table of Spaces at Attachments 3 and 4, respectively.
1.2.3 Architectural Theme and Materials. This narrative shall be no longer than 3 typewritten
pages. Describe the architectural themes of the various facilities and spaces which demonstrate
how the proposal achieves the results desired by the Statement of Work. Narrative should
address how the selection of materials and colors enhances the exterior and interior aesthetics of
24
the facilities and improves the living and/or working conditions for the populations who will
utilize the facilities. This narrative is not intended to be a material listing, but to explain/reflect
how the selections were made and how they address the requirements.
1.3 Evaluation Criteria.
1.3.1 Building Functional Arrangement: This element considers the overall functional layout
(Floor Plan) and interaction of the spaces in the facilities as well. This element considers the
planning and design of the spaces with respect to working conditions and the operations of the
facility. The following criteria will be considered in the evaluation of the functional arrangement
of the various facilities:
1.3.1.1 How well the floor plan responds to the Functional Relationship requirements described
in the Statement of Work.
1.3.1.2 How well the floor plan and space arrangement facilitate work flow and access necessary
to successfully operate this facility in accordance with its mission.
1.3.1.3 Do the facilities provide acceptable life safety and fire safety measures?
1.3.1.4 Do the proposed plans demonstrate compliance with the mandatory requirements for
circulation, furnishings (e.g., for UEPHs, will the required furniture fit in the rooms?),
equipment, and other specifically identified items in the Statement of Work?
1.3.1.5 Building Aesthetics: This element considers the overall appeal of the facility and the
desire that both the interior and exterior of the facilities present a professional, attractive
appearance. The following will be considered under this area:
1.3.2 Exterior Considerations: As Applicable
1.3.2.1 Proposals shall be evaluated on design of facades, roof lines, delineation of entrances,
proportions of fenestration in relation to elevations, shade and shadow effects, materials,
textures, exterior color schemes.
1.3.2.2 Is the building scale and proportion complimentary of the adjacent structures? Is the
building an attractive addition to the Installation? How well does the building harmonize with its
environment, including surrounding facilities?
1.3.3 Interior Considerations: As Applicable
1.3.3.1 Are the proposed colors and material finishes conducive to the working environment of
the facility?
1.3.3.2 For administrative areas, does the interior design provided establish a positive working
environment?
25
1.3.3.3 Has the proposal addressed/provided for natural and artificial light in the living and
working spaces and is the arrangement of fenestration and lighting fixtures in the spaces
conducive to furniture placement and space usage?
1.3.3.4 Do the proposed ceiling material, elevation, and design enhance the environment?
1.3.3.5 Has support item placement been considered and addressed in the proposal to enhance
the environment? For example: placement of supply/exhaust devices, placement of electrical
panels, placement of exhaust fans, etc.
1.3.3.6 Does the proposal provide for acoustic control of noise from service/support spaces to
administrative areas?
1.3.4 Minimum Space and Facility Size
1.3.4.1 The proposal must include all the mandatory spaces in response to the requirements set
forth in the Statement of Work. Proposals will be evaluated on compliance with these
requirements.
1.3.4.2 Proposals shall identify any individual areas which are less than the required areas and
describe how such deviation would enhance the building function.
1.3.4.3 Individual areas may slightly exceed the requirements, so long as building function is not
compromised elsewhere and as long as the overall square footage is not greater than that as
described in the Statement of Work.
Price
2. Submission Requirements:
2.1 Pricing shall be completed and submitted on the Task Order Pricing Schedule
Schedule A and Schedule B of the RFP.
2.2 Evaluation Criteria: Price analysis will be performed to determine if proposed prices
are fair and reasonable as well as to assure offeror understanding of the work and ability to
execute task order at price proposed. The evaluation will determine the extent to which the price
proposal is consistent with the requirements of the RFP, to include statutory limitations.
Historical price information, competitive price information, the Independent Government
Estimate (IGE), or any other pricing tool as necessary will be utilized in making this
determination. Offerors are advised that any offer wherein pricing is deemed unfair,
unreasonable or unrealistic may be rendered ineligible for award.
26
ENCLOSURE 3
APPENDIX C
RATINGS AND DEFINITIONS
W912HN-09-X-1813
Evaluation factor ratings will be determined and assigned by the Contracting Officer using the
adjectival descriptions contained herein. Upon assessment of individual factor ratings, the
Contracting Officer will then determine and assign the appropriate overall rating for the proposal
using these same adjectival descriptions. Offerors are reminded that as each technical factor is
evaluated an assessment of performance risk is also made as it relates to present and past work
performed under the existing umbrella contract, and the Offerors ability to successfully perform
the requested task order. (Applies to Bid Schedule B (Booker Range Classrooms/Pad) Only.)
OUTSTANDING Proposal meets requirements and indicates an exceptional approach and
understanding of the requirements. Strengths far outweigh any weaknesses. Risk of
unsuccessful performance is very low.
GOOD - Proposal meets requirements and indicates a thorough approach and understanding
of the requirements. Proposal contains strengths which outweigh any weaknesses. Risk of
unsuccessful performance is very low.
ACCEPTABLE - Proposal meets requirements and indicates an adequate approach and
understanding of the requirements. Strengths and weaknesses are offsetting or will have little
or no impact on contract performance. Risk of unsuccessful performance is no worse than
moderate.
MARGINAL Proposal does not clearly meet requirements and has not demonstrated an
adequate approach and understanding of the requirements. The proposal has one or more
weaknesses which are not offset by strengths. Risk of unsuccessful performance is high.
UNACCEPTABLE Proposal does not meet requirements and contains one or more
deficiencies. Proposal is unawardable.
27
ENCLOSURE 4
APPENDIX D
BUILDING FUNCTION AND AESTHETICS
SAMPLE FORMAT FOR TABLE OF FACILITIES
W912HN-09-X-1813
(Applies to Bid Schedule B (Booker Range Classrooms/Pad) Only.
FACILITY
REQUIREMENTS
(2)
(1)
Net SF
Gross SF
PROPOSAL
PROVIDED
(3)
Net SF
Gross SF
DIFFERENCE
(+/-)
(4)
Net SF
NOTES/REMARKS
(5)
Gross SF
Notes:
(1) Facility column shall identify building, e.g. Tactical Equipment Maintenance Facility (TEMF), Company
Operations Facility (COF) Headquarters Facility (HQ), etc. Where different designs are offered for the same overall
building type, each different design shall be identified and tabulated separately.
(2) Complete these columns directly from information in the request for proposal. If the Request for Proposal is silent
on net square feet for a particular facility, leave this blank.
(3) Complete these columns directly from the information in your proposal.
(4) This column represents the mathematical difference between the proposal and the requirements. + differences
represent areas above the Request for Proposal requirements and differences represent areas below the
requirements. Offerors are cautioned that exceeding the statutory limitations on building size will cause a proposal
to be considered non-compliant.
(5) This column is provided to allow the Offerors to place additional relevant information with respect to building area.
28
BUILDING FUNCTION AND AESTHETICS

SAMPLE FORMAT FOR TABLE OF SPACES
FACILITY: _____________________
SPACE
DESIGNATION
(1)
REQUIREMENTS
MIN REQUIRED
(2)
SF
PROPOSAL
PROVIDED
DIFFERENCE
(+/-)
NOTES/REMARKS
(3)
SF
(4)
SF
(5)
Notes:
(1) The Offeror shall list all spaces within the identified facility in this column.
(2) The Offeror shall complete this column by taking the information directly from the Request for Proposal Statement
of Work. Where a particular space does not have a specific requirement, this column may be left blank.
(3) The Offeror shall complete this column directly from the information contained in the proposal.
(4) This column represents the mathematical difference between the proposal and the requirements. + differences
represent areas above the requirements and differences represent areas below the requirements.
(5) This column is provided to allow the Offerors to place additional relevant information with respect to spaces
provided.
(6) Where multiple facilities of the same type (e.g. Dining Facility, UEPH, etc) are included in a single contract, each
facility shall be identified in a separate table.
29
W912HN-09-X-1813
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
11
32
33
35
42
45
45
50
57
57
62
74
78
78
00
01.00
00
26
00
00.00
00.10
00
20.00
23
35
19
00
23
10
10
10
10
*1 SUMMARY OF WORK
*1 PROJECT SCHEDULE
*1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
*1 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
*1 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
*1 QUALITY CONTROL
*1 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS)
*1 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
*1 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
*1 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
*1 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
*1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
*1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00
*1 DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 30 00
*1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05
05
05
05
12
30
40
50
00
00
00
13
*1
*1
*1
*1
STRUCTURAL STEEL
STEEL DECKS
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00
*1 ROUGH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07
07
07
07
07
07
07
11
42
53
54
60
61
92
13
13
24
50
00
14.00 20
00
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
METAL WALL PANELS
FABRIC COVER STRUCTURE
TPO THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE-PLY ROOFING
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
STEEL STANDING SEAM ROOFING
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13
08 91 00
*1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

*1 METAL WALL LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 90 00
*1 PAINTS AND COATINGS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1
13 12 50
W912HN-09-X-1813
*1 ANGLE FRAME BLEACHERS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 20 00
26 41 01.00 10
26 51 00
*1 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

*1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
*1 INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 00 00
*1 EARTHWORK
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 11 23
32 16 13
32 92 19
*1 AGGREGATE AND/OR GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

*1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS
*1 SEEDING
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 40 00
33 70 02.00 10
*1 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

*1 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND
-- End of Project Table of Contents --
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 11 00A
*1 SUMMARY OF WORK
08/11
PART 1
1.1
1.1.1
GENERAL
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Project Description
Construct Booker Range 75th Ranger Regiment in accordance with Construction

plans and Specifications.
This project consists of the construction of Ranges and various support
facilities at the Booker Range, Fort Benning. This range facility consists
of the following structures to facilitate this training: overhead range
cover, firing line canopies at each of the four ranges, a storage building,
target lifter pit and two bleacher enclosures.
1.1.2
Location
The work shall be located at the existing Booker Range, Fort Benning,
Georgia. The exact location will be shown by the Contracting Officer.
1.2
OCCUPANCY OF PREMISES
Before work is started, the Contractor shall arrange with the Contracting
Officer a sequence of procedure, means of access, space for storage of
materials and equipment, and use of approaches.
Contractor shall coordinate with Range Division thru Contracting Officer
for work due to proximity of this range with other active houses in the
area.
1.3
EXISTING WORK
In addition to "FAR 52.236-9, Protection of Existing Vegetation,

Structures, Equipment, Utilities, and Improvements":
1.4
a.
Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent

injury or damage to any portions of the existing work which remain.
b.
Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been

altered during construction operations to match existing or
adjoining work, as approved by the Contracting Officer. At the
completion of operations, existing work shall be in a condition
equal to or better than that which existed before new work started.
LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approval for all utility

spotting and dig permits. Contractor shall provide to the COR copies of
approval for spottings and digging. Contractor shall be responsible for
cost associated with digging and / or utility / cable repairs.
Notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours prior to starting
excavation work.
SECTION 01 11 00
Page 1 (Revised by RFPLetter_R1)
1.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
GOVERNMENT-FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
There is no Government furnished equipment in this contract.

1.6
GOVERNMENT-INSTALLED WORK
The Government will install range equipment after the Contractor has turned
over the completed project to the Government. Contractor shall coordinate
with Government for target carriers that will be Government installed to
ensure the attachment to contractor installed structure..
1.7
SALVAGE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
There is no material or equipment to salvage on this Contract.

PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not used.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 11 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10A

*1 PROJECT SCHEDULE
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
ECB 2005-10
(2005) Scheduling Requirements for Testing

of Mechanical Systems in Construction
Contracts
ER 1-1-11
(1995) Administration -- Progress,

Schedules, and Network Analysis Systems
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Project Schedule; G
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Designate an authorized representative to be responsible for the

preparation of the schedule and all required updating (activity status) and
preparation of reports. The authorized representative shall have
previously developed, created, and maintained at least 2 electronic
schedules for projects similar in nature to this project and shall be
experienced in the use of the scheduling software that meets the
requirements of this specification.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Prepare for approval a Project Schedule, as specified herein, pursuant to

the Contract Clause, SCHEDULE FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS. Show in the
schedule the sequence in which the Contractor proposes to perform the work
and dates on which the Contractor contemplates starting and completing all
schedule activities. The scheduling of the entire project, including the
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
design and construction sequences, is required. The scheduling of

construction is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor
management personnel shall actively participate in its development.
Subcontractors and suppliers working on the project shall also contribute
in developing and maintaining an accurate Project Schedule. Provide a
schedule that is a forward planning as well as a project monitoring tool.
3.1.1
Approved Project Schedule
Use the approved Project Schedule to measure the progress of the work and
to aid in evaluating time extensions. Make the schedule cost loaded and
activity coded. The schedule will provide the basis for all progress
payments. If the Contractor fails to submit any schedule within the time
prescribed, the Contracting Officer may withhold approval of progress
payments until the Contractor submits the required schedule.
3.1.2
Schedule Status Reports
Provide a Schedule Status Report on at least a monthly basis. If, in the

opinion of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor falls behind the
approved schedule, take steps necessary to improve its progress including
those that may be required by the Contracting Officer, without additional
cost to the Government. In this circumstance, the Contracting Officer may
require the Contractor to increase the number of shifts, overtime
operations, days of work, and/or the amount of construction plant, and to
submit for approval any supplementary schedule or schedules as the
Contracting Officer deems necessary to demonstrate how the approved rate of
progress will be regained.
3.1.3
Default Terms
Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the

Contracting Officer shall be grounds for a determination, by the
Contracting Officer, that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with
sufficient diligence to ensure completion within the time specified in the
contract. Upon making this determination, the Contracting Officer may
terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the work, or any separable
part of it, in accordance with the default terms of the contract.
3.2
BASIS FOR PAYMENT AND COST LOADING
Use the schedule as the basis for determining contract earnings during each
update period and therefore the amount of each progress payment. Lack of
an approved schedule update, or qualified scheduling personnel, will result
in the inability of the Contracting Officer to evaluate contract earned
value for the purposes of payment. Failure of the Contractor to provide
all required information will result in the disapproval of the preliminary,
initial and subsequent schedule updates. In the event schedule revisions
are directed by the Contracting Officer and those revisions have not been
included in subsequent revisions or updates, the Contracting Officer may
hold retainage up to the maximum allowed by contract, each payment period,
until such revisions to the Project Schedule have been made. Activity cost
loading shall be reasonable, as determined by the Contracting Officer. The
aggregate value of all activities coded to a contract CLIN shall equal the
value of the CLIN on the Schedule.
3.3
PROJECT SCHEDULE DETAILED REQUIREMENTS
The computer software system utilized to produce and update the Project
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
Schedule shall be capable of meeting all requirements of this

specification. Failure of the Contractor to meet the requirements of this
specification will result in the disapproval of the schedule.
3.3.1
Critical Path Method
Use the Critical Path Method (CPM) of network calculation to generate the
Project Schedule. Prepare the Project Schedule using the Precedence
Diagram Method (PDM).
3.3.2
Level of Detail Required
Develop the Project Schedule to an appropriate level of detail. Failure to

develop the Project Schedule to an appropriate level of detail, as
determined by the Contracting Officer, will result in its disapproval. The
Contracting Officer will consider, but is not limited to, the following
characteristics and requirements to determine appropriate level of detail:
3.3.2.1
Activity Durations
Reasonable activity durations are those that allow the progress of ongoing
activities to be accurately determined between update periods. Less than 2
percent of all non-procurement activities shall have Original Durations
(OD) greater than 20 work days or 30 calendar days. Procurement activities
are defined herein.
3.3.2.2
Procurement Activities
The schedule must include activities associated with the submittal,

approval, procurement, fabrication and delivery of long lead materials,
equipment, fabricated assemblies and supplies. Long lead procurement
activities are those with an anticipated procurement sequence of over 90
calendar days. A typical procurement sequence includes the string of
activities: submit, approve, procure, fabricate, and deliver.
3.3.2.3
Mandatory Tasks
The following tasks must be included and properly scheduled:

a. Submission, review and acceptance of design packages.
b. Submission of mechanical/electrical/information systems layout drawings.
c. Submission and approval of O & M manuals.
d. Submission and approval of as-built drawings.
e. Submission and approval of 1354 data and installed equipment lists.
f. Submission and approval of testing and air balance (TAB).
g. Submission of TAB specialist design review report.
h. Submission and approval of fire protection specialist.
i. Submission and approval of testing and balancing of HVAC plus
commissioning plans and data. Develop the schedule logic associated
with testing and commissioning of mechanical systems to a level of
detail consistent with ECB 2005-10.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
j. Air and water balancing.

k. HVAC commissioning.
l. Controls testing plan submission.
m. Controls testing.
n. Performance Verification testing.
o. Other systems testing, if required.
p. Contractor's pre-final inspection.
q. Correction of punchlist from Contractor's pre-final inspection.
r. Government's pre-final inspection.
s. Correction of punch list from Government's pre-final inspection.
t. Final inspection.
3.3.2.4
Government Activities
Show Government and other agency activities that could impact progress.
These activities include, but are not limited to: approvals, inspections,
utility tie-in, Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) and Notice to Proceed
(NTP) for phasing requirements.
3.3.2.5
Activity Responsibility Coding (RESP)
Assign responsibility Code for all activities to the Prime Contractor,

Subcontractor or Government agency responsible for performing the
activity. Activities coded with a Government Responsibility code include,
but are not limited to: Government approvals, Government design reviews,
environmental permit approvals by State regulators, Government Furnished
Equipment (GFE) and Notice to Proceed (NTP) for phasing requirements. Code
all activities not coded with a Government Responsibility Code to the Prime
Contractor or Subcontractor responsible to perform the work. Activities
shall not have more than one Responsibility Code. Examples of acceptable
activity code values are: DOR (for the designer of record); ELEC (for the
electrical subcontractor); MECH (for the mechanical subcontractor); and
GOVT (for USACE). Unacceptable code values are abbreviations of the names
of subcontractors.
3.3.2.6
Activity Work Area Coding
Assign Work Area code to activities based upon the work area in which the
activity occurs. Define work areas based on resource constraints or space
constraints that would preclude a resource, such as a particular trade or
craft work crew, from working in more than one work area at a time due to
restraints on resources or space. Examples of Work Area Coding include
different areas within a floor of a building, different floors within a
building, and different buildings within a complex of buildings.
Activities shall not have more than one Work Area Code. Not all activities
are required to be Work Area coded. A lack of Work Area coding will
indicate the activity is not resource or space constrained.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
3.3.2.7
(MODF)
W912HN-09-X-1813
Contract Changes/Requests for Equitable Adjustment (REA) Coding
Assign Activity code to any activity or sequence of activities added to the

schedule as a result of a Contract Modification, when approved by the
Contracting Officer, with a Contract Changes/REA Code. Key all Code values
to the Government's modification numbering system. Any activity or
sequence of activities added to the schedule as a result of alleged
constructive changes made by the Government may be added to a copy of the
current schedule, subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer.
Assign Activity codes for these activities with a Contract Changes/REA
Code. Key the code values to the Contractor's numbering system. Approval
to add these activities does not necessarily mean the Government accepts
responsibility and, therefore, liability for such activities and any
associated impacts to the schedule, but rather the Government recognizes
such activities are appropriately added to the schedule for the purposes of
maintaining a realistic and meaningful schedule. Such activities shall not
be Responsibility Coded to the Government unless approved. An activity
shall not have more than one Contract Changes/REA Code.
3.3.2.8
Contract Line Item (CLIN) Coding (BIDI)
Code all activities to the CLIN on the Contract Line Item Schedule to which
the activity belongs. An activity shall not contain more than one CLIN
Item Code. CLIN Item code all activities, even when an activity is not
cost loaded.
3.3.2.9
Phase of Work Coding (PHAS)
Assign Phase of Work Code to all activities based upon the phase of work in
which the activity occurs. Code activities to a Construction Phase. Code
fast track construction phases proposed by the Contractor to allow
filtering and organizing the schedule by fast track design and construction
packages. If the contract specifies construction phasing with separately
defined performance periods, identify a Construction Phase Code to allow
filtering and organizing the schedule accordingly. Each activity shall be
identified with a single project phase and have only one Phase of Work code.
3.3.2.10
Category of Work Coding (CATW)
Assign Category of Work Code to all Activities based upon the category of
work to which the activity belongs. Category of Work Code must include,
but is not limited to: construction submittal approvals, Acceptance,
Procurement, Fabrication, Delivery, Weather Sensitive Installation,
Non-Weather Sensitive Installation, Start-Up, Test and Turnover. Assign a
Category of Work Code to each activity. Each activity shall have only one
Category of Work Code.
3.3.2.11
Definable Features of Work Coding (FOW1, FOW2, FOW3)
Assign a Definable Feature of Work Code to appropriate activities based on

the definable feature of work to which the activity belongs. Definable
Feature of Work is defined in Specification Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY
CONTROL. An activity shall not have more than one Definable Feature of
Work Code. Not all activities are required to be Definable Feature of Work
Coded.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
3.3.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Scheduled Project Completion and Activity Calendars
The schedule interval shall extend from NTP date to the required contract
completion date. The contract completion activity (End Project) shall
finish based on the required contract duration in the accepted contract
proposal, as adjusted for any approved contract time extensions. The first
scheduled work period shall be the day after NTP is received by the
Contractor. Schedule activities on a calendar to which the activity
logically belongs. Activities may be assigned to a 7 day calendar when the
contract assigns calendar day durations for the activity such as a
Government Acceptance activity. If the Contractor intends to perform
physical work less than seven days per week, schedule the associated
activities on a calendar with non-work periods identified including
weekends and holidays. Assign the Category of Work Code - Weather
Sensitive Installation to those activities that are weather sensitive.
Original durations must account for anticipated normal adverse weather.
The Government will interpret all work periods not identified as non-work
periods on each calendar as meaning the Contractor intends to perform work
during those periods.
3.3.3.1
Project Start Date
The schedule shall start no earlier than the date on which the NTP was
acknowledged. Include as the first activity in the project schedule an
activity called "Start Project"( or NTP). The "Start Project" activity
shall have an "ES" constraint date equal to the date that the NTP was
acknowledged, and a zero day duration.
3.3.3.2
Schedule Constraints and Open Ended Logic
Constrain completion of the last activity in the schedule by the contract

completion date. Schedule calculations shall result in a negative float
when the calculated early finish date of the last activity is later than
the contract completion date. Include as the last activity in the project
schedule an activity called "End Project". The "End Project" activity
shall have an "LF" constraint date equal to the contract completion date
for the project, and with a zero day duration or by using the "project must
finish by" date in the scheduling software. The schedule shall have no
constrained dates other than those specified in the contract. The use of
artificial float constraints such as "zero fee float" or "zero total float"
are typically prohibited. There shall only be 2 open ended activities:
Start Project (or NTP) with no predecessor logic and End Project with no
successor logic.
3.3.3.3
Early Project Completion
In the event the Preliminary or Initial project schedule calculates an

early completion date of the last activity prior to the contract completion
date, identify those activities that it intends to accelerate and/or those
activities that are scheduled in parallel to support the Contractor's
"early" completion. The last activity shall have a late finish constraint
equal to the contract completion date and the schedule will calculate
positive float. The Government will not approve an early completion
schedule with zero float on the longest path. The Government is under no
obligation to accelerate activities for which it is responsible to support
a proposed early contract completion.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
3.3.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Interim Completion Dates
Constrain contractually specified interim completion dates to show negative

float when the calculated early finish date of the last activity in that
phase is later than the specified interim completion date.
3.3.4.1
Start Phase
Include as the first activity for a project phase an activity called "Start
Phase X" where "X" refers to the phase of work. The "Start Phase X"
activity shall have an "ES" constraint date equal to the date on which the
NTP was acknowledged, and a zero day duration.
3.3.4.2
End Phase
Include as the last activity for a project phase an activity called "End
Phase X" where "X" refers to the phase of work. The "End Phase X" activity
shall have an "LF" constraint date equal to the specified completion date
for that phase and a zero day duration.
3.3.4.3
Phase "X" Hammock
Include a hammock type activity for each project phase called "Phase X"
where "X" refers to the phase of work. The "Phase X" hammock activity
shall be logically tied to the earliest and latest activities in the phase.
3.3.5
Default Progress Data Disallowed
Do not automatically update Actual Start and Finish dates with default
mechanisms that may be included in the scheduling software. Activity
Actual Start (AS) and Actual Finish (AF) dates assigned during the updating
process shall match those dates provided from Contractor Quality Control
Reports. Failure of the Contractor to document the AS and AF dates on the
Daily Quality Control report for every in-progress or completed activity,
and failure to ensure that the data contained on the Daily Quality Control
reports is the sole basis for schedule updating shall result in the
disapproval of the Contractor's updated schedule and the inability of the
Contracting Officer to evaluate Contractor progress for payment purposes.
Updating of the percent complete and the remaining duration of any activity
shall be independent functions. Disable program features which calculate
one of these parameters from the other.
3.3.6
Out-of-Sequence Progress
Activities that have progressed before all preceding logic has been
satisfied (Out-of-Sequence Progress) will be allowed only on a case-by-case
basis subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Propose logic
corrections to eliminate all out of sequence progress or justify not
changing the sequencing for approval prior to submitting an updated project
schedule. Correct out of sequence progress that continues for more than
two update cycles by logic revision, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.3.7
Negative Lags and Start to Finish Relationships
Lag durations contained in the project schedule shall not have a negative
value. Do not use Start to Finish (SF) relationships.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
3.3.8
W912HN-09-X-1813
Calculation Mode
Schedule calculations shall retain the logic between predecessors and

successors even when the successor activity starts and the predecessor
activity has not finished. Software features that in effect sever the tie
between predecessor and successor activities when the successor has started
and the predecessor logic is not satisfied ("progress override") will not
be allowed.
3.3.9
Milestones
The schedule must include milestone activities for each significant project
event including but not limited to: milestone activities for each fast
track design package released for construction; design complete;
foundation/substructure construction complete; superstructure construction
complete; building dry-in or enclosure complete to allow the initiation of
finish activities; permanent power complete; and building systems
commissioning complete.
3.4
PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONS
Provide the submissions as described below. The data CD, reports, and
network diagrams required for each submission are contained in paragraph
SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS.
3.4.1
Preliminary Project Schedule Submission
Submit the Preliminary Project Schedule, defining the Contractor's planned

operations for the first 90 calendar days for approval within 15 calendar
days after the NTP is acknowledged. The approved Preliminary Project
Schedule will be used for payment purposes not to exceed 90 calendar days
after NTP. Completely cost load the Preliminary Project Schedule to
balance the contract award CLINS shown on the Price Schedule. Detail it
for the first 90 calendar days. It may be summary in nature for the
remaining performance period. It must be early start and late finish
constrained and logically tied as previously specified. The Preliminary
Project Schedule forms the basis for the Initial Project Schedule specified
herein and must include all of the required Plan and Program preparations,
submissions and approvals identified in the contract (for example, Quality
Control Plan, Safety Plan, and Environmental Protection Plan) as well as
design activities, the planned submissions of all early design packages,
permitting activities, design review conference activities and other
non-construction activities intended to occur within the first 90 calendar
days. Schedule any construction activities planned for the first 90
calendar days after NTP. Constrain planned construction activities by
Government acceptance of the associated design package(s) and all other
specified Program and Plan approvals. Activity code any activities that
are summary in nature after the first 90 calendar days with Responsibility
Code (RESP) and Feature of Work code (FOW1, FOW2, FOW3).
3.4.2
Initial Project Schedule Submission
Submit the Initial Project Schedule for approval within

after NTP. The schedule shall demonstrate a reasonable
sequence of activities which represent all work through
performance period. The Initial Schedule shall be at a
detail as determined by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
42 calendar days
and realistic
the entire contract
reasonable level of
3.4.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Periodic Schedule Updates
Based on the result of the meeting, specified in PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE

MEETINGS, submit periodic schedule updates. These submissions will enable
the Contracting Officer to assess Contractor's progress. If the Contractor
fails or refuses to furnish the information and project schedule data,
which in the judgment of the Contracting Officer or authorized
representative is necessary for verifying the Contractor's progress, the
Contractor shall be deemed not to have provided an estimate upon which
progress payment may be made.
3.4.4
Standard Activity Coding Dictionary
Use the activity coding structure defined in the Standard Data Exchange
Format (SDEF) in ER 1-1-11, Appendix A. This exact structure is mandatory,
even if some fields are not used. A template SDEF compatible schedule
backup file (sdef.prx) is available on the QCS website:
http://rms.usace.army.mil/. The SDEF format is as follows:
SDEF Format
Field
Activity Code Length
Description
WRKP
Workers per Day
RESP
AREA
Responsible Party (e.g. GC, subcontractor,

USACE)
Area of Work
MODF
Modification or REA number
BIDI
Bid Item (CLIN)
PHAS
Phase of Work
CATW
Category of Work
FOW1
10
FOW2
10
10
FOW3
10
3.5
Feature of Work (used up to 10 characters

in length)
in length)
in length)
SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Submit the following items for the Preliminary Schedule, Initial Schedule,
and every Periodic Schedule Update throughout the life of the project:
3.5.1
Data CD's
Provide two sets of data CD's containing the project schedule in the backup
format. Each CD shall also contain all previous update backup files. File
medium shall be CD. Label each CD indicating the type of schedule
(Preliminary, Initial, Update), full contract number, Data Date and file
name. Each schedule shall have a unique file name as determined by the
Contractor.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
3.5.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Narrative Report
Provide a Narrative Report with the Preliminary, Initial, and each Periodic
Update of the project schedule, as the basis of the progress payment
request. The Narrative Report shall include: a description of activities
along the 2 most critical paths where the total float is less than or equal
to 20 work days, a description of current and anticipated problem areas or
delaying factors and their impact, and an explanation of corrective actions
taken or required to be taken. The narrative report is expected to
communicate to the Government, the Contractor's thorough analysis of the
schedule output and its plans to compensate for any problems, either
current or potential, which are revealed through that analysis. Identify
and explain why any activities that, based their calculated late dates,
should have either started or finished during the update period but did not.
3.5.3
Approved Changes Verification
Include only those project schedule changes in the schedule submission that
have been previously approved by the Contracting Officer. The Narrative
Report shall specifically reference, on an activity by activity basis, all
changes made since the previous period and relate each change to
documented, approved schedule changes.
3.5.4
Schedule Reports
The format, filtering, organizing and sorting for each schedule report
shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer. Typically reports shall
contain: Activity Numbers, Activity Description, Original Duration,
Remaining Duration, Early Start Date, Early Finish Date, Late Start Date,
Late Finish Date, Total Float, Actual Start Date, Actual Finish Date, and
Percent Complete. The following lists typical reports that will be
requested. One or all of these reports may be requested for each schedule
submission.
3.5.4.1
Activity Report
A list of all activities sorted according to activity number.

3.5.4.2
Logic Report
A list of detailed predecessor and successor activities for every activity

in ascending order by activity number.
3.5.4.3
Total Float Report
A list of all incomplete activities sorted in ascending order of total

float. List activities which have the same amount of total float in
ascending order of Early Start Dates. Do not show completed activities on
this report.
3.5.4.4
Earnings Report by CLIN
A compilation of the Contractor's Total Earnings on the project from the

NTP to the data date. This report shall reflect the earnings of specific
activities based on the agreements made in the schedule update meeting
defined herein. Provided that the Contractor has furnished a complete
schedule update, this report shall serve as the basis of determining
progress payments. Group activities by CLIN item number and sort by
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
activity number. This report shall: sum all activities coded to a

particular CLIN and provide a CLIN item percent earned value; and complete
and sum CLIN items to provide a total project percent complete. The
printed report shall contain, for each activity: the Activity Number,
Activity Description, Original Budgeted Amount, Total Quantity, Quantity to
Date, Percent Complete (based on cost), and Earnings to Date.
3.5.5
Network Diagram
The network diagram is required for the Preliminary, Initial and Periodic
Updates. The network diagram shall depict and display the order and
interdependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be
accomplished. The Contracting Officer will use, but is not limited to, the
following conditions to review compliance with this paragraph:
3.5.5.1
Continuous Flow
Diagrams shall show a continuous flow from left to right with no arrows
from right to left. Show the activity number, description, duration, and
estimated earned value on the diagram.
3.5.5.2
Project Milestone Dates
Show dates on the diagram for start of project, any contract required
interim completion dates, and contract completion dates.
3.5.5.3
Critical Path
Clearly show the critical path.

3.5.5.4
Banding
Organize activities as directed to assist in the understanding of the

activity sequence. Typically, this flow will group activities by category
of work, work area and/or responsibility.
3.5.5.5
S-Curves
Earnings curves showing projected early and late earnings and earnings to
date.
3.6
PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS
Conduct periodic schedule update meetings for the purposes of reviewing the
Contractor's proposed out of sequence corrections, determining causes for
delay, correcting logic, maintaining schedule accuracy and determining
earned value. Meetings shall occur at least monthly within five days of
the proposed schedule data date and after the Contractor has updated the
schedule with Government concurrence respecting actual start dates, actual
finish dates, remaining durations and percent complete for each activity it
intend to status. Provide a computer with the scheduling software loaded
and a projector during the meeting which allows all meeting participants to
view the proposed schedule update during the meeting.
The meeting and
resultant approvable schedule update shall be a condition precedent to a
formal submission of the update as described in SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS and
to the submission of an invoice for payment. The meeting will be a working
interactive exchange which will allow the Government and the Contractor the
opportunity to review the updated schedule on a real time and interactive
basis. The Contractor's authorized scheduling representative will
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
organize, sort, filter and schedule the update as requested by the

Government. The meeting will last no longer than 8 hours. A rough draft
of the proposed activity logic corrections and narrative report shall be
provided to the Government 48 hours in advance of the meeting. The
Contractor's Project Manager and Authorized Scheduler shall attend the
meeting with the Authorized Representative of the Contracting Officer.
3.6.1
Update Submission Following Progress Meeting
Submit a complete update of the project schedule containing all approved

progress, revisions, and adjustments, pursuant to paragraph SUBMISSION
REQUIREMENTS not later than 4 working days after the periodic schedule
update meeting, reflecting only those changes made during the previous
update meeting.
3.6.2
Status of Activities
Update information, including Actual Start Dates (AS), Actual Finish Dates
(AF), Remaining Durations (RD), and Percent Complete shall be subject to
the approval of the Government prior to the meeting. As a minimum, address
the following items on an activity by activity basis during each progress
meeting.
3.6.2.1
Start and Finish Dates
Accurately show the status of the AS and/or AF dates for each activity
currently in-progress or completed since the last update. The Government
may allow an AF date to be assigned with the percent complete less than
100% to account for the value of work remaining but not restraining
successor activities. Only assign AS dates when actual progress occurs on
an activity.
3.6.2.2
Remaining Duration
Update the estimated RD for all incomplete activities independent of

Percent Complete. Remaining Durations may exceed the activity OD or may
exceed the activity's prior update RD if the Government considers the
current OD or RD to be understated based on current progress, insufficient
work crews actually manning the job, unrealistic OD or deficiencies that
must be corrected that restrain successor activities.
3.6.2.3
Percent Complete
Update the percent complete for each activity started, based on the
realistic assessment of earned value. Activities which are complete but
for remaining minor punch list work and which do not restrain the
initiation of successor activities may be declared 100 percent complete.
To allow for proper schedule management, cost load the correction of punch
list from Government pre-final inspection activity(ies) not less than 1
percent of the total contract value, which activity(ies) may be declared
100 percent complete upon completion and correction of all punch list work
identified during Government pre-final inspection(s).
3.6.2.4
Logic Changes
Specifically identify and discuss all logic changes pertaining to NTP on

change orders, change orders to be incorporated into the schedule,
Contractor proposed changes in work sequence, corrections to schedule logic
for out-of-sequence progress, and other changes that have been made
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
pursuant to contract provisions. The Government will only approve logic

revisions for the purpose of keeping the schedule valid in terms of its
usefulness in calculating a realistic completion date, correcting erroneous
logic ties, and accurately sequencing the work.
3.6.2.5
Other Changes
Other changes required due to delays in completion of any activity or group

of activities include: 1) delays beyond the Contractor's control, such as
strikes and unusual weather. 2) delays encountered due to submittals,
Government Activities, deliveries or work stoppages which make re-planning
the work necessary. 3) Changes required to correct a schedule that does
not represent the actual or planned prosecution and progress of the work.
3.7
REQUESTS FOR TIME EXTENSIONS
In the event the Contractor believes it is entitled to an extension of the

contract performance period, completion date, or any interim milestone
date, furnish the following for a determination by the Contracting
Officer: justification, project schedule data, and supporting evidence as
the Contracting Officer may deem necessary. Submission of proof of
excusable delay, based on revised activity logic, duration, and costs
(updated to the specific date that the delay occurred) is a condition
precedent to any approvals by the Government. In response to each Request
For Proposal issued by the Government, submit a schedule impact analysis
demonstrating whether or not the change contemplated by the Government
impacts the critical path.
3.7.1
Justification of Delay
The project schedule shall clearly display that the Contractor has used, in
full, all the float time available for the work involved with this
request. The Contracting Officer's determination as to the number of
allowable days of contract extension shall be based upon the project
schedule updates in effect for the time period in question, and other
factual information. Actual delays that are found to be caused by the
Contractor's own actions, which result in a calculated schedule delay, will
not be a cause for an extension to the performance period, completion date,
or any interim milestone date.
3.7.2
Submission Requirements
Submit a justification for each request for a change in the contract

completion date of less than 2 weeks based upon the most recent schedule
update at the time of the NTP or constructive direction issued for the
change. Such a request shall be in accordance with the requirements of
other appropriate Contract Clauses and shall include, as a minimum:
a.
A list of affected activities, with their associated project schedule

activity number.
b.
A brief explanation of the causes of the change.
c.
An analysis of the overall impact of the changes proposed.
d.
A sub-network of the affected area.
Identify activities impacted in each justification for change by a unique

activity code contained in the required data file.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
3.7.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Additional Submission Requirements
The Contracting Officer may request an interim update with revised

activities for any requested time extension of over 2 weeks. Provide this
disk within 4 days of the Contracting Officer's request.
3.8
DIRECTED CHANGES
If the NTP is issued for changes prior to settlement of price and/or time,
submit proposed schedule revisions to the Contracting Officer within 2
weeks of the NTP being issued. The Contracting Officer will approve
proposed revisions to the schedule prior to inclusion of those changes
within the project schedule. If the Contractor fails to submit the
proposed revisions, the Contracting Officer may furnish the Contractor with
suggested revisions to the project schedule. Include these revisions in
the project schedule until revisions are submitted, and final changes and
impacts have been negotiated. If the Contractor has any objections to the
revisions furnished by the Contracting Officer, advise the Contracting
Officer within 2 weeks of receipt of the revisions. Regardless of the
objections, continue to update the schedule with the Contracting Officer's
revisions until a mutual agreement in the revisions is reached. If the
Contractor fails to submit alternative revisions within 2 weeks of receipt
of the Contracting Officer's proposed revisions, the Contractor will be
deemed to have concurred with the Contracting Officer's proposed
revisions. The proposed revisions will then be the basis for an equitable
adjustment for performance of the work.
3.9
WEEKLY PROGRESS MEETINGS
a.
Meet weekly with the Government (or as otherwise mutually agreed to)
between the meetings described in paragraph PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE
MEETINGS for the purpose of jointly reviewing the actual progress of
the project as compared to the as planned progress and to review
planned activities for the upcoming two weeks. The then current and
approved schedule update shall be used for the purposes of this meeting
and for the production and review of reports. The Contractor's Project
Manager and the Authorized Representative of the Contracting Officer
shall attend. The weekly progress meeting will address the status of
RFI's, RFP's and Submittals.
b.
Provide a bar chart produced by the scheduling software, organized by

Total Float and Sorted by Early Start Date, and a two week "look-ahead"
schedule by filtering all schedule activities to show only current
ongoing activities and activities schedule to start during the upcoming
two weeks, organized by Work Area Code (AREA) and sorted by Early Start
Date.
c.
The Government and the Contractor shall jointly review the reports. If
it appears that activities on the longest path(s) which are currently
driving the calculated completion date (driving activities), are not
progressing satisfactorily and therefore could jeopardize timely
project completion, corrective action must be taken immediately.
Corrective action includes but is not limited to: increasing the number
of work crews; increasing the number of work shifts; increasing the
number of hours worked per shift; and determining if Government
responsibility coded activities require Government corrective action.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
3.10
W912HN-09-X-1813
OWNERSHIP OF FLOAT
Float available in the schedule, at any time, shall not be considered for
the exclusive use of either the Government or the Contractor.
3.11
TRANSFER OF SCHEDULE DATA INTO RMS/QCS
Download and upload the schedule data into the Resident Management System
(RMS) prior to RMS databases being transferred to the Government and is
considered to be additional supporting data in a form and detail required
by the Contracting Officer pursuant to FAR 52.232-5 - Payments under
Fixed-Price Construction Contracts. The receipt of a proper payment
request pursuant to FAR 52.232-27 - Prompt Payment for Construction
Contracts is contingent upon the Government receiving both acceptable and
approvable hard copies and electronic export from QCS of the application
for progress payment.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 33 00A
*1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
05/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
The Contracting Officer may request submittals in addition to those

specified when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work covered in
the respective sections.
Units of weights and measures used on all submittals shall be the same as
those used in the contract drawings.
Each submittal shall be complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready
determination of compliance with contract requirements.
Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) System Manager shall check and approve
all items prior to submittal and stamp, sign, and date indicating action
taken. Proposed deviations from the contract requirements shall be clearly
identified. Include within submittals items such as: Contractor's,
manufacturer's, or fabricator's drawings; descriptive literature including
(but not limited to) catalog cuts, diagrams, operating charts or curves;
test reports; test cylinders; samples; O&M manuals (including parts list);
certifications; warranties; and other such required submittals.
Submittals requiring Government approval shall be scheduled and made prior
to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered thereby. Pick up
and dispose of samples not incorporated into the work in accordance with
manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and in compliance with
existing laws and regulations.
1.2
1.2.1
DEFINITIONS
Submittal Descriptions (SD)
Submittals requirements are specified in the technical sections.

Submittals are identified by Submittal Description (SD) numbers and titles
as follows:
Submittals which are required prior to start of construction (work) or
the start of the next major phase of the construction on a multi-phase
contract, includes schedules, tabular list of data, or tabular list
including location, features, or other pertinent information regarding
products, materials, equipment, or components to be used in the work.
Certificates of insurance
Surety bonds
List of proposed Subcontractors
List of proposed products
SECTION 01 33 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Construction Progress Schedule

Network Analysis Schedule (NAS)
Submittal register
Schedule of prices
Health and safety plan
Work plan
Quality Control(QC) plan
Environmental protection plan
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate
some portion of the work.
Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in
producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for integrating the
product or system into the project.
Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple systems
and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.
SD-03 Product Data
Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts,
instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and
other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some
portion of the work.
Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended
product warranties.
SD-04 Samples
Fabricated or unfabricated physical examples of materials, equipment or
workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of
a material or product and establish standards by which the work can be
judged.
Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color
samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for
the project.
Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish
standards by which the ensuring work can be judged. Includes
assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be incorporated into
the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work.
SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to
a part of work.
SECTION 01 33 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SD-06 Test Reports

Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a
material, product or system identical to the material, product or
system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified
requirements. (Testing must have been within three years of date of
contract award for the project.)
Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by
the Contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared
for the project before shipment to job site.
Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on
sample taken from the job site, on portion of work during or after
installation.
Investigation reports.
Daily logs and checklists.
Final acceptance test and operational test procedure.
SD-07 Certificates
Statements printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by
responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material
attesting that product, system or material meets specification
requirements. Must be dated after award of project contract and
clearly name the project.
Document required of Contractor, or of a manufacturer, supplier,
installer or Subcontractor through Contractor, the purpose of which is
to further quality of orderly progression of a portion of the work by
documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel
qualifications.
Confined space entry permits.
Text of posted operating instructions.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or
material, including special notices and (MSDS)concerning impedances,
hazards and safety precautions.
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by
manufacturer's representative at the job site, in the vicinity of the
job site, or on a sample taken from the job site, on a portion of the
work, during or after installation, to confirm compliance with
manufacturer's standards or instructions. The documentation must be
signed by an authorized official of a testing laboratory or agency and
must state the test results; and indicate whether the material,
product, or system has passed or failed the test.
Factory test reports.
SECTION 01 33 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Data that is furnished by the manufacturer, or the system provider, to
the equipment operating and maintenance personnel, including
manufacturer's help and product line documentation necessary to
maintain and install equipment. This data is needed by operating and
maintenance personnel for the safe and efficient operation, maintenance
and repair of the item.
This data is intended to be incorporated in an operations and
maintenance manual or control system.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative
requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism.
Special requirements necessary to properly close out a construction
contract. For example, Record Drawings and as-built drawings. Also,
submittal requirements necessary to properly close out a major phase of
construction on a multi-phase contract.
Interim "DD Form 1354" with cost breakout for all assets 30 days prior
to facility turnover.
1.2.2
Approving Authority
Office or designated person authorized to approve submittal.

1.2.3
Work
As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract

documents, including labor necessary to produce submittals, except those
SD-01 Pre-Construction Submittals noted above, construction, materials,
products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such
construction.
1.3
SUBMITTALS

accordance with this section.
Submittal Register; G
1.4
SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION
Submittals are classified as follows:

1.4.1
Government Approved G
Government approval is required for extensions of design, critical

materials, deviations, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system
shall be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting
Officer. Within the terms of the Contract Clause entitled, "Specifications
SECTION 01 33 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
and Drawings for Construction," they are considered to be "shop drawings."

1.4.2
Information Only
Submittals not requiring Government approval will be for information only

(FIO).
1.5
1.5.1
PREPARATION
Transmittal Form
Use the attached sample transmittal form (ENG Form 4025) for submitting
both Government approved and information only submittals in accordance with
the instructions on the reverse side of the form. These forms are included
in the QCS software that the Contractor is required to use for this
contract. Properly complete this form by filling out all the heading blank
spaces and identifying each item submitted. Exercise special care to
ensure proper listing of the specification paragraph and sheet number of
the contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.
1.6
1.6.1
QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS
Number of Copies of SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit six copies of submittals of shop drawings requiring review and

approval only by QC organization and seven copies of shop drawings
requiring review and approval by Contracting Officer.
1.6.2
Number of Copies of SD-03 Product Data and SD-08 Manufacturer's
Instructions
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings.
1.6.3
Number of Samples SD-04 Samples
a.
Submit two samples, or two sets of samples showing range of variation,

of each required item. One approved sample or set of samples will be
retained by approving authority and one will be returned to Contractor.
b.
Submit one sample panel or provide one sample installation where

directed. Include components listed in technical section or as
directed.
c.
Submit one sample installation, where directed.
d.
Submit one sample of non-solid materials.
1.6.4
Number of Copies SD-05 Design Data and SD-07 Certificates
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings.

1.6.5
Number of Copies SD-06 Test Reports and SD-09 Manufacturer's Field
Reports
Submit in compliance with quantity and quality requirements specified for
shop drawings other than field test results that will be submitted with QC
reports.
SECTION 01 33 00
1.6.6
W912HN-09-X-1813
Number of Copies of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit three copies of O&M Data to the Contracting Officer for review and
approval.
1.6.7
Number of Copies of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals and SD-11
Closeout Submittals
Unless otherwise specified, submit three sets of administrative submittals.
1.7
INFORMATION ONLY SUBMITTALS
Normally submittals for information only will not be returned. Approval of

the Contracting Officer is not required on information only submittals.
The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to resubmit any
item found not to comply with the contract. This does not relieve the
Contractor from the obligation to furnish material conforming to the plans
and specifications; will not prevent the Contracting Officer from requiring
removal and replacement of nonconforming material incorporated in the work;
and does not relieve the Contractor of the requirement to furnish samples
for testing by the Government laboratory or for check testing by the
Government in those instances where the technical specifications so
prescribe.
1.8
VARIATIONS
Variations from contract requirements require both Designer of Record (DOR)

and Government approval pursuant to contract Clause FAR 52.236-21 and will
be considered where advantageous to Government.
1.8.1
Considering Variations
Discussion with Contracting Officer prior to submission, after consulting

with the DOR, will help ensure functional and quality requirements are met
and minimize rejections and re-submittals. When contemplating a variation
which results in lower cost, consider submission of the variation as a
Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP).
Specifically point out variations from contract requirements in transmittal
letters. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government
requiring rejection and removal of such work at no additional cost to the
Government.
1.8.2
Proposing Variations
When proposing variation, deliver written request to the Contracting

Officer, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and
why the variation is desirable and beneficial to Government, including the
DOR's written analysis and approval. If lower cost is a benefit, also
include an estimate of the cost savings. In addition to documentation
required for variation, include the submittals required for the item.
Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.
Check the column "variation" of ENG Form 4025 for submittals which include
proposed deviations requested by the Contractor. Set forth in writing the
reason for any deviations and annotate such deviations on the submittal.
The Government reserves the right to rescind inadvertent approval of
submittals containing unnoted deviations.
SECTION 01 33 00
1.8.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Warranting That Variations Are Compatible
When delivering a variation for approval, Contractor, including its

Designer(s) of Record, warrants that this contract has been reviewed to
establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with
other elements of work.
1.8.4
Review Schedule Is Modified
In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days

will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with
variations.
1.9
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses. Do not

change data which is output in columns (c), (d), (e), and (f) as delivered
by Government; retain data which is output in columns (a), (g), (h), and
(i) as approved. A submittal register showing items of equipment and
materials for which submittals are required by the specifications is
provided as an attachment. This list may not be all inclusive and
additional submittals may be required. Maintain a submittal register for
the project in accordance with Section 01 45 00.10 10 QUALITY CONTROL
SYSTEM (QCS). The Government will provide the initial submittal register in
electronic format with the following fields completed, to the extent that
will be required by the Government during subsequent usage.
Column (c):
required.
Lists specification section in which submittal is
Column (d): Lists each submittal description (SD No. and type,
e.g. SD-02 Shop Drawings) required in each specification section.
Column (e): Lists one principal paragraph in specification
section where a material or product is specified. This listing is
only to facilitate locating submitted requirements. Do not
consider entries in column (e) as limiting project requirements.
1.9.1
Use of Submittal Register
Submit submittal register. Submit with QC plan and project schedule.

Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and add missing
submittals. Coordinate and complete the following fields on the register
submitted with the QC plan and the project schedule:
Column (a) Activity Number:
schedule.
Activity number from the project
Column (g) Contractor Submit Date:

authority to receive submittals.
Scheduled date for approving
Column (h) Contractor Approval Date:

approval of submittal.
Date Contractor needs
Column (i) Contractor Material: Date that Contractor needs

material delivered to Contractor control.
SECTION 01 33 00
1.9.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Contractor Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields with each submittal throughout contract.

Column (b) Transmittal Number:
consecutive numbers.
Contractor assigned list of
Column (j) Action Code (k): Date of action used to record

Contractor's review when forwarding submittals to QC.
Column (l) List date of submittal transmission.
Column (q) List date approval received.
1.9.3
Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields .

Column (b) Transmittal Number:
consecutive numbers.
Contractor assigned list of
Column (l) List date of submittal receipt.

Column (m) through (p) List Date related to review actions.
Column (q) List date returned to Contractor.
1.9.4
Copies Delivered to the Government
Deliver one copy of submittal register updated by Contractor to Government

with each invoice request.
1.10
SCHEDULING
Schedule and submit concurrently submittals covering component items

forming a system or items that are interrelated. Include certifications to
be submitted with the pertinent drawings at the same time. No delay
damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late
submittals.
a.
Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of

submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by
submittal processing. Allow for potential resubmittal of requirements.
b.
Submittals called for by the contract documents will be listed on the

register. If a submittal is called for but does not pertain to the
contract work, the Contractor is to include the submittal in the
register and annotate it "N/A" with a brief explanation. Approval by
the Contracting Officer does not relieve the Contractor of supplying
submittals required by the contract documents but which have been
omitted from the register or marked "N/A."
c.
Re-submit register and annotate monthly by the Contractor with actual

submission and approval dates. When all items on the register have
been fully approved, no further re-submittal is required.
d.
Carefully control procurement operations to ensure that each individual

submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled submittal date
shown on the approved "Submittal Register."
SECTION 01 33 00
1.11
W912HN-09-X-1813
GOVERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITY
When approving authority is Contracting Officer, the Government will:

a.
Note date on which submittal was received.
b.
Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and

only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with
contract documents.
c.
Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in

paragraph entitled, "Review Notations," of this section and with
markings appropriate for action indicated.
Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval,

stamp and date approved submittals. Two copies of the approved submittal
will be retained by the Contracting Officer and four copies of the
submittal will be returned to the Contractor.
1.11.1
Review Notations
Contracting Officer review will be completed within 5 calendar days after

date of submission. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor with the
following notations:
a.
Submittals marked "approved" or "accepted" authorize the Contractor to

proceed with the work covered.
b.
Submittals marked "approved as noted" "or approved except as noted,

resubmittal not required," authorize the Contractor to proceed with the
work covered provided he takes no exception to the corrections.
c.
Submittals marked "not approved" or "disapproved," or "revise and

resubmit," indicate noncompliance with the contract requirements or
design concept, or that submittal is incomplete. Resubmit with
appropriate changes. No work shall proceed for this item until
resubmittal is approved.
d.
Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate submittal has been

previously reviewed and approved, is not required, does not have
evidence of being reviewed and approved by Contractor, or is not
complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" will be returned with an
explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit submittals
returned for lack of review by Contractor or for being incomplete, with
appropriate action, coordination, or change.
1.12
DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If

the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned
submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or
specifications; notice as required under the clause entitled, "Changes," is
to be given to the Contracting Officer. Contractor is responsible for the
dimensions and design of connection details and construction of work.
Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring
rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.
If changes are necessary to submittals, the Contractor shall make such
SECTION 01 33 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
revisions and submission of the submittals in accordance with the

procedures above. No item of work requiring a submittal change is to be
accomplished until the changed submittals are approved.
1.13
APPROVED SUBMITTALS
The Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not to be

construed as a complete check, and indicates only that:
Approval or acceptance will not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under the
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this contract is
responsible for dimensions, the design of adequate connections and details,
and the satisfactory construction of all work.
After submittals have been approved or accepted by the Contracting Officer,
no resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment will
be considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is
necessary.
1.14
APPROVED SAMPLES
Approval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such

approval and is not be construed to change or modify any contract
requirements. Before submitting samples, the Contractor to assure that the
materials or equipment will be available in quantities required in the
project. No change or substitution will be permitted after a sample has
been approved.
Match the approved samples for materials and equipment
work. If requested, approved samples, including those
in testing, will be returned to the Contractor, at his
completion of the contract. Samples not approved will
the Contractor at its expense, if so requested.
incorporated in the
which may be damaged
expense, upon
also be returned to
Failure of any materials to pass the specified tests will be sufficient

cause for refusal to consider, under this contract, any further samples of
the same brand or make of that material. Government reserves the right to
disapprove any material or equipment which previously has proved
unsatisfactory in service.
Samples of various materials or equipment delivered on the site or in place
may be taken by the Contracting Officer for testing. Samples failing to
meet contract requirements will automatically void previous approvals.
Contractor to replace such materials or equipment to meet contract
requirements.
Approval of the Contractor's samples by the Contracting Officer does not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the contract.
1.15
WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT
Payment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if required
approvals have not been obtained.
1.16
STAMPS
Stamps used by the Contractor on the submittal data to certify that the
submittal meets contract requirements is to be similar to the following:
SECTION 01 33 00
SECTION 01 33 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
W912HN-09-X-1813
________________________________________________________________________
|
CONTRACTOR
|
|
|
|
(Firm Name)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| _____ Approved
|
|
|
|
|
| _____ Approved with corrections as noted on submittal data and/or
|
| attached sheets(s)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| SIGNATURE: __________________________________________________________ |
|
|
| TITLE: ______________________________________________________________ |
|
|
| DATE: _______________________________________________________________ |
|
|
|________________________________________________________________________|
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 33 00
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
DESCRIPTION
01 32 01.00 10 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Project Schedule
01 33 00
Submittal Register
01 35 26
Accident Prevention Plan (APP)
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)
Crane Critical Lift Plan
Crane Operators
SD-06 Test Reports
Notifications and Reports
Accident Reports
Crane Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Confined Space Entry Permit
Hot work permit
License Certificates
01 50 00
Construction site plan
Traffic control plan
01 57 20.00 10 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Environmental Protection Plan
01 57 23
Storm Water Pollution Prevention
Plan
Storm Water Notice of Intent
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
1.10
1.7
1.8
1.7.1
1.6.1.4
G
G
G
G
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
3.4
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
A
A
A
A
1.12
1.12.2
1.12.3
1.9
1.9
1.14
1.4
3.3.1
G RO
G RO
1.7
G RO
1.3.2
1.3.2
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
PAGE 1 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
01 57 23
01 74 19
01 78 00
DESCRIPTION
SD-06 Test Reports

Erosion and Sediment Controls
SD-07 Certificates
Mill Certificate or Affidavit
Waste Management Plan
Records
SD-03 Product Data
As-Built Record of Equipment
and Materials
Warranty Management Plan
Warranty Tags
Spare Parts Data
SD-08 Manufacturers Instructions
Preventative Maintenance
Condition Monitoring (Predictive
Testing)
Inspection
Instructions
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance
Data
Operation and Maintenance
Manuals
Record Drawings
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
1.3
2.1.3
1.6
1.7
1.3.2
1.7.1
1.7.5
1.4
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.7.1
1.9
1.3.1
PAGE 2 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
01 78 00
02 41 00
03 30 00
DESCRIPTION
Certification of EPA Designated

Items
Interim Form DD1354
Checklist for Form DD1354
Existing Conditions
SD-07 Certificates
Demolition Plan
Notification
Receipts
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings
Reinforcing steel
SD-03 Product Data
Materials for curing concrete
Joint sealants
Joint filler
Plastic Forms
Carton Forms
Recycled Aggregate Materials
Cement
Portland Cement
Ready-Mix Concrete
Bonding Materials
Floor Finish Materials
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
1.6
1.11
1.11
G
G
1.11
G RO
1.2.1
1.7
G RO
G RO
1.6.2.1
1.6.2.3
G RO
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
2.4.7
2.4.10
2.4.9
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.4.3.3
2.4.1
2.4.1.4
2.3.3
2.6
2.7
PAGE 3 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
03 30 00
DESCRIPTION
Concrete Curing Materials

Reinforcement
Reinforcement Materials
Vapor barrier
Vapor barrier
Waterstops
Waterstops
Waterstops
Wood Forms
Local/Regional Materials
SD-05 Design Data
mix design
SD-06 Test Reports
Concrete mix design
Fly ash
Pozzolan
Ground granulated blast-furnace
slag
Aggregates
Compressive strength tests
Unit weight of structural
lightweight concrete
Air Content
Slump
Air Entrainment
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
2.3.4
2.5
1.6.2.1
1.5
2.4.6
2.2.1
2.4.10.3
3.14.2
2.1.1
1.8.1
2.3.2
G RO
1.6.4.1
1.6.4.2
1.6.4.2
1.6.4.3
G RO
1.6.4.4
3.12.2.3
3.12.2.5
3.12.2.4
2.3.2
2.3.2
PAGE 4 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
03 30 00
05 12 00
05 30 00
DESCRIPTION
Forest Stewardship Council

(FSC) Certification
Fly ash
Ground granulated blast-furnace
slag
Steel Bar
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Erection Plan
Fabrication drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Shop primer
Welding electrodes and rods
Load indicator washers
Non-Shrink Grout
SD-06 Test Reports
Class B coating
Bolts, nuts, and washers
SD-07 Certificates
Steel
Welding procedures and
qualifications
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Cant Strips
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
1.8.2
1.6.4.2
1.6.4.3
2.5.8
1.6.2.2
1.6.1
G RO
G RO
2.4
2.3.1
2.2.5
2.3.2
2.4
2.2
2.1
2.2
1.6.2.3
1.3.5
2.3.4.1
PAGE 5 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
05 30 00
05 40 00
DESCRIPTION
Ridge and Valley Plates

Metal Closure Strips
SD-03 Product Data
Accessories
Deck Units
Galvanizing Repair Paint
Joint Sealant Material
Mechanical Fasteners
Powder-Actuated Tool Operator
Repair Paint
Welder Qualifications
Welding Equipment
Welding Rods and Accessories
SD-05 Design Data
Deck Units
SD-07 Certificates
Welding Procedures
Fire Safety
Wind Storm Resistance
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Framing Components
SD-03 Product Data
studs,joists
SD-05 Design Data
Metal framing calculations
SD-07 Certificates
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
2.3.4.2
2.3.4.3
2.2
1.3.1
2.1.6
2.1.5
2.2.12
1.3.2
2.3.10
1.3.3
1.3.3
1.3.3
1.3.1
1.3.3
1.3.4.1
1.3.4.2
1.6.1
G RO
2.1
1.6.2
G RO
PAGE 6 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
05 40 00
06 10 00
07 11 13
07 42 13
DESCRIPTION
Load-bearing cold-formed metal

framing
Welds
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Modifications of structural
members
Nailing Strips
SD-03 Product Data
Engineered wood products
SD-06 Test Reports
Preservative-treated
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates of grade
Preservative treatment
Data
Take-back program
SD-07 Certificates
Materials
Qualification of Manufacturer
Qualification of Installation
Contractor
Qualification of Welders
Warranty
SD-02 Shop Drawings
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
1.4
3.1.1
G
2.2.2
2.1.4
1.4.5
1.9.3
1.7
1.3
1.5.3
1.5.4
G
G
1.5.4.1
1.8
G
G
PAGE 7 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
07 42 13
DESCRIPTION
Installation Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Wall Panels
Factory Color Finish
Closure Materials
Pressure Sensitive Tape
Sealants and Caulking
Enamel Repair Paint
Aluminized Steel Repair Paint
Accessories
Accessories
SD-04 Samples
Wall Panels
Fasteners
Color chart
SD-05 Design Data
Wind load design analysis
SD-06 Test Reports
Leakage Tests
Wind Load Tests
Coating
Chalking
Seismic Tests
SD-07 Certificates
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
2.2.2
2.2.3
1.5.5
2.5.4.4
2.5.4.1
1.5.3.1
1.5.3.1
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
1.5.1.1
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
1.5.5
2.5
2.2.2
1.5.3.1
2.5.3
G
G
G
G
1.5.1.2
3.7.2
1.3.2
2.2.3.6
2.2.3.6
1.3.2
G
G
G
G
G
PAGE 8 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
07 42 13
07 53 24
DESCRIPTION
Coil Stock
Fasteners
Enamel Repair Paint
Installation
SD-09 Manufacturers Field
Reports
Manufacturer's Field Reports
Warranty
Maintenance Instructions
20 year 'No Dollar Limit' warranty
for labor and material
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Floor and Roof Plan Drawing
Load Calculations and Reactions
Attachment Details to the
Foundation of Structure
Bracing Details
Fabric Fastening Details
SD-03 Product Data
Fabric Sheet
Fasteners and Plates
Warranty
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
G
G
G
G
3.3
3.8.1
1.8
1.5.6
1.8.1
G
G
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
1.5.3.1
1.5.3.1
1.5.3.1
1.5.3.1
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
1.3.1
1.3.1
1.3.1
1.3.1
1.3.1
PAGE 9 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
DESCRIPTION
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Covering on flat, sloped, or
curved surfaces
Gutters
Downspouts
Gravel stops and fascias
Drip edge
Quality Control Plan
07 61 14.00 20 SD-02 Shop Drawings
Roofing
SD-03 Product Data
Roofing panels
Attachment clips
Closures
Accessories
Fasteners
Sealants
Insulation
warranty
SD-04 Samples
panel
SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations
SD-06 Test Reports
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
07 53 24
07 60 00
3.1.25
3.1.17
3.1.18
3.1.15
3.1.16
G
G
G
G
3.5
1.2.5
2.1
2.3
2.4.1
2.4
2.4.2
2.4.3
1.7
2.1
1.5
PAGE 10 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
DESCRIPTION
07 61 14.00 20 Field Inspection

Structural performance
Finish
SD-07 Certificates
Manufacturer's Technical
Representative
Installer's Qualifications
Coil stock
Installation
Information card
07 92 00
SD-03 Product Data
Sealants
Primers
Bond breakers
Backstops
SD-07 Certificates
Sealant
08 11 13
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors
Doors
Frames
Frames
Accessories
Weatherstripping
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
3.6
1.3.3
1.6.6
1.6.3
1.6.4
2.1
3.3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3.3.6
2.1
2.1
2.7
2.7
G
G
G
G
2.9
PAGE 11 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
08 11 13
08 91 00
09 90 00
26 20 00
DESCRIPTION
SD-03 Product Data

Doors
Frames
Accessories
Weatherstripping
SD-04 Samples
Factory-applied enamel finish
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Wall louvers
Wall louvers
SD-03 Product Data
Metal Wall Louvers
SD-04 Samples
Wall louvers
Wall louvers
SD-03 Product Data
Coating
SD-04 Samples
Color
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Panelboards
Wireways
SD-03 Product Data
Receptacles
Circuit breakers
Switches
2.1
2.7
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
G
G
2.9
G
1.4
1.5
2.2
1.4
1.5
G
G
2.1
G
G
2.15
2.34
2.14
2.15.3
2.12
PAGE 12 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
DESCRIPTION
SD-06 Test Reports

600-volt wiring test
Grounding system test
Transformer tests
Ground-fault receptacle test
Detail Drawings
SD-07 Certificates
Materials
26 51 00
SD-03 Product Data
Fluorescent lighting fixtures
Fluorescent electronic ballasts
Fluorescent lamps
Light Emitting Diode Lighting
fixture
Environmental Data
Energy Efficiency
SD-06 Test Reports
Operating test
31 00 00
Shoring
Dewatering Work Plan
SD-03 Product Data
Utilization of Excavated Materials
Rock Excavation
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
26 20 00
3.5.2
3.5.5
3.5.4
1.3
2.2
2.1
1.6.1
2.1.6
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.6.4.3
3.3
3.5
1.6.3
G RO
G RO
3.9
1.6.1.2
G RO
PAGE 13 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
31 00 00
32 11 23
32 16 13
32 92 19
33 40 00
DESCRIPTION
SD-06 Test Reports

Testing
Borrow Site Testing
SD-07 Certificates
Testing
SD-03 Product Data
Plant, Equipment, and Tools
SD-06 Test Reports
Sampling and Testing
Field Density Tests
SD-03 Product Data
Concrete
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control
SD-03 Product Data
Wood cellulose fiber mulch
Fertilizer
SD-06 Test Reports
Topsoil composition tests
SD-07 Certificates
seed
Erosion Control Materials
SD-03 Product Data
Placing Pipe
SD-04 Samples
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
3.18
2.1
3.18
1.4
1.6
1.6.2.4
G RO
G RO
2.1
3.8
2.5.3
2.4
2.2.3
2.1
2.7
3.3
PAGE 14 OF 15 PAGES
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
N
O
(a)
S
P
E
C
N
O
S
E
C
T
ITEM SUBMITTED
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
33 40 00
DESCRIPTION
Pipe for Culverts and Storm

Drains
SD-07 Certificates
Resin Certification
Pipeline Testing
Hydrostatic Test on Watertight
Joints
Determination of Density
Frame and Cover for Gratings
Detail Drawings
As-Built Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Nameplates
Material and Equipment
Installation Requirements
SD-06 Test Reports
Factory Tests
Field Testing
Operating Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Data
Operation and Maintenance
Manuals
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
G
O
V
T
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
O
R
A
C
T
I
O
N
A
/
E
R
E
V
W
R
(f)
SUBMIT
(g)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
(h)
(i)
APPROVING AUTHORITY
A
C
T
I
O
N
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
(j)
(k)

FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
(l)
(m)
(n)
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
C
O
D
E
DATE
OF
ACTION
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
REMARKS
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
2.1
2.1.10
3.8
2.7
3.7.5
2.3.7
1.4.1
1.4.2
2.2
2.1
3.2
3.12
3.12.13
2.1
PAGE 15 OF 15 PAGES
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 35 26A
*1 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
02/12
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
ASSE/SAFE A10.32
(2004) Fall Protection
ASSE/SAFE A10.34
(2001; R 2005) Protection of the Public on

or Adjacent to Construction Sites
ASSE/SAFE Z359.1
(2007) Safety Requirements for Personal

Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and
Components
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME B30.22
(2010) Articulating Boom Cranes
ASME B30.3
(2009) Tower Cranes
ASME B30.5
(2007) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes
ASME B30.8
(2010) Floating Cranes and Floating

Derricks
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 10
(2010) Standard for Portable Fire

Extinguishers
NFPA 51B
(2009; TIA 09-1) Standard for Fire

Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and
Other Hot Work
NFPA 70E
(2012) Standard for Electrical Safety in

the Workplace
EM 385-1-1
(2008; Errata 1-2010; Changes 1-3 2010;

Changes 4-6 2011) Safety and Health
Requirements Manual
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

10 CFR 20
Standards for Protection Against Radiation
29 CFR 1910
Occupational Safety and Health Standards

SECTION 01 35 26
W912HN-09-X-1813
29 CFR 1910.146
Permit-required Confined Spaces
29 CFR 1926
Safety and Health Regulations for

Construction
29 CFR 1926.1400
Cranes & Derricks in Construction
29 CFR 1926.16
Rules of Construction
29 CFR 1926.500
Fall Protection
CPL 2.100
(1995) Application of the Permit-Required

Confined Spaces (PRCS) Standards, 29 CFR
1910.146
1.2
DEFINITIONS
b.
High Visibility Accident.

high visibility.
Any mishap which may generate publicity or
c.
Medical Treatment. Treatment administered by a physician or by

registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a
physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even
through provided by a physician or registered personnel.
e.
Recordable Injuries or Illnesses.

that results in:
Any work-related injury or illness
(1) Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the
length of the illness;
(2) Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness
onset);
(3) Restricted work;
(4) Transfer to another job;
(5) Medical treatment beyond first aid;
(6) Loss of consciousness; or
(7) A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other
licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in
(1) through (6) above.
f.
"USACE" property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 should be

interpreted as Government property and equipment.
g.
Weight Handling Equipment (WHE) Accident. A WHE accident occurs when

any one or more of the eight elements in the operating envelope fails
to perform correctly during operation, including operation during
maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death; material
or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-blocking; overload;
or collision, including unplanned contact between the load, crane, or
SECTION 01 35 26
W912HN-09-X-1813
other objects. A dropped load, derailment, two-blocking, overload and

collision are considered accidents even though no material damage or
injury occurs. A component failure (e.g., motor burnout, gear tooth
failure, bearing failure) is not considered an accident solely due to
material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in
damage to other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped load, roll
over, etc.) Any mishap meeting the criteria described above shall be
documented in both the Contractor Significant Incident Report (CSIR)
submitted within five days both as provided by the Contracting Officer.
1.3
SUBMITTALS

Government acceptance, as defined in EM 385-1-1, is required for submittals
with a "G, A" designation.
Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G, A
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA); G, A
Crane Critical Lift Plan; G, A
Proof of qualification for Crane Operators; G, A
SD-06 Test Reports
Notifications and Reports
Submit reports as their incidence occurs, in accordance with the
requirements of the paragraph, "Notifications and Reports."
Accident Reports
Crane Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Confined Space Entry Permit
Hot work permit
License Certificates
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this

contract, comply with the most recent addition of USACE EM 385-1-1, and the
following federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and
regulations. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the
appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work.
Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria,
SECTION 01 35 26
W912HN-09-X-1813
ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent

requirements govern.
1.5
SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES AND MEETINGS
1.5.1
Personnel Qualifications
1.5.1.1
Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
The SSHO must meet the requirements of EM 385-1-1 section 1 and ensure that
the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.16 are met for the project. Provide a
Safety oversight team that includes a minimum of one (1) person at each
project site to function as the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The
SSHO or an equally-qualified Designated Representative/alternate shall be
at the work site at all times to implement and administer the Contractor's
safety program and government-accepted Accident Prevention Plan. The
SSHO's training, experience, and qualifications shall be as required by
EM 385-1-1 paragraph 01.A.17, entitled SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH OFFICER
(SSHO), and all associated sub-paragraphs.
A Competent Person shall be provided for all of the hazards identified in
the Contractor's Safety and Health Program in accordance with the accepted
Accident Prevention Plan, and shall be on-site at all times when the work
that presents the hazards associated with their professional expertise is
being performed. Provide the credentials of the Competent Persons(s) to
the the Contracting Officer for acceptance in consultation with the Safety
Office.
1.5.1.1.1
Contractor Quality Control (QC) Person:
The Contractor Quality Control Person can be the SSHO on this project.
1.5.1.2
Crane Operators
Meet the crane operators requirements in USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 16 and

Appendix I. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacitates of 50,000 pounds or greater, designate
crane operators as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators
(i.e., union, a government agency, or an organization that tests and
qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of current qualification.
1.5.2
Personnel Duties
1.5.2.1
Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
The SSHO shall:

a.
Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log
which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified
hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of
corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the Contractors' daily
quality control report.
b.
Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports.

the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and
sub-contractors.
c.
Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.
SECTION 01 35 26
Maintain
W912HN-09-X-1813
d.
Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including

preparatory inspection meeting, and periodic in-progress meetings.
e.
Implement and enforce accepted APPS and AHAs.
f.
Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors

outstanding deficiencies until resolution. Post a list of unresolved
safety and health deficiencies on the safety bulletin board.
g.
Ensure sub-contractor compliance with safety and health requirements.
h.
Maintain a list of hazardous chemicals on site and their material

safety data sheets.
Failure to perform the above duties will result in dismissal of the

superintendent, QC Manager, and/or SSHO, and a project work stoppage.
The project work stoppage will remain in effect pending approval of a
suitable replacement.
1.5.3
Meetings
1.5.3.1
Preconstruction Conference
a.
Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant

role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the
preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent,
site safety and health officer, quality control supervisor, or any
other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the
development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs)
and special plans, program and procedures associated with it).
b.
Discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans,

programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be
developed and implemented during the performance of the contract. This
list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an
agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting
Officer's representative as to which phases will require an analysis.
In addition, establish a schedule for the preparation, submittal,
review, and acceptance of AHAs to preclude project delays.
c.
Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought to the attention of

the Contractor at the preconstruction conference, and the Contractor
shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re-submit it for
acceptance. Do not begin work until there is an accepted APP.
d.
The functions of a Preconstruction conference may take place at the

Post-Award Kickoff meeting for Design Build Contracts.
1.6
ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)
Use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare

the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1
and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements
in USACE EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, "Minimum Basic Outline for Accident
Prevention Plan". Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are
described below. The APP shall be job-specific and address any unusual or
unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP
shall interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program.
Include any portions of the Contractor's overall safety and health program
SECTION 01 35 26
W912HN-09-X-1813
referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element and made site-specific.
The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling
authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors.
Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the
safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for
noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering
with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and
inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention
responsibilities are being carried out. The APP shall be signed by the
person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP, the Contractor, the
on-site superintendent, the designated site safety and health officer, the
Contractor Quality control Manager, and any designated CSP or CIH.
Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15calendar days prior to the date
of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed
without an accepted APP.
Once accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be
enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this
contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work, at the
discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified.
Once work begins, changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the
knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project
superintendent, SSHO and quality control manager. Should any severe hazard
exposure, i.e. imminent danger, become evident, stop work in the area,
secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the exposure and control the
hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery.
Eliminate/remove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary action to
restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite
personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ASSE/SAFE A10.34,) and the
environment.
Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the Contracting Officer's
office and at the job site.
Continuously reviewed and amended the APP, as necessary, throughout the
life of the contract. Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not
identified in the original APP as they are discovered.
1.6.1
EM 385-1-1 Contents
In addition to the requirements outlined in Appendix A of USACE EM 385-1-1,

the following is required:
a. Crane Critical Lift Plan.
Prepare and sign weight handling critical lift plans for lifts over 75
percent of the capacity of the crane or hoist (or lifts over 50 percent of
the capacity of a barge mounted mobile crane's hoists) at any radius of
lift; lifts involving more than one crane or hoist; lifts of personnel; and
lifts involving non-routine rigging or operation, sensitive equipment, or
unusual safety risks. Submit 15 calendar days prior to on-site work and
include the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1, paragraph 16.H. and the
following:
(1) For lifts of personnel, demonstrate compliance with the requirements of
29 CFR 1926.1400.
(2) For barge mounted mobile cranes, barge stability calculations
identifying barge list and trim based on anticipated loading; and load
SECTION 01 35 26
W912HN-09-X-1813
charts based on calculated list and trim. The amount of list and trim
shall be within the crane manufacturer's requirements.
b.
Site Demolition Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in

accordance with Section 02 41 00 DEMOLITION and referenced sources.
Include engineering survey as applicable.
c.
Excavation Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance

with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
1.7
ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)
The Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) format shall be in accordance with USACE
EM 385-1-1, Section 1. Submit the AHA for review at least 15 calendar days
prior to the start of each phase. Format subsequent AHAs as amendments to
the APP. The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the
implementation and effectiveness of the activity's safety and health
controls.
The AHA list will be reviewed periodically (at least monthly) at the
Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when
procedures, scheduling, or hazards change.
Develop the activity hazard analyses using the project schedule as the
basis for the activities performed. Any activities listed on the project
schedule will require an AHA. The AHAs will be developed by the
contractor, supplier or subcontractor and provided to the prime contractor
for submittal to the Contracting Officer.
1.8
DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION
Within one calendar day(s) after commencement of work, erect a safety

bulletin board at the job site. Where size, duration, or logistics of
project do not facilitate a bulletin board, an alternative method,
acceptable to the Contracting Officer, that is accessible and includes all
mandatory information for employee and visitor review, shall be deemed as
meeting the requirement for a bulletin board. Include and maintain
information on safety bulletin board as required by EM 385-1-1, section
01.A.06. Additional items required to be posted include:
a.
Confined space entry permit.
b.
Hot work permit.
1.9
SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS
Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including

those listed in the article "References." Maintain applicable equipment
manufacturer's manuals.
1.10
EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT
Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment.

Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.
SECTION 01 35 26
1.11
1.11.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS

Accident Notification
Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but no more than four
hours after any accident meeting the definition of Recordable Injuries or
Illnesses or High Visibility Accidents, property damage equal to or greater
than $2,000, or any weight handling equipment accident. Within
notification include contractor name; contract title; type of contract;
name of activity, installation or location where accident occurred; date
and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of property
damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description of
accident (to include type of construction equipment used, PPE used, etc.).
Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the
Government investigation team arrives on-site and Government investigation
is conducted.
1.11.2
Accident Reports
a.
Conduct an accident investigation for recordable injuries and

illnesses, for Medical Treatment defined in paragraph DEFINITIONS,
property damage accidents resulting in at least $20,000 in damages, and
near misses as defined in EM 385-1-1, to establish the root cause(s) of
the accident. Complete the applicable USACE Accident Report Form
3394, and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 5
calendar day(s) of the accident. The Contracting Officer will provide
copies of any required or special forms.
b.
Conduct an accident investigation for any weight handling equipment

accident (including rigging gear accidents) to establish the root
cause(s) of the accident, complete the WHE Accident Report (Crane and
Rigging Gear) form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer
within 30 calendar days of the accident. Do not proceed with crane
operations until cause is determined and corrective actions have been
implemented to the satisfaction of the contracting officer. The
Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report
form.
1.11.3
Crane Reports
Submit crane inspection reports required in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1,

Appendix I and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections.
1.11.4
Certificate of Compliance
Provide a Certificate of Compliance for each crane entering an activity

under this contract (see Contracting Officer for a blank certificate).
State within the certificate that the crane and rigging gear meet
applicable OSHA regulations (with the Contractor citing which OSHA
regulations are applicable, e.g., cranes used in construction, demolition,
or maintenance comply with 29 CFR 1926 and USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 16 and
Appendix I. Certify on the Certificate of Compliance that the crane
operator(s) is qualified and trained in the operation of the crane to be
used. Also certify that all of its crane operators working on the DOD
activity have been trained in the proper use of all safety devices (e.g.,
anti-two block devices). Post certifications on the crane.
SECTION 01 35 26
1.12
W912HN-09-X-1813
HOT WORK
Submit and obtain a written permit prior to performing "Hot Work" (welding,
cutting, etc.) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing devices,
from the Fire Division. A permit is required from the Explosives Safety
Office for work in and around where explosives are processed, stored, or
handled. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS
ISSUED. Provide at least two (2) twenty (20) pound 4A:20 BC rated
extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". All extinguishers shall be current
inspection tagged, approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal. It is
also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at
this activity. The Fire Watch shall be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B
and remain on-site for a minimum of 30 minutes after completion of the task
or as specified on the hot work permit.
When starting work in the facility, require personnel to familiarize
themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in
memory the emergency Fire Division phone number. ANY FIRE, NO MATTER HOW
SMALL, SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE RESPONSIBLE FIRE DIVISION IMMEDIATELY.
1.13
RADIATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
License Certificates for radiation materials and equipment shall be

submitted to the Contracting Officer and Radiation Safety Office (RSO)for
all specialized and licensed material and equipment that could cause fatal
harm to construction personnel or to the construction project.
Workers shall be protected from radiation exposure in accordance with
10 CFR 20. Standards for Protection Against Radiation
Loss of radioactive material shall be reported immediately to the
Contracting Officer.
Actual exposure of the radiographic film or unshielding the source shall
not be initiated until after 5 p.m. on weekdays.
In instances where radiography is scheduled near or adjacent to buildings
or areas having limited access or one-way doors, no assumptions shall be
made as to building occupancy. Where necessary, the Contracting Officer
will direct the Contractor to conduct an actual building entry, search, and
alert. Where removal of personnel from such a building cannot be
accomplished and it is otherwise safe to proceed with the radiography, a
fully instructed employee shall be positioned inside such building or area
to prevent exiting while external radiographic operations are in process.
Transportation of Regulated Amounts of Radioactive Material will comply
with 49 CFR, Subchapter C, Hazardous Material Regulations. Local Fire
authorities and the site Radiation Safety officer (RSO) shall be notified
of any Radioactive Material use.
Transmitter Requirements: The base policy concerning the use of
transmitters such as radios, cell phones, etc., must be adhered to by all
contractor personnel. They must also obey Emissions control (EMCON)
restrictions.
1.14
FACILITY OCCUPANCY CLOSURE
Streets, walks, and other facilities occupied and used by the Government
shall not be closed or obstructed without written permission from the
SECTION 01 35 26
W912HN-09-X-1813
1.15
SEVERE STORM PLAN
In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:

a.
Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that could
be damaged in protected areas.
b.
Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material, equipment,

debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against existing
facilities.
c.
Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.
1.16
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS.
Contractors entering and working in confined spaces while performing

general industry work are required to follow the requirements of OSHA
29 CFR 1926 and comply with the requirements in Section 34 of EM 385-1-1,
OSHA 29 CFR 1910, and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK
3.1.1
Hazardous Material Exclusions
Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract,
radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing
ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material
and devices used in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear
density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with
radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury
or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocynates, lead-based paint are
prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the
Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded
materials. Low mercury lamps used within fluorescent lighting fixtures are
allowed as an exception without further Contracting Officer approval.
Notify the Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) prior to excepted items of
radioactive material and devices being brought on base.
3.1.2
Unforeseen Hazardous Material
The design should have identified materials such as PCB, lead paint, and
friable and non-friable asbestos and other OSHA regulated chemicals (i.e.
29 CFR Part 1910.1000). If additional material, not indicated, that may be
hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations
is encountered, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting
Officer immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine
if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no
danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without
change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary
to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant
to "FAR 52.243-4, Changes" and "FAR 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions."
SECTION 01 35 26
3.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING
Apply for utility outages at least 15 days in advance. As a minimum, the

request should include the location of the outage, utilities being
affected, duration of outage and any necessary sketches. Special
requirements for electrical outage requests are contained elsewhere in this
specification section. Once approved, and prior to beginning work on the
utility system requiring shut down, attend a pre-outage coordination
meeting with the Contracting Officer and the Installation representative
to review the scope of work and the lock-out/tag-out procedures for worker
protection. No work will be performed on energized electrical circuits
unless proof is provided that no other means exist.
3.3
CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)
Ensure that each employee is familiar with and complies with these
procedures and USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 12, Control of Hazardous Energy.
3.4
FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION PROGRAM
Establish a fall protection and prevention program, for the protection of

all employees exposed to fall hazards. Within the program include company
policy, identify responsibilities, education and training requirements,
fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection,
storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and
evacuation procedures.
3.4.1
Training
Institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Hazard

Protection and Prevention Program, provide training for each employee who
might be exposed to fall hazards. Provide training by a competent person
for fall protection in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 21.B.
3.4.2
Fall Protection Equipment and Systems
Enforce use of the fall protection equipment and systems designated for
each specific work activity in the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan
and/or AHA at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard.
Protect employees from fall hazards as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section
21. In addition to the required fall protection systems, safety skiff,
personal floatation devices, life rings etc., are required when working
above or next to water in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, Paragraphs 21.N
through 21.N.04. Personal fall arrest systems are required when working
from an articulating or extendible boom, swing stages, or suspended
platform. In addition, personal fall arrest systems are required when
operating other equipment such as scissor lifts if the work platform is
capable of being positioned outside the wheelbase. The need for tying-off
in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment
during raising, lowering, or travel. Fall protection must comply with
29 CFR 1926.500, Subpart M, USACE EM 385-1-1 and ASSE/SAFE A10.32.
3.4.2.1
Personal Fall Arrest Equipment
Personal fall arrest equipment, systems, subsystems, and components shall

meet ASSE/SAFE Z359.1. Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing
lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest
body support device. Body belts may only be used as a positioning device
system (for uses such as steel reinforcing assembly and in addition to an
SECTION 01 35 26
W912HN-09-X-1813
approved fall arrest system). Harnesses shall have a fall arrest

attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and
specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Only
locking snap hooks and carabiners shall be used. Webbing, straps, and ropes
shall be made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance when using
fall arrest equipment shall not exceed 6 feet. The total fall distance and
any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion) that can occur during a
fall shall always be taken into consideration when attaching a person to a
fall arrest system.
3.4.3
Fall Protection for Roofing Work
Implement fall protection controls based on the type of roof being

constructed and work being performed. Evaluate the roof area to be
accessed for its structural integrity including weight-bearing capabilities
for the projected loading.
a.
Low Sloped Roofs:

(1) For work within 6 feet of an edge, on low-slope roofs, protect
personnel from falling by use of personal fall arrest systems,
guardrails, or safety nets.
(2) For work greater than 6 feet from an edge, erect and install
warning lines in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.500 and USACE
EM 385-1-1.
b.
3.4.4
Steep-Sloped Roofs: Work on steep-sloped roofs requires a personal

fall arrest system, guardrails with toe-boards, or safety nets. This
requirement also includes residential or housing type construction.
Horizontal Lifelines
Design, install, certify and use under the supervision of a qualified

person horizontal lifelines for fall protection as part of a complete fall
arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 (29 CFR 1926.500).
3.4.5
Guardrails and Safety Nets
Design, install and use guardrails and safety nets in accordance with
EM 385-1-1 and 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M.
3.4.6
Rescue and Evacuation Procedures
When personal fall arrest systems are used, ensure that the mishap victim
can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur. Prepare a
Rescue and Evacuation Plan and include a detailed discussion of the
following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue; equipment used;
training requirement; specialized training for the rescuers; procedures for
requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to a
medical facility. Include the Rescue and Evacuation Plan within the
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work, in the Fall
Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident Prevention Plan
(APP).
SECTION 01 35 26
3.5
3.5.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
EQUIPMENT
Material Handling Equipment
a.
Material handling equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified

with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless
specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating
instructions.
b.
The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in

accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
c.
Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks shall be licensed in

accordance with OSHA.
3.5.2
Weight Handling Equipment
a.
Equip cranes and derricks as specified in EM 385-1-1, section 16.
b.
Comply with the crane manufacturer's specifications and limitations for

erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the
work. Perform erection under the supervision of a designated person
(as defined in ASME B30.5). Perform all testing in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
c.
Comply with ASME B30.5 for mobile and locomotive cranes, ASME B30.22
for articulating boom cranes, ASME B30.3 for construction tower cranes,
and ASME B30.8 for floating cranes and floating derricks.
d.
Under no circumstance shall a Contractor make a lift at or above 90

percent of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration.
e.
When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines,

operators and riggers shall be alert to this special hazard and follow
the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 11 and ASME B30.5 or
ASME B30.22 as applicable.
f.
Do not crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) unless the

Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location
would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Do not
lift personnel with a line hoist or friction crane.
g.
Inspect, maintain, and recharge portable fire extinguishers as

specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
h.
All employees must keep clear of loads about to be lifted and of

suspended loads.
i.
Use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers.
j.
The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load.

loading of the crane is prohibited.
k.
A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel from

entering the counterweight swing (tail swing) area of the crane.
l.
Certification records which include the date of inspection, signature

of the person performing the inspection, and the serial number or other
identifier of the crane that was inspected shall always be available
SECTION 01 35 26
Side
W912HN-09-X-1813
for review by Contracting Officer personnel.

m.
Written reports listing the load test procedures used along with any
repairs or alterations performed on the crane shall be available for
review by Contracting Officer personnel.
n.
Certify that all crane operators have been trained in proper use of all
safety devices (e.g. anti-two block devices).
3.5.3
USE OF EXPLOSIVES
Explosives shall not be used or brought to the project site without prior
written approval from the Contracting Officer. Such approval shall not
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for injury to persons or for
damage to property due to blasting operations.
Storage of explosives, when permitted on Government property, shall be only
where directed and in approved storage facilities. These facilities shall
be kept locked at all times except for inspection, delivery, and withdrawal
of explosives.
3.6
EXCAVATIONS
Soil classification must be performed by a competent person in accordance

with 29 CFR 1926 and EM 385-1-1.
3.6.1
Utility Locations
All underground utilities in the work area must be positively identified by

a third party, independent, private utility locating company in addition to
any station locating service and coordinated with the station utility
department.
3.6.2
Utility Location Verification
Physically verify underground utility locations, including utility depth,

by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent
construction work is expected to come within three feet of the underground
system.
3.6.3
Utilities Within and Under Concrete, Bituminous Asphalt, and Other
Impervious Surfaces
Utilities located within and under concrete slabs or pier structures,
bridges, parking areas, and the like, are extremely difficult to identify.
Whenever contract work involves chipping, saw cutting, or core drilling
through concrete, bituminous asphalt or other impervious surfaces, the
existing utility location must be coordinated with station utility
departments in addition to location and depth verification by a third
party, independent, private locating company. The third party,
independent, private locating company shall locate utility depth by use of
Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR), X-ray, bore scope, or ultrasound prior to
the start of demolition and construction. Outages to isolate utility
systems must be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be
positively identified. The use of historical drawings does not alleviate
the contractor from meeting this requirement.
SECTION 01 35 26
3.7
W912HN-09-X-1813
ELECTRICAL
3.9.1
Portable Extension Cords
Size portable extension cords in accordance with manufacturer ratings for

the tool to be powered and protected from damage. Immediately removed from
service all damaged extension cords. Portable extension cords shall meet
the requirements of EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70E, and OSHA electrical standards.
3.8
WORK IN CONFINED SPACES
Comply
29 CFR
29 CFR
permit
with the requirements in Section 34 of USACE EM 385-1-1, OSHA

1910, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146, OSHA Directive CPL 2.100 and OSHA
1926. Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a
system to be used.
a.
Entry Procedures. Prohibit entry into a confined space by personnel

for any purpose, including hot work, until the qualified person has
conducted appropriate tests to ensure the confined or enclosed space is
safe for the work intended and that all potential hazards are
controlled or eliminated and documented. (See Section 34 of USACE
EM 385-1-1 for entry procedures.) All hazards pertaining to the space
shall be reviewed with each employee during review of the AHA.
b.
Forced air ventilation is required for all confined space entry

operations and the minimum air exchange requirements must be maintained
to ensure exposure to any hazardous atmosphere is kept below its'
action level.
c.
Sewer wet wells require continuous atmosphere monitoring with audible

alarm for toxic gas detection.
SECTION 01 35 26
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 42 00A
*1 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
08/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications

to establish requirements for the work. These references are identified in
each section by document number, date and title. The document number used
in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing
organization, (e.g.
ASTM B564 Nickel Alloy Forgings). However, when the
standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document,
an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes.
1.2
ORDERING INFORMATION
The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are

referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below, and
if the source of the publications is different from the address of the
sponsoring organization, that information is also provided. Documents
listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the
standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title
rather than by number.
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)
38800 Country Club Drive
Farmington Hills, MI 48331
Ph:
248-848-3700
Fax: 248-848-3701
E-mail: bkstore@concrete.org
Internet: http://www.concrete.org
ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)
2 Huntington Quadrangle, Suite 1NO1
Melville, NY 11747-4502
Ph:
516-576-2360
Fax: 516-576-2377
E-mail: asa@aip.org
Internet: http://asa.aip.org
AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA (ACCA)
2800 Shirlington Road, Suite 300
Arlington, VA 22206
Ph: 703-575-4477
Fax: 703-575-4449
E-mail: info@acca.org
Internet: http://www.acca.org
AIR DIFFUSION COUNCIL (ADC)
1901 N. Roselle Road, suite 800
Schaumburg, IL 60195
Ph:
847-706-6750
Fax: 847-706-6751
E-mail: info@flexibleduct.org
SECTION 01 42 00
Internet:
W912HN-09-X-1813
http://www.flexibleduct.org
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)

30 West University Drive
Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893
Ph:
847-394-0150
Fax: 847-253-0088
E-mail: amca@amca.org
Internet: http://www.amca.org
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
2111 Wilson Blvd, Suite 500
Arlington, VA 22201
Ph:
703-524-8800
Fax: 703-528-3816
E-mail: fdietz@ahrinet.org
Internet: http://www.ahrinet.org
ALLIANCE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS (ATIS)
1200 G Street, NW, Suite 500
Washington, D.C. 20005
Ph:
202-628-6380
Fax: 202-393-5453
E-mail: doccenter@atis.org
Internet: http://www.atis.org
ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)
National Headquarters
1525 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, VA 22209
Ph:
703-358-2960
Fax: 703-358-2961
Internet: http://www.aluminum.org
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)
1827 Walden Office Square
Suite 550
Schaumburg, IL 60173-5774
Ph:
847-303-5664
Fax: 847-303-5774
E-mail: webmaster@aamanet.org
Internet: http://www.aamanet.org
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
(AASHTO)
444 North Capital Street, NW, Suite 249
Ph:
202-624-5800
Fax: 202-624-5806
E-Mail: info@aashto.org
Internet: http://www.aashto.org
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF TEXTILE CHEMISTS AND COLORISTS (AATCC)
1 Davis Drive
P.O. Box 12215
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709
Ph:
919-549-8141
Fax: 919-549-8933
E-mail: leonardc@aatcc.org
SECTION 01 42 00
Internet:
W912HN-09-X-1813
http://www.aatcc.org
AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)

2025 M Street, NW, Suite 800
Ph:
202-367-1155
Fax: 202-367-2155
E-mail: info@americanbearings.org
Internet: http://www.abma-dc.org
AMERICAN BOILER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)
8221 Old Courthouse Road Suite 207
Vienna, VA 22182
Ph: 703-356-7171
Fax: 703-356-4543
Internet: http://www.abma.com
AMERICAN BUREAU OF SHIPPING (ABS)
16855 Northcase Drive
Houston, TX 77060 USA
Ph: 1-282-877-5800
Internet: http://www.eagle.org
AMERICAN CONCRETE PIPE ASSOCIATION (ACPA)
1303 W. Walnut Hill Lane, Suite 305
Irving, TX 75038-3008
Ph:
972-506-7216
Fax: 972-506-7682
E-mail: info@concrete-pipe.org
Internet: http://www.concrete-pipe.org
AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)
1330 Kemper Meadow Drive
Cincinnati, OH 45240
Ph:
513-742-2020 or 513-742-6163
Fax: 513-742-3355
E-mail: mail@acgih.org
Internet: http://www.acgih.org
AMERICAN FOREST & PAPER ASSOCIATION (AF&PA)
American Wood Council
ATTN: Publications Department
1111 Nineteenth Street NW, Suite 800
Ph: 800-890-7732 or 202-463-2766
Fax: 202-463-2791
E-mail: awcpubs@afandpa.org
Internet: http://www.awc.org/
AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION (AGA)
400 North Capitol Street N.W.
Suite 450
Ph:
202-824-7000
Fax: 202-824-7115
E-mail: website@aga.org
Internet: http://www.aga.org
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
AMERICAN GEAR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AGMA)

500 Montgomery Street, Suite 350
Alexandria, VA 22314-1581
Ph:
703-684-0211
Fax: 703-684-0242
E-mail: websiter@agma.org
Internet: http://www.agma.org
AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)
1210 West Northwest Highway
Palatine, IL 60067
Ph:
847-934-8800
Fax: 847-934-8803
E-mail: aha@hardboard.org
Internet: http://www.hardboard.org
AMERICAN INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ASSOCIATION (AIHA)
2700 Prosperity Ave., Suite 250
Fairfax, VA 22031
Tel: 703-849-8888
Fax: 703-207-3561
E-mail: infonet@aiha.org
Internet http://www.aiha.org
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700
Chicago, IL 60601-1802
Ph:
312-670-2400
Fax: 312-670-5403
Publications: 800-644-2400
E-mail: pubs@aisc.org
Internet: http://www.aisc.org
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF TIMBER CONSTRUCTION (AITC)
7012 South Revere Parkway, Suite 140
Centennial, CO 80112
Ph:
303-792-9559
Fax: 303-792-0669
E-mail: info@aitc-glulam.org
Internet: http://www.aitc-glulam.org
AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)
1140 Connecticut Avenue, NW, Suite 705
Ph:
202-452-7100
Fax: 202-463-6577
E-mail: webmaster@steel.org
Internet: http://www.steel.org
AMERICAN LADDER INSTITUTE (ALI/LADDER)
410 North Michigan Avenue
Chicago, IL 60611
Tel: 312-644-6610
Fax: 312-673-6929
E-mail: jrapp@smithbucklin.com
Internet: http://www.americanladderinstitute.org
AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE (ALSC)
P.O. Box 210
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Germantown, MD 20875-0210
Ph:
301-972-1700
Fax: 301-540-8004
E-mail: alsc@alsc.org
Internet:
http://www.alsc.org
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
1819 L Street, NW, 6th Floor
Ph:
202-293-8020
Fax: 202-293-9287
E-mail: info@ansi.org
Internet: http://www.ansi.org/
AMERICAN NURSERY & LANDSCAPE ASSOCIATION (ANLA)
1000 Vermont Ave NW
Suite 300
Ph:
202-789-2900
Fax: 202-789-1893
E-mail: aflynn@anla.org
Internet: http://www.anla.org
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)
1220 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 20005-4070
Ph:
303-397-7993
Fax: 303-397-2740
E-mail: greg.kallio@ihs.com
Internet: http://www.api.org
AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING AND MAINTENANCE-OF-WAY ASSOCIATION
(AREMA)
10003 Derekwood Lane, Suite 210
Lanham, MD 20706
Ph:
301-459-3200
Fax: 301-459-8077
Internet: http://www.arema.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING (ASNT)
1711 Arlingate Lane
P.O. Box 28518
Columbus, OH 43228-0518
Ph:
800-222-2768; 614-274-6003
Fax: 614-274-6899
E-mail: webmaster@asnt.org
Internet: http://www.asnt.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR QUALITY (ASQ)
600 North Plankinton Avenue
Milwaukee, WI 53203
-orP.O. Box 3005
Milwaukee, WI 53201-3005
Ph:
800-935-2231; 414-272-8575
Fax: 414-272-1734
E-mail: help@asq.org
Internet: http://www.asq.org
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, VA 20191-4400
Ph:
703-295-6300 - 800-548-2723
Fax: 703-295-6333
E-mail: member@asce.org
Internet: http://www.asce.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329
Ph:
800-527-4723 or 404-636-8400
Fax: 404-321-5478
E-mail: ashrae@ashrae.org
Internet: http://www.ashrae.org
1800 East Oakton Street
Des Plaines, IL 60018-2187
Ph: 847-699-2929
Fax: 847-768-3434
E-mail: customerservice@asse.org
Internet: http://www.asse.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
901 Canterbury, Suite A
Westlake, OH 44145
Ph:
440-835-3040
Fax: 440-835-3488
E-mail: info@asse-plumbing.org
Internet: http://www.asse-plumbing.org
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
6666 West Quincy Avenue
Denver, CO 80235
Ph: 800-926-7337
Fax: 303-347-0804
E-mail: smorrison@awwa.org
Internet: http://www.awwa.org
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
550 N.W. LeJeune Road
Miami, FL 33126
Ph:
800-443-9353 - 305-443-9353
Fax: 305-443-7559
E-mail: info@aws.org or customerservice@awspubs.com
Internet: http://www.aws.org
AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)
P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
Ph:
205-733-4077
Fax: 205-733-4075
E-mail: email@awpa.com
Internet: http://www.awpa.com
APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)
7011 South 19th St.
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Tacoma, WA 98466-5333
Ph:
253-565-6600
Fax: 253-565-7265
E-mail: help@apawood.org
Internet: http://www.apawood.org
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)
46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120
Potomac Falls, VA 20165
Ph:
571-323-3636
Fax: 571-323-3630
E-mail: info@awinet.org
Internet: http://www.awinet.org
ARCNET TRADE ASSOCIATION (ATA)
E-M-mail: info@arcnet.com
Internet: http://www.arcnet.com/index.htm</URL
ASM INTERNATIONAL (ASM)
9639 Kinsman Road
Materials Park, OH 44073-0002
Ph: 440-338-5151
Fax: 440-338-4634
E-mail: memberservicecenter@asminternational.org
Internet:
http://asmcommunity.asminternational.org/portal/site/www/Home/
Three Park Avenue, M/S 10E
New York, NY 10016-5990
Ph:
800-854-7179 or 800-843-2763
Fax: 212-591-7674
E-mail: infocentral@asme.org
Internet: http://www.asme.org
ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI)
Research Park Drive
P.O. Box 14052
Lexington, KY 40512-4052
Ph:
859-288-4960
Fax: 859-288-4999
E-mail: info@asphaltinstitute.org
Internet: http://www.asphaltinstitute.org
ASPHALT ROOFING MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (ARMA)
529 14th Street, NW
Washington D.C. 20045
Ph: 202-207-0917
Fax: 202-223-9741
Internet: http://www.asphaltroofing.org
ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)
1518 K Street, NW
Ph:
202-737-0202
Fax: 202-638-4833
E-mail: info@aabc.com
Internet: http://www.aabchq.com
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION (AAMI)

4301 N. Fairfax Drive, Suite 301
Arlington, VA 22203-1633
Ph: 800-332-2264 or 703-525-4890
Fax: 703-276-0793
E-mail: customerservice@aami.org
Internet: http://www.aami.org
ASSOCIATION FOR IRON AND STEEL TECHNOLOGY (AIST)
186 Thorn Hill Road
Warrendale, PA 15086-7528
Ph: 724-814-3000
Fax: 724-814-3001
E-Mail: info@aist.org
Internet:
http://www.aistech.org
ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)
600 North 18th Street
P.O. Box 2641
Birmingham, AL 35291
Ph:
205-257-2530
Fax: 205-257-2540
E-Mail: aeicdir@bellsouth.net
Internet: http://www.aeic.org
ASSOCIATION OF HOME APPLIANCE MANUFACTURERS (AHAM)
1111 19th Street NW, Suite 402
Ph:
202-872-5955
Fax: 202-872-9354
E-mail: info@aham.org
Internet: http://www.aham.org
ASSOCIATION OF THE WALL AND CEILING INDUSTRIES - INTERNATIONAL
(AWCI)
513 West Broad Street, Suite 210
Falls Church, VA 22046
Ph: 703-534-8300
Fax: 703-534-8307
E-mail: info@awci.org
Internet: http://www.awci.org
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Ph:
610-832-9585
Fax: 610-832-9555
E-mail: service@astm.org
Internet: http://www.astm.org
BAY AREA AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (Bay Area AQMD)
939 Ellis Street
San Francisco, CA 94109
Ph: 415-771-6000
Fax: 415-928-8560
E-Mail: publicrecords@baaqmd.gov
Internet: http://www.baaqmd.gov/
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
BAY AREA AIR RESOURCES BOARD (BAARB)

Address and contact information unavailable.
BIFMA INTERNATIONAL (BIFMA)
678 Front Ave. NW, Suite 150
Grand Rapids, MI 49504-5368
Ph:
616-285-3963
Fax: 616-285-3765
E-mail: email@bifma.org
Internet: http://www.bifma.org
BIOCYCLE, JOURNAL OF COMPOSTING AND RECYCLING (BIOCYCLE)
The JG Press Inc.
419 State Avenue
Emmaus, PA 18049
Ph: 610-967-4135, Ext. 22
E-mail: biocycle@jgpress.com
Internet: http://www.biocycle.net
BRICK INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (BIA)
1850 Centennial Park Drive, Suite 301
Reston, VA 22091
Ph:
703-620-0010
Fax: 703-620-3928
E-mail: brickinfo@bia.org
Internet: http://www.bia.org
BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTE (BSI)
389 Chiswick High Road
London W4 4AL
United Kingdom
Ph: +44 (0)20 8996 9001
Fax:
+44 (0)20 8996 7001
E-mail: cservices@bsi-global.com or info@bsigroup.com
Internet: http://www.bsi-group.com
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)
355 Lexington Avenue
15th Floor
New York, NY 10017
Ph: 212-297-2122
Fax: 212-370-9047
E-mail: assocmgmt@aol.com
Internet: http://www.buildershardware.com
CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)
Media and Public Communications Office
1516 Ninth Street, MS-29
Sacramento, CA 95814-5512
Ph: 916-654-4287
Internet: http://www.energy.ca.gov/
CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE (CRI)
P.O. Box 2048
Dalton, GA 30722-2048
Ph:
800-882-8846 or 706-278-3176
Fax: 706-278-8835
Internet: http://www.carpet-rug.com
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)

5959 Shallowford Road, Suite 419
Chattanooga, TN 37421
Ph:
423-892-0137
Fax: 423-892-0817
Internet: http://www.cispi.org
CEILINGS & INTERIOR SYSTEMS CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATION (CISCA)
405 Illinois Ave. Unit 2B
St. Charles, IL 60174
Ph: 630-584-1919
Fax: 866-560-8537
E-mail: cisca@cisca.org
Internet: http://www.cisca.org
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTROL AND PREVENTION (CDC)
1600 Clifton Road
Atlanta, GA 30333
Ph: 404-639-3311 or 800-232-4636
E-mail: cdcinfo@cdc.gov
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov
CHEMICAL FABRICS & FILM ASSOCIATION (CFFA)
1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland OH 44115-2851
Ph: 216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: cffa@chemicalfabricsandfilm.com
Internet: http://www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com/
CHLORINE INSTITUTE (CI)
1300 Wilson Boulevard
Arlington, VA 22209
Ph:
703-741-5760
Fax: 703-741-6068
E-mail: aonna@CL2.com
Internet: http://www.CL2.com
COMPOSITE PANEL ASSOCIATION (CPA)
19465 Deerfield Avenue, Suite 306
Leesburg, VA 20176
Ph:
703-724-1128
Fax: 703-724-1588
Internet: http://www.pbmdf.com
COMPRESSED AIR AND GAS INSTITUTE (CAGI)
1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland OH 44115-2851
Ph: 216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: cagi@cagi.org
Internet: http://www.cagi.org/
COMPRESSED GAS ASSOCIATION (CGA)
4221 Walney Road, 5th Floor
Chantilly, VA 20151
Ph:
703-788-2700
Fax: 703-961-1831
E-mail: cga@cganet.com
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Internet: http://www.cganet.com
CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)
933 North Plum Grove Road
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
Ph:
847-517-1200 or 800-328-6306
Fax: 847-517-1206
Internet: http://www.crsi.org/
CONCRETE SAWING AND DRILLING ASSOCIATION (CSDA)
11001 Danka Way North, Suite 1
St Petersburg, FL 33716
PH: 727-577-5004
Fax: 727-577-5012
E-mail: info@csda.org
Internet: http://www.csda.org
CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION (CEA)

1919 South Eads St.
Arlington, VA 22202
Ph: 866-858-1555 or 703-907-7600
Fax: 703-907-7675
E-mail: cea@CE.org
Internet: http://www.CE.org
CONSUMER PRODUCT SAFETY COMMISSION (CPSC)
4330 East-West Highway
Bethesda, MD 20814-4408
Ph: 301-504-7923
Fax: 301-504-0124 or 301-504-0025
E-mail: info@cpsc.gov
Internet: http://www.cpsc.gov
CONVEYOR EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (CEMA)
6724 Lone Oak Boulevard
Naples, FL 34109
Ph:
239-514-3441
Fax: 239-514-3470
E-mail: cema@cemanet.org
Internet: http://www.cemanet.org
COOLING TECHNOLOGY INSTITUTE (CTI)
2611 FM 1960 West
Suite A-101
Houston, TX 77068-3730
Ph:
281-583-4087
Fax: 281-537-1721
E-mail: vmanser@cti.org
Internet: http://www.cti.org
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
260 Madison Avenue
New York, NY 10016
Ph:
212-251-7200
Fax: 212-251-7234
E-mail: questions@cda.copper.org
Internet: http://www.copper.org
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
CRANE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION OF AMERICA (CMAA)

8720 Red Oak Boulevard, Suite 201
Charlotte, NC 28217-3992
Ph: 704-676-1190
Fax: 704-676-1199
Internet: www.mhia.org/psc/PSC_Products_Cranes.cfm
CSA STANDARDS (CSA)
8501 East Pleasant Valley Road
Cleveland, OH 44131-5575
Ph:
216-524-4990 or 877-235-9791
Fax: 216-520-8979
E-mail: cathy.rake@csa-america.org
Internet: http://www.csa-america.org
DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI)
14150 Newbrook Dr.
Chantilly, VA 20151-2232
Ph: 703-222-2010
Fax: 703-222-2410
E-mail: infor@dhi.org
Internet: http://www.dhi.org
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA MUNICIPAL REGULATIONS (DCMR)
1350 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW, Room 419
Washington DC 20004
Ph: 202-727-6306 8:30 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.
Fax: 202-727-3582
E-mail: secretary@dc.gov
Internet: http://os.dc.gov/info/odai/odai.shtm
DOOR AND ACCESS SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (DASMA)
1300 Sumner Avenue
Ph:
216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: dasma@dasma.com
Internet: http://www.dasma.com
DUCTILE IRON PIPE RESEARCH ASSOCIATION (DIPRA)
245 Riverchase Parkway East, Suite O
Birmingham, AL 35244
Ph:
205-402-8700
Fax: 205-402-8730
E-mail: info@dipra.org
Internet: http://www.dipra.org
EIFS INDUSTRY MEMBERS ASSOCIATION (EIMA)
513 West Broad St., Suite 210
Falls Church, VA 22046-3257
Ph:
800-294-3462
Fax: 703-538-1736
E-mail: lwidzowski@eima.com
Internet: http://www.eima.com
ELECTRICAL GENERATING SYSTEMS ASSOCIATION (EGSA)
1650 South Dixie Highway, Suite 400
Boca Raton, FL 33432-7462
Ph: 561-750-5575
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Fax: 561-395-8557
E-mail: e-mail@egsa.org
Internet: http://www.egsa.org
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ASSOCIATION (ECA)
2500 Wilson Blvd.
Suite 310
Arlington, VA 22201
Ph: 703-907-8024
E-mail: emikoski@ecaus.org
Internet: http://www.ecaus.org
ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ALLIANCE (EIA)
2500 Wilson Boulevard
Ph: 703-907-7500
Fax: 703-907-7501
E-mail: infor@ecaus.org
Internet: http://www.eia.org
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ASSOCIATION (ESD)
7900 Turin Road, Building 3
Rome, NY 13440-2069
Ph:
315-339-6937
Fax: 315-339-6793
E-mail: info@esda.org
http://www.esda.org/
ENERGY INSTITUTE (EI)
Publications Team
Energy Institute
61 New Cavendish Street
London
W1G 7AR, UK
Ph: +44 (0)20 7467 7100
Fax: +44 (0)20 7255 1472
Internet:
http://www.energyinstpubs.org.uk/cgi-bin/open.cgi?page=index
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)
1000 Independance Ave. SW
Ph: 800-342-5363
Fax: 202-586-4403
E-mail: dmteam@hq.doe.gov
Internet: http://www.eh.doe.gov/
ETL TESTING LABORATORIES (ETL)
Intertek Testing Services, ETL SEMKO
70 Codman Hill Road
Boxborough, MA 01719
Ph:
978-263-2662
Fax: 978-263-7086
E-mail: info@etlsemko.com
Internet: http://www.intertek-etlsemko.com
EUROPEAN COMMITTEE FOR STANDARDIZATION (CEN/CENELEC)
CEN
Avenue Marnix 17
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
B-1000 Brussels
Ph: 32-2-550-08-11
Fax: 32-2-550-08-19
E-mail: infodesk@cenorm.be
Internet: http://www.cenorm.be
EXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (EJMA)
25 North Broadway
Tarrytown, NY 10591
Ph: 914-332-0040
Fax: 914-332-1541
E-mail: inquiries@ejma.org
Internet: http://www.ejma.org
FEDERAL ENERGY REGULATORY COMMISSION (FERC)
888 First Street, NE
Ph: 202-502-6088
E-mail: customer@ferc.gov
Internet: http://www.ferc.gov/default.asp
FLAT GLASS MARKETING ASSOCIATION (FGMA)
White Lakes Professional Bldg.
3310 Harrison St.
Topeka, KS 66611-2279
Ph: 913-266-7013
Fax: 913-266-0272
FLUID CONTROLS INSTITUTE (FCI)
1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland, OH 44115
Ph:
216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: fci@fluidcontrolsinstitute.org
Internet: www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org
FLUID SEALING ASSOCIATION (FSA)
994 Old Eagle School Rd. #1019
Wayne, PA 19087
Ph: 610-971-4850
E-mail: info@fluidsealing.com
Internet: www.fluidsealing.com
FM GLOBAL (FM)
270 Central Avenue
P.O. Box 7500
Johnston, RI 02919
Ph:
401-275-3000 ext. 1945
Fax: 401-275-3029
E-mail: servicedesk.myrisk@fmglobal.com
Internet: http://www.fmglobal.com
FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL (FSC)
212 Third Avenue North
Suite 280
Minneapolis, MN 55401
Ph:
612-353-4511
Fax: 612-208-1565
E-mail: info@fscus.org
SECTION 01 42 00
Internet:
W912HN-09-X-1813
http://www.fscus.org
FORESTRY SUPPLIERS INC. (FSUP)

205 West Rankin Street
P.O. Box 8397
Jackson, MS 39284-8397
Ph: 800-752-8460
Fax: 601-292-0165
E-mail: cs@forestry-suppliers.com
Internet: http://www.forestry-suppliers.com
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH
(FCCCHR)
University of South California
Kaprielian Hall 200
Los Angeles, CA 90089-2531
Ph:
213-740-2032 or 866-545-6340
Fax: 213-740-8399
E-mail: fccchr@usc.edu
Internet: http://www.usc.edu/dept/fccchr
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (GeoSA)
P.O. Box 9140
Boulder, CO 80301-9140
Ph: 303-447-2020
Fax: 303-357-1070
E-mail: gsaservice@geosociety.org
Internet: http://www.geosociety.org
Publication available from: http://www.munsellstore.com/
GEOSYNTHETIC INSTITUTE (GSI)
475 Kedron Avenue
Folsom, PA 19033 1208
Ph:
610-522-8440
Fax: 610-522-8441
E-mail: mvashley@verizon.net
Internet: http://www.geosynthetic-institute.org
GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)
2945 SW Wanamaker Drive, Suite A
Topeka, KS 66614
Ph:
785-271-0208
Fax: 785-271-0166
E-mail: gana@glasswebsite.com
Internet: http://www.glasswebsite.com
GREEN BUILDING INITIATIVE (GBI)
2104 SE Morrison
Portland, Oregon 97214
Ph: 877-424-4241
Fax: 503.961.8991
Email: info@thegbi.org
Internet: http://www.thegbi.org/gbi/
GREEN SEAL (GS)
1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Suite 827
Ph:
202-872-6400
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Fax: 202-872-4324
E-mail: greenseal@greenseal.org
Internet: http://www.greenseal.org
GREENGUARD ENVIRONMENTAL INSTITUTE (GEI)
2211 Newmarket Parkway, Suite 110
Marietta, GA 30067
Ph: 800-427-9681
Fax: 770-980-0072
E-mail: info@greenguard.org
Internet: http://www.greenguard.org/
GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)
6525 Belcrest Road, Suite 480
Hyattsville, MD 20782
Ph:
301-277-8686
Fax: 301-277-8747
E-mail: info@gypsum.org
Internet: http://www.gypsum.org
HARDWOOD PLYWOOD AND VENEER ASSOCIATION (HPVA)
1825 Michael Faraday Dr.
Reston, VA 20190
Ph:
703-435-2900
Fax: 703-435-2537
E-mail: hpva@hpva.org
Internet: http://www.hpva.org
HEAT EXCHANGE INSTITUTE (HEI)
1300 Sumner Avenue
Ph:
216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: hei@heatexchange.org
Internet: http://www.heatexchange.org
HOIST MANUFACTURERS INSTITUTE (HMI)
Charlotte, NC 28217
Ph: 704-676-1190
Fax: 704-676-1199
E-mail: hmi@mhia.org
Internet: http://www.mhia.org/psc/PSC_Products_Hoists.cfm
H.P. WHITE LABORATORY (HPW)
3114 Scarboro Road
Street, MD 21154
Ph: 410-838-6550
Fax: 410-838-2802
E-mail: info@hpwhite.com
Internet: http://www.hpwhite.com
HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI)
6 Campus Drive, First Floor North
Parsippany, NJ 07054-4406
Ph:
973-267-9700
Fax: 973-267-9055
E-mail: webmaster@pumps.org
Internet: http://www.pumps.org
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
HYDRONICS INSTITUTE DIVISION OF GAMA (HYI)

35 Russo Place
P.O. Box 218
Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922-0218
Ph:
908-464-8200
Fax: 908-464-7818
E-mail: information@gamanet.org
Internet: http://www.gamanet.org
ICC EVALUATION SERVICE, INC. (ICC-ES)
5360 Workman Mill Road
Whitier, CA 90601
Ph:
562-699-0543
Fax: 562-695-4694
E-mail: es@icc-es.org
Internet: http://www.icc-es.org
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)
120 Wall Street, 17th Floor
New York, NY 10005
Ph:
212-248-5000
Fax: 212-248-5018
E-mail: iesna@iesna.org
Internet: http://www.iesna.org
INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS INSTITUTE (IFI)
6363 Oak Tree Boulevard
Independance, OH 44131
Ph:
216-241-1482
Fax: 216-241-5901
E-mail: IFI-orders@indfast.org
Internet: http://www.industrial-fasteners.org
INSTITUTE OF INSPECTION, CLEANING, AND RESTORATION CERTIFICATION
(IICRC)
IICRC Administrative Office
2715 E Mill Plain Blvd.
Vancouver, WA 98661
Ph: 360-693-5675
Fax: 360-693-4858
Internet: http://www.iicrc.org/home
INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)
1901 North Moore Street
Ph:
703-525-1695
Fax: 703-528-2148
E-mail: isea@safety equipment.org
Internet: http://www.safetyequipment.org/
INNOVATIVE PAVEMENT RESEARCH FOUNDATION (IPRF)
Att: Mr. Gerald Voigt
5420 Old Orchard Rd, Suite A-100
Skokie, IL 60077-1059
Internet: www.iprf.org
INSTITUTE OF TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERS (ITE)
1099 14th Street, Suite 300 West
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Ph:
202-289-0222
Fax: 202-289-7722
E-mail: ite_staff@ite.org
Internet: http://www.ite.org
INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORT ASSOCIATION (IATA)
703 Waterford Way (NW 62nd Avenue), Suite 600
Miami, FL 33126
Ph:
305-264-7772
Fax: 305-264-8088
Internet: http://www.iata.org
INSTITUTE OF CLEAN AIR COMPANIES (ICAC)
1730 M Street NW, Suite 206
Ph:
202-457-0911
Fax: 202-331-1388
E-mail: icacinfo@icac.com
Internet: http://www.icac.com
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
445 Hoes Lane or 2001 L Street, NW. Suite 700
Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331 or Washington, DC 20036-4910 USA
Ph:
732-981-0060 or 800-701-4333
Fax: 732-562-6380
E-mail: onlinesupport@ieee.org or ieeeusa@ieee.org
Internet: http://www.ieee.org
INSTITUTE OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND TECHNOLOGY (IEST)
Arlington Place One or 2340 South Arlington Heights Rd. Suite 100
Arlington Heights, IL 60005-4516
Ph: 847-981-0100
Fax: 847-981-4130
E-mail: iest@iest.org
Internet: http://www.iest.org
INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS FOR NAVBASE GUANTANAMO BAY CUBA
(COMNAVBASEGTMOINST)
Address Not Available
INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)
P.O. Box 1568
Carrollton, GA 30112
Ph:
1 800 447 3352
Fax: 1 303 397 2599
E-mail: global@ihs.com
Internet: http://www.icea.net
INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ALLIANCE (IGMA)
27 N. Wacker Dr. Suite 365
Chicago, IL 60606-2800
Ph:
613-233-1510
Fax:
613-482-9436
E-mail: info@igmaonline.org
Internet: http://www.igmaonline.org
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS

(IAPMO)
4755 E. Philadelphia St.
Ontario, CA 91761
Ph:
909-472-4100
Fax: 909-472-4150
E-mail: iampo@iampo.org
Internet: www.iampo.org
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
5360 Workman Mill Road
Whittier, CA 90601
Ph:
1-888-422-7233
Fax: 562-908-5524
E-mail: webmaster@iccsafe.org
Internet: www.iccsafe.org
INTERNATIONAL CONCRETE REPAIR INSTITUTE (ICRI)
3166 South River Road, Suite 132
Des Plaines, IL 60018
Ph:
847-827-0830
Fax: 847-827-0832
Internet: http://www.icri.org
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)
3050 Centre Ave. Suite 102
Portage, MI 49024
Ph: 269-488-6382
Fax: 269-488-6383
E-mail: neta@netaworld.org
Internet: http://www.netaworld.org
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)
3, rue de Varembe, P.O. Box 131
CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland
Ph:
41-22-919-0211
Fax: 41-22-919-0300
E-mail: custserv@iec.ch
Internet: http://www.iec.ch
INTERNATIONAL GROUND SOURCE HEAT PUMP ASSOCIATION (IGSHPA)
Oklahoma State University
374 Cordell South
Stillwater OK 74078-8018
Ph: 405-744-5175
Fax: 405-744-5283
E-mail: igshpa@okstate.edu
Internet: http://www.igshpa.okstate.edu/
INTERNATIONAL INSTITUTE OF AMMONIA REFRIGERATION (IIAR)
1110 North Glebe Road, Suite 250
Arlington, VA 22201
Ph: 703-312-4200
Fax: 703-312-0065
E-mail: info@iiar.org or iiar_request@iiar.org
Internet: http://www.iiar.org
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
INTERNATIONAL MUNICIPAL SIGNAL ASSOCIATION (IMSA)

P.O. Box 539
165 East Union Street
Newark, NY 14513-0539
Ph:
315-331-2182 and 800-723-4672
Fax: 315-331-8205
E-mail: info@imsasafety.org
Internet: http://www.imsasafety.org/
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse
Case Postale 56
CH-1211 Geneve 20 Switzerland
Ph:
41-22-749-01-11
Fax: 41-22-733-34-30
E-mail: central@iso.ch
Internet: http://www.iso.org
INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION UNION (ITU)
For documents not available from Dept of Commerce:
Sales Service
International Telecommunication Union
Place des Nations
CH-1211 Geneve 20 Switzerland
Ph:
41-22-730-5852
Fax: 41-22-733-5853
E-mail: itumail@itu.int
Internet: http://www.itu.org
For documents available from Dept of Commerce:
U.S. Dept of Commerce
National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
5301 Shawnee Road
Alexandria, VA 22312
Ph:
703-605-6050 or 1-888-584-8332
FAX: 703-605-6887
E-mail: info@ntis.gov
Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
IPC - ASSOCIATION CONNECTING ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES (IPC)
3000 Lakeside Drive, 309S
Bannockburn, IL 60015
Ph: 847-615-7100
Fax: 847-615-7105
E-mail: webmaster@ipc.org
Internet: http://www.ipc.org
ISA - INTERNATIONAL SOCIETY OF AUTOMATION (ISA)
67 Alexander Drive
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709
Ph:
919-549-8411
Fax: 919-549-8288
E-mail: info@isa.org
Internet: http://www.isa.org
INTERNATIONAL WINDOW CLEANING ASSOCIATION (IWCA)
400 Admiral Blvd
Kansas City, MO 64106
Ph: 800-875-4922 or 816-471-4922
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
E-mail: info@iwca.org
Internet: http://www.iwca.org
THE INTERNET ENGINEERING TASK FORCE (IETF)
IETF, Internet Society
48377 Fremont Blvd., Suite 117
Fremont, California 94538
Ph: 510-492-4080
Fax: 510-492-4001
E-mail: ietf-info@ietf.org
Internet: http://www.rfc-editor.org/
ITALIAN LAWS AND DECREES (D.M.)
Internet: http://www.nyulawglobal.org/globalex/Italy2.htm
KITCHEN CABINET MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (KCMA)
1899 Preston White Drive
Reston, VA 20191-5435
Ph:
703-264-1690
Fax: 703-620-6530
E-mail: info@kcma.org
Internet: http://www.kcma.org
L.H. BAILEY HORTORIUM (LHBH)
Dept of Plant Biology
c/o Cornell University
412 Mann Library Building
Ithaca, NY 14853
Ph: 607-255-4477(Dr. William L.Crepet)
Internet: http://www.plantbio.cornell.edu/Hort.html
LONMARK INTERNATIONAL (LonMark)
550 Meridan Ave.
San Jose, CA 95126
Ph: 408-938-5266
Fax: 408-790-3838
E-mail: info@lonmark.org
Internet: http://www.lonmark.org
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
127 Park Street, NE
Vienna, VA 22180
Ph:
703-281-6613
Fax: 703-281-6671
E-mail: info@mss-hq.com
Internet: http://www.mss-hq.com
MAPLE FLOORING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MFMA)
111 Deer Lake Road, Suite 100
Deerfield, IL 60015
Ph:
847-480-9138
Fax: 847-480-9282
E-mail: mfma@maplefloor.org
Internet: http://www.maplefloor.org
MARBLE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA (MIA)
28901 Clemens Road, Suite 100
Cleveland, OH 44145
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Ph:
440-250-9222
Fax: 440-250-9223
E-mail: info@marble-institute.com
Internet: http://www.marble-institute.com
MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)
2800 Engleton Avenue
Burnaby, BC CANADA V5C 6G7
Ph: 604-298-7578
Fax: 604-298-7571
E-mail: info@paintinfo.com,jody@mpi.net,bgl@mpi.net
Internet: http://www.paintinfo.com/mpi
MATERIAL HANDLING INDUSTRY OF AMERICA INC (MHIA)
8720 Red Oak Blvd., Suite 201
Charlotte, NC 28717-3992
Ph: 704-676-1190
Fax: 704-676-1199
Internet: http://www.mhia.org
METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA)
1300 Sumner Avenue
Ph:
216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: mbma@mbma.com
Internet: http://www.mbma.com
MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)
16712 Elm Circle
Omaha, NE 68130
Ph:
800-747-6422
Fax: 402-330-9702
E-mail: mica@tconl.com
Internet: http://www.micainsulation.org
MIDWEST ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MRCA)
4840 Bob Billings Parkway, Suite 1000
Lawrence, Kansas 66049-3862
Ph: 785-843-4888 or 800-497-6722
Fax: 785-843-7555
E-mail: mrca@mrca.org
Internet: General Information: http://www.mrca.org
MONORAIL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MMA)
Charlotte, NC 28217
Ph: 704-676-1190
Fax: 704-676-1199
E-mail: mma@mhia.org
Internet: http://www.mhia.org/mma
NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)
1440 South Creek Drive
Houston, TX 77084-4906
Ph:
281-228-6200
Fax: 281-228-6300
E-mail: firstservice@nace.org
Internet: http://www.nace.org
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION (NASA)

Superintendent of Documents at
U.S. Government Printing Office
732 North Capitol Street, NW
Ph: 202-783-3238
Fax: 202-512-1800
E-mail: ContactCenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.nasa.gov or http://www.gpoaccess.gov/help
NATIONAL AIR DUCT CLEANERS ASSOCIATION (NADCA)
1518 K Street, NW
Suite 503
Ph:
(202) 737-2926
Fax: (202) 347-8847
E-mail: info@nadca.com
Internet: http://www.nadca.com
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

800 Roosevelt Road, Bldg C, Suite 312
Glen Ellyn, IL 60137
Ph:
630-942-6591
Fax: 630-790-3095
E-mail: wlewis7@cox.net(Vernon Lewis,technical consultant)
Internet: http://www.naamm.org
NATIONAL BOARD OF BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL INSPECTORS (NBBPVI)
1055 Crupper Avenue
Columbus, OH 43229-1183
Ph:
614-888-8320
Fax: 614-888-0750
E-mail: available on website
Internet: http://www.nationalboard.org
NATIONAL CABLE AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS ASSOCIATION (NCTA)
25 Massachusetts Avenue, NW, Suite 100
Ph:
202-222-2300
E-mail: webmaster@ncta.com
Internet: http://www.ncta.com
NATIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY ASSOCIATION (NCMA)
13750 Sunrise Valley Drive
Herndon, VA 20171-4662
Ph:
703-713-1900
Fax: 703-713-1910
E-mail: mterrell@ncma.org (Mary Arntson)
Internet: http://www.ncma.org/Pages/default.aspx
NATIONAL COUNCIL ON RADIATION PROTECTION AND MEASUREMENTS (NCRP)
7910 Woodmont Avenue, Suite 400
Bethesda, MD 20814-3095
Ph:
301-657-2652
Fax: 301-907-8768
E-mail: ncrppubs@ncrpponline.org
SECTION 01 42 00
Internet:
W912HN-09-X-1813
http://www.ncrp.com
NATIONAL DRILLING ASSOCIATION (NDA)

1545 W.130th St, Suite A2
Hinckley, OH 44233
Ph: 877-632-4748
Fax: 216-803-9900
E-mail: form available online
Internet: http://www.nda4u.com/
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)
3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100
Bethesda, MD 20814
Ph: 301-657-3110
Fax: 301-215-45002
Internet: http://www.necanet.org/
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752
Rosslyn, VA 22209
Ph:
703-841-3200
Fax: 703-841-5900
Internet: http://www.nema.org/
NATIONAL ELEVATOR INDUSTRY, INC. (NEII)
1677 County Route 64
P.O. Box 838
Salem, New York 12865-0838
Ph: 518-854-3100
Fax: 518-854-3257
E-Mail: into@neii.org
Internet: http://www.neii.org/index.cfm
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)
8575 Grovemont Circle
Gaithersburg, MD 20877
Ph:
301-977-3698
Fax: 301-977-9589
E-Mail: elana@nebb.org
Internet: http://www.nebb.org
NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL (NFRC)
6305 Ivy Lane, Suite 140
Greenbelt, MD 20770
Ph: 301-589-1776
Fax: 301-589-3884
E-Mail: info@nfrc.org
Internet: http://www.nfrc.org
1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02169-7471
Ph:
617-770-3000 or 800-344-3555
Fax: 617-770-0700
E-mail: webmaster@nfpa.org
Internet: http://www.nfpa.org
NATIONAL FLUID POWER ASSOCIATION (NFLPA)
3333 North Mayfair Road, Suite 211
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Milwaukee, WI 53222-3219
Ph:
414-778-3344
Fax: 414-778-3361
E-mail: nfpa@nfpa.com
Internet: http://www.nfpa.com
NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (NHLA)
6830 Raleigh LaGrange Road
Memphis, TN 38184-0518
Ph:
901-377-1818
E-mail: info@nhla.com
Internet: http://www.natlhardwood.org
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES
(NICET)
1420 King Street
Ph: 888-476-4238 (1-888 IS-NICET)
E-mail: tech@nicet.org
Internet: http://www.nicet.org
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH (NIOSH)
Mail Stop C-34
4676 Columbia Parkway
Cincinnati, OH 45226
Ph: 513-533-8611
Fax: 513-533-8285
E-mail: nioshdocket@cdc.gov
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/nchs/products.htm
NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF JUSTICE (NIJ)
National Law Enforcement and Corrections Technology Center
2277 Research Boulevard - Mailstop 8J
Rockville, MD 20850
Ph:
800-248-2742
Fax: 301-519-5149
E-mail: asknlectc@nlectc.org
Internet: http://www.justnet.org
NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)
100 Bureau Drive
Stop 1070
Gaithersburg, MD 20899-1070
Ph: 301-975-NIST (6478
E-mail: inquiries@nist.gov
Internet: http://www.nist.gov
NATIONAL LIME ASSOCIATION (NLA)

200 North Glebe Road, Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203
Ph: 703-243-5463
Fax: 703-243-5489
E-mail: ecoyner@lime.org
Internet: http://www.lime.org
NATIONAL PRECAST CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NPCA)
10333 N. Meridian Street, Suite 272
Indianapolis, Indiana 46290
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Ph: 317-571-9500 or 800 366 7731

Fax: 317-571-0041
E-mail: npca@precast.org
Internet: www.precast.org
NOFMA: THE WOOD FLOORING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NOFMA)
National Wood Flooring Association
111 Chesterfield Industrial Boulevard
Chesterfield, MO 63005
Ph: 1-800-422-4556
Fax: 1-636-519-6664
E-mail: info@nofma.org
Internet: http://www.nofma.org
NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)
900 Spring Street
Silver Spring, MD 20910
Ph:
240-485-1165
E-mail: jjenkins@nrmca.org (jacques jenkins)
Internet: http://www.nrmca.org
NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA)
10255 West Higgins Road, Suite 600
Rosemont, IL 60018-5607
Ph:
847-299-9070
Fax: 847-299-1183
E-mail: form available online
Internet: http://www.nrca.net
NATIONAL SECURITY TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND INFORMATION SYSTEMS
SECURITY (NSTISS)
CNSS Secretariat
National Security Agency
9800 Savage Road, Ste 6716
Fort George G. Meade, MD 20755-6716
Ph:
410-854-6805
Fax: 410-854-6814
E-mail: cnss@radium.ncsc.mil
Internet: http://www.cnss.gov/index.html
NATIONAL TERRAZZO & MOSAIC ASSOCIATION (NTMA)
P.O. Box 2605
Fredericksburg, TX 78624
Ph:
800-323-9736
Fax: 888-362-2770
E-mail: info@ntma.com
Internet: http://www.ntma.com
NATIONAL WOOD WINDOW AND DOOR ASSOCIATION (NWWDA)
601 N. Michigan Avenue, Suite 2200
Chicago, IL 60611
Ph:
312-321-6802
Fax: 312-673-6922
E-mail: admin@wdma.com
Internet: http://www.wdma.com
NATURAL RESOURCE, AGRICULTURAL AND ENGINEERING SERVICE (NRAES)
Cooperative Extension
P.O. Box 4557
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Ithaca, NY 14852-4557
Ph:
607-255-7654
Fax: 607-254-8770
E-mail: nraes@cornell.edu
Internet: http://www.nraes.org
NORTH AMERICAN INSULATION MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NAIMA)
44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 310
Ph:
703-684-0084
Fax: 703-684-0427
E-mail: online form
Internet: http://www.naima.org
NORTHEASTERN LUMBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NELMA)
272 Tuttle Road
Cumberland, ME 04021
Ph:
207-829-6901
Fax: 207-829-4293
E-mail: barbara@nelma.org
Internet: http://www.nelma.org
NORTHWEST AIR POLLUTION AUTHORITY (NWAPA)
1600 2nd Street
Mt. Vernon, WA 98273-5202
Ph: 360-428-4627 or 800-622-4627
Fax: 360-428-1620
E-mail: info@nwcleanair.org
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
789 North Dixboro Road
P.O. Box 130140
Ann Arbor, MI 48113-0140
Ph:
734-769-8010 or 800-NSF-MARK
Fax: 734-769-0109
E-mail: info@nsf.org
Internet: http://www.nsf.org
OLYMPIC AIR POLLUTION CONTROL AUTHORITY (OAPCA)
2940-B Limited Lane NW
Olympia, WA 98502
Ph:
360-586-1044
Fax: 360-491-6308
E-mail: jkelly@oapca.org
Internet: www.orcaa.org/contact-us/
ORGANISATION FOR ECONOMIC CO-OPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT (OECD)
2, rue Andre Pascal
F-75775 Paris Cedex 16, France
Ph:
+ 33 1 45 24 82 00
Fax: 33 1 45 24 85 00
E-mail: bookshop@oecd.org
Internet: http://www.oecd.org
U.S. Contact Center
OECD Washington Center
2001 L Street, NW, Suite 650
Ph:
202-785-6323
Fax: 202-785-0350
SECTION 01 42 00
E-mail:
W912HN-09-X-1813
washington.contact@oecd.org
PIPE FABRICATION INSTITUTE (PFI)

511 Avenue of America's, #601
New York, NY 10011
Ph:
514-634-3434
Fax: 514-634-9736
E-mail: pfi@pfi-institute.org
Internet: http://www.pfi-institute.org
Canada Office:
655-32nd Ave., Suite 201
Lachine, QC H8T 3G6
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)
800 Roosevelt Road, Building C, Suite 312
Glen Ellyn, IL 60137
Ph:
630-858-6540
Fax: 630-790-3095
Internet: http://www.ppfahome.org
PLASTICS PIPE INSTITUTE (PPI)
105 Decker Court, Suite 825
Irving, TX 75062
Ph:
469-499-1044
Fax: 469-499-1063
E-Mail: sboros@plasticpipe.org
Internet: http://www.plasticpipe.org
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)
800 Turnpike Street, Suite 300
North Andover, MA 01845
Ph:
978-557-0720 or 800-589-8956
Fax: 978-557-0721
E-Mail: pdi@PDIonline.org
Internet: http://www.pdionline.org
PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (PMCA)
14695 SW Millikan Way
Beaverton, OR 97006
Ph:
503-682-7919 (Frank Wall, Executive Director)
Fax: 503-682-6241
Internet: http://www.pmcaoregon.com/
PLUMBING-HEATING-COOLING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (PHCC)
180 South Washington Street
P.O. Box 6808
Falls Church, VA 22046
Ph:
800-533-7694 or 703-237-8100
Fax: 703-237-7442
E-mail: naphcc@naphcc.org
Internet: http://www.phccweb.org
PORCELAIN ENAMEL INSTITUTE (PEI)
PO Box 920220
Norcross, GA 30010
Ph: 770-676-9366
Fax: 770-676-9368
E-mail: penamel@aol.com
Internet: http://www.porcelainenamel.com
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE (PTI)

38800 Country Club Drive
Farmington Hills, MI 48331
Ph: 248-848-3180
Fax: 248-848-3181
E-mail: info@post-tensioning.org
Internet: http://www.post-tensioning.org/
PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE (PCI)

209 West Jackson Blvd. #500
Chicago, IL 60606
Ph:
312-786-0300
Fax: 312-786-0353
E-mail: info@pci.org
Internet: http://www.pci.org
PUGET SOUND CLEAN AIR AGENCY (PSCAA)
1904 Third Street
Suite 105
Seattle, WA 98101
Ph:
206-343-8800
Fax: 206-343-7522
Internet: www.pscleanair.org
REDWOOD INSPECTION SERVICE (RIS) OF THE CALIFORNIA REDWOOD
ASSOCIATION (CRA)
405 Enfrente Drive, Suite 200
Novato, CA 94949
Ph:
415-382-0662 or 888-CALREDWOOD
Fax: 415-382-8531
E-Mail: info@calredwood.org
Internet: http://www.redwoodinspection.com/
RESEARCH COUNCIL ON STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS (RCSC)
E-Mail: clarson@lejeunebolt.com
Internet: http://www.boltcouncil.org
RUBBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (RMA)
1400 K Street, NW, Suite 900
Ph:
202-682-4800
Fax: 202-682-4854
E-mail: info@rma.org
Internet: http://www.rma.org
SCIENTIFIC EQUIPMENT AND FURNITURE ASSOCIATION (SEFA)
1205 Franklin Avenue, Suite 320
Garden City, N.Y. 11530
Ph: 516-294-5424
Fax: 516-294-4765
E-mail: david@sefalabs.com, barbara@sefalabs.com, sefalabs@aol.com
Internet: http://www.scs1.com
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)
2200 Powell Street, Suite 725
Emeryville, CA 94608
Ph: 510-452-8000
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Fax: 510-452-8001
Internet: http://www.scs1.com
SCREEN MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SMA)
2850 South Ocean Boulevard, Suite 114
Palm Beach, FL 33480-6205
E-mail: jvsawyers@home-shield.com (Jeff Sawyers)
Internet: http://www.smainfo.org
SEMICONDUCTOR EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS INTERNATIONAL (SEMI)
3081 Zanker Road
San Jose, CA 95134
Ph: 408-943-6900
Fax: 408-428-9600
E-mail: semihq@semi.org
Internet: http://www.semi.org
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
(SMACNA)
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, VA 20151-1219
Ph:
703-803-2980
Fax: 703-803-3732
E-mail: info@smacna.org
Internet: http://www.smacna.org
SINGLE PLY ROOFING INDUSTRY (SPRI)
411 Waverley Oaks Road, Suite 331B
Waltham, MA 02452
Ph: 781-647-7026
Fax: 781-647-7222
E-mail: info@spri.org
Internet: http://www.spri.org
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
400 Commonwealth Drive
Warrendale, PA 15096-0001
Ph:
724-776-4970
Fax: 724-776-0790
E-mail: customerservice@sae.org
Internet: http://www.sae.org
SOCIETY OF MOTION PICTURE AND TELEVISION ENGINEERS (SMPTE)
3 Baker Avenue, 5th Floor
White Plains, New York 10601
Ph: 914-761-1100
Fax: 914-761-3115
E-mail: smpte@smpte.org
Internet: http://www.smpte.org
SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM ALLIANCE (SPFA)
4400 Fair Lakes Court, Suite 105
Fairfax, VA 22033
Ph: 800-523-6154
Fax: THIS IS OK
E-mail: Fill out a form online
Internet: http://www.sprayfoam.org
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SOLAR RATING AND CERTIFICATION CORPORATION (SRCC)

1679 Clearlake Road
Cocoa, FL 32922-5703
Ph: 321-638-1537
Fax: 321-638-1010
E-mail: srcc@solar-rating.org
Internet: http://www.solar-rating.org
SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD)
21865 Copley Drive
Diamond Bar, CA 91765
Ph:
909-396-2000
Internet: http://www.aqmd.gov
SOUTHERN CYPRESS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SCMA)
400 Penn Center Boulevard, Suite 530
Pittsburgh, PA 15235-5605
Ph: 412-829-0770
Fax: 412-829-0844
Internet: http://www.cypressinfo.org
SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)
P.O. Box 10915
Pensacola, FL 32504-0915
Ph:
850-434-2611
Fax: 850-433-5594
E-mail: Fill out form at http://www.spib.org/contact.shtml
Internet: http://www.spib.org
STATE OF CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (CALTRANS)
Publication Distribution Unit
1900 Royal Oaks Dr.
Sacramento, CA 95815-3800
Ph:
916-263-0822 or 916-263-0865
Fax: 916-263-0469
E-mail: publications@dot.ca.gov
Internet: www.//caltrans-opac.ca.gov/publicathtm
STATE OF MARYLAND CODE OF MARYLAND REGULATIONS (COMAR)
Division of State Documents
16 Francis Street
Annapolis, MD 21401
Ph: 410-974-2486x3872,(800) 633-9657 ext. 3872
Fax: 410-974-2546
E-mail:
support@sos.state.md.us
Internet:
www.dsd.state.md.us/comar/
STATE OF VIRGINIA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (VAC)
Virginia Code Commission
General Assembly Building, 2nd Floor
910 Capitol Street
Richmond, Virginia 23219
Ph:
804-786-3591
Fax:
804-692-0625
E-mail: tlong@dls.virginia.gov (Tina Long)
Internet:
http://leg1.state.va.us/000/srr.htm
STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI)
P.O. Box 25
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Fox River Grove, IL 60021

Ph:
847-458-4647
Fax: 847-458-4648
E-mail: Steve@sdi.org
Internet: http://www.sdi.org
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)
c/o Steel Door Institute
30200 Detroit Road
Ph:
440-899-0010
Fax: 440-892-1404
E-mail: info@steeldoor.org
Internet: http://www.steeldoor.org
STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE (SJI)
1173B London Links Drive
Forest, VA 24551
Ph:
434-525-7377
Fax: 434-525-7747
E-mail: sji@steeljoist.org
Internet: http://www.steeljoist.org
STEEL TANK INSTITUTE (STI)
944 Donata Ct.
Lake Zurich, IL 60047
Ph:
847-438-8265
Fax: 847-438-8766
E-mail: lagibson@steeltank.com
Internet: http://www.steeltank.com
STEEL WINDOW INSTITUTE (SWI)
1300 Sumner Avenue
Ph:
216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: swi@steelwindows.com
Internet: http://www.steelwindows.com
TECHNICAL ASSOCIATION OF THE PULP AND PAPER INDUSTRY (TAPPI)
15 Technology Parkway South
Norcross, GA 30092
Ph:
800-322-8686 or 770-446-1400
Fax: 770-446-6947
E-mail: memberconnection@tappi.org
Internet: http://www.tappi.org
TECHNICAL MANUAL (TM)
Commander
USACE Publication Depot
ATTN: CEHEC-IM-PD
2803 52nd Ave.
Hyattsville, MD 20781-1102
Ph:
301-394-0081
Fax: 301-394-0084
E-mail: karl.abt@hq02.usace.army.mil
Internet: http://140.194.76.129/publications/armytm
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

40 24th Street, 6th Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4656
Ph: 412-281-2331
Fax: 412-281-9992
E-mail: info@sspc.org
Internet: http://www.sspc.org
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)
2500 Wilson Blvd,. Suite 300
Arlington, VA 22201
Ph: 703-907-7700
Fax: 703-907-7727
Internet: http://www.tiaonline.org
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING BUREAU (TABB)
601 North Fairfax Street
Suite 250
Alexandria, Va 22314
Ph: 703-299-6546
Fax: 703-683-7615
E-mail: infor@tabbcertified.org
Internet: http://www.tabbcertified.org
TILE COUNCIL OF NORTH AMERICA (TCNA)
100 Clemson Research Boulevard
Anderson, SC 29625
Ph: 864-646-8453
Fax: 864-646-2821
E-mail: literature@tileusa.com
Internet: http://www.tileusa.com
TREE CARE INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TCIA)
136 Harvey Road, Suite 101
Londonderry, NH 03053
Ph: 603-314-5380
Fax: 603-314-5386
Internet: http://www.treecareindustry.org
TRUSS PLATE INSTITUTE (TPI)
218 N. Lee Street, Suite 312
Ph:
703-683-1010
Fax: 866-501-4012
E-mail: info@tpinst.org
Internet: http://www.tpinst.org
TUBULAR EXCHANGER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (TEMA)
25 North Broadway
Tarrytown, NY 10591
Ph: 914-332-0040
Fax: 914-332-1541
E-mail: info@tema.org
Internet: http://www.tema.org
TURFGRASS PRODUCERS INTERNATIONAL (TPI)
2 East Main Street
East Dundee, IL 60118
Ph: 847-649-5555
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Fax: 847-649-5678
E-mail: info@turfgrasssod.org
Internet: http://www.turfgrasssod.org
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
2600 N.W. Lake Road
Camas, WA 98607-8542
Ph: 877-854-3577
Fax: 360-817-6278
E-mail: CEC.us@us.ul.com
Internet: http://www.ul.com/
UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA)
2711 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 1000
Dallas, TX 75234
Ph:
972-243-3902
Fax: 972-243-3907
E-mail: info@uni-bell.org
Internet: http://www.uni-bell.org
U.S. AIR FORCE (USAF)
Air Force Publishing Distribution Center
E-mail: afdpo-ppl@pentagon.af.mil
Internet: http://www.e-publishing.af.mil/
U.S. AIR FORCE TECHNICAL ORDERS (TO)
Air Force Logistics Command, ATTN: D.A.D.
Wright-Patterson Air Force Base, OH 45433
U.S. ARMY (DA)
U.S. Army Publishing Directorate
Ph: 314-592-0910
Fax: 314-592-0923
Internet: http://www.apd.army.mil
U.S. ARMY CENTER FOR HEALTH PROMOTION AND PREVENTIVE MEDICINE
(USACHPPM)
5158 Blackhawk Road
Aberdeen Proving Ground, MD 21010-5403
Ph: 800-222-9698
Fax: 1 (410) 436-7142
E-mail: chppmhhc@AMEDD.ARMY.MIL
Internet: http://chppm-www.apgea.army.mil
Order CRD-C DOCUMENTS from:
Headquarters Points of contact
441 G Street NW
Ph:
202-761-0011
E-mail: hq-publicaffairs@.usace.army.mil
Internet: http://www.wes.army.mil/SL/MTC/handbook.htm
Order Other Documents from:
USACE Publications Depot
Attn: CEHEC-IM-PD
2803 52nd Avenue
Hyattsville, MD 20781-1102
Ph: 301-394-0081
Fax: 301-394-0084
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
E-mail: pubs-army@usace.army.mil
Internet: http://www.usace.army.mil/publications
or
http://www.hnd.usace.army.mil/techinfo/engpubs.htm
U.S. ARMY RESEARCH, DEVELOPMENT, AND ENGINEERING COMMAND (EA)
Attn: Public Affairs/G-5; Bldg. E5101/223
Ph: 410-671-5770
Internet: http://www.rdecom.army.mil
U.S. ARMY ENVIRONMENTAL CENTER (USAEC)
5179 Hoadley Road
Internet: http://aec.army.mil/usaec
Order from:
5301 Shawnee Road
Ph:
703-605-6050 or 1-888-584-8332
Fax: 703-605-6900
U.S. BUREAU OF RECLAMATION (BOR)
Denver Federal Center
P.O. Box 25007
Denver, CO 80225
Ph: 303-445-2072
Fax: 303-445-6303
Internet: http://www.usbr.gov
Order from:
5301 Shawnee Road
Ph:
703-605-6050 or 1-888-584-8332
Fax: 703-605-6900
Internet: http://wwwsee above
U.S. Code
Office of the Law Revision Counsel
Internet: http://uscode.house.gov/lawrevisioncounsel.shtml
U.S. DEFENSE INFORMATION SYSTEMS AGENCY (DISA)
Internet:http://www.disa.mil
U.S. DEFENSE INTELLIGENCE AGENCY (DIA)
Defense Intelligence Analysis Center (DIAC)
MacDill Boulevard and Luke Avenue
Bolling AFB, MD
PH: 202-231-2838
E-mail: sea0131@dia.mil
Internet: http://www.dia.mil
U.S. DEFENSE LOGISTICS AGENCY (DLA)
Andrew T. McNamara Building
8725 John J. Kingman Road
Fort Belvoir, VA 22060-6221
Ph: 1-877-352-2255 or 703-767-5525
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Fax: DSN 427-3316

Internet: http://www.dla.mil
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)
Order AMS Publications from:
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE (AMS)
Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch
801 Summit Crossing Place, Suite C
Gastonia, NC 28054-2193
Ph:
704-810-8871
Fax: 704-852-4189
E-mail: seed.ams@usda.gov
Internet: http://www.ams.usda.gov/lsg/seed.htm
Order Other Publications from:
U.S. Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Service
14th and Independence Avenue, SW, Room 4028-S
Ph:
202-720-2791
Fax: 202-720-2166
Internet: http://www.usda.gov/rus
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (DOC)
1401 Constitution Avenue, NW
Ph: 202-482-2000
Fax: 703-605-6900
E-mail: webmaster@doc.gov
Internet: http://www.commerce.gov/
Order Publications From:
5301 Shawnee Road
Ph:
703-605-6050 or 1-888-584-8332
Fax: 703-605-6900
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
Order DOD Documents from:
Room 3A750-The Pentagon
1400 Defense Pentagon
Ph: 703-571-3343
FAX: 215-697-1462
E-mail: pia@hq.afis.asd.mil
Internet: http://www.dod.gov
Obtain Military Specifications, Standards and Related Publications
from:
Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System
(ASSIST)
Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)
Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)
Building 4/D
700 Robbins Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
Ph:
215-697-6396 - for account/password issues
Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account
registration required
Obtain Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) from:
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Whole Building Design Guide (WBDG)

National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS)
1090 Vermont Avenue NW, Suite 700
Washington, CD 20005
Ph: 202-289-7800
Fax: 202-289-1092
Internet: http://www.wbdg.org/references/docs_refs.php
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)
Order from:
1000 Independence Avenue Southwest
Ph: 202-586-5000
Fax: 202-586-4403
E-mail: The Secretary@hq.doe.gov
Internet: www.eh.doe.gov
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT (HUD)
Order from:
HUD User
P.O. Box 23268
Ph:
800-245-2691 or 202-708-9981
Fax: 202-708-9981
E-mail: helpdesk@Huduser.org
Internet: http://www.huduser.org
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF STATE (SD)
2201 C Street, NW
Ph: 202-647-4000
Internet: http://www.state.gov
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (DOT)
1200 New Jersey Ave. SE
Ph: 202-366-4000
Internet: http://www.dot.gov
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Ariel Rios Building
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W.
Ph:
202-272-0167
for Fax and E-mail see below
Internet: http://www.epa.gov
--- Some EPA documents are available only from:
5301 Shawnee Road
Ph: 703-605-6050 or 1-688-584-8332
Fax: 703-605-6900
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
Order for sale documents from:
Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813

Ph:
202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
Order free documents from:
Federal Aviation Administration
Department of Transportation
800 Independence Avenue, SW
Ph: 1-866-835-5322
Internet: http://www.faa.gov
U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)
445 12th Street SW
Phone:
888-CALL-FCC
Fax:
866-418-0232
Internet: http://www.fcc.gov
E-mail:
fccinfo@fcc.gov
Order Publications From:
U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
Ph:
202-512-1800
Fax: 866-418-0232
E-mail: gpoweb@gpo.gov
Internet:
http://www.fcc.gov
U.S. FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY (FEMA)
500 C Street, SW
Ph: 1-202-646-2500
Internet: http://www.fema.gov
U.S. FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)
FHWA, Office of Safety
1200 New Jersey Ave., SE
Washington, DC 20590Ph:
202-366-0411
Fax: 202-366-2249
Internet: http://www.safety.fhwa.dot.gov
Order from:
U. S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
Ph:
202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
U. S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
2101 L St NW, Suite 500
Fax:
202-828-5110
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
E-mail: info@usgbc.org
Internet: http://www.usgbc.org
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
General Services Administration
1800 F Street, NW
Ph: 202-501-0800
Internet: www.GSA.gov
Obtain documents from:
Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System
(ASSIST)
Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)
Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)
Building 4/D
700 Robbins Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
Ph:
215-697-6396 - for account/password issues
Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account
registration required
8601 Adelphi Road
College Park, MD 20740-6001
Ph: 866-272-6272
Fax: 301-837-0483
Internet: http://www.archives.gov
Order documents from:
U.S.Government Printing Office (GPO)
Ph:
202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
U.S. NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND (NAVFAC)
1322 Patterson Ave. SE, Suite 1000
Washington Navy Yard, DC 20374
Ph:
757-322-4200
Fax: 757-322-4416
Internet: http://www.navfac.navy.mil
U.S. NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING SERVICE CENTER (NFESC)
401 Industry Road, Suite 500
Louisville, KY 40208
Ph: 502-638-4400
Fax: 502-638-4300
E-mail: contact@nstcenter.com
Internet: http://www.nfesc.navy.mil
U.S. NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COMMAND (NAVSEA)
Commander Naval Sea Systems Command
1333 Isaac Hull Ave., SE
Washington Navy Yard, DC 20376-1080
Ph:
202-781-0000
E-mail: navsea_publicqueries@navy.mil
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
WASHINGTON STATE ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (WAC)

Kyle Thiessen, Code Reviser
P.O. Box 40581
Olympia, WA 98504-0466
Ph:
360-782-6777
Fax:
360-786-1529
E-mail: Via internet address and prompt at "Title 1: Code Reviser"
Internet: http://apps.leg.wa.gov/wac/
WATER ENVIRONMENT FEDERATION (WEF)
601 Wythe Street
Ph:
703-684-2400x7551 (Margaret Richards) or x7211 (Carolyn Chew
Fax: 703-684-2492
E-mail: mrichards@wef.org(Margaret Richards) or subs@wef.org
(Carolyn Chew)
Internet: http://www.wef.org
WATER QUALITY ASSOCIATION (WQA)
4151 Naperville Road
Lisle, IL 60532-3696
Ph:
630-505-0160
Fax: 630-505-9637
E-mail: szrout@wqa.org
Internet: http://www.wqa.org
WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU (WCLIB)
P.O. Box 23145
Tigard, OR 97281
Ph:
503-639-0651
Fax: 503-684-8928
E-mail: info@wclib.org
Internet: http://www.wclib.org
WESTERN WOOD PRESERVERS INSTITUTE (WWPI)
7017 N.E. Highway 99 Suite 108
Vancouver, WA 98665
Ph:
360-693-9958
Fax: 360-693-9967
E-mail: info@wwpinstitute.org
Internet: http://www.wwpinstitute.org
WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)
Yeon Building
522 SW 5th Avenue
Suite 500
Portland, OR 97204-2122
Ph:
503-224-3930
Fax: 503-224-3934
E-mail: info@wwpa.org
Internet: http://www.wwpa.org
WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (WDMA)
401 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 2200
Chicago, IL 60611
Ph:
312-321-6802
Fax: 312-673-6922
E-mail: wdma@wdma.com
SECTION 01 42 00
Internet:
W912HN-09-X-1813
http://www.wdma.com
WIRE ROPE TECHNICAL BOARD (WRTB)

801 North Fairfax Street, Suite 211
Ph:
703-299-8550
Fax: 703-299-9253
E-mail: wrtb@usa.net
Internet: www.domesticwirerope.org/wrtb
WOOD MOULDING AND MILLWORK PRODUCERS ASSOCIATION (WMMPA)
507 First Street
Woodland, CA 95695
Ph:
530-661-9591 or 800-550-7889
Fax: 530-661-9586
E-mail: info@wmmpa.com
Internet: http://www.wmmpa.com
WOOLMARK BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE (WBI)
The Woolmark Company
1230 Avenue of the Americas, 7th Fl.
New York, NY 10020
Ph:
646-756-2535
Internet: www.woolmark.org
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not used
SECTION 01 42 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10A

*1 QUALITY CONTROL
02/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

ASTM D3740
(2011) Minimum Requirements for Agencies

Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection
of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering
Design and Construction
ASTM E329
(2011b) Standard Specification for

Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Materials Used in
Construction
1.2
PAYMENT
Separate payment will not be made for providing and maintaining an

effective Quality Control program, and all associated costs will be
included in the applicable Bid Schedule unit or lump-sum prices.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
Establish and maintain an effective quality control (QC) system in

compliance with the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction."
QC consist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an
end product which complies with the contract requirements. Cover all
construction operations, both onsite and offsite, and be keyed to the
proposed construction sequence. The project superintendent will be held
responsible for the quality of work and is subject to removal by the
Contracting Officer for non-compliance with the quality requirements
specified in the contract. In this context the highest level manager
responsible for the overall construction activities at the site, including
quality and production is the project superintendent. The project
superintendent must maintain a physical presence at the site at all times
and is responsible for all construction and related activities at the site,
except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
3.2
QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
Submit no later than 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed, the

SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan proposed to implement the

requirements of the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction."
The Government will consider an interim plan for the first 30 days of
operation. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance
of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the
particular feature of work to be started. Work outside of the accepted
interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a CQC Plan
or another interim plan containing the additional work.
3.2.1
Content of the CQC Plan
Include, as a minimum, the following to cover all construction operations,

both onsite and offsite, including work by subcontractors, fabricators,
suppliers, and purchasing agents:
a.
A description of the quality control organization, including a chart

showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff will
implement the three phase control system for all aspects of the work
specified. Include a CQC System Manager who reports to the project
superintendent.
b.
The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities,

and authorities of each person assigned a CQC function.
c.
A copy of the letter to the CQC System Manager signed by an authorized

official of the firm which describes the responsibilities and delegates
sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the CQC
System Manager, including authority to stop work which is not in
compliance with the contract. Letters of direction to all other
various quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities,
and responsibilities will be issued by the CQC System Manager. Copies
of these letters must be furnished to the Government.
d.
Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing

submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite fabricators,
suppliers, and purchasing agents. These procedures must be in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
e.
Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each

specific test to include the test name, specification paragraph
requiring test, feature of work to be tested, test frequency, and
person responsible for each test. (Laboratory facilities approved by
the Contracting Officer must be used.)
f.
Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control

phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests including
documentation.
g.
Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from identification

through acceptable corrective action. Establish verification
procedures that identified deficiencies have been corrected.
h.
Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats.
i.
A list of the definable features of work. A definable feature of work

is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate
control requirements, and may be identified by different trades or
disciplines, or it may be work by the same trade in a different
environment. Although each section of the specifications may generally
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
be considered as a definable feature of work, there are frequently more

than one definable features under a particular section. This list will
be agreed upon during the coordination meeting.
3.2.2
Acceptance of Plan
Acceptance of the Contractor's plan is required prior to the start of

construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on
satisfactory performance during the construction. The Government reserves
the right to require the Contractor to make changes in his CQC Plan and
operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the
quality specified.
3.2.3
Notification of Changes
After acceptance of the CQC Plan, notify the Contracting Officer in writing
of any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by the
3.3
COORDINATION MEETING
After the Preconstruction Conference, before start of construction, and

prior to acceptance by the Government of the CQC Plan, meet with the
Contracting Officer or Authorized Representative and discuss the
Contractor's quality control system. Submit the CQC Plan a minimum of 30
calendar days prior to the Coordination Meeting. During the meeting, a
mutual understanding of the system details must be developed, including the
forms for recording the CQC operations, control activities, testing,
administration of the system for both onsite and offsite work, and the
interrelationship of Contractor's Management and control with the
Government's Quality Assurance. Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by
the Government, signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer
and will become a part of the contract file. There may be occasions when
subsequent conferences will be called by either party to reconfirm mutual
understandings and/or address deficiencies in the CQC system or procedures
which may require corrective action by the Contractor.
3.4
3.4.1
QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION

Personnel Requirements
The requirements for the CQC organization are a CQC System Manager and
sufficient number of additional qualified personnel to ensure safety and
contract compliance. The Safety and Health Manager must receive direction
and authority from the CQC System Manager and serve as a member of the CQC
staff. Personnel identified in the technical provisions as requiring
specialized skills to assure the required work is being performed properly
will also be included as part of the CQC organization. The Contractor's
CQC staff must maintain a presence at the site at all times during progress
of the work and have complete authority and responsibility to take any
action necessary to ensure contract compliance. The CQC staff will be
subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. Provide adequate office
space, filing systems and other resources as necessary to maintain an
effective and fully functional CQC organization. Promptly complete and
furnish all letters, material submittals, shop drawing submittals,
schedules and all other project documentation to the CQC organization. The
CQC organization shall be responsible to maintain these documents and
records at the site at all times, except as otherwise acceptable to the
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
3.4.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
CQC System Manager
Identify as CQC System Manager an individual within the onsite work

organization who is responsible for overall management of CQC and have the
authority to act in all CQC matters for the Contractor. The CQC System
Manager must be a graduate engineer, graduate architect, or a graduate of
construction management, with a minimum of 2 years construction experience
on construction similar to this contract. This CQC System Manager must be
on the site at all times during construction and be employed by the prime
Contractor. The CQC System Manager must be assigned as System Manager but
may have duties as project superintendent in addition to quality control.
Identify in the plan an alternate to serve in the event of the CQC System
Manager's absence. The requirements for the alternate are the same as the
CQC System Manager.
3.4.3
CQC Personnel
In addition to CQC personnel specified elsewhere in the contract, provide

as part of the CQC organization specialized personnel to assist the CQC
System Manager for the following areas: electrical, civil, structural,
environmental, architectural, materials technician, submittals clerk, .
These individuals must be responsible to the CQC System Manager; be
physically present at the construction site during work on their areas of
responsibility; have the necessary education and/or experience in
accordance with the experience matrix listed herein. These individuals may
perform other duties but must be allowed sufficient time to perform their
assigned quality control duties as described in the Quality Control Plan.
A single person may cover more than one area provided that they are
qualified to perform QC activities in each designated and that workload
allows.
Experience Matrix
Area
Qualifications
Civil
Graduate Civil Engineer or Construction Manager

with 2 years experience in the type of work
being performed on this project or technician
with 5 yrs related experience
Electrical
Graduate Electrical Engineer with 2 yrs related

experience or person 5 years of experience
supervising electrical features of work in the
field with a construction company
Structural
Graduate Civil Engineer (with Structural Track

or Focus) or Construction Manager with 2 yrs
experience or person 5 years of experience
supervising structural features of work in the
field with a construction company
Architectural
Graduate Architect with 2 yrs experience or

person with 5 yrs related experience
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
Experience Matrix
Area
Qualifications
Environmental
Graduate Environmental Engineer with 3 yrs

experience
Submittals
Submittal Clerk with 1 yr experience
Concrete, Pavements and

Soils
Materials Technician with 2 yrs experience for

the appropriate area
Testing, Adjusting and

Specialist must be a member of AABC or an
Balancing (TAB) Personnel experienced technician of the firm certified by
the NEBB
3.4.4
Additional Requirement
In addition to the above experience and education requirements the CQC

System Manager must have completed the course entitled "Construction
Quality Management For Contractors".
3.4.5
Organizational Changes
Maintain the CQC staff at full strength at all times. When it is necessary
to make changes to the CQC staff, revise the CQC Plan to reflect the
changes and submit the changes to the Contracting Officer for acceptance.
3.5
SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES
Submittals, if needed, must comply with the requirements in Section 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. The CQC organization is responsible for certifying
that all submittals and deliverables are in compliance with the contract
requirements.
3.6
CONTROL
Contractor Quality Control is the means by which the Contractor ensures

that the construction, to include that of subcontractors and suppliers,
complies with the requirements of the contract. At least three phases of
control must be conducted by the CQC System Manager for each definable
feature of the construction work as follows:
3.6.1
Preparatory Phase
This phase is performed prior to beginning work on each definable feature of

work, after all required plans/documents/materials are approved/accepted, and
after copies are at the work site. This phase includes:
a.
A review of each paragraph of applicable specifications, reference

codes, and standards. Make available during the preparatory inspection
a copy of those sections of referenced codes and standards applicable
to that portion of the work to be accomplished in the field. Maintain
and make available in the field for use by Government personnel until
final acceptance of the work.
b.
Review of the contract drawings.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
c.
Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested,
submitted, and approved.
d.
Review of provisions that have been made to provide required control

inspection and testing.
e.
Examination of the work area to assure that all required preliminary

work has been completed and is in compliance with the contract.
f.
Examination of required materials, equipment, and sample work to assure

that they are on hand, conform to approved shop drawings or submitted
data, and are properly stored.
g.
Review of the appropriate activity hazard analysis to assure safety

requirements are met.
h.
Discussion of procedures for controlling quality of the work including

repetitive deficiencies. Document construction tolerances and
workmanship standards for that feature of work.
i.
Check to ensure that the portion of the plan for the work to be
performed has been accepted by the Contracting Officer.
j.
Discussion of the initial control phase.
k.
The Government must be notified at least 24 hours in advance of

beginning the preparatory control phase. Include a meeting conducted
by the CQC System Manager and attended by the superintendent, other CQC
personnel (as applicable), and the foreman responsible for the
definable feature. Document the results of the preparatory phase
actions by separate minutes prepared by the CQC System Manager and
attach to the daily CQC report. Instruct applicable workers as to the
acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet contract
specifications.
3.6.2
Initial Phase
This phase is accomplished at the beginning of a definable feature of

work. Accomplish the following:
a.
Check work to ensure that it is in full compliance with contract

requirements. Review minutes of the preparatory meeting.
b.
Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full contract compliance.

required control inspection and testing.
c.
Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum

acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample panels
as appropriate.
d.
Resolve all differences.
e.
Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the safety

plan and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis with
each worker.
f.
The Government must be notified at least 24 hours in advance of

beginning the initial phase. Prepare separate minutes of this phase by
the CQC System Manager and attach to the daily CQC report. Indicate
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
Verify
W912HN-09-X-1813
the exact location of initial phase for future reference and comparison
with follow-up phases.
g.
3.6.3
The initial phase should be repeated for each new crew to work onsite,
or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met.
Follow-up Phase
Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control

testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements,
until completion of the particular feature of work. Record the checks in
the CQC documentation. Conduct final follow-up checks and correct all
deficiencies prior to the start of additional features of work which may be
affected by the deficient work. Do not build upon nor conceal
non-conforming work.
3.6.4
Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases
Conduct additional preparatory and initial phases on the same definable

features of work if: the quality of on-going work is unacceptable; if
there are changes in the applicable CQC staff, onsite production
supervision or work crew; if work on a definable feature is resumed after a
substantial period of inactivity; or if other problems develop.
3.7
3.7.1
TESTS
Testing Procedure
Perform specified or required tests to verify that control measures are

adequate to provide a product which conforms to contract requirements.
Upon request, furnish to the Government duplicate samples of test specimens
for possible testing by the Government. Testing includes operation and/or
acceptance tests when specified. Procure the services of a Corps of
Engineers approved testing laboratory or establish an approved testing
laboratory at the project site. Perform the following activities and
record and provide the following data:
a.
Verify that testing procedures comply with contract requirements.
b.
Verify that facilities and testing equipment are available and comply
with testing standards.
c.
Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards.
d.
Verify that recording forms and test identification control number

system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have been
prepared.
e.
Record results of all tests taken, both passing and failing on the CQC
report for the date taken. Specification paragraph reference, location
where tests were taken, and the sequential control number identifying
the test. If approved by the Contracting Officer, actual test reports
may be submitted later with a reference to the test number and date
taken. Provide an information copy of tests performed by an offsite or
commercial test facility directly to the Contracting Officer. Failure
to submit timely test reports as stated may result in nonpayment for
related work performed and disapproval of the test facility for this
contract.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
3.7.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Testing Laboratories
3.7.2.1
Capability Check
The Government reserves the right to check laboratory equipment in the

proposed laboratory for compliance with the standards set forth in the
contract specifications and to check the laboratory technician's testing
procedures and techniques. Laboratories utilized for testing soils,
concrete, asphalt, and steel must meet criteria detailed in ASTM D3740 and
ASTM E329.
3.7.2.2
Capability Recheck
If the selected laboratory fails the capability check, the Contractor will
be assessed a charge of $500 to reimburse the Government for each
succeeding recheck of the laboratory or the checking of a subsequently
selected laboratory. Such costs will be deducted from the contract amount
due the Contractor.
3.7.3
Onsite Laboratory
The Government reserves the right to utilize the Contractor's control

testing laboratory and equipment to make assurance tests, and to check the
Contractor's testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no
additional cost to the Government.
3.8
3.8.1
COMPLETION INSPECTION
Punch-Out Inspection
Conduct an inspection of the work by the CQC Manager near the end of the
work, or any increment of the work established by a time stated in the
SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Clause, "Commencement, Prosecution, and
Completion of Work", or by the specifications. Prepare and include in the
CQC documentation a punch list of items which do not conform to the
approved drawings and specifications, as required by paragraph
DOCUMENTATION. Include within the list of deficiencies the estimated date
by which the deficiencies will be corrected. Make a second inspection the
CQC System Manager or staff to ascertain that all deficiencies have been
corrected. Once this is accomplished, notify the Government that the
facility is ready for the Government Pre-Final inspection.
3.8.2
Pre-Final Inspection
The Government will perform the pre-final inspection to verify that the
facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government Pre-Final
Punch List may be developed as a result of this inspection. Ensure that
all items on this list have been corrected before notifying the Government,
so that a Final inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Correct any
items noted on the Pre-Final inspection in a timely manner. These
inspections and any deficiency corrections required by this paragraph must
be accomplished within the time slated for completion of the entire work or
any particular increment of the work if the project is divided into
increments by separate completion dates.
3.8.3
Final Acceptance Inspection
The Contractor's Quality Control Inspection personnel, plus the

superintendent or other primary management person, and the Contracting
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
Officer's Representative must be in attendance at the final acceptance

inspection. Additional Government personnel including, but not limited to,
those from Base/Post Civil Facility Engineer user groups, and major
commands may also be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will
be formally scheduled by the Contracting Officer based upon results of the
Pre-Final inspection. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 days
prior to the final acceptance inspection and include the Contractor's
assurance that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor
as being unacceptable, along with all remaining work performed under the
contract, will be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the
final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all
contract work acceptably complete for this inspection will be cause for the
Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional
inspection cost in accordance with the contract clause titled "Inspection
of Construction".
3.9
DOCUMENTATION
Maintain current records providing factual evidence that required quality

control activities and/or tests have been performed. Include in these
records the work of subcontractors and suppliers on an acceptable form that
includes, as a minimum, the following information:
a.
Contractor/subcontractor and their area of responsibility.
b.
Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for repair.
c.
Work performed each day, giving location, description, and by whom.

When Network Analysis (NAS) is used, identify each phase of work
performed each day by NAS activity number.
d.
Test and/or control activities performed with results and references to

specifications/drawings requirements. Identify the control phase
(Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List of deficiencies noted, along
with corrective action.
e.
Quantity of materials received at the site with statement as to

acceptability, storage, and reference to specifications/drawings
requirements.
f.
Submittals and deliverables reviewed, with contract reference, by whom,

and action taken.
g.
Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken.
h.
Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and

instructions or corrective actions.
i.
Instructions given/received and conflicts in plans and/or

specifications.
j.
Contractor's verification statement.
Indicate a description of trades working on the project; the number of

personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays
encountered. Cover both conforming and deficient features and include a
statement that equipment and materials incorporated in the work and
workmanship comply with the contract. Furnish the original and one copy of
these records in report form to the Government daily within 24 hours after
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
the date covered by the report, except that reports need not be submitted
for days on which no work is performed. As a minimum, prepare and submit
one report for every 7 days of no work and on the last day of a no work
period. All calendar days must be accounted for throughout the life of the
contract. The first report following a day of no work will be for that day
only. Reports must be signed and dated by the CQC System Manager. Include
copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by all subordinate
quality control personnel within the CQC System Manager Report.
3.10
SAMPLE FORMS
Sample forms enclosed at the end of this section.

3.11
NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected

noncompliance with the foregoing requirements. Take immediate corrective
action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the
Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for the purpose of
notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the
Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work
until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time
lost due to such stop orders will be made the subject of claim for
extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10A

*1 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS)
02/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Contract Administration
The Government will use the Resident Management System for Windows (RMS) to
assist in its monitoring and administration of this contract. The
Contractor must use the Government-furnished Construction Contractor Module
of RMS, referred to as QCS, to record, maintain, and submit various
information throughout the contract period. The Contractor module, user
manuals, updates, and training information can be downloaded from the RMS
web site (www.rmssupport.com). This joint Government-Contractor use of RMS
and QCS will facilitate electronic exchange of information and overall
management of the contract. QCS provides the means for the Contractor to
input, track, and electronically share information with the Government in
the following areas:
Administration
Finances
Quality Control
Submittal Monitoring
Scheduling
Import/Export of Data
1.1.1
Correspondence and Electronic Communications
For ease and speed of communications, both Government and Contractor will,
to the maximum extent feasible, exchange correspondence and other documents
in electronic format. Correspondence, pay requests and other documents
comprising the official contract record will also be provided in paper
format, with signatures and dates where necessary. Paper documents will
govern, in the event of discrepancy with the electronic version.
1.1.2
Other Factors
Particular attention is directed to Contract Clause, "Schedules for

Construction Contracts", Contract Clause, "Payments", Section 01 32 01.00 10
PROJECT SCHEDULE, Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and Section
01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL, which have a direct relationship to the
reporting to be accomplished through QCS. Also, there is no separate
payment for establishing and maintaining the QCS database; all costs
associated therewith will be included in the contract pricing for the work.
1.2
QCS SOFTWARE
QCS is a Windows-based program that can be run on a stand-alone personal

computer or on a network. The Government will make available the QCS
software to the Contractor after award of the construction contract. Prior
to the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor will be responsible to
download, install and use the latest version of the QCS software from the
Government's RMS Internet Website. Upon specific justification and request
by the Contractor, the Government can provide QCS on CD-ROM. Any program
updates of QCS will be made available to the Contractor via the Government
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
RMS Website as they become available.

1.3
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The following is the minimum system configuration that the Contractor must
have to run QCS:
QCS and Quality Assurance System (QAS) System
Hardware
IBM-compatible PC with 1000 MHz Pentium or higher processor
256+ MB RAM for workstation / 512+ MB RAM for server
1 GB hard drive disk space for sole use by the QCS system
Compact Disk (CD) Reader 8x speed or higher
SVGA or higher resolution monitor (1024x768, 256 colors)
Mouse or other pointing device
Windows compatible printer. (Laser printer must have 4 MB+ of RAM)
Connection to the Internet, minimum 56k BPS
Software
MS Windows 2000, XP, Vista or Windows 7
QAS-Word Processing software: MS Word 2000 or newer
Latest version of: Netscape Navigator, Microsoft Internet
Explorer, or other browser that supports HTML 4.0 or higher
Electronic mail (E-mail) MAPI compatible
Virus protection software that is regularly upgraded with all
issued manufacturer's updates
1.4
1.4.1
RELATED INFORMATION
QCS User Guide
After contract award, download instructions for the installation and use of
QCS from the Government RMS Internet Website. In case of justifiable
difficulties, the Government will provide the Contractor with a CD-ROM
containing these instructions.
1.4.2
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Training
The use of QCS will be discussed with the Contractor's QC System Manager
during the mandatory CQC Training class.
1.5
CONTRACT DATABASE
Prior to the pre-construction conference, the Government will provide the

Contractor with basic contract award data to use for QCS. The Government
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
will provide data updates to the Contractor as needed, generally by using

the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS import/export function.
These updates will generally consist of submittal reviews, correspondence
status, QA comments, and other administrative and QA data.
1.6
DATABASE MAINTENANCE
Establish, maintain, and update data in the QCS database throughout the
duration of the contract at the Contractor's site office. Submit data
updates to the Government (e.g., daily reports, submittals, RFI's, schedule
updates, payment requests, etc.) using the Government's SFTP repository
built into QCS export function. If permitted by the Contracting Officer,
e-mail or CD-ROM may be used instead of E-mail (see Paragraph DATA
SUBMISSION VIA CD-ROM). The QCS database typically includes current data
on the following items:
1.6.1
1.6.1.1
Administration
Contractor Information
Contain within the database the Contractor's name, address, telephone

numbers, management staff, and other required items. Within 14 calendar
days of receipt of QCS software from the Government, deliver Contractor
administrative data in electronic format.
1.6.1.2
Subcontractor Information
Contain within the database the name, trade, address, phone numbers, and
other required information for all subcontractors. A subcontractor must be
listed separately for each trade to be performed. Assign each
subcontractor/trade a unique Responsibility Code, provided in QCS. Within
14 calendar days of receipt of QCS software from the Government, deliver
subcontractor administrative data in electronic format.
1.6.1.3
Correspondence
Identify all Contractor correspondence to the Government with a serial

number. Prefix correspondence initiated by the Contractor's site office
with "S". Prefix letters initiated by the Contractor's home (main) office
with "H". Letters must be numbered starting from 0001. (e.g., H-0001 or
S-0001). The Government's letters to the Contractor will be prefixed with
"C".
1.6.1.4
Equipment
Contain within the Contractor's QCS database a current list of equipment

planned for use or being used on the jobsite, including the most recent and
planned equipment inspection dates.
1.6.1.5
Management Reporting
QCS includes a number of reports that Contractor management can use to

track the status of the project. The value of these reports is reflective
of the quality of the data input, and is maintained in the various sections
of QCS. Among these reports are: Progress Payment Request worksheet,
QA/QC comments, Submittal Register Status, Three-Phase Control checklists.
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10
1.6.1.6
W912HN-09-X-1813
Request For Information (RFI)
Exchange all Requests For Information (RFI) using the Built-in RFI
generator and tracker in QCS.
1.6.2
1.6.2.1
Finances
Pay Activity Data
Include within the QCS database a list of pay activities that the
Contractor must develop in conjunction with the construction schedule. The
sum of all pay activities must be equal to the total contract amount,
including modifications. Group pay activities Contract Line Item Number
(CLIN); the sum of the activities must equal the amount of each CLIN. The
total of all CLINs equals the Contract Amount.
1.6.2.2
Payment Requests
Prepare all progress payment requests using QCS. Complete the payment
request worksheet, prompt payment certification, and payment invoice in
QCS. Update the work completed under the contract, measured as percent or
as specific quantities, at least monthly. After the update, generate a
payment request report using QCS. Submit the payment request, prompt
payment certification, and payment invoice with supporting data using the
Government's SFTP repository built into QCS export function. If permitted
by the Contracting Officer, e-mail or a CD-ROM may be used. A signed paper
copy of the approved payment request is also required, which will govern in
the event of discrepancy with the electronic version.
1.6.3
Quality Control (QC)
QCS provides a means to track implementation of the 3-phase QC Control

System, prepare daily reports, identify and track deficiencies, document
progress of work, and support other Contractor QC requirements. Maintain
this data on a daily basis. Entered data will automatically output to the
QCS generated daily report. Provide the Government a Contractor Quality
Control (CQC) Plan within the time required in Section 01 45 00.00 10
QUALITY CONTROL. Within seven calendar days of Government acceptance,
submit a QCS update reflecting the information contained in the accepted
CQC Plan: schedule, pay activities, features of work, submittal register,
QC requirements, and equipment list.
1.6.3.1
Daily Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Reports.
QCS includes the means to produce the Daily CQC Report. The Contractor may
use other formats to record basic QC data. However, the Daily CQC Report
generated by QCS must be the Contractor's official report. Summarize data
from any supplemental reports by the Contractor and consolidate onto the
QCS-generated Daily CQC Report. Submit daily CQC Reports as required by
Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL. Electronically submit reports to
the Government within 24 hours after the date covered by the report. Also
provide the Government a signed, printed copy of the daily CQC report.
1.6.3.2
Deficiency Tracking.
Use QCS to track deficiencies. Deficiencies identified by the Contractor

will be numerically tracked using QC punch list items. Maintain a current
log of its QC punch list items in the QCS database. The Government will
log the deficiencies it has identified using its QA punch list items. The
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
Government's QA punch list items will be included in its export file to the
Contractor. Regularly update the correction status of both QC and QA punch
list items.
1.6.3.3
QC Requirements
Develop and maintain a complete list of QC testing and required structural

and life safety special inspections required by the International Code
Council (ICC), transferred and installed property, and user training
requirements in QCS. Update all data on these QC requirements as work
progresses, and promptly provide this information to the Government via QCS.
1.6.3.4
Three-Phase Control Meetings
Maintain scheduled and actual dates and times of preparatory and initial
control meetings in QCS.
1.6.3.5
Labor and Equipment Hours
Log labor and equipment exposure hours on a daily basis.

rolled up into a monthly exposure report.
1.6.3.6
This data will be
Accident/Safety Reporting
The Government will issue safety comments, directions, or guidance whenever

safety deficiencies are observed. The Government's safety comments will be
included in its export file to the Contractor. Regularly update the
correction status of the safety comments. In addition, utilize QCS to
advise the Government of any accidents occurring on the jobsite. This
brief supplemental entry is not to be considered as a substitute for
completion of mandatory reports, e.g., ENG Form 3394 and OSHA Form 300.
1.6.3.7
Features of Work
Include a complete list of the features of work in the QCS database. A

feature of work may be associated with multiple pay activities. However,
each pay activity (see subparagraph "Pay Activity Data" of paragraph
"Finances") will only be linked to a single feature of work.
1.6.3.8
Hazard Analysis
Use QCS to develop a hazard analysis for each feature of work included in
the CQC Plan. Address any hazards, or potential hazards, that may be
associated with the work.
1.6.4
Submittal Management
The Government will provide the initial submittal register in electronic

format. Thereafter, maintain a complete list of all submittals, including
completion of all data columns. Dates on which submittals are received and
returned by the Government will be included in its export file to the
Contractor. Use QCS to track and transmit all submittals. ENG Form 4025,
submittal transmittal form, and the submittal register update must be
produced using QCS. QCS and RMS will be used to update, store and exchange
submittal registers and transmittals, but will not be used for storage of
actual submittals.
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10
1.6.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
Schedule
Develop a construction schedule consisting of pay activities, in accordance

with Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE. Input and maintain in the
QCS database this schedule either manually or by using the Standard Data
Exchange Format (SDEF) (see Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE).
Include with each pay request the updated schedule.
1.6.6
Import/Export of Data
QCS includes the ability to export Contractor data to the Government and to
import submittal register and other Government-provided data from RMS, and
schedule data using SDEF.
1.7
IMPLEMENTATION
Contractor use of QCS as described in the preceding paragraphs is

mandatory. Ensure that sufficient resources are available to maintain its
QCS database, and to provide the Government with regular database updates.
QCS shall be an integral part of the Contractor's management of quality
control.
1.8
DATA SUBMISSION VIA CD-ROM
The Government-preferred method for Contractor's submission of QCS data is

by using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS export function.
Other data should be submitted using E-mail with file attachment(s). For
locations where this is not feasible, the Contracting Officer may permit
use of CD-ROM for data transfer. Export data onto CDs using the QCS
built-in export function. If used, submit CD-ROMs in accordance with the
following:
1.8.1
File Medium
Submit in English required data on CD-ROM conforming to industry standards

used in the United States.
1.8.2
CD-ROM Labels
Affix a permanent exterior label to each CD-ROM submitted. Indicate on the

label in English, the QCS file name, full contract number, contract name,
project location, data date, name and telephone number of person
responsible for the data.
1.8.3
File Names
The files will be automatically named by the QCS software. The naming
convention established by the QCS software must not be altered.
1.9
MONTHLY COORDINATION MEETING
Update the QCS database each workday. At least monthly, generate and
submit an export file to the Government with schedule update and progress
payment request. As required in Contract Clause "Payments", at least one
week prior to submittal, meet with the Government representative to review
the planned progress payment data submission for errors and omissions.
Make all required corrections prior to Government acceptance of the export
file and progress payment request. Payment requests accompanied by
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
incomplete or incorrect data submittals will be returned. The Government

will not process progress payments until an acceptable QCS export file is
received.
1.10
NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected

noncompliance with the requirements of this specification. Take immediate
corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when
delivered to the Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for
the purpose of notification.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 50 00A
*1 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
08/09
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
Requirements of this Section apply to, and are a component of, each section
of the specifications.
1.2
REFERENCES

NFPA 241
(2009) Standard for Safeguarding

Construction,Alteration, and Demolition
Operations
NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2;

TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical
Code
U.S. FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)
MUTCD
1.3
(2009) Manual of Uniform Traffic Control

Devices
SUBMITTALS

that will review the submittal for the Government. Submitted the following
in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Construction site plan; G, RO
Traffic control plan; G, RO
1.4
CONSTRUCTION SITE PLAN
Prior to the start of work, submit a site plan showing the locations and
dimensions of temporary facilities (including layouts and details,
equipment and material storage area (onsite and offsite), and access and
haul routes, avenues of ingress/egress to the fenced area and details of
the fence installation. Identify any areas which may have to be graveled
to prevent the tracking of mud. Indicate if the use of a supplemental or
other staging area is desired. Show locations of safety and construction
fences, site trailers, construction entrances, trash dumpsters, temporary
sanitary facilities, and worker parking areas.
SECTION 01 50 00
PART 2
W912HN-09-X-1813
2.1
PRODUCTS
2.1.1
TEMPORARY SIGNAGE
Bulletin Board
Immediately upon beginning of work, provide a weatherproof glass-covered

bulletin board not less than 36 by 48 inches in size for displaying the
Equal Employment Opportunity poster, a copy of the wage decision contained
in the contract, Wage Rate Information poster, and other information
approved by the Contracting Officer. Locate the bulletin board at the
project site in a conspicuous place easily accessible to all employees, as
approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.1.2
Project and Safety Signs
Construct sign with a face sheet of 4 by 8-foot exterior grade plywood, 1/2
inch thick, mounted on a substantial frame of treated lumber. Provide one
coat of lead-free alkyd primer paint and two coats of exterior type white
enamel to frame and sign. Erect signs within 15 days after receipt of the
notice to proceed. Correct the data required by the safety sign daily,
with light colored metallic or non-metallic numerals.
2.2
2.2.1
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

Haul Roads
At contractors expense construct access and haul roads necessary for proper
prosecution of the work under this contract. Construct with suitable
grades and widths; sharp curves, blind corners, and dangerous cross traffic
are be avoided. Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and
distinctive markings for the safe movement of traffic. The method of dust
control, although optional, must be adequate to ensure safe operation at
all times. Location, grade, width, and alignment of construction and
hauling roads are subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Lighting
must be adequate to assure full and clear visibility for full width of haul
road and work areas during any night work operations.
2.2.2
Temporary Wiring
Provide temporary wiring in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 70, Article
305-6(b), Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program. Include frequent
inspection of all equipment and apparatus.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EMPLOYEE PARKING
Contractor employees will park privately owned vehicles in an area

designated by the Contracting Officer. This area will be within reasonable
walking distance of the construction site. Contractor employee parking
must not interfere with existing and established parking requirements of
the government installation.
SECTION 01 50 00
3.2
3.2.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES

Temporary Utilities
Provide temporary utilities required for construction. Materials may be

new or used, must be adequate for the required usage, not create unsafe
conditions, and not violate applicable codes and standards.
3.2.2
Payment for Utility Services
a.
The Government will make all reasonably required utilities available to

the Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the
contract. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the amount of
each utility service consumed will be charged to or paid for by the
Contractor at prevailing rates charged to the Government or, where the
utility is produced by the Government, at reasonable rates determined
by the Contracting Officer. Carefully conserve any utilities furnished
without charge.
b.
The point at which the Government will deliver such utilities. Pay all
costs incurred in connecting, converting, and transferring the
utilities to the work. Make connections, including providing meters;
and providing transformers; and make disconnections.
3.2.3
Meters and Temporary Connections
At the Contractors expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting

Officer, provide and maintain necessary temporary connections, distribution
lines, and meter bases (Government will provide meters) required to measure
the amount of each utility used for the purpose of determining charges.
Notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 5 working days before final
electrical connection is desired so that a utilities contract can be
established. The Government will provide a meter and make the final hot
connection after inspection and approval of the Contractor's temporary
wiring installation. The Contractor will not make the final electrical
connection.
3.2.4
Advance Deposit
An advance deposit for utilities consisting of an estimated month's usage

or a minimum of $50.00 will be required. The last monthly bills for the
fiscal year will normally be offset by the deposit and adjustments will be
billed or returned as appropriate. Services to be rendered for the next
fiscal year, beginning 1 October, will require a new deposit. Notification
of the due date for this deposit will be mailed to the Contractor prior to
the end of the current fiscal year.
3.2.5
Final Meter Reading
Before completion of the work and final acceptance of the work by the
Government, notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 5 working days
before termination is desired. The Government will take a final meter
reading, disconnect service, and remove the meters. Then remove all the
temporary distribution lines, meter bases, and associated paraphernalia.
Pay all outstanding utility bills before final acceptance of the work by
the Government.
SECTION 01 50 00
3.2.6
W912HN-09-X-1813
Sanitation
a. Provide and maintain within the construction area minimum
field-type sanitary facilities approved by the Contracting Officer and
periodically empty wastes into a municipal, district, or station
sanitary sewage system, or remove waste to a commercial facility.
Obtain approval from the system owner prior to discharge into any
municipal, district, or commercial sanitary sewer system. Any
penalties and / or fines associated with improper discharge will be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Coordinate with the Contracting
Officer and follow station regulations and procedures when discharging
into the station sanitary sewer system. Maintain these conveniences at
all times without nuisance. Include provisions for pest control and
elimination of odors. Government toilet facilities will not be
available to Contractor's personnel.
3.2.7
Telephone
Make arrangements and pay all costs for telephone facilities desired.
3.2.8
Fire Protection
Provide temporary fire protection equipment for the protection of personnel

and property during construction. Remove debris and flammable materials
daily to minimize potential hazards.
3.3
3.3.1
TRAFFIC PROVISIONS
Maintenance of Traffic
a.
Conduct operations in a manner that will not close any thoroughfare or

interfere in any way with traffic on railways or highways except with
written permission of the Contracting Officer at least 15 calendar days
prior to the proposed modification date, and provide a Traffic Control
Plan detailing the proposed controls to traffic movement for approval.
The plan must be in accordance with State and local regulations and the
MUTCD, Part VI. Contractor may move oversized and slow-moving vehicles
to the worksite provided requirements of the highway authority have
been met.
b.
Conduct work so as to minimize obstruction of traffic, and maintain

traffic on at least half of the roadway width at all times. Obtain
approval from the Contracting Officer prior to starting any activity
that will obstruct traffic.
c.
Provide, erect, and maintain, at contractors expense, lights, barriers,

signals, passageways, detours, and other items, that may be required by
the Life Safety Signage, overhead protection authority having
jurisdiction.
3.3.2
Protection of Traffic
Maintain and protect traffic on all affected roads during the construction
period except as otherwise specifically directed by the Contracting
Officer. Measures for the protection and diversion of traffic, including
the provision of watchmen and flagmen, erection of barricades, placing of
lights around and in front of equipment the work, and the erection and
maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs, will be as
required by the State and local authorities having jurisdiction. Protect
SECTION 01 50 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
the traveling public from damage to person and property. Minimize the
interference with public traffic on roads selected for hauling material to
and from the site. Investigate the adequacy of existing roads and their
allowable load limit. Contractor is responsible for the repair of any
damage to roads caused by construction operations.
3.3.3
Rush Hour Restrictions
Do not interfere with the peak traffic flows preceding and during normal
operations without notification to and approval by the Contracting Officer.
3.3.4
Dust Control
Dust control methods and procedures must be approved by the Contracting

Officer. Treat dust abatement on access roads with applications of calcium
chloride, water sprinklers, or similar methods or treatment.
3.4
CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Contractor-owned or -leased trailers must be identified by Government

assigned numbers. Apply the number to the trailer within 14 calendar days
of notification, or sooner, if directed by the Government.
3.4.1
Safety
Protect the integrity of any installed safety systems or personnel safety

devices. If entrance into systems serving safety devices is required, the
Contractor must obtain prior approval from the Contracting Officer. If it
is temporarily necessary to remove or disable personnel safety devices in
order to accomplish contract requirements, provide alternative means of
protection prior to removing or disabling any permanently installed safety
devices or equipment and obtain approval from the Contracting Officer.
3.4.2
Administrative Field Offices
Provide and maintain administrative field office facilities within the

construction area at the designated site. Government office and warehouse
facilities will not be available to the Contractor's personnel.
3.4.3
Appearance of Trailers
a.
Trailers utilized by the Contractor for administrative or material

storage purposes must present a clean and neat exterior appearance and
be in a state of good repair. Trailers which, in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer, require exterior painting or maintenance will not
be allowed on installation property.
b.
Paint using suitable paint and maintain the temporary facilities.

Failure to do so will be sufficient reason to require their removal.
3.4.4
a.
Maintenance of Storage Area

Grassed or unpaved areas, which are not established roadways, will be
covered with a layer of gravel as necessary to prevent rutting and the
tracking of mud onto paved or established roadways, should the
Contractor elect to traverse them with construction equipment or other
vehicles; gravel gradation will be at the Contractor's discretion. Mow
and maintain grass located within the boundaries of the construction
site for the duration of the project. Grass and vegetation along
SECTION 01 50 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
fences, buildings, under trailers, and in areas not accessible to

mowers will be edged or trimmed neatly.
3.4.5
Security Provisions
Provide adequate outside security lighting at the Contractor's temporary

facilities. The Contractor will be responsible for the security of its own
equipment; in addition, the Contractor will notify the appropriate law
enforcement agency requesting periodic security checks of the temporary
project field office.
3.4.6
Weather Protection of Temporary Facilities and Stored Materials
Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical
openings in the building are monitored carefully. Take immediate actions
required to seal off such openings when rain or other detrimental weather
is imminent, and at the end of each workday. Ensure that the openings are
completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building
from damage.
3.4.6.1
Building and Site Storm Protection
When a warning of gale force winds is issued, take precautions to minimize

danger to persons, and protect the work and nearby Government property.
Precautions must include, but are not limited to, closing openings;
removing loose materials, tools and equipment from exposed locations; and
removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work. Close openings
in the work when storms of lesser intensity pose a threat to the work or
any nearby Government property.
3.5
3.5.1
GOVERNMENT FIELD OFFICE

Trailer-Type Mobile Office
The Contractor may, at its option, furnish and maintain a trailer-type

mobile office acceptable to the Contracting Officer and providing as a
minimum the facilities specified above. Securely anchor the trailer to the
ground at all four corners to guard against movement during high winds.
3.6
PLANT COMMUNICATION
Whenever the Contractor has the individual elements of its plant so located
that operation by normal voice between these elements is not satisfactory,
the Contractor must install a satisfactory means of communication, such as
telephone or other suitable devices and made available for use by
Government personnel.
3.7
TEMPORARY PROJECT SAFETY FENCING
As soon as practicable, but not later than 15 days after the date
established for commencement of work, furnish and erect temporary project
safety fencing at the work site. The safety fencing must be a high
visibility orange colored, high density polyethylene grid or approved
equal, a minimum of 42 inches high, supported and tightly secured to steel
posts located on maximum 10 foot centers, constructed at the approved
location. Maintain the safety fencing during the life of the contract and,
upon completion and acceptance of the work, will become the property of the
Contractor and be removed from the work site.
SECTION 01 50 00
3.8
W912HN-09-X-1813
CLEANUP
Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the

like from the work site daily. Any dirt or mud which is tracked onto paved
or surfaced roadways must be cleaned away. Store within the fenced area
described above or at the supplemental storage area any materials resulting
from demolition activities which are salvageable. Neatly stacked stored
materials not in trailers, whether new or salvaged.
3.9
RESTORATION OF STORAGE AREA
Upon completion of the project remove the bulletinboard, signs, barricades,

haulroads, and any other temporary products from the site. After removal
of trailers, materials, and equipment from within the fenced area, remove
the fence that will become the property of the Contractor. Restore to the
original or better condition, areas used by the Contractor for the storage
of equipment or material, or other use. Gravel used to traverse grassed
areas must be removed and the area restored to its original condition,
including top soil and seeding as necessary.
SECTION 01 50 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10A

*1 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
04/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

EM 385-1-1
(2008; Errata 1-2010; Changes 1-3 2010;

Requirements Manual
WETLANDS DELINEATION MANUAL
(1987) Corps of Engineers Wetlands

Delineation Manual

33 CFR 328
Definitions of Waters of the United States
40 CFR 150 - 189
Pesticide Programs
40 CFR 260
Hazardous Waste Management System:
40 CFR 261
Identification and Listing of Hazardous

Waste
40 CFR 262
Standards Applicable to Generators of

Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 279
Standards for the Management of Used Oil
40 CFR 302
Designation, Reportable Quantities, and

Notification
40 CFR 355
Emergency Planning and Notification
40 CFR 68
Chemical Accident Prevention Provisions
49 CFR 171 - 178
Hazardous Materials Regulations
1.2
1.2.1
General
DEFINITIONS
Environmental Pollution and Damage
Environmental pollution and damage is the presence of chemical, physical,

or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or
welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life;
affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade the environment
aesthetically, culturally and/or historically.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
1.2.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Environmental Protection
Environmental protection is the prevention/control of pollution and habitat

disruption that may occur to the environment during construction. The
control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of
land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes
management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and
liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other
pollutants.
1.2.3
Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste
Contractor generated hazardous waste means materials that, if abandoned or

disposed of, may meet the definition of a hazardous waste. These waste
streams would typically consist of material brought on site by the
Contractor to execute work, but are not fully consumed during the course of
construction. Examples include, but are not limited to, excess paint
thinners (i.e. methyl ethyl ketone, toluene etc.), waste thinners,excess
paints, excess solvents, waste solvents, and excess pesticides, and
contaminated pesticide equipment rinse water.
1.2.4
Installation Pest Management Coordinator
Installation Pest Management Coordinator (IPMC) is the individual

officially designated by the Installation Commander to oversee the
Installation Pest Management Program and the Installation Pest Management
Plan.
1.2.5
Project Pesticide Coordinator
The Project Pesticide Coordinator (PPC) is an individual that resides at a

Civil Works Project office and that is responsible for oversight of
pesticide application on Project grounds.
1.2.6
Land Application for Discharge Water
The term "Land Application" for discharge water implies that the Contractor
must discharge water at a rate which allows the water to percolate into the
soil. No sheeting action, soil erosion, discharge into storm sewers,
discharge into defined drainage areas, or discharge into the "waters of the
United States" must occur. Land Application must be in compliance with all
applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations.
1.2.7
Pesticide
Pesticide is defined as any substance or mixture of substances intended for

preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating any pest, or intended for
use as a plant regulator, defoliant or desiccant.
1.2.8
Pests
The term "pests" means arthropods, birds, rodents, nematodes, fungi,

bacteria, viruses, algae, snails, marine borers, snakes, weeds and other
organisms (except for human or animal disease-causing organisms) that
adversely affect readiness, military operations, or the well-being of
personnel and animals; attack or damage real property, supplies, equipment,
or vegetation; or are otherwise undesirable.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
1.2.9
W912HN-09-X-1813
Surface Discharge
The term "Surface Discharge" implies that the water is discharged with
possible sheeting action and subsequent soil erosion may occur. Waters
that are surface discharged may terminate in drainage ditches, storm
sewers,creeks, and/or "waters of the United States" and would require a
permit to discharge water from the governing agency.
1.2.10
Waters of the United States
All waters which are under the jurisdiction of the Clean Water Act, as
defined in 33 CFR 328.
1.2.11
Wetlands
Those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or ground water at a

frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that under normal
circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for
life in saturated soil conditions. Wetlands generally include swamps,
marshes, and bogs. Official determination of whether or not an area is
classified as a wetland must be done in accordance with
WETLANDS DELINEATION MANUAL.
1.3
Minimize environmental pollution and damage that may occur as the result of
construction operations. The environmental resources within the project
boundaries and those affected outside the limits of permanent work must be
protected during the entire duration of this contract. Comply with all
applicable environmental Federal, State, and local laws and regulations.
Any delays resulting from failure to comply with environmental laws and
regulations will be the Contractor's responsibility.
1.4
SUBCONTRACTORS
Ensure compliance with this section by subcontractors.

1.5
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work covered under this section.
Payment of fees associated with environmental permits, application, and/or
notices obtained by the Contractor, and payment of all fines/fees for
violation or non-compliance with Federal, State, Regional and local laws
and regulations are the Contractor's responsibility. All costs associated
with this section must be included in the contract price.
1.6
SUBMITTALS

Environmental Protection Plan; G, RO
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
1.7
W912HN-09-X-1813
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN
Prior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to the

site, submit an Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval by
the Contracting Officer. The purpose of the Environmental Protection Plan
is to present a comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental
issues which the Contractor must address during construction. Issues of
concern must be defined within the Environmental Protection Plan as
outlined in this section. Address each topic at a level of detail
commensurate with the environmental issue and required construction
task(s). Topics or issues which are not identified in this section, but
are considered necessary, must be identified and discussed after those
items formally identified in this section. Prior to submittal of the
Environmental Protection Plan, meet with the Contracting Officer for the
purpose of discussing the implementation of the initial Environmental
Protection Plan; possible subsequent additions and revisions to the plan
including any reporting requirements; and methods for administration of the
Contractor's Environmental Plans. The Environmental Protection Plan must
be current and maintained onsite by the Contractor.
1.7.1
Compliance
No requirement in this Section will relieve the Contractor of any

applicable Federal, State, and local environmental protection laws and
regulations. During Construction, the Contractor will be responsible for
identifying, implementing, and submitting for approval any additional
requirements to be included in the Environmental Protection Plan.
1.7.2
Contents
Include in the environmental protection plan, but not limit it to, the
following:
a.
Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is(are)

responsible for ensuring adherence to the Environmental Protection Plan.
b.
Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting

hazardous waste to be removed from the site, if applicable.
c.
Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the

Contractor's environmental protection personnel.
d.
Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel

training program.
e.
An erosion and sediment control plan which identifies the type and
location of the erosion and sediment controls to be provided. The plan
must include monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that the
control measures are in compliance with the erosion and sediment
control plan, Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. A Storm
Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) may be substituted for this
plan.
f.
Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or

embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas,
structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil
materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials
on the site.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
g.
Traffic control plans including measures to reduce erosion of temporary

roadbeds by construction traffic, especially during wet weather. Plan
shall include measures to minimize the amount of mud transported onto
paved public roads by vehicles or runoff.
h.
Work area plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the
area and identifying the areas of limited use or nonuse. Plan should
include measures for marking the limits of use areas including methods
for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas.
i.
Drawing showing the location of borrow areas.
j.
Include in the Spill Control plan the procedures, instructions, and

reports to be used in the event of an unforeseen spill of a substance
regulated by 40 CFR 68, 40 CFR 302, 40 CFR 355, and/or regulated under
State or Local laws and regulations. The Spill Control Plan
supplements the requirements of EM 385-1-1 . Include in this plan, as
a minimum:
k.
(1)
The name of the individual who will report any spills or

hazardous substance releases and who will follow up with complete
documentation. This individual will immediately notify the
Contracting Officer and Facility Environmental Office in addition
to the legally required Federal, State, and local reporting
channels (including the National Response Center 1-800-424-8802)
if a reportable quantity is released to the environment. Include
in the plan a list of the required reporting channels and
telephone numbers.
(2)
The name and qualifications of the individual who will be

responsible for implementing and supervising the containment and
cleanup.
(3)
Training requirements for Contractor's personnel and methods of

accomplishing the training.
(4)
A list of materials and equipment to be immediately available at

the job site, tailored to cleanup work of the potential hazard(s)
identified.
(5)
The names and locations of suppliers of containment materials and

locations of additional fuel oil recovery, cleanup, restoration,
and material-placement equipment available in case of an
unforeseen spill emergency.
(6)
The methods and procedures to be used for expeditious contaminant

cleanup.
A non-hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifying methods and

locations for solid waste disposal including clearing debris and
schedules for disposal.
(1)
Identify any subcontractors responsible for the transportation

and disposal of solid waste. Submit licenses or permits for solid
waste disposal sites that are not a commercial operating facility.
(2)
Evidence of the disposal facility's acceptance of the solid waste

must be attached to this plan during the construction. Attach a
copy of each of the Non-hazardous Solid Waste Diversion Reports to
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
the disposal plan. Submit the report for the previous quarter on
the first working day after the first quarter that non-hazardous
solid waste has been disposed and/or diverted (e.g. the first
working day of January, April, July, and October).
(3)
Indicate in the report the total amount of waste generated and

total amount of waste diverted in cubic yards or tons along with
the percent that was diverted.
(4)
A recycling and solid waste minimization plan with a list of

measures to reduce consumption of energy and natural resources.
Detail in the plan the Contractor's actions to comply with and to
participate in Federal, State, Regional, and local government
sponsored recycling programs to reduce the volume of solid waste
at the source.
l.
An air pollution control plan detailing provisions to assure that dust,

debris, materials, trash, etc., do not become air borne and travel off
the project site.
m.
A contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially hazardous

substances to be used on the job site; identifies the intended actions
to prevent introduction of such materials into the air, water, or
ground; and details provisions for compliance with Federal, State, and
local laws and regulations for storage and handling of these
materials. In accordance with EM 385-1-1, a copy of the Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and the maximum quantity of each hazardous
material to be onsite at any given time must be included in the
contaminant prevention plan. Update the plan as new hazardous
materials are brought onsite or removed from the site.
n.
A waste water management plan that identifies the methods and

procedures for management and/or discharge of waste waters which are
directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing
water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water,
hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines. If a
settling/retention pond is required, the plan must include the design
of the pond including drawings, removal plan, and testing requirements
for possible pollutants. If land application will be the method of
disposal for the waste water, the plan must include a sketch showing
the location for land application along with a description of the
pretreatment methods to be implemented. If surface discharge will be
the method of disposal, include a copy of the permit and associated
documents as an attachment prior to discharging the waste water. If
disposal is to a sanitary sewer, the plan must include documentation
that the Waste Water Treatment Plant Operator has approved the flow
rate, volume, and type of discharge.
o.
A historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources

and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and
protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological
resources and wetlands known to be on the project site: and/or
identifies procedures to be followed if historical archaeological,
cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands not previously
known to be onsite or in the area are discovered during construction.
Include in the plan methods to assure the protection of known or
discovered resources, identifying lines of communication between
Contractor personnel and the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
1.7.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Appendix
Attach to the Environmental Protection Plan, as an appendix, copies of all

environmental permits, permit application packages, approvals to construct,
notifications, certifications, reports, and termination documents.
1.8
PROTECTION FEATURES
This paragraph supplements the Contract Clause PROTECTION OF EXISTING

VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS. Prior to
start of any onsite construction activities, the Contractor and the
Contracting Officer will make a joint condition survey. Immediately
following the survey, the Contractor will prepare a brief report including
a plan describing the features requiring protection under the provisions of
the Contract Clauses, which are not specifically identified on the drawings
as environmental features requiring protection along with the condition of
trees, shrubs and grassed areas immediately adjacent to the site of work
and adjacent to the Contractor's assigned storage area and access route(s),
as applicable. This survey report will be signed by both the the
Contractor and the Contracting Officer upon mutual agreement as to its
accuracy and completeness. The Contractor must protect those environmental
features included in the survey report and any indicated on the drawings,
regardless of interference which their preservation may cause to the work
under the contract.
1.9
SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Comply with the special environmental requirements listed here

attached at the end of this section.
1.10
and
ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT OF CONTRACT DEVIATIONS
Any deviations from the drawings,plans and specifications, requested by the

Contractor and which may have an environmental impact, will be subject to
approval by the Contracting Officer and may require an extended review,
processing, and approval time. The Contracting Officer reserves the right
to disapprove alternate methods, even if they are more cost effective, if
the Contracting Officer determines that the proposed alternate method will
have an adverse environmental impact.
1.11
NOTIFICATION
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any

observed noncompliance with Federal, State or local environmental laws or
regulations, permits, and other elements of the Contractor's Environmental
Protection plan. After receipt of such notice, the Contractor will inform
the Contracting Officer of the proposed corrective action and take such
action when approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer
may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory
corrective action has been taken. No time extensions will be granted or
equitable adjustments allowed for any such suspensions. This is in
addition to any other actions the Contracting Officer may take under the
contract, or in accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulation or
Federal Law.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
NOT USED
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
PART 3
3.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
EXECUTION
ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS AND COMMITMENTS
Obtaining and complying with all environmental permits and commitments

required by Federal, State, Regional, and local environmental laws and
regulations is the Contractor's responsibility.
3.2
LAND RESOURCES
Confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and

specifications. Identify any land resources to be preserved within the
work area prior to the beginning of any construction. Do not remove, cut,
deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines,
grasses, topsoil, and land forms without approval, except in areas
indicated on the drawings or specified to be cleared. Ropes, cables, or
guys will not be fastened to or attached to any trees for anchorage unless
specifically authorized. Provide effective protection for land and
vegetation resources at all times, as defined in the following
subparagraphs. Remove stone, soil, or other materials displaced into
uncleared areas.
3.2.1
Work Area Limits
Mark the areas that need not be disturbed under this contract prior to
commencing construction activities. Mark or fence isolated areas within
the general work area which are not to be disturbed. Protect monuments and
markers before construction operations commence. Where construction
operations are to be conducted during darkness, any markers must be visible
in the dark. The Contractor's personnel must be knowledgeable of the
purpose for marking and/or protecting particular objects.
3.2.2
Landscape
Trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms and other landscape features
indicated and defined on the drawings to be preserved must be clearly
identified by marking, fencing, or wrapping with boards, or any other
approved techniques. Restore landscape features damaged or destroyed
during construction operations outside the limits of the approved work area.
3.2.3
Providing erosion and sediment control measures in accordance with Federal,

State, and local laws and regulations is the Contractor's responsibility.
Select and maintain the erosion and sediment controls such that water
quality standards are not violated as a result of construction activities.
The area of bare soil exposed at any one time by construction operations
should be kept to a minimum. Construct or install temporary and permanent
erosion and sediment control best management practices (BMPs) as indicated
on the drawings. BMPs may include, but not be limited to, vegetation
cover, slope stabilization, silt fences, interceptor channels, sediment
traps, inlet and outfall protection, diversion channels, and sedimentation
basins. Remove any temporary measures after the area has been stabilized.
3.2.4
Contractor Facilities and Work Areas
Place field offices, staging areas, stockpile storage, and temporary

buildings in areas designated on the drawings or as directed by the
Contracting Officer. Temporary movement or relocation of Contractor
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
facilities will be made only when approved. Erosion and sediment controls
must be provided for onsite borrow and spoil areas to prevent sediment from
entering nearby waters. Temporary excavation and embankments for plant
and/or work areas must be controlled to protect adjacent areas.
3.3
WATER RESOURCES
Monitor all water areas affected by construction activities to prevent

pollution of surface and ground waters. Do not apply toxic or hazardous
chemicals to soil or vegetation unless otherwise indicated. For
construction activities immediately adjacent to impaired surface waters,
the Contractor must be capable of quantifying sediment or pollutant loading
to that surface water when required by State or Federally issued Clean
Water Act permits.
3.3.1
Wetlands
D0 not enter, disturb, destroy, or allow discharge of contaminants into any

wetlands.
3.4
AIR RESOURCES
Equipment operation, activities, or processes will be in accordance with

all Federal and State air emission and performance laws and standards.
3.4.1
Particulates
Dust particles; aerosols and gaseous by-products from construction

activities; must be controlled at all times, including weekends, holidays
and hours when work is not in progress. Maintain excavations, stockpiles,
haul roads, permanent and temporary access roads, spoil areas, borrow
areas, and other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free
from particulates which would cause the Federal, State, and local air
pollution standards to be exceeded or which would cause a hazard or a
nuisance. Sprinkling, chemical treatment of an approved type, baghouse,
scrubbers, electrostatic precipitators or other methods will be permitted
to control particulates in the work area. Sprinkling, to be efficient,
must be repeated to keep the disturbed area damp at all times. Provide
sufficient, competent equipment available to accomplish these tasks.
Perform particulate control as the work proceeds and whenever a particulate
nuisance or hazard occurs. Comply with all State and local visibility
regulations.
3.4.2
Odors
Odors from construction activities must be controlled at all times. The

odors must be in compliance with State regulations and/or local ordinances
and may not constitute a health hazard.
3.4.3
Sound Intrusions
Keep construction activities under surveillance and control to minimize

environment damage by noise. Comply with the provisions of the State of GA
rules.
3.4.4
Burning
Burning is prohibited on the Government premises.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
3.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
CHEMICAL MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND WASTE DISPOSAL
Disposal of wastes will be as directed below, unless otherwise specified in

other sections and/or shown on the drawings.
3.5.1
Solid Wastes
Place solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) in containers which are

emptied on a regular schedule. Handling, storage, and disposal must be
conducted to prevent contamination. Employ segregation measures so that no
hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with solid waste.
Transport solid waste off Government property and dispose of it in
compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements for solid waste
disposal. A Subtitle D RCRA permitted landfill will be the minimum
acceptable offsite solid waste disposal option. Verify that the selected
transporters and disposal facilities have the necessary permits and
licenses to operate.
3.5.2
Chemicals and Chemical Wastes
Dispense chemicals ensuring no spillage to the ground or water. Perform

and document periodic inspections of dispensing areas to identify leakage
and initiate corrective action. This documentation will be periodically
reviewed by the Government. Collect chemical waste in corrosion resistant,
compatible containers. Collection drums must be monitored and removed to a
staging or storage area when contents are within 6 inches of the top.
Wastes will be classified, managed, stored, and disposed of in accordance
with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations.
3.5.3
Contractor Generated Hazardous Wastes/Excess Hazardous Materials
Hazardous wastes are defined in 40 CFR 261, or are as defined by applicable

State and local regulations. Hazardous materials are defined in
49 CFR 171 - 178. At a minimum, manage and store hazardous waste in
compliance with 40 CFR 262 in accordance with the Installation hazardous
waste management plan. Take sufficient measures to prevent spillage of
hazardous and toxic materials during dispensing. Segregate hazardous waste
from other materials and wastes, protect it from the weather by placing it
in a safe covered location, and take precautionary measures such as berming
or other appropriate measures against accidental spillage. Storage,
describing, packaging, labeling, marking, and placarding of hazardous waste
and hazardous material in accordance with 49 CFR 171 - 178, State, and
local laws and regulations is the Contractor's responsibility. Transport
Contractor generated hazardous waste off Government property within 60 days
in accordance with the Environmental Protection Agency and the Department
of Transportation laws and regulations. Dispose of hazardous waste in
compliance with Federal, State and local laws and regulations. Spills of
hazardous or toxic materials must be immediately reported to the
Contracting Officer and the Facility Environmental Office. Cleanup and
cleanup costs due to spills are the Contractor's responsibility. The
disposition of Contractor generated hazardous waste and excess hazardous
materials are the Contractor's responsibility. Coordinate the disposition
of hazardous waste with the Facility's Hazardous Waste Manager and the
3.5.4
Fuel and Lubricants
Storage, fueling and lubrication of equipment and motor vehicles must be

conducted in a manner that affords the maximum protection against spill and
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
evaporation. Manage and store fuel, lubricants and oil in accordance with
all Federal, State, Regional, and local laws and regulations. Used
lubricants and used oil to be discarded must be stored in marked
corrosion-resistant containers and recycled or disposed in accordance with
40 CFR 279, State, and local laws and regulations. Storage of fuel on the
project site will be in accordance with all Federal, State, and local laws
and regulations.
3.5.5
Waste Water
Disposal of waste water will be as specified below.

a.
3.6
Waste water from construction activities, such as onsite material

processing, concrete curing, foundation and concrete clean-up,
water used in concrete trucks, forms, etc. will not be allowed to
enter water ways or to be discharged prior to being treated to
remove pollutants. Dispose of the construction related waste
water off-Government property in accordance with all Federal,
State, Regional and Local laws and regulations.
RECYCLING AND WASTE MINIMIZATION
Participate in State and local government sponsored recycling programs.

The Contractor is further encouraged to minimize solid waste generation
throughout the duration of the project. .
3.7
NON-HAZARDOUS SOLID WASTE DIVERSION REPORT
Maintain an inventory of non-hazardous solid waste diversion and disposal

of construction and demolition debris. Submit a report to the Contracting
Officer on the first working day after each fiscal year quarter, starting
the first quarter that non-hazardous solid waste has been generated.
Include the following in the report:
3.8
a.
Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Disposed = _____ in cubic

yards or tons, as appropriate.
b.
Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Recycled = _____ in cubic

c.
Total C&D Debris Generated = _____ in cubic yards or tons, as

appropriate.
d.
Waste Sent to Waste-To-Energy Incineration Plant (This amount

should not be included in the recycled amount) = _____ in cubic
HISTORICAL, ARCHAEOLOGICAL, AND CULTURAL RESOURCES
If during excavation or other construction activities any previously

unidentified or unanticipated historical, archaeological, and cultural
resources are discovered or found, all activities that may damage or alter
such resources will be temporarily suspended. Resources covered by this
paragraph include but are not limited to: any human skeletal remains or
burials; artifacts; shell, midden, bone, charcoal, or other deposits; rock
or coral alignments, pavings, wall, or other constructed features; and any
indication of agricultural or other human activities. Upon such discovery
or find, immediately notify the Contracting Officer so that the appropriate
authorities may be notified and a determination made as to their
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
significance and what, if any, special disposition of the finds should be

made. Cease all activities that may result in impact to or the destruction
of these resources. Secure the area and prevent employees or other persons
from trespassing on, removing, or otherwise disturbing such resources.
3.9
BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES
Minimize interference with, disturbance to, and damage to fish, wildlife,

and plants including their habitat. The protection of threatened and
endangered animal and plant species, including their habitat, is the
Contractor's responsibility in accordance with Federal, State, Regional,
and local laws and regulations.
3.10
INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT
In order to minimize impacts to existing fauna and flora, the Contractor

through the Contracting Officer, must coordinate with the Installation Pest
Management Coordinator (IPMC) at the earliest possible time prior to
pesticide application. Discuss integrated pest management strategies with
the IPMC and receive concurrence from the IPMC through the COR prior to the
application of any pesticide associated with these specifications.
Installation Project Office Pest Management personnel will be given the
opportunity to be present at all meetings concerning treatment measures for
pest or disease control and during application of the pesticide. The use
and management of pesticides are regulated under 40 CFR 150 - 189.
3.10.1
Pesticide Delivery and Storage
Deliver pesticides to the site in the original, unopened containers bearing

legible labels indicating the EPA registration number and the
manufacturer's registered uses. Store pesticides according to
manufacturer's instructions and under lock and key when unattended.
3.10.2
Qualifications
For the application of pesticides, use the services of a subcontractor

whose principal business is pest control. The subcontractor must be
licensed and certified in the state where the work is to be performed.
3.10.3
Pesticide Handling Requirements
Formulate, treat with, and dispose of pesticides and associated containers

in accordance with label directions and use the clothing and personal
protective equipment specified on the labeling for use during all phases of
the application. Furnish Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all
pesticide products.
3.10.4
Application
Apply pesticides using a State Certified Pesticide Applicator in accordance

with EPA label restrictions and recommendation. The Certified Applicator
must wear clothing and personal protective equipment as specified on the
pesticide label. The Contracting Officer will designate locations for
water used in formulating. Do not allow the equipment to overflow. All
equipment must be inspected for leaks, clogging, wear, or damage and
repaired prior to application of pesticide.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
3.11
W912HN-09-X-1813
PREVIOUSLY USED EQUIPMENT
Clean all previously used construction equipment prior to bringing it onto

the project site. Ensure that the equipment is free from soil residuals,
egg deposits from plant pests, noxious weeds, and plant seeds. Consult
with the USDA jurisdictional office for additional cleaning requirements.
3.12
MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION FACILITIES
Maintain permanent and temporary pollution control facilities and devices

for the duration of the contract or for that length of time construction
activities create the particular pollutant.
3.13
MILITARY MUNITIONS
In the event military munitions, as defined in 40 CFR 260, are discovered

or uncovered, the Contractor will immediately stop work in that area and
immediately inform the Contracting Officer.
3.14
TRAINING OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL
The Contractor's personnel must be trained in all phases of environmental

protection and pollution control. Conduct environmental
protection/pollution control meetings for all personnel prior to commencing
construction activities. Additional meetings must be conducted for new
personnel and when site conditions change. Include in the training and
meeting agenda: methods of detecting and avoiding pollution;
familiarization with statutory and contractual pollution standards;
installation and care of devices, vegetative covers, and instruments
required for monitoring purposes to ensure adequate and continuous
environmental protection/pollution control; anticipated hazardous or toxic
chemicals or wastes, and other regulated contaminants; recognition and
protection of archaeological sites, artifacts, wetlands, and endangered
species and their habitat that are known to be in the area.
3.15
POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP
The Contractor will clean up all areas used for construction in accordance
with Contract Clause: "Cleaning Up". Unless otherwise instructed in
writing by the Contracting Officer, obliterate all signs of temporary
construction facilities such as haul roads, work area, structures,
foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or waste
materials, and other vestiges of construction prior to final acceptance of
the work. The disturbed area must be graded, filled and the entire area
seeded unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 57 23A
*1 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
04/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

ASTM D4439
(2004) Geosynthetics
ASTM D4491
(1999a; R 2009) Water Permeability of

Geotextiles by Permittivity
ASTM D4533
(2011) Trapezoid Tearing Strength of

Geotextiles
ASTM D4632
(2008) Grab Breaking Load and Elongation

of Geotextiles
ASTM D4751
(2004) Determining Apparent Opening Size

of a Geotextile
ASTM D4873
(2002; R 2009) Identification, Storage,

and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and
Samples
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The work consists of implementing the storm water pollution prevention

measures to prevent sediment from entering streams or water bodies as
specified in this Section in conformance with the requirements of Section
01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION, and the requirements of the
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES).
1.3
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
The controls and measures required of the Contractor are described below.
1.3.1
Stabilization Practices
The stabilization practices to be implemented include temporary seeding,

mulching, geotextiles, erosion control matts, protection of trees, etc. On
the daily CQC Report, record the dates when the major grading activities
occur, (e.g., clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading);
when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion
of the site; and when stabilization practices are initiated. Except as
provided in paragraphs UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS and NO ACTIVITY FOR LESS THAN
21 DAYS, initiate stabilization practices as soon as practicable, but no
more than 14 days, in any portion of the site where construction activities
have temporarily or permanently ceased.
SECTION 01 57 23
1.3.1.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
Unsuitable Conditions
Where the initiation of stabilization measures by the fourteenth day after

construction activity temporarily or permanently ceases or is precluded by
unsuitable conditions caused by the weather, initiate stabilization
practices as soon as practicable after conditions become suitable.
1.3.1.2
No Activity for Less Than 21 Days
When the total time period in which construction activity is temporarily

ceased on a portion of the site is 21 days minimum, stabilization practices
do not have to be initiated on that portion of the site until 14 days have
elapsed after construction activity temporarily ceased.
1.3.1.3
Burnoff
Burnoff of the ground cover is not permitted.

1.3.1.4
Protection of Erodible Soils
Immediately finish the earthwork brought to a final grade, as indicated or

specified, and protect the side slopes and back slopes upon completion of
rough grading. Plan and conduct earthwork to minimize the duration of
exposure of unprotected soils.
1.3.2
Erosion, Sediment and Stormwater Control
a.
Storm Water Notice of Intent for Construction Activities
b.
Submit a Storm Water Notice of Intent for NPDES coverage under the
general permit for construction activities and a Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the project to the Contracting Officer
prior to the commencement of work. The SWPPP shall meet the
requirements of the State of GA general permit for storm water
discharges from construction sites. Submit the SWPPP along with any
required Notice of Intents, Notice of Termination, and appropriate
permit fees, via the Contracting Officer, to the appropriate State
agency for approval, a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the start
of any land disturbing activities. Maintain an approved copy of the
SWPPP at the construction on-site office, and continually update as
regulations require, to reflect current site conditions. Include
within the SWPPP:
(1)
Identify potential sources of pollution which may be reasonably

expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge from the
site.
(2)
Describe and ensure implementation of practices which will be

used to reduce the pollutants in storm water discharge from the
site.
(3)
Ensure compliance with terms of the State of GA general permit

for storm water discharge.
(4)
Select applicable best management practices from EPA 832-R-92-005.
(5)
Include a completed copy of the Registration Statement, BMP

SECTION 01 57 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
Inspection Report Template and Notice of Termination except for

the effective date.
1.3.3
Structural Practices
Implement structural practices to divert flows from exposed soils,

temporarily store flows, or otherwise limit runoff and the discharge of
pollutants from exposed areas of the site. Implement structural practices
in a timely manner, during the construction process, to minimize erosion
and sediment runoff. Include the following devices; Location and details
of installation and construction are shown on the drawings.
1.3.3.1
Silt Fences
Provide silt fences as a temporary structural practice to minimize erosion

and sediment runoff. Properly install silt fences to effectively retain
sediment immediately after completing each phase of work where erosion
would occur in the form of sheet and rill erosion (e.g. clearing and
grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading). Install silt fences in the
locations indicated on the drawings. Obtain approval from the Contracting
Officer prior to final removal of silt fence barriers.
1.3.4
Sediment Basins
Trap sediment in temporary sediment basins.

Pump dry and remove the
accumulated sediment, after each storm. Remove collected sediment from the
site. Institute effluent quality monitoring programs. Install, inspect,
and maintain best management practices (BMPs) as required by the general
permit. Prepare BMP Inspection Reports as required by the general permit.
If required by the permit, include those inspection reports.
1.3.5
Vegetation and Mulch
a.
Provide temporary protection on sides and back slopes as soon as rough

grading is completed or sufficient soil is exposed to require erosion
protection. Protect slopes by accelerated growth of permanent
vegetation, temporary vegetation, mulching, or netting. Stabilize
slopes by hydroseeding, anchoring mulch in place, covering with
anchored netting, sodding, or such combination of these and other
methods necessary for effective erosion control.
b.
Seeding: Provide new seeding where ground is disturbed. Include

topsoil or nutriment during the seeding operation necessary to
establish and reestablish a suitable stand of grass. The seeding
operation will be as specified in Section 32 92 19 SEEDING.
1.4
SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 57 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan

Storm Water Notice of Intent
Pollution prevention plan and Notice of intent for NPDES
coverage under the general permit for construction activities
SD-06 Test Reports
Storm Water Inspection Reports for General Permit
SD-07 Certificates
Certificate attesting that the Contractor has met all specified
requirements.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Identify, store and handle filter fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873.
PART 2
2.1
2.1.1
PRODUCTS
COMPONENTS FOR SILT FENCES
Filter Fabric
Provide geotextile that complies with the requirements of ASTM D4439, and
consists of polymeric filaments which are formed into a stable network such
that filaments retain their relative positions. The filament shall consist
of a long-chain synthetic polymer composed of at least 85 percent by weight
of ester, propylene, or amide, and contains stabilizers and/or inhibitors
added to the base plastic to make the filaments resistant to deterioration
due to ultraviolet and heat exposure. Provide synthetic filter fabric that
contains ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to assure a minimum of
six months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0
to 120 degrees F. The filter fabric shall meet the following requirements:
FILTER FABRIC FOR SILT SCREEN FENCE

PHYSICAL PROPERTY
TEST PROCEDURE
STRENGTH REQUIREMENT
Grab Tensile Elongation

(percent)
ASTM D4632
100 lbs. min. 30

percent max.
Trapezoid Tear
ASTM D4533
55 lbs. min.
Permittivity
ASTM D4491
0.2 sec-1
AOS (U.S. Std Sieve)
ASTM D4751
20-100
2.1.2
Silt Fence Stakes and Posts
Use steel posts for fence construction. Steel posts (standard "U" or "T"
section) utilized for silt fence construction, shall have a minimum weight
SECTION 01 57 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
of 1.33 pounds/linear foot and a minimum length of 4 feet.

2.1.3
Provide a mill certificate or affidavit attesting that the fabric and

factory seams meet chemical, physical, and manufacturing requirements
specified above. Specify in the mill certificate or affidavit the actual
Minimum Average Roll Values and identify the fabric supplied by roll
identification numbers. Submit a mill certificate or affidavit signed by a
legally authorized official from the company manufacturing the filter
fabric.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF SILT FENCES
Extend silt fences a minimum of 16 inches above the ground surface without
exceeding 34 inches above the ground surface. Provide filter fabric from a
continuous roll cut to the length of the barrier to avoid the use of
joints. When joints are unavoidable, splice together filter fabric at a
support post, with a minimum 6 inch overlap, and securely sealed. Excavate
trench approximately 4 inches wide and 4 inches deep on the upslope side of
the location of the silt fence. The 4 by 4 inch trench shall be backfilled
and the soil compacted over the filter fabric. Remove silt fences upon
approval by the Contracting Officer.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Maintain the temporary and permanent vegetation, erosion and sediment

control measures, and other protective measures in good and effective
operating condition by performing routine inspections to determine
condition and effectiveness, by restoration of destroyed vegetative cover,
and by repair of erosion and sediment control measures and other protective
measures. Use the following procedures to maintain the protective measures.
3.2.1
Silt Fence Maintenance
Inspect the silt fences in accordance with paragraph, titled "Inspections,"

of this section. Any required repairs shall be made promptly. Pay close
attention to the repair of damaged silt fence resulting from end runs and
undercutting. Should the fabric on a silt fence decompose or become
ineffective, and the barrier is still necessary, replace the fabric
promptly. Remove sediment deposits when deposits reach one-third of the
height of the barrier. Remove a silt fence when it is no longer required.
The immediate area occupied by the fence and any sediment deposits shall be
shaped to an acceptable grade. The areas disturbed by this shaping shall
be seeded in accordance with Section 32 92 19 SEEDING.
3.3
3.3.1
INSPECTIONS
General
Inspect disturbed areas of the construction site, areas that have not been
finally stabilized used for storage of materials exposed to precipitation,
stabilization practices, structural practices, other controls, and area
where vehicles exit the site at least once every seven (7) calendar days
and within 24 hours of the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or
more rainfall at the site. Conduct inspections at least once every month
where sites have been finally stabilized.
SECTION 01 57 23
3.3.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Inspections Details
Inspect disturbed areas and areas used for material storage that are
exposed to precipitation for evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants
entering the drainage system. Observe erosion and sediment control
measures identified in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan to ensure
that they are operating correctly. Inspect discharge locations or points
to ascertain whether erosion control measures are effective in preventing
significant impacts to receiving waters. Inspect locations where vehicles
exit the site for evidence of offsite sediment tracking.
3.3.3
Inspection Reports
For each inspection conducted, prepare a report summarizing the scope of

the inspection, name(s) and qualifications of personnel making the
inspection, the date(s) of the inspection, major observations relating to
the implementation of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan,
maintenance performed, and actions taken. Furnish the report to the
Contracting Officer within 24 hours of the inspection as a part of the
Contractor's daily CQC REPORT. A copy of the inspection report shall be
maintained on the job site. All inspections shall follow the requirements
listed for inspection time frames, qualified personnel, rainfall events,
record keeping and reporting, as outlined in the construction plans.
SECTION 01 57 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 62 35A
*1 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS
07/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

40 CFR 247
1.2
Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for

Products Containing Recovered Materials
OBJECTIVES
Government procurement policy is to acquire, in a cost effective manner,

items containing the highest percentage of recycled and recovered materials
practicable consistent with maintaining a satisfactory level of competition
without adversely affecting performance requirements or exposing suppliers'
employees to undue hazards from the recovered materials. The Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) has designated certain items which must contain a
specified percent range of recovered or recycled materials. EPA designated
products specified in this contract comply with the stated policy and with
the EPA guidelines. Make all reasonable efforts to use recycled and
recovered materials in providing the EPA designated products and in
otherwise utilizing recycled and recovered materials in the execution of
the work.
1.3
EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS INCORPORATED IN THE WORK
Various sections of the specifications contain requirements for materials

that have been designated by EPA as being products which are or can be made
with recovered or recycled materials. These items, when incorporated into
the work under this contract, shall contain at least the specified
percentage of recycled or recovered materials unless adequate
justification (non-availability) for non-use is provided. When a
designated item is specified as an option to a non-designated item, the
designated item requirements apply only if the designated item is used in
the work.
1.4
EPA PROPOSED ITEMS INCORPORATED IN THE WORK
Products other than those designated by EPA are still being researched and
are being considered for future Comprehensive Procurement Guideline (CPG)
designation. It is recommended that these items, when incorporated in the
work under this contract, contain the highest practicable percentage of
recycled or recovered materials, provided specified requirements are also
met.
SECTION 01 62 35
W912HN-09-X-1813
1.5
EPA LISTED ITEMS USED IN CONDUCT OF THE WORK BUT NOT INCORPORATED IN
THE WORK
There are many products listed in 40 CFR 247 which have been designated or
proposed by EPA to include recycled or recovered materials that may be used
by the Contractor in performing the work but will not be incorporated into
the work. These products include office products, temporary traffic
control products, and pallets. It is recommended that these
non-construction products, when used in the conduct of the work, contain
the highest practicable percentage of recycled or recovered materials and
that these products be recycled when no longer needed.
PART 2
TITLE
Not Used
PART 3
TITLE
Not Used
SECTION 01 62 35
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01/07
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED
1.2
(2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and

Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
Rating System for New Construction
(LEED-NC)
GOVERNMENT POLICY
Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the design,

construction and use of facilities. As part of the implementation of that
policy: (1) practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting, and
installing products and materials and (2) use all reasonable means to
divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators
and to facilitate their recycling or reuse. A minimum of [50][75][_____]
percent by weight of total project solid waste shall be diverted from the
landfill.
1.3
MANAGEMENT
Develop and implement a waste management program. Take a pro-active,

responsible role in the management of construction and demolition waste and
require all subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in the
effort. Construction and demolition waste includes products of demolition
or removal, excess or unusable construction materials, packaging materials
for construction products, and other materials generated during the
construction process but not incorporated into the work. In the management
of waste consideration shall be given to the availability of viable
markets, the condition of the material, the ability to provide the material
in suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to available markets,
and time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates. The
Contractor is responsible for implementation of any special programs
involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste.
Revenues or other savings obtained for salvage, or recycling accrue to the
Contractor. Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling,
reuse, and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by federal,
state, and local regulations. Also, provide on-site instruction of
appropriate separation, handling, recycling, salvage, reuse, and return
methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.
1.4
SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor Quality Control
SECTION 01 74 19
W912HN-09-X-1813
approval.][for information only. When used, a designation following the

"G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for
the Government.] The following shall be submitted in accordance with
Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Waste Management Plan[; G][; G, [_____]]; (LEED)
Records; (LEED)
1.5
MEETINGS
Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings. After award of the

Contract and prior to commencement of work, schedule and conduct a meeting
with the Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan
and to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of waste
management. The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the
coordination and mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section
01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL. At a minimum, environmental and waste
management goals and issues shall be discussed at the following additional
meetings:
1.6
a.
Pre-bid meeting.
b.
[Preconstruction][Pre-demolition] meeting.
c.
Regular [site][QC] meetings.
d.
Work safety meetings.
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A waste management plan shall be submitted within [15][_____] days after [

contract award][notice to proceed] and not less than 10 days before the [
preconstruction][pre-demolition] meeting. The plan shall demonstrate how
the project waste diversion goal shall be met and shall include the
following:
a.
Name of individuals on the Contractor's staff responsible for waste

prevention and management.
b.
Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation, including

coordination with subcontractors to ensure awareness and participation.
c.
Description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste

management.
d.
Description of the specific approaches to be used in recycling/reuse of

the various materials generated, including the areas on site and
equipment to be used for processing, sorting, and temporary storage of
wastes.
e.
Characterization, including estimated types and quantities, of the

waste to be generated.
f.
Name of landfill and/or incinerator to be used and the estimated costs

SECTION 01 74 19
W912HN-09-X-1813
for use, assuming that there would be no salvage or recycling on the

project.
g.
Identification of local and regional reuse programs, including

non-profit organizations such as schools, local housing agencies, and
organizations that accept used materials such as materials exchange
networks and Habitat for Humanity. Include the name, location, and
phone number for each reuse facility to be used, and provide a copy of
the permit or license for each facility.
h.
List of specific waste materials that will be salvaged for resale,

salvaged and reused on the current project, salvaged and stored for
reuse on a future project, or recycled. Recycling facilities that will
be used shall be identified by name, location, and phone number,
including a copy of the permit or license for each facility.
i.
Identification of materials that cannot be recycled/reused with an

explanation or justification, to be approved by the Contracting Officer.
j.
Description of the means by which any waste materials identified in

item (h) above will be protected from contamination.
k.
Description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials

(whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated
centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler
and removed from the site).
l.
Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting Contractor

program management costs and the cost of disposal from the revenue
generated by sale of the materials and the incineration and/or landfill
cost avoidance.
Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the Contracting Officer. Approval

of Contractor's Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with applicable environmental regulations or meeting project
cumulative waste diversion requirement. Distribute copies of the Waste
Management Plan to each subcontractor, the Quality Control Manager, and the
1.7
RECORDS
Records shall be maintained to document the quantity of waste generated;

the quantity of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the
quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration. [Records shall be
kept in accordance with the LEED Reference Guide and using the LEED Letter
Template.] The records shall be made available to the Contracting Officer
during construction, and a copy of the records shall be [delivered to the
Contracting Officer upon completion of the construction][included in the
LEED Documentation Notebook].
[Demolition accomplished by other parties on this project site count toward
the project's total waste diversion cumulative score for LEED. Information
on the quantity and disposition of these materials will be provided by the
Contracting Officer. Include this data in records, annotated to indicate
that it was accomplished by another party.]
1.8
COLLECTION
Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable and
SECTION 01 74 19
W912HN-09-X-1813
salvageable waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability and

salvagability of identified materials. Provide the necessary containers,
bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and clearly
and appropriately identify them. Provide materials for barriers and
enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are nonhazardous
and recyclable or reusable. Locate out of the way of construction traffic.
Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to
subcontractors. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and
clean, and recyclable materials shall be handled to prevent contamination
of materials from incompatible products and materials. Clean contaminated
materials prior to placing in collection containers. Use cleaning materials
that are nonhazardous and biodegradable. Handle hazardous waste and
hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations and
coordinate with [Section 01 35 40.00 20 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT][Section
01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION]. Separate materials by one of the
following methods:
1.8.1
Source Separated Method.
Waste products and materials that are recyclable shall be separated from
trash and sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate
containers and then transported to the respective recycling facility for
further processing. Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or
reuse facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, adhesives, solvents,
petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling
process). Separate materials into the following category types as
appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse
programs in the project area:
a.
Land clearing debris.
b.
Asphalt.
c.
Concrete and masonry.
d.
Metal (e.g. banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other
trim, steel, iron, galvanized, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc,
lead brass, bronze).
(1)
Ferrous.
(2)
Non-ferrous.
e.
Wood (nails and staples allowed).
f.
Debris.
g.
Glass (colored glass allowed).
h.
Paper.
i.
(1)
Bond.
(2)
Newsprint.
(3)
Cardboard and paper packaging materials.
Plastic.
SECTION 01 74 19
(1)
Type 1:
Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE).
(2)
Type 2:
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).
(3)
Type 3:
Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).
(4)
Type 4:
Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE).
(5)
Type 5:
Polypropylene (PP).
(6)
Type 6:
Polystyrene (PS).
(7)
Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in

question is made with a resin other than the six listed above, or
is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a
multi-layer combination.
j.
Gypsum.
k.
Non-hazardous paint and paint cans.
l.
Carpet.
m.
Ceiling tiles.
n.
Insulation.
o.
Beverage containers.
p.
[_____].
1.8.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Co-Mingled Method.
Waste products and recyclable materials shall be placed into a single

container and then transported to a recycling facility where the recyclable
materials are sorted and processed.
1.8.3
Other Methods.
Other methods proposed by the Contractor may be used when approved by the
1.9
DISPOSAL
Control accumulation of waste materials and trash. Recycle or dispose of

collected materials off-site at intervals approved by the Contracting
Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures. Except as
otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications, disposal shall
be in accordance with the following:
1.9.1
Reuse.
First consideration shall be given to salvage for reuse since little or no

re-processing is necessary for this method, and less pollution is created
when items are reused in their original form. [Coordinate reuse with the
Contracting Officer. ][Reuse materials as indicated on the drawings. ]
Sale or donation of waste suitable for reuse shall be considered.
SECTION 01 74 19
1.9.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Recycle.
Waste materials not suitable for reuse, but having value as being
recyclable, shall be made available for recycling. All fluorescent lamps,
HID lamps, and mercury-containing thermostats removed from the site shall
be recycled. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to
recycling facilities in order to prevent contamination of recyclable
materials.
[1.10.3
Compost
Consider composting on site if a reasonable amount of compostable material

will be available. Compostable materials include plant material, sawdust,
and certain food scraps.
]1.9.3
Waste.
Materials with no practical use or economic benefit shall be disposed at a

landfill or incinerator.
1.9.4
Return
Set aside and protect misdelivered and substandard products and materials
and return to supplier for credit.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not used.
SECTION 01 74 19
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 78 00A
*1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
08/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

UFC 1-300-08
1.2
(2009, with Change 1) Criteria for

Transfer and Acceptance of DoD Real
Property
SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
As-Built Record of Equipment and Materials
Warranty Tags
Spare Parts Data
Preventative Maintenance
Condition Monitoring (Predictive Testing)
Inspection
Posted Instructions
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Record Drawings
Certification of EPA Designated Items; G
Interim Form DD1354; G
Checklist for Form DD1354; G
1.3
1.3.1
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

Record Drawings
Drawings showing final as-built conditions of the project.

SECTION 01 78 00
This paragraph
W912HN-09-X-1813
covers record drawings complete, as a requirement of the contract. The

terms "drawings," "contract drawings," "drawing files," "working record
drawings" and "final record drawings" refer to contract drawings which are
revised to be used for final record drawings showing as-built conditions.
The final CAD record drawings must consist of one set of electronic CAD
drawing files in the specified format, 2 sets of prints, and one set of
the approved working Record drawings. The manually prepared drawings must
consist of 1 set of completed final as-built original transparency
drawings, 2 sets of blue-line prints of the transparencies, and the
approved marked working as-built prints.
1.3.1.1
Government Furnished Materials
One set of electronic CADD files in the specified software and format
revised to reflect all bid amendments will be provided by the Government at
the preconstruction conference for projects requiring CADD file record
drawings.
1.3.1.2
Working Record and Final Record Drawings
Revise 2 sets of paper drawings by red-line process to show the as-built

conditions during the prosecution of the project. Keep these working
as-built marked drawings current on a weekly basis and at least one set
available on the jobsite at all times. Changes from the contract plans
which are made in the work or additional information which might be
uncovered in the course of construction must be accurately and neatly
recorded as they occur by means of details and notes. Prepare final record
(as-built) drawings after the completion of each definable feature of work
as listed in the Contractor Quality Control Plan (Foundations, Utilities,
Structural Steel, etc., as appropriate for the project). The working
as-built marked prints and final record (as-built) drawings will be jointly
reviewed for accuracy and completeness by the Contracting Officer and the
Contractor prior to submission of each monthly pay estimate. If the
Contractor fails to maintain the working and final record drawings as
specified herein, the Contracting Officer will deduct from the monthly
progress payment an amount representing the estimated cost of maintaining
the record drawings. This monthly deduction will continue until an
agreement can be reached between the Contracting Officer and the Contractor
regarding the accuracy and completeness of updated drawings. Show on the
working and final record drawings , but not limited to, the following
information:
a.
The actual location, kinds and sizes of all sub-surface utility lines.
In order that the location of these lines and appurtenances may be
determined in the event the surface openings or indicators become
covered over or obscured, show by offset dimensions to two permanently
fixed surface features the end of each run including each change in
direction on the record drawings. Locate valves, splice boxes and
similar appurtenances by dimensioning along the utility run from a
reference point. Also record the average depth below the surface of
each run.
b.
The location and dimensions of any changes within the building

structure.
c.
Correct grade, elevations, cross section, or alignment of roads,

earthwork, structures or utilities if any changes were made from
contract plans.
SECTION 01 78 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
d.
Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from

working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the
Contractor; including but not limited to fabrication, erection,
installation plans and placing details, pipe sizes, insulation
material, dimensions of equipment foundations, etc.
e.
The topography, invert elevations and grades of drainage installed or

affected as part of the project construction.
f.
Changes or modifications which result from the final inspection.
g.
Where contract drawings or specifications present options, show only

the option selected for construction on the final as-built prints.
h.
If borrow material for this project is from sources on Government

property, or if Government property is used as a spoil area, furnish a
contour map of the final borrow pit/spoil area elevations.
i.
Systems designed or enhanced by the Contractor, such as HVAC controls,

fire alarm, fire sprinkler, and irrigation systems.
j.
Modifications (include within change order price the cost to change

working and final record drawings to reflect modifications) and
compliance with the following procedures.
(1)
Follow directions in the modification for posting descriptive

changes.
(2)
Place a Modification Delta at the location of each deletion.
(3)
For new details or sections which are added to a drawing, place a

Modification Delta by the detail or section title.
(4)
For minor changes, place a Modification Delta by the area changed

on the drawing (each location).
(5)
For major changes to a drawing, place a Modification Delta by the

title of the affected plan, section, or detail at each location.
(6)
For changes to schedules or drawings, place a Modification Delta

either by the schedule heading or by the change in the schedule.
(7)
The Modification Delta size shall be 1/2 inch diameter unless the
area where the circle is to be placed is crowded. Smaller size
circle shall be used for crowded areas.
1.3.1.3
Drawing Preparation
Modify the record drawings as may be necessary to correctly show the

features of the project as it has been constructed by bringing the contract
set into agreement with approved working as-built prints, and adding such
additional drawings as may be necessary. These working as-built marked
prints must be neat, legible and accurate. These drawings are part of the
permanent records of this project and must be returned to the Contracting
Officer after approval by the Government. Any drawings damaged or lost by
the Contractor must be satisfactorily replaced by the Contractor at no
expense to the Government.
SECTION 01 78 00
1.3.1.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Computer Aided Design and Drafting (CADD) Drawings
Only employ personnel proficient in the preparation of CADD drawings to

modify the contract drawings or prepare additional new drawings. Additions
and corrections to the contract drawings must be equal in quality and
detail to that of the originals. Line colors, line weights, lettering,
layering conventions, and symbols must be the same as the original line
colors, line weights, lettering, layering conventions, and symbols. If
additional drawings are required, prepare them using the specified
electronic file format applying the same graphic standards specified for
original drawings. The title block and drawing border to be used for any
new final record drawings must be identical to that used on the contract
drawings. Accomplish additions and corrections to the contract drawings
using CADD files. The Contractor will be furnished "as-designed" drawings
in Microstation V8 format compatible with a Windows XP operating system.
The electronic files will be supplied on compact disc, read-only memory
(CD-ROM). Provide all program files and hardware necessary to prepare
final record drawings. The Contracting Officer will review final record
drawings for accuracy and return them to the Contractor for required
corrections, changes, additions, and deletions.
a.
Provide CADD "base" colors of red, green, and blue.

changes as follows:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Color code for
Deletions (Red) - Over-strike deleted graphic items (lines),

lettering in notes and leaders.
Additions (Green) - Added items, lettering in notes and leaders.
Special (Blue) - Items requiring special information,
coordination, or special detailing or detailing notes.
b.
Rename the Contract Drawing files in a manner related to the contract

number (i.e., 98-C-10.DGN) as instructed in the Pre-Construction
conference. Use only those renamed files for the Marked-up changes.
All changes shall be made on the layer/level as the original item.
c.
When final revisions have been completed, show the wording "RECORD
DRAWINGS / AS-BUILT CONDITIONS" followed by the name of the Contractor
in letters at least 3/16 inch high on the cover sheet drawing. Mark
all other contract drawings either "Record" drawing denoting no
revisions on the sheet or "Revised Record" denoting one or more
revisions. Date original contract drawings in the revision block.
d.
Within 20 days for contracts $5 million and above after Government

approval of all of the working record drawings for a phase of work,
prepare the final CADD record drawings for that phase of work and
submit two sets of blue-lined prints of these drawings for Government
review and approval. The Government will promptly return one set of
prints annotated with any necessary corrections. Within 10 days for
contracts $5 million and above revise the CADD files accordingly at no
additional cost and submit one set of final prints for the completed
phase of work to the Government. Within 20 days for contracts $5
million and above of substantial completion of all phases of work,
submit the final record drawing package for the entire project. Submit
one set of electronic files on compact disc, read-only memory (CD-ROM),
one set of mylars, two sets of blue-line prints and one set of the
approved working record drawings. They must be complete in all details
and identical in form and function to the contract drawing files
SECTION 01 78 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
supplied by the Government. Any transactions or adjustments necessary

to accomplish this is the responsibility of the Contractor. The
Government reserves the right to reject any drawing files it deems
incompatible with the customer's CADD system. Paper prints, drawing
files and storage media submitted will become the property of the
Government upon final approval. Failure to submit final record drawing
files and marked prints as specified will be cause for withholding any
payment due the Contractor under this contract. Approval and
acceptance of final record drawings must be accomplished before final
payment is made to the Contractor.
1.3.1.5
Payment
No separate payment will be made for record drawings required under this
contract, and all costs accrued in connection with such drawings are
considered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor.
1.3.2
As-Built Record of Equipment and Materials
Furnish one copy of preliminary record of equipment and materials used on

the project 15 days prior to final inspection. This preliminary submittal
will be reviewed and returned 5 days after final inspection with Government
comments. Submit Two sets of final record of equipment and materials 10
days after final inspection. Key the designations to the related area
depicted on the contract drawings. List the following data:
RECORD OF DESIGNATED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS DATA
Description
1.3.3
Specification Manufacturer Composition

Section
and Catalog, and Size
Model, and
Serial Number
Where Used
Final Approved Shop Drawings
Furnish final approved project shop drawings 30 days after transfer of the
completed facility.
1.3.4
Construction Contract Specifications
Furnish final record (as-built) construction contract specifications,

including modifications thereto, 30 days after transfer of the completed
facility.
1.3.5
Real Property Equipment
Furnish a list of installed equipment furnished under this contract.

Include all information usually listed on manufacturer's name plate. In
the "EQUIPMENT-IN-PLACE LIST" include, as applicable, the following for
each piece of equipment installed: description of item, location (by room
number), model number, serial number, capacity, name and address of
manufacturer, name and address of equipment supplier, condition, spare
parts list, manufacturer's catalog, and warranty. Furnish a draft list at
time of transfer. Furnish the final list 30 days after transfer of the
completed facility.
SECTION 01 78 00
1.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
SPARE PARTS DATA

Submit copies of the Spare Parts Data list.
a.
Indicate manufacturer's name, part number, nomenclature, and stock

level required for maintenance and repair. List those items that may be
standard to the normal maintenance of the system.
b.
Supply five items of each part for spare parts inventory. Provision of
spare parts does not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities listed
under the contract guarantee provisions.
1.5
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
Submit Preventative Maintenance, Condition Monitoring (Predictive Testing)

and Inspection schedules with instructions that state when systems should
be retested.
a.
Define the anticipated length of each test, test apparatus, number of

personnel identified by responsibility, and a testing validation
procedure permitting the record operation capability requirements
within the schedule. Provide a signoff blank for the Contractor and
Contracting Officer for each test feature; e.g., gpm, rpm, psi.
Include a remarks column for the testing validation procedure
referencing operating limits of time, pressure, temperature, volume,
voltage, current, acceleration, velocity, alignment, calibration,
adjustments, cleaning, or special system notes. Delineate procedures
for preventative maintenance, inspection, adjustment, lubrication and
cleaning necessary to minimize corrective maintenance and repair.
b.
Repair requirements must inform operators how to check out,

troubleshoot, repair, and replace components of the system. Include
electrical and mechanical schematics and diagrams and diagnostic
techniques necessary to enable operation and troubleshooting of the
system after acceptance.
1.6
CERTIFICATION OF EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS
Submit the Certification of EPA Designated Items as required by FAR

52.223-9, "Certification and Estimate of Percentage of Recovered Material
Content for EPA Designated Items". Include on the certification form the
following information: project name, project number, Contractor name,
license number, Contractor address, and certification. The certification
will read as follows and be signed and dated by the Contractor. "I hereby
certify the information provided herein is accurate and that the
requisition/procurement of all materials listed on this form comply with
current EPA standards for recycled/recovered materials content. The
following exemptions may apply to the non-procurement of recycled/recovered
content materials: 1) The product does not meet appropriate performance
standards; 2) The product is not available within a reasonable time frame;
3) The product is not available competitively (from two or more sources);
4) The product is only available at an unreasonable price (compared with a
comparable non-recycled content product)." Record each product used in the
project that has a requirement or option of containing recycled or biobased
content in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED/RECOVERED MATERIALS,
noting total price, total value of post-industrial recycled content, total
value of post-consumer recycled content, exemptions (1, 2, 3, or 4, as
indicated), and comments. Recycled content values may be determined by
weight or volume percent, but must be consistent throughout.
SECTION 01 78 00
1.7
1.7.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
WARRANTY MANAGEMENT
Develop a warranty management plan which contains information relevant to

the clause Warranty of Construction. At least 30 days before the planned
pre-warranty conference, submit one set of the warranty management plan.
Include within the warranty management plan all required actions and
documents to assure that the Government receives all warranties to which it
is entitled. The plan must be in narrative form and contain sufficient
detail to render it suitable for use by future maintenance and repair
personnel, whether tradesmen, or of engineering background, not necessarily
familiar with this contract. The term "status" as indicated below must
include due date and whether item has been submitted or was accomplished.
Warranty information made available during the construction phase must be
submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to each monthly pay
estimate. Assemble approved information in a binder and turn over to the
Government upon acceptance of the work. The construction warranty period
will begin on the date of project acceptance and continue for the full
product warranty period. A joint 4 month and 9 month warranty inspection
will be conducted, measured from time of acceptance, by the Contractor,
Contracting Officer and the Customer Representative. Include within the
warranty management plan, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Roles and responsibilities of all personnel associated with the

warranty process, including points of contact and telephone numbers
within the organizations of the Contractors, subContractors,
manufacturers or suppliers involved.
b.
Furnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone number of
each of the guarantor's representatives nearest to the project location.
c.
Listing and status of delivery of all Certificates of Warranty for

extended warranty items, to include roofs, HVAC balancing, pumps,
motors, transformers, and for all commissioned systems such as fire
protection and alarm systems, sprinkler systems, lightning protection
systems, etc.
d.
A list for each warranted equipment, item, feature of construction or

system indicating:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Name of item.
Model and serial numbers.
Location where installed.
Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers.
Names, addresses and telephone numbers of sources of spare parts.
Warranties and terms of warranty. Include one-year overall
warranty of construction, including the starting date of warranty
of construction. Items which have extended warranties must be
indicated with separate warranty expiration dates.
(7) Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable.
(8) Starting point and duration of warranty period.
(9) Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue the
warranty in force.
(10) Cross-reference to specific pertinent Operation and Maintenance
manuals.
(11) Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call for
warranty service.
SECTION 01 78 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
(12) Typical response time and repair time expected for various
warranted equipment.
e.
The Contractor's plans for attendance at the 4 and 9 month

post-construction warranty inspections conducted by the Government.
f.
Procedure and status of tagging of all equipment covered by extended

warranties.
g.
Copies of instructions to be posted near selected pieces of equipment

where operation is critical for warranty and/or safety reasons.
1.7.2
Performance Bond
The Contractor's Performance Bond must remain effective throughout the

construction period .
a.
In the event the Contractor fails to commence and diligently pursue any
construction warranty work required, the Contracting Officer will have
the work performed by others, and after completion of the work, will
charge the remaining construction warranty funds of expenses incurred
by the Government while performing the work, including, but not limited
to administrative expenses.
b.
In the event sufficient funds are not available to cover the

construction warranty work performed by the Government at the
Contractor's expense, the Contracting Officer will have the right to
recoup expenses from the bonding company.
c.
Following oral or written notification of required construction

warranty repair work, respond in a timely manner. Written verification
will follow oral instructions. Failure of the Contractor to respond
will be cause for the Contracting Officer to proceed against the
Contractor.
1.7.3
Pre-Warranty Conference
Prior to contract completion, and at a time designated by the Contracting

Officer, meet with the Contracting Officer to develop a mutual
understanding with respect to the requirements of this section.
Communication procedures for Contractor notification of construction
warranty defects, priorities with respect to the type of defect, reasonable
time required for Contractor response, and other details deemed necessary
by the Contracting Officer for the execution of the construction warranty
will be established/reviewed at this meeting. In connection with these
requirements and at the time of the Contractor's quality control completion
inspection, furnish the name, telephone number and address of a licensed
and bonded company which is authorized to initiate and pursue construction
warranty work action on behalf of the Contractor. This point of contact
will be located within the local service area of the warranted
construction, be continuously available, and be responsive to Government
inquiry on warranty work action and status. This requirement does not
relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities in connection with
other portions of this provision.
1.7.4
Contractor's Response to Construction Warranty Service Requirements
Following oral or written notification by the Contracting Officer, respond

to construction warranty service requirements in accordance with the
SECTION 01 78 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
"Construction Warranty Service Priority List" and the three categories of

priorities listed below. Submit a report on any warranty item that has
been repaired during the warranty period. Include within the report the
cause of the problem, date reported, corrective action taken, and when the
repair was completed. If the Contractor does not perform the construction
warranty within the timeframes specified, the Government will perform the
work and backcharge the construction warranty payment item established.
a.
First Priority Code 1. Perform onsite inspection to evaluate

situation, and determine course of action within 4 hours, initiate work
within 6 hours and work continuously to completion or relief.
b.
Second Priority Code 2. Perform onsite inspection to evaluate

situation, and determine course of action within 8 hours, initiate work
within 24 hours and work continuously to completion or relief.
c.
Third Priority Code 3. All other work to be initiated within 3 work

days and work continuously to completion or relief.
d.
The "Construction Warranty Service Priority List" is as follows:

Code 1-Life Safety Systems
(1) Fire suppression systems.
(2) Fire alarm system(s) in place in the building.
Code
(1)
(2)
(3)
1-Air Conditioning Systems

Recreational support.
Air conditioning leak in part of building, if causing damage.
Air conditioning system not cooling properly.
Code 1-Doors
(1) Overhead doors not operational, causing a security, fire, or
safety problem.
(2) Interior, exterior personnel doors or hardware, not functioning
properly, causing a security, fire, or safety problem.
Code 3-Doors
(1) Overhead doors not operational.
(2) Interior/exterior personnel doors or hardware not functioning
properly.
Code 1-Electrical
(1) Power failure (entire area or any building operational after 1600
hours).
(2) Security lights
(3) Smoke detectors
Code 2-Electrical
(1) Power failure (no power to a room or part of building).
(2) Receptacle and lights (in a room or part of building).
Code 3-Electrical
Street lights.
Code 1-Gas
(1) Leaks and breaks.
(2) No gas to family housing unit or cantonment area.
Code 1-Heat
SECTION 01 78 00
(1)
(2)
W912HN-09-X-1813
Area power failure affecting heat.

Heater in unit not working.
Code 2-Kitchen Equipment

(1) Dishwasher not operating properly.
(2) All other equipment hampering preparation of a meal.
Code 1-Plumbing
(1) Hot water heater failure.
(2) Leaking water supply pipes.
Code
(1)
(2)
(3)
2-Plumbing
Flush valves not operating properly.
Fixture drain, supply line to commode, or any water pipe leaking.
Commode leaking at base.
Code 3 -Plumbing
Leaky faucets.
Code
(1)
(2)
(3)
3-Interior
Floors damaged.
Paint chipping or peeling.
Casework.
Code 1-Roof Leaks

Temporary repairs will be made where major damage to property is
occurring.
Code 2-Roof Leaks
Where major damage to property is not occurring, check for location of
leak during rain and complete repairs on a Code 2 basis.
Code 2-Water (Exterior)
No water to facility.
Code 2-Water (Hot)
No hot water in portion of building listed.
Code 3-All other work not listed above.
1.7.5
Warranty Tags
At the time of installation, tag each warranted item with a durable, oil
and water resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer. Attach each
tag with a copper wire and spray with a silicone waterproof coating. Also,
submit two record copies of the warranty tags showing the layout and
design. The date of acceptance and the QC signature must remain blank
until the project is accepted for beneficial occupancy. Show the following
information on the tag.
Type of
product/material
Model number
Serial number
Contract number
SECTION 01 78 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Warranty period from/to

Inspector's signature
Construction Contractor
Address
Telephone number
Warranty contact
Address
Telephone number
Warranty response time
priority code
WARNING - PROJECT PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE
DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD.
1.8
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Submit 6 copies of the project operation and maintenance manuals 30

calendar days prior to testing the system involved. Update and resubmit
data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to contract
completion.
1.8.1
Configuration
Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be consistent with the

manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions,
general operating procedures, and safety precautions. Bind information in
manual format and grouped by technical sections. Test data must be legible
and of good quality. Light-sensitive reproduction techniques are
acceptable provided finished pages are clear, legible, and not subject to
fading. Pages for vendor data and manuals must have 0.3937-inch holes and
be bound in 3-ring, loose-leaf binders. Organize data by separate index
and tabbed sheets, in a loose-leaf binder. Binder must lie flat with
printed sheets that are easy to read. Caution and warning indications must
be clearly labeled.
1.8.2
Training and Instruction
Submit classroom and field instructions in the operation and maintenance of

systems equipment where required by the technical provisions. These
services must be directed by the Contractor, using the manufacturer's
factory-trained personnel or qualified representatives. Contracting
Officer will be given 7 calendar days written notice of scheduled
instructional services. Instructional materials belonging to the
manufacturer or vendor, such as lists, static exhibits, and visual aids,
must be made available to the Contracting Officer.
1.9
CLEANUP
The Contractor shall keep the work area clean and remove all unneeded
SECTION 01 78 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
debris daily and / or as directed by the Construction Inspector.

1.10
REAL PROPERTY RECORD
Near the completion of Project, but a minimum of 60 days prior to final

acceptance of the work, complete and submit an accounting of all installed
property with Interim Form DD1354 "Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real
Property." Include any additional assets/improvements/alterations from the
Draft DD Form 1354. Contact the Contracting Officer for any project
specific information necessary to complete the DD Form 1354. Refer to
UFC 1-300-08 for instruction on completing the DD Form 1354. For
information purposes, a blank DD Form 1354 (fill-able) in ADOBE (PDF) may
be obtained at the following web site:
http:
//www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/eforms/dd1354.pdf
Submit the completed Checklist for Form DD1354 of Installed Building
Equipment items. Attach this list to the updated DD Form 1354.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 78 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 01 78 23A
*1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
07/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data specifically applicable to this

contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment,
product, or system, stressing and enhancing the importance of system
interactions, troubleshooting, and long-term preventative maintenance and
operation. The subcontractors shall compile and prepare data and deliver
to the Contractor prior to the training of Government personnel. The
Contractor shall compile and prepare aggregate O&M data including
clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built
conditions. Organize and present information in sufficient detail to
clearly explain O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and
subassembly level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in
accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.1.1
Package Quality
Documents must be fully legible. Poor quality copies and material with
hole punches obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted.
1.1.2
Package Content
Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled "Schedule of

Operation and Maintenance Data Packages." Comply with the data package
requirements specified in the individual technical sections, including the
content of the packages and addressing each product, component, and system
designated for data package submission, except as follows. Commissioned
items without a specified data package requirement in the individual
technical sections shall use Data Package 5. Commissioned items with a
Data Package 1 or 2 requirement shall use instead Data Package 5.
1.1.3
Changes to Submittals
Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data shall be

furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so affected
subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Changes, additions, or revisions
required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of submitted data,
shall be submitted by the Contractor within 30 calendar days of the
notification of this change requirement.
1.1.4
Review and Approval
The Contractor's Commissioning Authority (CA) shall review the commissioned

systems and equipment submittals for completeness and applicability. The
CA shall verify that the systems and equipment provided meet the
requirements of the Contract documents and design intent, particularly as
they relate to functionality, energy performance, water performance,
maintainability, sustainability, system cost, indoor environmental
quality, and local environmental impacts. The CA shall communicate
deficiencies to the Contracting Officer. Upon a successful review of the
corrections, the CA shall recommend approval and acceptance of these O&M
SECTION 01 78 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
manuals to the Contracting Officer. This work shall be in addition

normal review procedures for O&M data.
1.1.5
to the
O&M Database
Develop a database from the O&M manuals that contains the information
required to start a preventative maintenance program.
1.2
TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES
1.2.1
Operating Instructions
Include specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the

following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each
system:
1.2.1.1
Safety Precautions
List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all
operating conditions.
1.2.1.2
Operator Prestart
Include procedures required to install, set up, and prepare each system for
use.
1.2.1.3
Startup, Shutdown, and Post-Shutdown Procedures
Provide narrative description for Startup, Shutdown and Post-shutdown

operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure.
1.2.1.4
Normal Operations
Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures. Include

Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and
specific equipment.
1.2.1.5
Emergency Operations
Include Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short

period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent
further damage to systems and equipment. Include Emergency Shutdown
Instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable
contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of
all utility systems including required valve positions, valve locations and
zones or portions of systems controlled.
1.2.1.6
Operator Service Requirements
Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as

lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and recording gage readings.
1.2.1.7
Environmental Conditions
Include a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature, humidity, and

other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each
product, component or system. Describe conditions under which the item
equipment should not be allowed to run.
SECTION 01 78 23
1.2.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Preventive Maintenance
Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance

to minimize corrective maintenance and repair for the installed model and
features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air
quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.
1.2.2.1
Lubrication Data
Include preventative maintenance lubrication data, in addition to

instructions for lubrication provided under paragraph titled "Operator
Service Requirements":
a.
A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges

and applications.
b.
Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication

points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities.
c.
A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency.
1.2.2.2
Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule
Include manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance,

inspections, tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical
operation and to minimize corrective maintenance. Provide manufacturer's
projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily, weekly,
monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft.
For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified frequency and
procedures for each separate operation.
1.2.3
Corrective Maintenance (Repair)
Include manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for

correcting problems and making repairs.
1.2.3.1
Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques
Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical

malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what
conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test
equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused
or require replacement.
1.2.3.2
Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of

wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a
complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and
control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and
pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to
actual installation configuration and numbering.
1.2.3.3
Maintenance and Repair Procedures
Include instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the

product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.
SECTION 01 78 23
1.2.3.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Removal and Replacement Instructions
Include step-by-step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for
removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies,
subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances,
dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Instructions shall include
a combination of text and illustrations.
1.2.3.5
Spare Parts and Supply Lists
Include lists of
repair to ensure
delays. Special
locations. List
obtain.
1.2.4
spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and

continued service or operation without unreasonable
consideration is required for facilities at remote
spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to
Corrective Maintenance Work-Hours
Include manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance work-hours

including requirements by type of craft. Corrective maintenance that
requires completion or participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be
identified and tabulated separately.
1.2.5
Appendices
Provide information required below and information not specified in the

preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the
product or equipment. Include the following:
1.2.5.1
Product Submittal Data
Provide a copy of all SD-03 Product Data submittals required in the

applicable technical sections.
1.2.5.2
Manufacturer's Instructions
Provide a copy of all SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions submittals required

in the applicable technical sections.
1.2.5.3
O&M Submittal Data
Provide a copy of all SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals

required in the applicable technical sections.
1.2.5.4
Parts Identification
Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component,

assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to
replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to
use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial
number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further
identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and
exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When
illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations
and separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key number that
will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown
in the listings shall be grouped by components, assemblies, and
subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice.
Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment,
SECTION 01 78 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as

typically shown in a master parts catalog
1.2.5.5
Warranty Information
List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing
and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract
documents in order to keep warranties in force. Include warranty
information for primary components such as the compressor of air
conditioning system.
1.2.5.6
Personnel Training Requirements
Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for

use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the
equipment and systems.
1.2.5.7
Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information
Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests

and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of
components.
1.2.5.8
Testing and Performance Data
Include completed prefunctional checklists, functional performance test

forms, and monitoring reports. Include recommended schedule for retesting
and blank test forms.
1.2.5.9
Contractor Information
Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the
General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or
equipment, or system. For each item, also provide the name address and
telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service
organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project
site. Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product,
equipment, and system manufacturers.
1.3
TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN CONTROLS O&M DATA PACKAGES
Include Data Package 5 and the following for control systems:

a.
Narrative description on how to perform and apply all functions,

features, modes, and other operations, including unoccupied operation,
seasonal changeover, manual operation, and alarms. Include detailed
technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and
algorithms.
b.
Full as-built sequence of operations.
c.
Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the

Contractor (not Cx tests).
d.
Full points list. A listing of rooms shall be provided with the

following information for each room:
(1)
Floor
SECTION 01 78 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
(2)
Room number
(3)
Room name
(4)
Air handler unit ID
(5)
Reference drawing number
(6)
Air terminal unit tag ID
(7)
Heating and/or cooling valve tag ID
(8)
Minimum cfm
(9)
Maximum cfm
e.
Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and
acceptance of the system.
f.
Full as-built print out of software program.
g.
Electronic copy on disk or CD of the entire program for this facility.
h.
Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor

plan and mechanical drawings with their control system designations.
1.4
SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES
Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections.

The required information for each O&M data package is as follows:
1.4.1
Data Package 1
a.
Safety precautions
b.
Cleaning recommendations
c.
Maintenance and repair procedures
d.
Warranty information
e.
Contractor information
f.
Spare parts and supply list
1.4.2
Data Package 2
a.
Safety precautions
b.
Normal operations
c.
Environmental conditions
d.
Lubrication data
e.
Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
f.
SECTION 01 78 23
g.
h.
Removal and replacement instructions
i.
j.
Parts identification
k.
l.
1.4.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Data Package 3
a.
Safety precautions
b.
Operator prestart
c.
Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
d.
Normal operations
e.
Emergency operations
f.
g.
Lubrication data
h.
i.
j.
Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
k.
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
l.
m.
n.
o.
Product submittal data
p.
O&M submittal data
q.
r.
s.
Testing equipment and special tool information
t.
Testing and performance data
u.
1.4.4
a.
Data Package 4
Safety precautions
SECTION 01 78 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
b.
Operator prestart
c.
Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
d.
Normal operations
e.
Emergency operations
f.
Operator service requirements
g.
h.
Lubrication data
i.
j.
k.
l.
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
m.
n.
o.
p.
Corrective maintenance man-hours
q.
r.
O&M submittal data
s.
t.
u.
Personnel training requirements
v.
w.
x.
1.4.5
Data Package 5
a.
Safety precautions
b.
Operator prestart
c.
Start-up, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
d.
Normal operations
e.
SECTION 01 78 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
f.
g.
h.
Wiring and control diagrams
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Manufacturer's instructions
n.
O&M submittal data
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 78 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 02 41 00A
*1 DEMOLITION
05/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 145
(1991; R 2008) Standard Specification for

Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes
AASHTO T 180
(2010) Standard Method of Test for

Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using
a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm
(18-in.) Drop

ASSE/SAFE A10.6
(2006) Safety Requirements for Demolition

Operations

EM 385-1-1
(2008; Errata 1-2010; Changes 1-3 2010;

Requirements Manual

40 CFR 61
1.2
1.2.1
National Emission Standards for Hazardous

Air Pollutants
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Demolition/Deconstruction Plan
Prepare a Demolition Plan and submit proposed salvage, demolition, and

removal procedures for approval before work is started. Include in the
plan procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified
to be salvaged, coordination with other work in progress and a detailed
description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of
the sequence of operations. Coordinate with Waste Management Plan.
1.2.2
General Requirements
Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the

Contracting Officer. Remove rubbish and debris from the project site; do
not allow accumulations . In the interest of occupational safety and
SECTION 02 41 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
health, perform the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 23,

Demolition, and other applicable Sections.
1.3
ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE
Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in

place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Government. Repair
or replace damaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer.
Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated.
Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required.
Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval by the
Contracting Officer prior to performing such work.
1.3.1
Existing Construction Limits and Protection
Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or

necessary for installation of new construction. Provide protective
measures to control accumulation and migration of dust and dirt in all work
areas. Remove dust, dirt, and debris from work areas daily.
1.3.2
Weather Protection
For portions of the building to remain, protect building interior and

materials and equipment from the weather at all times. Where removal of
existing roofing is necessary to accomplish work, have materials and
workmen ready to provide adequate and temporary covering of exposed areas.
1.3.3
Trees
Protect trees within the project site which might be damaged during
demolition, and which are indicated to be left in place, by a 6 foot high
fence. Erect and secure fence at the drip line of individual trees or
follow the outer perimeter of branches or clumps of trees. Replace any
tree designated to remain that is damaged during the work under this
contract with like-kind or as approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.3.4
Utility Service
Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect

against damage during demolition and deconstruction operations. Prior to
start of work, utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be
shut off by the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor .
1.3.5
Facilities
Protect electrical utilities. Where removal of existing utilities is

specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of
exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical
utilities.
Ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left
unsupported and place and secure bracing, shoring, or lateral supports as
may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or
demolition work performed under this contract.
1.4
BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and
debris will not be permitted .
SECTION 02 41 00
1.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREAS
Areas in which the work is to be accomplished will be available in

accordance with the following schedule:
Monday-Friday, 0800 to 1730, excluding Federal Holidays or as approved by
1.6
SUBMITTALS
Existing Conditions; G, RO
SD-07 Certificates
Demolition Plan; G, RO
Notification; G, RO

Receipts
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Submit timely notification of demolition projects to Federal, State,

regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M.
Notify the the Contracting Officer in writing 10 working days prior to the
commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Comply with
federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to
the requirements of the "Contract Clauses," conform to the safety
requirements contained in ASSE/SAFE A10.6. Comply with the Environmental
Protection Agency requirements specified. Use of explosives will not be
permitted.
1.8
1.8.1
PROTECTION
Protection of Personnel
Before, during and after the demolition work continuously evaluate the
condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to
protect all personnel working in and around the project site. No area,
section, or component of floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, or other
structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient
bracing, shoring, or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while
workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area.
1.9
RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with

workmen skilled in the trades involved. Repair or replace items to be
relocated which are damaged by the Contractor with new undamaged items as
SECTION 02 41 00
1.10
W912HN-09-X-1813
EXISTING CONDITIONS
Before beginning any demolition or deconstruction work, survey the site and
examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the
work. Record existing conditions in the presence of the Contracting
Officer showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent
to areas of alteration or removal. Photographs sized 4 inch will be
acceptable as a record of existing conditions. Include in the record the
elevation of the top of foundation walls, finish floor elevations, possible
conflicting electrical conduits, plumbing lines, alarms systems, the
location and extent of existing cracks and other damage and description of
surface conditions that exist prior to before starting work. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to verify and document all required outages
which will be required during the course of work, and to note these outages
on the record document. Submit survey results.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
FILL MATERIAL
a.
Comply with excavating, backfilling, and compacting procedures for

soils used as backfill material to fill excavations resulting from
demolition or deconstruction of structures.
b.
Fill material shall conform to the definition of satisfactory soil

material as defined in AASHTO M 145, Soil Classification Groups A-1,
A-2-4, A-2-5 and A-3. In addition, fill material shall be free from
roots and other organic matter, trash, debris, frozen materials, and
stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension.
c.
Proposed fill material must be sampled and tested by an approved soil

testing laboratory, as follows:
PART 3
3.1
Soil classification
AASHTO M 145
Moisture-density relations
AASHTO T 180, Method B or D
EXECUTION
EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
Inspect and evaluate existing structures onsite for reuse. Existing

construction scheduled to be removed for reuse shall be disassembled.
Dismantled and removed materials are to be separated, set aside, and
prepared as specified, and stored or delivered to a collection point for
reuse, remanufacture, recycling, or other disposal, as specified.
Materials shall be designated for reuse onsite whenever possible.
3.1.1
Structures
a.
Remove existing structures indicated to be removed to 3 feet below

grade. I
b.
Building, or the remaining portions thereof, not exceeding 80 feet in

height may be demolished by the mechanical method of demolition.
SECTION 02 41 00
3.1.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Utilities and Related Equipment
3.1.2.1
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities,

except when authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer. Do not
interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the
Government except when approved in writing and then only after temporary
utility services have been approved and provided. Do not begin demolition
work until all utility disconnections have been made. Shut off and cap
utilities for future use, as indicated.
3.1.2.2
Disconnecting Existing Utilities
Remove existing utilities , as indicated and terminate in a manner

conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility
and approved by the Contracting Officer. When utility lines are
encountered but are not indicated on the drawings, notify the Contracting
Officer prior to further work in that area. Remove meters and related
equipment and deliver to a location in accordance with instructions of the
3.2
CONCURRENT EARTH-MOVING OPERATIONS
Do not begin excavation, filling, and other earth-moving operations that

are sequential to demolition work in areas occupied by structures to be
demolished until all demolition in the area has been completed and debris
removed. Fill holes, open basements and other hazardous openings.
3.3
3.3.1
DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
Title to Materials
Except for salvaged items specified in related Sections, and for materials
or equipment scheduled for salvage, all materials and equipment removed and
not reused or salvaged, shall become the property of the Contractor and
shall be removed from Government property. Title to materials resulting
from demolition and deconstruction, and materials and equipment to be
removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Contracting
Officer of the Contractor's demolition, deconstruction, and removal
procedures, and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin
demolition and deconstruction. The Government will not be responsible for
the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract
award. Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is
prohibited.
3.4
CLEANUP
Remove debris and rubbish from basement and similar excavations. Remove
and transport the debris in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or
adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal.
3.5
3.5.1
DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS

Regulation of Removed Materials
Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other nonsalvageable materials

resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal, state and
SECTION 02 41 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
local regulations as contractually specified off the Government property.

Storage of removed materials on the project site is prohibited.
3.5.2
Burning on Government Property
Burning of materials removed from demolished and deconstructed structures

will not be permitted on Government property .
SECTION 02 41 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 03 30 00A
*1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
11/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)
ACI/MCP-1
(2010) Manual of Concrete Practice Part 1
ACI/MCP-2
ACI/MCP-3
ACI/MCP-4

(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 182
(2009) Standard Specification for Burlap

Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton
Mats
AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)

AHA A135.4
(1995; R 2004) Basic Hardboard

ASTM A 185/A 185M
(2007) Standard Specification for Steel

Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete
ASTM A 496/A 496M

Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 615/A 615M

Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 706/A 706M

Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 82/A 82M

Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C 1017/C 1017M
(2007) Standard Specification for Chemical

Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing
Concrete
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
ASTM C 1107/C 1107M
(2008) Standard Specification for Packaged

Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
ASTM C 1240
(2005) Standard Specification for Silica

Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures
ASTM C 1260
(2007) Standard Test Method for Potential

Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates
(Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C 143/C 143M
(2010) Standard Test Method for Slump of

Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C 150/C 150M
(2009) Standard Specification for Portland

Cement
ASTM C 156
(2009a) Standard Test Method for Water

Retention by Concrete Curing Materials
ASTM C 1567
(2008) Standard Test Method for Potential

Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations
of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate
(Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C 171
(2007) Standard Specification for Sheet

Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C 172
(2008) Standard Practice for Sampling

Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 173/C 173M
(2010a) Standard Test Method for Air

Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
ASTM C 192/C 192M
(2007) Standard Practice for Making and

Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory
ASTM C 231
(2009b) Standard Test Method for Air

Pressure Method
ASTM C 233
(2007) Standard Test Method for

Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 260
(2006) Standard Specification for

Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 295
(2008) Petrographic Examination of

Aggregates for Concrete
ASTM C 309
(2007) Standard Specification for Liquid

Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
ASTM C 31/C 31M

Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C 311
(2007) Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or

SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral

Admixture in Portland-Cement Concrete
ASTM C 33/C 33M
(2008) Standard Specification for Concrete

Aggregates
ASTM C 330

Lightweight Aggregates for Structural
Concrete
ASTM C 39/C 39M
(2009a) Standard Test Method for

Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens
ASTM C 42/C 42M
(2010) Standard Test Method for Obtaining

and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete
ASTM C 494/C 494M
(2010a) Standard Specification for

Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 567
(2005a) Determining Density of Structural

Lightweight Concrete
ASTM C 595/C 595M
(2010) Standard Specification for Blended

Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C 618
(2008a) Standard Specification for Coal

Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C 881/C 881M

Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete
ASTM C 920

Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C 932

Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for
Exterior Plastering
ASTM C 94/C 94M

Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 989
(2009a) Standard Specification for Slag

Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars
ASTM D 1557
(2009) Standard Test Methods for

Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000
ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D 1751

Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types)
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
ASTM D 1752
(2004a; R 2008) Standard Specification for

Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled
PVC Expansion
ASTM D 5759
(1995; R 2005) Characterization of Coal

Fly Ash and Clean Coal Combustion Fly Ash
for Potential Uses
ASTM D 6690
(2007) Standard Specification for Joint

and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for
Concrete and Asphalt Pavements
ASTM D 7116
(2005) Standard Specification for Joint

Sealants, Hot Applied, Jet Fuel Resistant
Types, for Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement
ASTM E 1745
(2009) Standard Specification for Water

Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil
or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs
ASTM E 329
(2009) Standard Specification for Agencies

of Materials Used in Construction
CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)

CRSI 10MSP
(2001; 27Ed) Manual of Standard Practice
FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL (FSC)

FSC STD 01 001
(2000) Principles and Criteria for Forest

Stewardship
NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)

NIST PS 1
(2007) DOC Voluntary Product Standard PS

1-07, Structural Plywood

COE CRD-C 572
(1974) Corps of Engineers Specifications

for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops

DOC/NIST PS1
(1995) Construction and Industrial Plywood

with Typical APA Trademarks

FS MMM-A-001993
(1978) Adhesive, Epoxy, Flexible, Filled

(For Binding, Sealing, and Grouting)
FS SS-S-200
(Rev E; Am 2) Sealant, Joint,

Two-Component, Jet-Blast-Resistant,
Cold-Applied, for Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

LEED
1.2
(2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and

Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
Rating System for New Construction
(LEED-NC)
DEFINITIONS
a.
"Cementitious material" as used herein must include all portland

cement, pozzolan, fly ash, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and
silica fume.
b.
"Exposed to public view" means situated so that it can be seen from eye
level from a public location after completion of the building. A
public location is accessible to persons not responsible for operation
or maintenance of the building.
c.
"Chemical admixtures" are materials in the form of powder or fluids

that are added to the concrete to give it certain characteristics not
obtainable with plain concrete mixes.
d.
"Workability (or consistence)" is the ability of a fresh (plastic)

concrete mix to fill the form/mould properly with the desired work
(vibration) and without reducing the concrete's quality. Workability
depends on water content, chemical admixtures, aggregate (shape and
size distribution), cementitious content and age (level of hydration).
1.3
SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings for concrete formwork must be submitted by
the Contractor in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Shop
Drawings," of this section, to include the following:
Reinforcing steel; G, RO
Reproductions of contract drawings are unacceptable.
SD-03 Product Data
Materials for curing concrete
Joint sealants; (LEED)
Submit manufacturer's product data, indicating VOC content.
Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items must include
printed instructions for admixtures, bonding agents, epoxy-resin
adhesive binders, waterstops, and liquid chemical floor hardeners.
Joint filler; (LEED)
Plastic Forms
Carton Forms
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Recycled Aggregate Materials; (LEED)

Cement; (LEED)
Portland Cement
Ready-Mix Concrete
Bonding Materials
Floor Finish Materials
Reinforcement; (LEED)
Reinforcement Materials
Submit documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial

and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate
relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar
value of products included in project.
Vapor barrier
Waterstops
Wood Forms
Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)
Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing
facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material
origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of
local/regional materials to total dollar value of products
included in project.
SD-05 Design Data
Concrete mix design; G, RO
Thirty days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix
design for each strength and type of concrete. Submit a complete
list of materials including type; brand; source and amount of
cement, fly ash, pozzolans, silica fume, ground slag , and
admixtures; and applicable reference specifications. Provide mix
proportion data using at least three different water-cement ratios
for each type of mixture, which produce a range of strength
encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete
required. If source material changes, resubmit mix proportion
data using revised source material. Provide only materials that
have been proven by trial mix studies to meet the requirements of
this specification, unless otherwise approved in writing by the
Contracting Officer. Indicate clearly in the submittal where each
mix design is used when more than one mix design is submitted.
Submit additional data regarding concrete aggregates if the source
of aggregate changes. Submit copies of the fly ash, silica fume,
and pozzolan test results, in addition. The approval of fly ash,
silica fume, and pozzolan test results must be within 6 months of
submittal date. Obtain acknowledgement of receipt prior to
concrete placement.
SD-06 Test Reports
Concrete mix design; G, RO
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Fly ash
Pozzolan
Ground granulated blast-furnace slag
Aggregates
Compressive strength tests
Unit weight of structural lightweight concrete
Air Content
Slump
Air Entrainment
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification
Fly ash
Ground granulated blast-furnace slag
Submit mill certificates for Steel Bar according to the
paragraph entitled, "Fabrication," of this section.
Provide certificates for concrete that are in accordance with
the paragraph entitled, "Classification and Quality of Concrete,"
of this section. Provide certificates that contain project name
and number, date, name of Contractor, name of concrete testing
service, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer,
brand name of manufactured materials, material name, values as
specified for each material, and test results. Provide
certificates for Welder Qualifications that are in accordance with
the paragraph entitled, "Qualifications for Welding Work," of this
section.

1.4
MODIFICATION OF REFERENCES
Accomplish work in accordance with ACI publications except as modified

herein. Consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory.
Interpret reference to the "Building Official," the "Structural Engineer,"
and the "Architect/Engineer" to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.5
Do not deliver concrete until vapor barrier, forms, reinforcement,

embedded items, and chamfer strips are in place and ready for concrete
placement. ACI/MCP-2 for job site storage of materials. Protect materials
from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt. Ensure materials can be
accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed. Do not
store concrete curing compounds or sealers with materials that have a high
capacity to adsorb volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions. Do not store
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
concrete curing compounds or sealers in occupied spaces.

1.5.1
Reinforcement
Store reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or

racks raised above the ground to avoid excessive rusting. Protect from
contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt. Ensure bar sizes can be
accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1
1.6.1.1
Design Data
Formwork Calculations
ACI/MCP-4. Include design calculations indicating arrangement of forms,

sizes and grades of supports (lumber), panels, and related components.
Furnish drawings and calculations of shoring and re-shoring methods
proposed for floor and roof slabs, spandrel beams, and other horizontal
concrete members.
1.6.2
1.6.2.1
Drawings
Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings for Reinforcement Materials,

and for
Special Construction must indicate concrete pressure calculations with both
live and dead loads, along with material types. Provide all design
calculations in accordance with ACI/MCP-2 and ACI/MCP-3.
1.6.2.2
Reinforcing Steel
ACI/MCP-4. Indicate bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing and laps

of bars, shapes, dimensions, and details of bar reinforcing, accessories,
and concrete cover. Do not scale dimensions from structural drawings to
determine lengths of reinforcing bars.
1.6.3
1.6.3.1
Control Submittals
Curing Concrete Elements
Submit proposed materials and methods for curing concrete elements.

1.6.3.2
Pumping Concrete
Submit proposed materials and methods for pumping concrete. Submittal must
include mix designs, pumping equipment including type of pump and size and
material for pipe, and maximum length and height concrete is to be pumped.
1.6.3.3
Material Safety Data Sheets
Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials that are
regulated for hazardous health effects. Prominently post the MSDS at the
construction site.
SECTION 03 30 00
1.6.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Test Reports
1.6.4.1
Concrete Mix Design
Submit copies of laboratory test reports showing that the mix has been
successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and
that mix must be suitable for the job conditions. Include mill test and
all other test for cement, silica fume, aggregates, and admixtures in the
laboratory test reports. Provide maximum nominal aggregate size, gradation
analysis, percentage retained and passing sieve, and a graph of percentage
retained verses sieve size. Submit test reports along with the concrete
mix design. Obtain approval before concrete placement.
1.6.4.2
Fly Ash and Pozzolan
Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C 618 for fly ash and
pozzolan. Submit test results performed within 6 months of submittal
date. Submit manufacturer's policy statement on fly ash use in concrete.
1.6.4.3
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag
Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C 989 for ground granulated
blast-furnace slag. Submit test results performed within 6 months of
submittal date. Submit manufacturer's policy statement on slag use in
concrete.
1.6.4.4
Aggregates
ASTM C 1260 for potential alkali-silica reactions, ASTM C 295 for

petrographic analysis.
1.6.5
Special Finisher Qualifications
For 35 percent or more fly ash content as a percentage of cementitious

materials, finisher must have a minimum of 3 years' experience finishing
high-volume fly ash concrete.
1.7
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Provide space ventilation according to manufacturer recommendations, at a

minimum, during and following installation of concrete curing compound and
sealer. Maintain one of the following ventilation conditions during the
curing compound/sealer curing period or for 72 hours after installation:
a. Supply 100 percent outside air 24 hours a day.
b. Supply airflow at a rate of 6 air changes per hour, when outside
temperatures are between 55 degrees F and 84 degrees F and humidity is
between 30 percent and 60 percent.
c. Supply airflow at a rate of 1.5 air changes per hour, when outside air
conditions are not within the range stipulated above.
1.7.1
Submittals for Environmental Performance
a. Provide data indication the percentage of post-industrial pozzolan (fly

ash, blast furnace slag) cement substitution as a percentage of the
full product composite by weight.
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
b. Provide data indicating the percentage of post-industrial and

post-consumer recycled content aggregate.
c. Provide product data indicating the percentage of post-consumer recycled
steel content in each type of steel reinforcement as a percentage of
the full product composite by weight.
d. Provide product data stating the location where all products were
manufactured
e. For projects using FSC certified formwork, provide chain-of-custody
documentation for all certified wood products.
f. For projects using reusable formwork, provide data showing how formwork
is reused.
g. Provide MSDS product information data showing that form release agents
meet any environmental performance goals such as using vegetable and
soy based products.
h. Provide MSDS product information data showing that concrete adhesives
meet any environmental performance goals including low emitting, low
volatile organic compound products.
1.8
1.8.1
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as

manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources. Concrete materials may be locally
available.
1.8.2
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification
Use FSC-certified wood where specified. Provide letter of certification

signed by lumber supplier. Indicate compliance with FSC STD 01 001 and
identify certifying organization. Submit FSC certification numbers;
identify each certified product on a line-item basis. Submit copies of
invoices bearing the FSC certification numbers.
1.9
QUALIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE TESTING SERVICE
Perform concrete testing by an approved laboratory and inspection service

experienced in sampling and testing concrete. Testing agency must meet the
requirements of ASTM E 329.
1.10
CONCRETE SAMPLING AND TESTING
Testing by the Contractor must include sampling and testing concrete

materials proposed for use in the work and testing the design mix for each
class of concrete. Perform quality control testing during construction.
Sample and test concrete aggregate materials proposed for use in the work
in accordance with ASTM C 33/C 33M.
Sample and test portland cement in accordance with ASTM C 150/C 150M.
Sample and test air-entraining admixtures in accordance with ASTM C 233.
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Testing must be performed by a Grade I Testing Technician.

PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS FOR FORMS
Provide wood, plywood, plastic, carton, or steel.

forms where a smooth form finish is required.
2.1.1
Use plywood or steel
Wood Forms
Use lumber as follows. Provide lumber that is square edged or

tongue-and-groove boards, free of raised grain, knotholes, or other surface
defects. Provide plywood that complies with DOC/NIST PS1, B-B concrete
form panels or better or AHA A135.4, hardboard for smooth form lining.
Submit data verifying that composite wood products contain no urea
formaldehyde resins. Virgin wood used must be FSC-certified.
2.1.1.1
Concrete Form Plywood (Standard Rough)
Provide plywood that conforms to NIST PS 1, B-B, concrete form, not less
than 5/8-inch thick.
2.1.1.2
Overlaid Concrete Form Plywood (Standard Smooth)
Provide plywood that conforms to NIST PS 1, B-B, high density form overlay,
not less than 5/8-inch thick.
2.1.2
Plastic Forms
Provide plastic forms that contain a minimum of 50 percent post-consumer

recycled content, or a minimum of 50 percent post-industrial recycled
content.
2.1.3
Carton Forms
Moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, structurally

sufficient to support weight of wet concrete until initial set. Provide
carton forms that contain a minimum of 5 percent post-consumer recycled
content, or a minimum of 20 percent post-industrial recycled content.
2.1.4
Steel Forms
Provide steel form surfaces that do not contain irregularities, dents, or

sags.
2.2
FORM TIES AND ACCESSORIES
The use of wire alone is prohibited. Provide form ties and accessories
that do not reduce the effective cover of the reinforcement.
2.2.1
Polyvinylchloride Waterstops
COE CRD-C 572.

2.2.2
Dovetail Anchor Slot
Preformed metal slot approximately 1 by 1 inch of not less than 22 gage

SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
galvanized steel cast in concrete. Coordinate actual size and throat

opening with dovetail anchors and provide with removable filler material.
2.3
CONCRETE
2.3.1
Contractor-Furnished Mix Design
ACI/MCP-1, ACI/MCP-2, and ACI/MCP-3 except as otherwise specified.

Indicate the compressive strength (f'c) of the concrete for each portion of
the structure(s) and as specified below.
Location
All areas
f'c
ASTM C 33/C 33M
(Min. 28Maximum
Range
Day Comp.
Nominal
of
Strength) Aggregate
Slump
(psi)
(Size No.)
(inches)
4000 psi
57
Maximum
WaterCement
Air
Ratio
Entr.
(by weight) (percent)
0.45
Maximum slump shown above may be increased 1 inch for methods of

consolidation other than vibration. Slump may be increased to 8 inches
when superplasticizers are used. Provide air entrainment using
air-entraining admixture. Provide air entrainment within plus or minus 1.5
percent of the value specified. The water soluble chloride ion
concentrations in hardened concrete at ages from 28 to 42 days must not
exceed 0.15.
Proportion concrete mixes for strength at 28 days.
2.3.1.1
Mix Proportions for Normal Weight Concrete
Trial design batches, mixture proportioning studies, and testing

requirements for various classes and types of concrete specified are the
responsibility of the Contractor. Base mixture proportions on compressive
strength as determined by test specimens fabricated in accordance with
ASTM C 192/C 192M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M. Samples
of all materials used in mixture proportioning studies must be
representative of those proposed for use in the project and must be
accompanied by the manufacturer's or producer's test report indicating
compliance with these specifications. Base trial mixtures having
proportions, consistencies, and air content suitable for the work on
methodology described in ACI/MCP-1. In the trial mixture, use at least
three different water-cement ratios for each type of mixture, which must
produce a range of strength encompassing those required for each class and
type of concrete required on the project. The maximum water-cement ratio
required must be based on equivalent water-cement ratio calculations as
determined by the conversion from the weight ratio of water to cement plus
pozzolan, silica fume, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag by weight
equivalency method. Design laboratory trial mixture for maximum permitted
slump and air content. Each combination of material proposed for use must
have separate trial mixture, except for accelerator or retarder use can be
provided without separate trial mixture. Report the temperature of
concrete in each trial batch. For each water-cement ratio, at least three
test cylinders for each test age must be made and cured in accordance with
ASTM C 192/C 192M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M for 7 and
28 days. From these results, plot a curve showing the relationship between
water-cement ratio and strength for each set of trial mix studies. In
addition, plot a curve showing the relationship between 7 and 28 day
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
strengths.
2.3.1.2
Lightweight Concrete Proportion
ACI/MCP-1, using weight method. Provide ASTM C 330 aggregates for

concrete; 115 pcf (dry) for floors with a 4000 psi minimum compressive
strength at 28 days.
2.3.1.3
Required Average Strength of Mix Design
The selected mixture must produce an average compressive strength exceeding

the specified strength by the amount indicated in ACI/MCP-2. When a
concrete production facility has a record of at least 15 consecutive tests,
the standard deviation must be calculated and the required average
compressive strength must be determined in accordance with ACI/MCP-2. When
a concrete production facility does not have a suitable record of tests to
establish a standard deviation, the required average strength must follow
ACI/MCP-2 requirements.
2.3.2
Ready-Mix Concrete
Provide concrete that meets the requirements of ASTM C 94/C 94M.

Ready-mixed concrete manufacturer must provide duplicate delivery tickets
with each load of concrete delivered. Provide delivery tickets with the
following information in addition to that required by ASTM C 94/C 94M:
Type and brand cement
Cement content in 95-pound bags per cubic yard of concrete
Maximum size of aggregate
Amount and brand name of admixtures
Total water content expressed by water/cement ratio
2.3.3
2.3.3.1

Absorptive Cover
Provide burlap cloth cover for curing concrete made from jute or kenaf,
weighing 10 ounces plus or minus 5 percent per square yard when clean and
dry, conforming to ASTM C 171, Class 3; or cover may be cotton mats as
approved.
2.3.3.2
Moisture-Retaining Cover
Provide waterproof paper cover for curing concrete conforming to ASTM C 171,
regular or white, or polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM C 171, or
polyethylene-coated burlap consisting of a laminate of burlap and a white
opaque polyethylene film permanently bonded to the burlap; burlap must
conform to ASTM C 171, Class 3, and polyethylene film must conform to
ASTM C 171. When tested for water retention in accordance with ASTM C 156,
weight of water lost 72 hours after application of moisture retaining
covering material must not exceed 0.039 gram per square centimeter of the
mortar specimen surface.
SECTION 03 30 00
2.3.3.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
Provide liquid type compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear, Type
1D with fugitive dye for interior work and Type 2, white, pigmented for
exterior work.
2.4
MATERIALS
2.4.1
Cement
ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II or ASTM C 595/C 595M, Type blended cement
except as modified herein. Provide blended cement that consists of a
mixture of ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II, cement and one of the following
materials: ASTM C 618 pozzolan or fly ash, ASTM C 989 ground granulated
blast-furnace slag. For portland cement manufactured in a kiln fueled by
hazardous waste, maintain a record of source for each batch. Supplier must
certify that no hazardous waste is used in the fuel mix or raw materials.
For exposed concrete, use one manufacturer for each type of cement, ground
slag, fly ash, and pozzolan.
2.4.1.1
Fly Ash and Pozzolan
ASTM C 618, Type N, F, or C, except that the maximum allowable loss on

ignition must be 6 percent for Types N and F. Add with cement. Fly ash
must not reduce the amount of cement in the concrete mix below the minimum
requirements of local building codes.
Report the chemical analysis of
the fly ash in accordance with ASTM C 311. Evaluate and classify fly ash
in accordance with ASTM D 5759.
High contents of supplementary cementitious materials can have some
detrimental effects on the concrete properties, such as slowing excessively
the strength gain rate, and delaying and increasing the difficulty of
finishing. The recommended maximum content (by weight of the total
cementitious material) for these materials are:
1.
For GGBF slag: 50 percent
2.
For fly ash or natural pozzolan:
3.
For silica fume: 10 percent
2.4.1.2
25 percent
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag
ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

2.4.1.3
Silica Fume
ASTM C 1240, provide silica fume that is a by-product of silicon or
ferrosilicon production.
2.4.1.4
Portland Cement
Provide cement that conforms to ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, IA, II, or IIA.
Use one brand and type of cement for formed concrete having exposed-to-view
finished surfaces.
2.4.2
Water
Minimize the amount of water in the mix. The amount of water must not
exceed 45 percent by weight of cementitious materials (cement plus
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
pozzolans), and in general, improve workability by adjusting the grading

rather than by adding water. Water must be fresh, clean, and potable; free
from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials,
or other substances deleterious to concrete.
2.4.3
Aggregates
ASTM C 33/C 33M, except as modified herein. Furnish aggregates for exposed
concrete surfaces from one source. Provide aggregates that do not contain
any substance which may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the
cement.
Fine and coarse aggregates must show expansions less than 0.08 percent at
16 days after casting when testing in accordance with ASTM C 1260. Should
the test data indicate an expansion of 0.08 percent or greater, reject the
aggregate(s) or perform additional testing using ASTM C 1567 using the
Contractor's proposed mix design. In this case, include the mix design low
alkali portland cement and one of the following supplementary cementitious
materials:
1.
GGBF slag at a minimum of 40 percent of total cementitious
2.
Fly ash or natural pozzolan at a minimum of total cementitious of

b.
c.
d.
3.
25 percent if (SiO2+Al2O3+Fe2O3) is 70 percent or more,

20 percent if (SiO2+Al2O3+Fe2O3) is 80 percent or more,
15 percent if (SiO2+Al2O3+Fe2O3) is 90 percent or more.
Silica fume at a minimum of 7 percent of total cementitious.
If a combination of these materials is chosen, the minimum amount must be a

linear combination of the minimum amounts above. Include these materials
in sufficient proportion to show less than 0.08 percent expansion at 16
days after casting when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1567.
Aggregates must not possess properties or constituents that are known to
have specific unfavorable effects in concrete when tested in accordance
with ASTM C 295.
2.4.3.1
Aggregates/Combined Aggregate Gradation (Floor Slabs Only)
ASTM C 33/C 33M, uniformly graded and as follows: Nominal maximum

aggregate size of 1 inch. A combined sieve analysis must indicate a well
graded aggregate from coarsest to finest with not more than 18 percent and
not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less
than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 (0.3mm)
sieve, and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50
(0.3mm). Provide sand that is at least 50 percent natural sand.
2.4.3.2
Aggregates for Lightweight Concrete
ASTM C 330.
2.4.3.3
Recycled Aggregate Materials
Use a minimum of 25 percent recycled aggregate, depending on local

availability and conforming to requirements of the mix design. Recycled
aggregate to include: recovered glass, recovered concrete, recovered
porcelain, recovered stone that meets the aggregate requirements
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
specified. Submit recycled material request with the aggregate

certification submittals and do not use until approved by the Contracting
Officer.
2.4.4
Nonshrink Grout
ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.

2.4.5
Admixtures
ASTM C 494/C 494M: Type A, water reducing; Type B, retarding; Type C,

accelerating; Type D, water-reducing and retarding; and Type E,
water-reducing and accelerating admixture. Do not use calcium chloride
admixtures.
2.4.5.1
Air-Entraining
ASTM C 260.
2.4.5.2
High Range Water Reducer (HRWR) (Superplasticizers)
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F and Type G (HRWR retarding admixture) and
ASTM C 1017/C 1017M.
2.4.5.3
Pozzolan
Provide fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures that conform to

ASTM C 618.
2.4.6
Vapor Barrier
ASTM E 1745 polyethylene sheeting, minimum

2.4.7
10 mil thickness.
Use water-based curing compounds, sealers, and coatings with low (maximum
160 grams/liter, less water and less exempt compounds) VOC content.
Consider the use of water based or vegetable or soy based curing agents in
lieu of petroleum based products. Consider agents that are not toxic and
emit low or no Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC). Consider the use of
admixtures that offer high performance to increase durability of the finish
product but also have low toxicity and are made from bio-based materials
such as soy, and emit low levels of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC).
2.4.7.1
Impervious Sheeting
ASTM C 171; waterproof paper, clear or white polyethylene sheeting, or

polyethylene-coated burlap.
2.4.7.2
Pervious Sheeting
AASHTO M 182.
2.4.7.3
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound
ASTM C 309, white-pigmented, Type 2, Class B.
SECTION 03 30 00
2.4.8
W912HN-09-X-1813
Liquid Chemical Sealer-Hardener Compound
Provide surface treatments containing certain chemicals, including sodium

silicate and the fluosilicates of magnesium and zinc. Provide compound that
does not reduce the adhesion of resilient flooring, tile, paint, roofing,
waterproofing, or other material applied to concrete.
2.4.9
Expansion/Contraction Joint Filler
ASTM D 1751, ASTM D 1752, cork or 100 percent post-consumer paper meeting
ASTM D 1752 (subparagraphs 5.1 to 5.4). Material must be 1/2 inch thick,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.4.9.1
Preformed Joint Filler Strips
Provide nonextruding and resilient bituminous type filler strips conforming

to ASTM D 1751.
Provide nonextruding and resilient nonbituminous type filler strips
conforming to ASTM D 1752, Type I or II.
2.4.10
Joint Sealants
Use concrete penetrating sealers with a low (maximum 100 grams/liter, less
water and less exempt compounds) VOC content.
2.4.10.1
Horizontal Surfaces, 3 Percent Slope, Maximum
ASTM D 6690 or ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Use T.

surfaces subjected to jet fuel.
2.4.10.2
ASTM D 7116 for
Vertical Surfaces Greater Than 3 Percent Slope
ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T.

2.4.10.3
Waterstops
Provide waterstops that are flat dumbbell type, not less than 3/16 inch for
widths up to 5 inches, and not less than 3/8 inch for widths 5 inches and
over.
Provide waterstops made of rubber and that conform to ASTM D 1752.
2.4.10.4
Joint Sealant Compound
Provide cold-applied, two-component, elastomeric polymer type compound

conforming to FS SS-S-200.
2.4.11
Epoxy Bonding Compound
ASTM C 881/C 881M. Provide Type I for bonding hardened concrete to

hardened concrete; Type II for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete; and Type III as a binder in epoxy mortar or concrete, or for use
in bonding skid-resistant materials to hardened concrete. Provide Grade 1
or 2 for horizontal surfaces and Grade 3 for vertical surfaces. Provide
Class A if placement temperature is below 40 degrees F; Class B if
placement temperature is between 40 and 60 degrees F; or Class C if
placement temperature is above 60 degrees F.
SECTION 03 30 00
2.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
REINFORCEMENT
2.5.1
Reinforcing Bars
ACI/MCP-2 unless otherwise specified. Use deformed steel.

ASTM A 615/A 615M with the bars marked A, S, W, Grade 60. Reinforcing bars
may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
2.5.1.1
Weldable Reinforcing Bars
Provide weldable reinforcing bars that conform to ASTM A 706/A 706M and
ASTM A 615/A 615M and Supplement S1, Grade 60, except that the maximum
carbon content must be 0.55 percent.
2.5.2
Wire
ASTM A 82/A 82M or ASTM A 496/A 496M.

2.5.2.1
Welded Wire Fabric
ASTM A 185/A 185M. Wire fabric may contain post-consumer or

post-industrial recycled content. Provide flat sheets of welded wire
fabric for slabs and toppings.
2.5.2.2
Steel Wire
Wire must conform to ASTM A 82/A 82M.

2.5.3
Reinforcing Bar Supports
Provide bar ties and supports of coated or non corrodible material.

2.5.4
Chairs and Bolsters:
Plastic and steel may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled

content.
2.5.5
Dowels for Load Transfer in Floors
Provide dowels for load transfer in floors of the type, design, weight, and
dimensions indicated. Provide dowel bars that are plain-billet steel
conforming to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 40. Provide dowel pipe that is
steel conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M.
2.5.6
Supports for Reinforcement
Supports include bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices necessary for
proper spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and wire fabric
in place.
Provide wire bar type supports conforming to ACI/MCP-3, ACI/MCP-4 and
CRSI 10MSP.
Legs of supports in contact with formwork must be hot-dip galvanized, or
plastic coated after fabrication, or stainless-steel bar supports.
SECTION 03 30 00
2.6
W912HN-09-X-1813
2.6.1
BONDING MATERIALS
Concrete Bonding Agent
Provide aqueous-phase, film-forming, nonoxidizing, freeze and

thaw-resistant compound agent suitable for brush or spray application
conforming to ASTM C 932.
2.6.2
Epoxy-Resin Adhesive Binder
Provide two-component, epoxy-polysulfide polymer type binder with an

amine-type curing-agent conforming to FS MMM-A-001993, Type I or
ASTM C 881/C 881M.
2.7
2.7.1
FLOOR FINISH MATERIALS

Abrasive Aggregate for Nonslip Aggregate Finish
Aggregate must be packaged, factory-graded fused aluminum oxide grits, or

it may be crushed emery containing not less than 40-percent aluminum oxide
and not less than 25-percent ferric oxide. Aggregate must be rust proof
and nonglazing and must be unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning
materials.
Aggregate must be packaged, factory-graded, silicon carbide grits.
Aggregate must be rust proof and must be unaffected by freezing, moisture,
and cleaning materials.
Aggregate must be well-graded in size from particles retained on No. 30
sieve (0.0236 inch) to particles passing No. 8 sieve (0.0929 inch).
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed;

verify that substrates are plumb and true.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify
Architect/Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before processing.
Check field dimensions before beginning installation. If dimensions vary
too much from design dimensions for proper installation, notify
Architect/Engineer and wait for instructions before beginning installation.
3.2
PREPARATION
Determine quantity of concrete needed and minimize the production of excess

concrete. Designate locations or uses for potential excess concrete before
the concrete is poured.
3.2.1
General
Surfaces against which concrete is to be placed must be free of debris,

loose material, standing water, snow, ice, and other deleterious substances
before start of concrete placing.
Remove standing water without washing over freshly deposited concrete.
Divert flow of water through side drains provided for such purpose.
SECTION 03 30 00
3.2.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Subgrade Under Foundations and Footings
When subgrade material is semiporous and dry, sprinkle subgrade surface

with water as required to eliminate suction at the time concrete is
deposited. When subgrade material is porous, seal subgrade surface by
covering surface with specified vapor retarder; this may also be used over
semiporous, dry subgrade material instead of water sprinkling.
3.2.3
Subgrade Under Slabs on Ground
Before construction of slabs on ground, have underground work on pipes and

conduits completed and approved.
Previously constructed subgrade or fill must be cleaned of foreign
materials and inspected by the Contractor for adequate compaction and
surface tolerances as specified.
Actual density of top 12 inches of subgrade soil material-in-place must not
be less than the following percentages of maximum density of same soil
material compacted at optimum moisture content in accordance with
ASTM D 1557.
SOIL MATERIAL
PERCENT MAXIMUM DENSITY
Capillary water barrier
100
Cohesionless soil material
100
Cohesive soil material
95
Finish surface of capillary water barrier under interior slabs on ground

must not show deviation in excess of 1/4 inch when tested with a 10-foot
straightedge parallel with and at right angles to building lines.
Finished surface of subgrade or fill under exterior slabs on ground must
not be more than 0.02-foot above or 0.10-foot below elevation indicated.
Prepare subgrade or fill surface under exterior slabs on ground as
specified for subgrade under foundations and footings.
3.2.4
Formwork
Complete and approve formwork. Remove debris and foreign material from
interior of forms before start of concrete placing.
3.2.5
Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs
Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to
obtain indicated elevations and contours in finished slab surface and must
be strong enough to support vibrating bridge screeds or roller pipe screeds
if nature of specified slab finish requires use of such equipment. Align
concrete surface to elevation of screed strips by use of strike-off
templates or approved compacting-type screeds.
3.2.6
Reinforcement and Other Embedded Items
Secure reinforcement, joint materials, and other embedded materials in

position, inspected, and approved before start of concrete placing.
SECTION 03 30 00
3.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
FORMS
ACI/MCP-2. Provide forms, shoring, and scaffolding for concrete

placement. Set forms mortar-tight and true to line and grade. Chamfer
above grade exposed joints, edges, and external corners of concrete 0.75
inch unless otherwise indicated. Provide formwork with clean-out openings
to permit inspection and removal of debris. Forms submerged in water must
be watertight.
3.3.1
General
Construct forms to conform, within the tolerances specified, to shapes

dimensions, lines, elevations, and positions of cast-in-place concrete
members as indicated. Forms must be supported, braced, and maintained
sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load.
3.3.2
Design and Construction of Formwork
Provide formwork design and construction that conforms to ACI/MCP-2,

Chapter 4.
Provide forms that are tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during
concrete placing.
Support form facing materials by structural members spaced close to prevent
deflection of form facing material. Fit forms placed in successive units
for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment to ensure a smooth completed
surface within the tolerances specified. Where necessary to maintain the
tolerances specified, such as long spans where immediate supports are not
possible, camber formwork for anticipated deflections in formwork due to
weight and pressure of fresh concrete and to construction loads.
Chamfer exposed joints, edges, and external corners a minimum of 3/4 inch
by moldings placed in corners of column, beam, and wall forms.
Provide shores and struts with a positive means of adjustment capable of
taking up formwork settlement during concrete placing operations. Obtain
adjustment with wedges or jacks or a combination thereof. When adequate
foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured, provide trussed
supports.
Provide temporary openings in wall forms, column forms, and at other points
where necessary to permit inspection and to facilitate cleaning.
Provide forms that are readily removable without impact, shock, or damage
to concrete.
3.3.3
Coating
Before concrete placement, coat the contact surfaces of forms with a

nonstaining mineral oil, nonstaining form coating compound, or two coats of
nitrocellulose lacquer. Do not use mineral oil on forms for surfaces to
which adhesive, paint, or other finish material is to be applied.
3.3.4
Reshoring
Reshore concrete elements where forms are removed prior to the specified
time period. Do not permit elements to deflect or accept loads during form
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
stripping or reshoring. Forms on columns, walls, or other load-bearing

members may be stripped after 2 days if loads are not applied to the
members. After forms are removed, reshore slabs and beams over 10 feet in
span and cantilevers over 4 feet for the remainder of the specified time
period in accordance with paragraph entitled "Removal of Forms." Perform
reshoring operations to prevent subjecting concrete members to overloads,
eccentric loading, or reverse bending. Provide reshoring elements with the
same load-carrying capabilities as original shoring and spaced similar to
original shoring. Firmly secure and brace reshoring elements to provide
solid bearing and support.
3.3.5
Reuse
Reuse forms providing the structural integrity of concrete and the

aesthetics of exposed concrete are not compromised.
3.3.6
Forms for Standard Rough Form Finish
Give rough form finish concrete formed surfaces that are to be concealed by
other construction, unless otherwise specified.
Form facing material for standard rough form finish must be the specified
concrete form plywood or other approved form facing material that produces
concrete surfaces equivalent in smoothness and appearance to that produced
by new concrete form plywood panels.
For concrete surfaces exposed only to the ground, undressed, square-edge,
1-inch nominal thickness lumber may be used. Provide horizontal joints
that are level and vertical joints that are plumb.
3.3.7
Forms for Standard Smooth Form Finish
Give smooth form finish concrete formed surfaces that are to be exposed to
view or that are to be covered with coating material applied directly to
concrete or with covering material bonded to concrete, such as
waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, or other similar coating system.
Form facing material for standard smooth finish must be the specified
overlaid concrete form plywood or other approved form facing material that
is nonreactive with concrete and that produce concrete surfaces equivalent
in smoothness and appearance to that produced by new overlaid concrete form
plywood panels.
Maximum deflection of form facing material between supports and maximum
deflection of form supports such as studs and wales must not exceed 0.0025
times the span.
Provide arrangement of form facing sheets that are orderly and symmetrical,
and sheets that are in sizes as large as practical.
Arrange panels to make a symmetrical pattern of joints. Horizontal and
vertical joints must be solidly backed and butted tight to prevent leakage
and fins.
3.3.8
Form Ties
Provide ties that are factory fabricated metal, adjustable in length,

removable or snap-off type that do allow form deflection or do not spall
concrete upon removal. Portion of form ties remaining within concrete
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
after removal of exterior parts must be at least 1-1/2 inches back from
concrete surface. Provide form ties that are free of devices that leave a
hole larger than 7/8 inch or less than 1/2 inch in diameter in concrete
surface. Form ties fabricated at the project site or wire ties of any type
are not acceptable.
3.3.9
Tolerances for Form Construction
Construct formwork to ensure that after removal of forms and prior to

patching and finishing of formed surfaces, provide concrete surfaces in
accordance with tolerances specified in ACI/MCP-1 and ACI/MCP-2.
3.3.10
Removal of Forms and Supports
After placing concrete, forms must remain in place for the time periods
specified in ACI/MCP-4. Do not remove forms and shores (except those used
for slabs on grade and slip forms) until the client determines that the
concrete has gained sufficient strength to support its weight and
superimposed loads. Base such determination on compliance with one of the
following:
a. The plans and specifications stipulate conditions for removal of forms
and shores, and such conditions have been followed, or
b. The concrete has been properly tested with an appropriate ASTM standard
test method designed to indicate the concrete compressive strength, and
the test results indicate that the concrete has gained sufficient
strength to support its weight and superimposed loads.
Prevent concrete damage during form removal.
after removal.
3.3.10.1
Clean all forms immediately
Special Requirements for Reduced Time Period
Forms may be removed earlier than specified if ASTM C 39/C 39M test results
of field-cured samples from a representative portion of the structure
indicate that the concrete has reached a minimum of 85 percent of the
design strength.
3.4
WATERSTOP SPLICES
Fusion weld in the field.

3.5
3.5.1
FORMED SURFACES
Preparation of Form Surfaces
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-coating compound before

reinforcement is placed. Provide a commercial formulation form-coating
compound that does not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete
surfaces and impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces that entails
bonding or adhesion nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water
or curing compounds. Do not allow excess form-coating compound to stand in
puddles in the forms nor to come in contact with concrete against which
fresh concrete is placed. Make thinning of form-coating compound with
thinning agent of the type, in the amount, and under the conditions
recommended by form-coating compound manufacturer's printed or written
directions.
SECTION 03 30 00
3.5.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Tolerances
ACI/MCP-4 and as indicated.

3.5.3
As-Cast Form
Provide form facing material producing a smooth, hard, uniform texture on

the concrete. Arrange facing material in an orderly and symmetrical manner
and keep seams to a practical minimum. Support forms as necessary to meet
required tolerances. Do not use material with raised grain, torn surfaces,
worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects which can impair the texture
of the concrete surface.
3.6
PLACING REINFORCEMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
ACI/MCP-2. Provide bars, wire fabric, wire ties, supports, and other
devices necessary to install and secure reinforcement. Reinforcement must
not have rust, scale, oil, grease, clay, or foreign substances that would
reduce the bond. Rusting of reinforcement is a basis of rejection if the
effective cross-sectional area or the nominal weight per unit length has
been reduced. Remove loose rust prior to placing steel. Tack welding is
prohibited.
3.6.1
General
Provide details of reinforcement that are in accordance with ACI/MCP-3 and

ACI/MCP-4 and as specified.
3.6.2
Vapor Barrier
Provide beneath the on-grade concrete floor slab. Use the greatest widths
and lengths practicable to eliminate joints wherever possible. Lap joints
a minimum of 12 inches and tape or cement joints. Remove torn, punctured,
or damaged vapor barrier material and provide with new vapor barrier prior
to placing concrete. Concrete placement must not damage vapor barrier
material.
3.6.3
Reinforcement Supports
Place reinforcement and secure with galvanized or non corrodible chairs,

spacers, or metal hangers. For supporting reinforcement on the ground, use
concrete or other non corrodible material, having a compressive strength
equal to or greater than the concrete being placed.
3.6.4
Splicing
As indicated. For splices not indicated ACI/MCP-2. Do not splice at

points of maximum stress. Overlap welded wire fabric the spacing of the
cross wires, plus 2 inches.
3.6.5
Future Bonding
Plug exposed, threaded, mechanical reinforcement bar connectors with a

greased bolt. Provide bolt threads that match the connector. Countersink
the connector in the concrete. Calk the depression after the bolt is
installed.
SECTION 03 30 00
3.6.6
W912HN-09-X-1813
Cover
ACI/MCP-2 for minimum coverage, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6.7
Setting Miscellaneous Material
Place and secure anchors and bolts, pipe sleeves, conduits, and other such
items in position before concrete placement. Plumb anchor bolts and check
location and elevation. Temporarily fill voids in sleeves with readily
removable material to prevent the entry of concrete.
3.6.8
Construction Joints
Locate joints to least impair strength.

joints unless otherwise indicated.
3.6.9
Continue reinforcement across
Expansion Joints and Contraction Joints
Provide expansion joint at edges of interior floor slabs on grade abutting

vertical surfaces, and as indicated. Make expansion joints 1/2 inch wide
unless indicated otherwise. Fill expansion joints not exposed to weather
with preformed joint filler material. Completely fill joints exposed to
weather with joint filler material and joint sealant. Do not extend
reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete through
any expansion joint unless an expansion sleeve is used. Provide
contraction joints, either formed or saw cut or cut with a jointing tool,
to the indicated depth after the surface has been finished. Complete saw
joints within 4 to 12 hours after concrete placement. Protect joints from
intrusion of foreign matter.
3.6.10
Fabrication
Shop fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to shapes and dimensions

indicated for reinforcement, and as follows:
Provide fabrication tolerances that are in accordance with ACI/MCP-1,
ACI/MCP-2 and ACI/MCP-3.
Provide hooks and bends that are in accordance with ACI/MCP-3 and
ACI/MCP-4.
Reinforcement must be bent cold to shapes as indicated. Bending must be
done in the shop. Rebending of a reinforcing bar that has been bent
incorrectly is not be permitted. Bending must be in accordance with
standard approved practice and by approved machine methods.
Tolerance on nominally square-cut, reinforcing bar ends must be in
accordance with ACI/MCP-3.
Deliver reinforcing bars bundled, tagged, and marked. Tags must be metal
with bar size, length, mark, and other information pressed in by machine.
Marks must correspond with those used on the placing drawings.
Do not use reinforcement that has any of the following defects:
a. Bar lengths, depths, and bends beyond specified fabrication
tolerances
b. Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or approved shop drawings
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
c. Bars with reduced cross-section due to rusting or other cause

Replace defective reinforcement with new reinforcement having required
shape, form, and cross-section area.
3.6.11
Placing Reinforcement
Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI/MCP-3 and ACI/MCP-4.

For slabs on grade (over earth or over capillary water barrier) and for
footing reinforcement, support bars or welded wire fabric on precast
concrete blocks, spaced at intervals required by size of reinforcement, to
keep reinforcement the minimum height specified above the underside of slab
or footing.
For slabs other than on grade, supports for which any portion is less than
1 inch from concrete surfaces that are exposed to view or to be painted
must be of precast concrete units, plastic-coated steel, or stainless steel
protected bar supports. Precast concrete units must be wedge shaped, not
larger than 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches, and of thickness equal to that indicated
for concrete protection of reinforcement. Provide precast units that have
cast-in galvanized tie wire hooked for anchorage and blend with concrete
surfaces after finishing is completed.
Contractor must cooperate with other trades in setting of anchor bolts,
inserts, and other embedded items. Where conflicts occur between locating
reinforcing and embedded items, the Contractor must notify the Contracting
Officer so that conflicts may be reconciled before placing concrete.
Anchors and embedded items must be positioned and supported with
appropriate accessories.
Handle epoxy-coated reinforcing bars carefully to prevent damage to the
coating. Use plastic-coated tie wire and supports of a type to prevent
damage to the reinforcing bars.
Provide reinforcement that is supported and secured together to prevent
displacement by construction loads or by placing of wet concrete, and as
follows:
Provide supports for reinforcing bars that are sufficient in number and
sufficiently heavy to carry the reinforcement they support, and in
accordance with ACI/MCP-3, ACI/MCP-4 and CRSI 10MSP. Do not use supports
to support runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar
construction loads.
Equip supports on ground and similar surfaces with sand-plates.
Support welded wire fabric as required for reinforcing bars.
Secure reinforcements to supports by means of tie wire. Wire must be
black, soft iron wire, not less than 16 gage.
With the exception of temperature reinforcement, tied to main steel
approximately 24 inches on center, reinforcement must be accurately
placed, securely tied at intersections with 18-gage annealed wire, and
held in position during placing of concrete by spacers, chairs, or
other approved supports. Point wire-tie ends away from the form.
Unless otherwise indicated, numbers, type, and spacing of supports must
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
conform to ACI/MCP-3.
Bending of reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete is permitted
only as specified in ACI/MCP-3 and ACI/MCP-4.
3.6.12
Spacing of Reinforcing Bars
Spacing must be as indicated. If not indicated, spacing must be in

accordance with the ACI/MCP-3 and ACI/MCP-4.
Reinforcing bars may be relocated to avoid interference with other
reinforcement, or with conduit, pipe, or other embedded items. If any
reinforcing bar is moved a distance exceeding one bar diameter or specified
placing tolerance, resulting rearrangement of reinforcement is subject to
approval.
3.6.13
Concrete Protection for Reinforcement
Concrete protection must be in accordance with the ACI/MCP-3 and ACI/MCP-4.

3.7
BATCHING, MEASURING, MIXING, AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and ACI/MCP-2, except as modified herein. Batching

equipment must be such that the concrete ingredients are consistently
measured within the following tolerances: 1 percent for cement and water, 2
percent for aggregate, and 3 percent for admixtures. Furnish mandatory
batch ticket information for each load of ready mix concrete.
3.7.1
Measuring
Make measurements at intervals as specified in paragraphs entitled

"Sampling" and "Testing."
3.7.2
Mixing
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ACI/MCP-2. Machine mix concrete. Begin mixing within
30 minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregates. Place
concrete within 90 minutes of either addition of mixing water to cement and
aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates if the air temperature is
less than 84 degrees F. Reduce mixing time and place concrete within 60
minutes if the air temperature is greater than 84 degrees F except as
follows: if set retarding admixture is used and slump requirements can be
met, limit for placing concrete may remain at 90 minutes.
Dissolve
admixtures in the mixing water and mix in the drum to uniformly distribute
the admixture throughout the batch.
3.7.3
Transporting
Transport concrete from the mixer to the forms as rapidly as practicable.

Prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. Clean transporting equipment
thoroughly before each batch. Do not use aluminum pipe or chutes. Remove
concrete which has segregated in transporting and dispose of as directed.
3.8
PLACING CONCRETE
Place concrete as soon as practicable after the forms and the reinforcement
have been inspected and approved. Do not place concrete when weather
conditions prevent proper placement and consolidation; in uncovered areas
during periods of precipitation; or in standing water. Prior to placing
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
concrete, remove dirt, construction debris, water, snow, and ice from
within the forms. Deposit concrete as close as practicable to the final
position in the forms. Do not exceed a free vertical drop of 3 feet from
the point of discharge. Place concrete in one continuous operation from
one end of the structure towards the other. Position grade stakes on 10
foot centers maximum in each direction when pouring interior slabs and on
20 foot centers maximum for exterior slabs.
3.8.1
General Placing Requirements
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no

concrete is placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause
formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section
cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified.
Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete which is being
integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Deposit concrete as
nearly as practical in its final position to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to procedures which cause
segregation.
Concrete to receive other construction must be screeded to proper level to
avoid excessive skimming or grouting.
Do not use concrete which becomes nonplastic and unworkable or does not
meet quality control limits as specified or has been contaminated by
foreign materials. Use of retempered concrete is permitted. Remove
rejected concrete from the site.
3.8.2
Footing Placement
Concrete for footings may be placed in excavations without forms upon

inspection and approval by the Contracting Officer. Excavation width must
be a minimum of 4 inches greater than indicated.
3.8.3
Vibration
ACI/MCP-2. Furnish a spare, working, vibrator on the job site whenever

concrete is placed. Consolidate concrete slabs greater than 4 inches in
depth with high frequency mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by
hand spading and tamping. Consolidate concrete slabs 4 inches or less in
depth by wood tampers, spading, and settling with a heavy leveling
straightedge. Operate internal vibrators with vibratory element submerged
in the concrete, with a minimum frequency of not less than 6000 impulses
per minute when submerged. Do not use vibrators to transport the concrete
in the forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators approximately 20 inches
apart. Penetrate the previously placed lift with the vibrator when more
than one lift is required. Place concrete in 20 inch maximum vertical
lifts. Use external vibrators on the exterior surface of the forms when
internal vibrators do not provide adequate consolidation of the concrete.
3.8.4
Pumping
ACI/MCP-2. Pumping must not result in separation or loss of materials nor

cause interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between
successive increments. Loss of slump in pumping equipment must not exceed
2 inches. Do not convey concrete through pipe made of aluminum or aluminum
alloy. Avoid rapid changes in pipe sizes. Limit maximum size of course
aggregate to 33 percent of the diameter of the pipe. Limit maximum size of
well rounded aggregate to 40 percent of the pipe diameter. Take samples
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
for testing at both the point of delivery to the pump and at the discharge
end.
3.8.4.1
Pumping Lightweight Concrete
ACI/MCP-1. Presoak or presaturate aggregates. Cement content must be

minimum of 564 pounds per cubic yard and be sufficient to accommodate a 4
to 6 inch slump.
3.8.5
Cold Weather
ACI/MCP-2. Do not allow concrete temperature to decrease below 50 degrees F

Obtain approval prior to placing concrete when the ambient temperature is
below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing
temperatures within 24 hours. Cover concrete and provide sufficient heat
to maintain 50 degrees F minimum adjacent to both the formwork and the
structure while curing. Limit the rate of cooling to 37 degrees F in any 1
hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours after heat application.
3.8.6
Hot Weather
Maintain required concrete temperature using Figure 2.1.5 in ACI/MCP-2 to

prevent the evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square
foot of exposed concrete per hour. Cool ingredients before mixing or use
other suitable means to control concrete temperature and prevent rapid
drying of newly placed concrete. Shade the fresh concrete as soon as
possible after placing. Start curing when the surface of the fresh
concrete is sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage. Provide
water hoses, pipes, spraying equipment, and water hauling equipment, where
job site is remote to water source, to maintain a moist concrete surface
throughout the curing period. Provide burlap cover or other suitable,
permeable material with fog spray or continuous wetting of the concrete
when weather conditions prevent the use of either liquid membrane curing
compound or impervious sheets. For vertical surfaces, protect forms from
direct sunlight and add water to top of structure once concrete is set.
3.8.7
Follow-up
Check concrete within 24 hours of placement for flatness, levelness, and

other specified tolerances. Adjust formwork and placement techniques on
subsequent pours to achieve specified tolerances.
3.8.8
Placing Concrete in Forms
Deposit concrete placed in forms in horizontal layers not exceeding 24

inches.
Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete placing has reached
elevation of spreaders.
Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Design vibrators to
operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete and maintain a speed
of not less than 9,000 impulses per minute when submerged in concrete.
Provide vibrating equipment adequate in number of units and power of each
unit to properly consolidate concrete. Vibration of forms and
reinforcement is not be permitted. Do not use vibrators to transport
concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced points not farther apart than visible effectiveness of
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
machine. Do not insert vibrator into lower courses of concrete that have
begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time
necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement
and other embedded items without causing segregation of concrete mix.
Do not start placing of concrete in supporting elements until concrete
previously placed in columns and walls is no longer plastic and has been in
place a minimum of 2 hours.
3.8.9
Placing Concrete Slabs
Place and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operation, within

the limits of approved construction joints until placing of panel or
section is completed.
During concrete placing operations, consolidate concrete by mechanical
vibrating equipment so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and
other embedded items and into corners. Consolidate concrete placed in
beams and girders of supported slabs and against bulkheads of slabs on
ground by mechanical vibrators as specified. Consolidate concrete in
remainder of slabs by vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds, or
other approved method. Limit consolidation operations to time necessary to
obtain consolidation of concrete without bringing an excess of fine
aggregate to the surface. Concrete to be consolidated must be as dry as
practical and surfaces thereof must not be manipulated prior to finishing
operations. Bring concrete correct level with a straightedge and
struck-off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, leaving it free
of humps or hollows. Sprinkling of water on plastic surface is not
permitted.
Provide finish of slabs as specified.
3.8.10
Bonding
Surfaces of set concrete at joints, except where bonding is obtained by use

of concrete bonding agent, must be roughened and cleaned of laitance,
coatings, loose particles, and foreign matter. Roughen surfaces in a
manner that exposes the aggregate uniformly and does not leave laitance,
loosened particles of aggregate, nor damaged concrete at the surface.
Obtain bonding of fresh concrete that has set as follows:
At joints between footings and walls or columns, between walls or
columns and the beams or slabs they support, and elsewhere unless
otherwise specified; roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete must
be dampened, but not saturated, immediately prior to placing of fresh
concrete.
At joints in exposed-to-view work; at vertical joints in walls; at
joints near midpoint of span in girders, beams, supported slabs, other
structural members; in work designed to contain liquids; the roughened
and cleaned surface of set concrete must be dampened but not saturated
and covered with a cement grout coating.
Provide cement grout that consists of equal parts of portland cement
and fine aggregate by weight with not more than 6 gallons of water per
sack of cement. Apply cement grout with a stiff broom or brush to a
minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Deposit fresh concrete before cement
grout has attained its initial set.
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Bonding of fresh concrete to concrete that has set may be obtained by

use of a concrete bonding agent. Apply such bonding material to
cleaned concrete surface in accordance with approved printed
instructions of bonding material manufacturer.
3.9
SURFACE FINISHES EXCEPT FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT FINISHES
3.9.1
Defects
Repair formed surfaces by removing minor honeycombs, pits greater than 1

square inch surface area or 0.25 inch maximum depth, or otherwise defective
areas. Provide edges perpendicular to the surface and patch with nonshrink
grout. Patch tie holes and defects when the forms are removed. Concrete
with extensive honeycomb including exposed steel reinforcement, cold
joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects which
affect the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected, unless
correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of corrective action
prior to repair. The surface of the concrete must not vary more than the
allowable tolerances of ACI/MCP-4. Exposed surfaces must be uniform in
appearance and finished to a smooth form finish unless otherwise specified.
3.9.2
Not Against Forms (Top of Walls)
Surfaces not otherwise specified must be finished with wood floats to even
surfaces. Finish must match adjacent finishes.
3.9.3
3.9.3.1
Formed Surfaces
Tolerances
ACI/MCP-1 and as indicated.

3.9.3.2
As-Cast Rough Form
Provide for surfaces not exposed to public view. Patch these holes and
defects and level abrupt irregularities. Remove or rub off fins and other
projections exceeding 0.25 inch in height.
3.9.3.3
Standard Smooth Finish
Finish must be as-cast concrete surface as obtained with form facing

material for standard smooth finish. Repair and patch defective areas as
specified; and all fins and remove other projections on surface.
3.10
FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT FINISHES AND MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION
ACI/MCP-2, unless otherwise specified. Slope floors uniformly to drains

where drains are provided. Depress the concrete base slab where quarry
tile, ceramic tile, are indicated. Steel trowel and fine-broom finish
concrete slabs that are to receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, or paver tile .
Where straightedge measurements are specified, Contractor must provide
straightedge.
3.10.1
Finish
Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper

contour, grade, and elevation before bleedwater appears. Permit concrete
to attain a set sufficient for floating and supporting the weight of the
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
finisher and equipment. If bleedwater is present prior to floating the

surface, drag the excess water off or remove by absorption with porous
materials. Do not use dry cement to absorb bleedwater.
3.10.1.1
Scratched
Use for surfaces intended to receive bonded applied cementitious

applications. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck
off, and leveled to a Class C tolerance as defined below,roughen the
surface with stiff brushes of rakes before final set.
3.10.1.2
Floated
Use for surfaces to receive waterproofing membranes, and exterior slabs

where not otherwise specified. After the concrete has been placed,
consolidated, struck off, and leveled, do not work the concrete further,
until ready for floating. Whether floating with a wood, magnesium, or
composite hand float, with a bladed power trowel equipped with float shoes,
or with a powered disc, float must begin when the surface has stiffened
sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the first floating,
check surface with a 10 foot straightedge applied at no less than two
different angles, one of which is perpendicular to the direction of strike
off. Cut down high spots and fill low spots during this procedure to
produce a surface level within 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
3.10.1.3
Concrete Containing Silica Fume
Finish using magnesium floats or darbies.

3.10.1.4
Steel Troweled
Use for floors intended as walking surfaces and for reception of floor
coverings . First, provide a floated finish. Next, the finish must be
power troweled two times, and finally hand troweled. The first troweling
after floating needs to produce a smooth surface which is relatively free
of defects but which may still show some trowel marks. Perform additional
trowelings done by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. The
final troweling is done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is
moved over the surface. Thoroughly consolidate the surface by the hand
troweling operations. The finished surface must be essentially free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. The finished surface
must produce a surface level to within 1/4 inch in 10 feet. On surfaces
intended to support floor coverings, remove any defects of sufficient
magnitude to show through the floor covering by grinding.
3.10.1.5
Nonslip Finish
Use on surfaces of exterior platforms, steps, and landings; and on exterior

and interior pedestrian ramps. Apply dry shake aggregate of ceramically
bonded aluminum oxide to the surface at a minimum rate of 25 pounds per 100
square feet. Blend approximately two-thirds of the aggregate with portland
cement as recommended by the manufacturer and apply to the surface evenly
and without segregation. After blended material has been embedded by
floating, apply the remainder of the blended material to the surface at
right angles to the previous application. Apply blended material heavier
in any areas not sufficiently covered by the first application. Perform a
second floating immediately following the first. After the selected
material has been embedded by the two floatings, complete the operation
with a broomed finish.
SECTION 03 30 00
3.10.1.6
W912HN-09-X-1813
Broomed
Use on surfaces of exterior walks, platforms, patios, and ramps, unless

otherwise indicated. Perform a floated finish, then draw a broom or burlap
belt across the surface to produce a coarse scored texture. Permit surface
to harden sufficiently to retain the scoring or ridges. Broom transverse
to traffic or at right angles to the slope of the slab.
3.10.2
Concrete Walks
Provide 4 inches thick minimum. Provide contraction joints spaced every 5

linear feet unless otherwise indicated. Cut contraction joints one inch
deep with a jointing tool after the surface has been finished. Provide 0.5
inch thick transverse expansion joints at changes in direction where
sidewalk abuts curb, steps, rigid pavement, or other similar structures;
space expansion joints every 50 feet maximum. Give walks a broomed
finish. Unless indicated otherwise, provide a transverse slope of 1/48.
Limit variation in cross section to 1/4 inch in 5 feet.
3.10.3
Pits and Trenches
Place bottoms and walls monolithically or provide waterstops and keys.

3.10.4
Curbs
Provide contraction joints spaced every 10 feet maximum unless otherwise

indicated. Cut contraction joints 3/4 inch deep with a jointing tool after
the surface has been finished. Provide expansion joints 1/2 inch thick and
spaced every 100 feet maximum unless otherwise indicated. Perform pavement
finish.
3.10.5
Splash Blocks
Provide at outlets of downspouts emptying at grade. Splash blocks may be

precast concrete, and must be 24 inches long, 12 inches wide and 4 inches
thick, unless otherwise indicated, with smooth-finished countersunk dishes
sloped to drain away from the building.
3.11
CURING AND PROTECTION
ACI/MCP-2 unless otherwise specified. Begin curing immediately following

form removal. Avoid damage to concrete from vibration created by blasting,
pile driving, movement of equipment in the vicinity, disturbance of
formwork or protruding reinforcement, and any other activity resulting in
ground vibrations. Protect concrete from injurious action by sun, rain,
flowing water, frost, mechanical injury, tire marks, and oil stains. Do
not allow concrete to dry out from time of placement until the expiration
of the specified curing period. Do not use membrane-forming compound on
surfaces where appearance would be objectionable, on any surface to be
painted, where coverings are to be bonded to the concrete, or on concrete
to which other concrete is to be bonded. If forms are removed prior to the
expiration of the curing period, provide another curing procedure specified
herein for the remaining portion of the curing period. Provide moist
curing for those areas receiving liquid chemical sealer-hardener or epoxy
coating. Allow curing compound/sealer installations to cure prior to the
installation of materials that adsorb VOCs.
SECTION 03 30 00
3.11.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
General
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and cold or hot
temperature and maintain without drying at a relatively constant
temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of cement and
proper hardening of concrete.
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from surface of
concrete after placing and finishing. Keep concrete moist for minimum 72
hours.
Final curing must immediately follow initial curing and before concrete has
dried. Continue final curing until cumulative number of hours or fraction
thereof (not necessarily consecutive) during which temperature of air in
contact with the concrete is above 50 degrees F has totaled 168 hours.
Alternatively, if tests are made of cylinders kept adjacent to the
structure and cured by the same methods, final curing may be terminated
when the average compressive strength has reached 70 percent of the 28-day
design compressive strength. Prevent rapid drying at end of final curing
period.
3.11.2
Moist Curing
Remove water without erosion or damage to the structure.

run-off.
3.11.2.1
Prevent water
Ponding or Immersion
Continually immerse the concrete throughout the curing period. Water must
not be more than 50 degrees F less than the temperature of the concrete.
For temperatures between 40 and 50 degrees F, increase the curing period by
50 percent.
3.11.2.2
Fog Spraying or Sprinkling
Apply water uniformly and continuously throughout the curing period. For
temperatures between 40 and 50 degrees F, increase the curing period by 50
percent.
3.11.2.3
Pervious Sheeting
Completely cover surface and edges of the concrete with two thicknesses of
wet sheeting. Overlap sheeting 6 inches over adjacent sheeting. Provide
sheeting that is at least as long as the width of the surface to be cured.
During application, do not drag the sheeting over the finished concrete nor
over sheeting already placed. Wet sheeting thoroughly and keep
continuously wet throughout the curing period.
3.11.2.4
Impervious Sheeting
Wet the entire exposed surface of the concrete thoroughly with a fine spray
of water and cover with impervious sheeting throughout the curing period.
Lay sheeting directly on the concrete surface and overlap edges 12 inches
minimum. Provide sheeting not less than 18 inches wider than the concrete
surface to be cured. Secure edges and transverse laps to form closed
joints. Repair torn or damaged sheeting or provide new sheeting. Cover or
wrap columns, walls, and other vertical structural elements from the top
down with impervious sheeting; overlap and continuously tape sheeting
joints; and introduce sufficient water to soak the entire surface prior to
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
completely enclosing.
3.11.3
Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
Seal or cover joint openings prior to application of curing compound.

Prevent curing compound from entering the joint. Apply in accordance with
the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after any water sheen
which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete
surface. Provide and maintain compound on the concrete surface throughout
the curing period. Do not use this method of curing where the use of
Figure 2.1.5 in ACI/MCP-2 indicates that hot weather conditions cause an
evaporation rate exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square foot per hour.
3.11.3.1
Application
Unless the manufacturer recommends otherwise, apply compound immediately

after the surface loses its water sheen and has a dull appearance, and
before joints are sawed. Mechanically agitate curing compound thoroughly
during use. Use approved power-spraying equipment to uniformly apply two
coats of compound in a continuous operation. The total coverage for the
two coats must be 200 square feet maximum per gallon of undiluted compound
unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer's written instructions.
The compound must form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that does not
check, crack, or peel. Immediately apply an additional coat of compound to
areas where the film is defective. Re-spray concrete surfaces subjected to
rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound application.
3.11.3.2
Protection of Treated Surfaces
Prohibit pedestrian and vehicular traffic and other sources of abrasion at

least 72 hours after compound application. Maintain continuity of the
coating for the entire curing period and immediately repair any damage.
3.11.4
Liquid Chemical Sealer-Hardener
Apply sealer-hardener to interior floors not receiving floor covering .

Apply the sealer-hardener in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Seal or cover joints and openings in which joint sealant
is to be applied as required by the joint sealant manufacturer. Do not
apply the sealer hardener until the concrete has been moist cured and has
aged for a minimum of 30 days. Apply a minimum of two coats of
sealer-hardener.
3.11.5
Requirements for Type III, High-Early-Strength Portland Cement
The curing periods are required to be not less than one-fourth of those
specified for portland cement, but in no case less than 72 hours.
3.11.6
Curing Periods
ACI/MCP-2 except 10 days for retaining walls, pavement or chimneys, 21 days

for concrete that is in full-time or intermittent contact with seawater,
salt spray, alkali soil or waters. Begin curing immediately after
placement. Protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot
temperatures, and mechanical injury; and maintain minimal moisture loss at
a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of
the cement and hardening of the concrete. The materials and methods of
curing are subject to approval by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 03 30 00
3.11.7
W912HN-09-X-1813
Curing Methods
Accomplish curing by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, by

membrane curing, and by combinations thereof, as specified.
Moist curing:
Accomplish moisture curing by any of the following methods:
Keeping surface of concrete wet by covering with water
Continuous water spraying
Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover for
curing concrete saturated with water and keeping absorptive cover
wet by water spraying or intermittent hosing. Place absorptive
cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges with a
slight overlap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture-cover curing:
Accomplish moisture-retaining cover curing by covering concrete surfaces
with specified moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete. Place
cover directly on concrete in widest practical width, with sides and
ends lapped at least 3 inches. Weight cover to prevent displacement;
immediately repair tears or holes appearing during curing period by
patching with pressure-sensitive, waterproof tape or other approved
method.
Membrane curing:
Accomplish membrane curing by applying specified membrane-forming curing
compound to damp concrete surfaces as soon as moisture film has
disappeared. Apply curing compound uniformly in a two-coat operation
by power-spraying equipment using a spray nozzle equipped with a wind
guard. Apply second coat in a direction at right angles to direction
of first coat. Total coverage for two coats must be not more than 200
square feet per gallon of curing compound. Respray concrete surfaces
which are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after curing
compound has been applied by method and at rate specified. Maintain
continuity of coating for entire curing period and immediately repair
damage to coating during this period.
Membrane-curing compounds must not be used on surfaces that are to be
covered with coating material applied directly to concrete or with a
covering material bonded to concrete, such as other concrete, liquid
floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing,
painting, and other coatings and finish materials.
3.11.8
Curing Formed Surfaces
Accomplish curing of formed surfaces, including undersurfaces of girders,

beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces by moist curing with
forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms
are removed before end of curing period, accomplish final curing of formed
surfaces by any of the curing methods specified above, as applicable.
SECTION 03 30 00
3.11.9
W912HN-09-X-1813
Curing Unformed Surfaces
Accomplish initial curing of unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs,

floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by membrane curing.
Unless otherwise specified, accomplish final curing of unformed surfaces by
any of curing methods specified above, as applicable.
Accomplish final curing of concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor
hardener of finish flooring by moisture-retaining cover curing.
3.11.10
Temperature of Concrete During Curing
When temperature of atmosphere is 41 degrees F and below, maintain

temperature of concrete at not less than 55 degrees F throughout concrete
curing period or 45 degrees F when the curing period is measured by
maturity. When necessary, make arrangements before start of concrete
placing for heating, covering, insulation, or housing as required to
maintain specified temperature and moisture conditions for concrete during
curing period.
When the temperature of atmosphere is 80 degrees F and above or during
other climatic conditions which cause too rapid drying of concrete, make
arrangements before start of concrete placing for installation of wind
breaks, of shading, and for fog spraying, wet sprinkling, or
moisture-retaining covering of light color as required to protect concrete
during curing period.
Changes in temperature of concrete must be uniform and not exceed 37
degrees F in any 1 hour nor 80 degrees F in any 24-hour period.
3.11.11
Protection from Mechanical Injury
During curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical

disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive
vibration and from damage caused by rain or running water.
3.11.12
Protection After Curing
Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage by construction operations.

3.12
3.12.1
Sampling
ASTM C 172. Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests specified.

ASTM C 31/C 31M for making test specimens.
3.12.2
3.12.2.1
Testing
Slump Tests
ASTM C 143/C 143M. Take concrete samples during concrete placement. The
maximum slump may be increased as specified with the addition of an
approved admixture provided that the water-cement ratio is not exceeded.
Perform tests at commencement of concrete placement, when test cylinders
are made, and for each batch (minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of
concrete.
SECTION 03 30 00
3.12.2.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Temperature Tests
Test the concrete delivered and the concrete in the forms. Perform tests
in hot or cold weather conditions (below 50 degrees F and above 80 degrees F
) for each batch (minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete,
until the specified temperature is obtained, and whenever test cylinders
and slump tests are made.
3.12.2.3
Compressive Strength Tests
ASTM C 39/C 39M. Make five test cylinders for each set of tests in
accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M. Take precautions to prevent evaporation
and loss of water from the specimen. Test two cylinders at 7 days, two
cylinders at 28 days, and hold one cylinder in reserve. Take samples for
strength tests of each mix design of concrete placed each day not less than
once a day, nor less than once for each 160 cubic yards of concrete, nor
less than once for each 5400 square feet of surface area for slabs or
walls. For the entire project, take no less than five sets of samples and
perform strength tests for each mix design of concrete placed. Each
strength test result must be the average of two cylinders from the same
concrete sample tested at 28 days. If the average of any three consecutive
strength test results is less than f'c or if any strength test result falls
below f'c by more than 450 psi, take a minimum of three ASTM C 42/C 42M
core samples from the in-place work represented by the low test cylinder
results and test. Concrete represented by core test is considered
structurally adequate if the average of three cores is equal to at least 85
percent of f'c and if no single core is less than 75 percent of f'c.
Retest locations represented by erratic core strengths. Remove concrete
not meeting strength criteria and provide new acceptable concrete. Repair
core holes with nonshrink grout. Match color and finish of adjacent
concrete.
3.12.2.4
Air Content
ASTM C 173/C 173M or ASTM C 231 for normal weight concrete . Test
air-entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as specified
for slump tests.
3.12.2.5
Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete
ASTM C 567. Determine unit weight of lightweight concrete.

for every 20 cubic yards maximum.
3.12.2.6
Perform test
Strength of Concrete Structure
Compliance with the following is considered deficient if it fails to meet

the requirements which control strength of structure in place, including
following conditions:
Failure to meet compressive strength tests as evaluated
Reinforcement not conforming to requirements specified
Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location in such a
manner as to reduce strength
Concrete curing and protection of concrete against extremes of
temperature during curing, not conforming to requirements specified
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Concrete subjected to damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly

load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration
Poor workmanship likely to result in deficient strength
3.12.2.7
Testing Concrete Structure for Strength
When there is evidence that strength of concrete structure in place does

not meet specification requirements, make cores drilled from hardened
concrete for compressive strength determination in accordance with
ASTM C 42/C 42M, and as follows:
Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of
concrete-in-place that is considered potentially deficient. Location
of cores will be determined by the Contracting Officer.
Test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with
ASTM C 42/C 42M if concrete they represent is more than superficially
wet under service.
Air dry cores, (60 to 80 degrees F with relative humidity less than 60
percent) for 7 days before test and test dry if concrete they represent
is dry under service conditions.
Strength of cores from each member or area are considered satisfactory
if their average is equal to or greater than 85 percent of the 28-day
design compressive strength of the class of concrete.
Core specimens will be taken and tested by the Government. If the
results of core-boring tests indicate that the concrete as placed does
not conform to the drawings and specification, the cost of such tests
and restoration required must be borne by the Contractor.
Fill core holes solid with patching mortar and finished to match adjacent
concrete surfaces.
Correct concrete work that is found inadequate by core tests in a manner
3.13
WASTE MANAGEMENT
As specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows.

3.13.1
Mixing Equipment
Before concrete pours, designate on-site area to be paved later in project

for cleaning out concrete mixing trucks. Minimize water used to wash
equipment.
3.13.2
Hardened, Cured Waste Concrete
Crush and reuse hardened, cured waste concrete as fill or as a base course
for pavement.
3.13.3
Reinforcing Steel
Collect reinforcing steel and place in designated area for recycling.
SECTION 03 30 00
3.13.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Other Waste
Identify concrete manufacturer's or supplier's policy for collection or

return of construction waste, unused material, deconstruction waste, and/or
packaging material. Return excess cement to supplier. Institute
deconstruction and construction waste separation and recycling for use in
manufacturer's programs. When such a program is not available, seek local
recyclers to reclaim the materials.
3.14
3.14.1
JOINTS
Construction Joints
Make and locate joints not indicated so as not to impair strength and
appearance of the structure, as approved. Locate construction joints as
follows:
a. In walls at not more than 60 feet in any horizontal direction; at
top of footing; at top of slabs on ground; at top and bottom of door
and window openings or where required to conform to architectural
details; and at underside of deepest beam or girder framing into wall
b. In columns or piers, at top of footing; at top of slabs on ground;
and at underside of deepest beam or girder framing into column or pier
c. Near midpoint of spans for supported slabs, beams, and girders
unless a beam intersects a girder at the center, in which case
construction joints in girder must offset a distance equal to twice the
width of the beam. Make transfer of shear through construction joint
by use of inclined reinforcement.
d. In slabs on ground, so as to divide slab into areas not in excess of
1,200 square feet
Provide keyways at least 1-1/2-inches deep in construction joints in walls
and slabs and between walls and footings; approved bulkheads may be used
for slabs.
Joints must be perpendicular to main reinforcement.
continued across construction joints.
3.14.2
Reinforcement must be
Waterstops
Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated.

Install waterstops to form a continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make
adequate provisions to support and protect waterstops during progress of
work. Make field joints in waterstops in accordance with waterstop
manufacturer's printed instructions, as approved. Protect waterstops
protruding from joints from damage.
3.14.3
Isolation Joints in Slabs on Ground
Provide joints at points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical

surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
elsewhere as indicated.
Fill joints with premolded joint filler strips 1/2 inch thick, extending
full slab depth. Install filler strips at proper level below finish floor
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
elevation with a slightly tapered, dress-and-oiled wood strip temporarily

secured to top of filler strip to form a groove not less than 3/4 inch in
depth where joint is sealed with sealing compound and not less than 1/4 inch
in depth where joint sealing is not required. Remove wood strip after
concrete has set. Contractor must clean groove of foreign matter and loose
particles after surface has dried.
3.14.4
Control Joints in Slabs on Ground
Provide joints to form panels as indicated.

Under and on exact line of each control joint, cut 50 percent of welded
wire fabric reinforcement before placing concrete.
Joints must be 1/8-inch wide by 1/5 to 1/4 of slab depth and formed by
inserting hand-pressed fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top
surface of strip is flush with slab surface or by cutting the concrete with
a saw after the concrete has set. After concrete has cured for at least 7
days, the Contractor must remove inserts and clean groove of foreign matter
and loose particles.
In Hawaii, sawcutting will be limited to within 12 hours after set and at
1/4 slab depth.
3.14.5
Sealing Joints in Slabs on Ground
Isolation and control joints which are to receive finish flooring material
must be sealed with joint sealing compound after concrete curing period.
Slightly underfill groove with joint sealing compound to prevent extrusion
of compound. Remove excess material as soon after sealing as possible.
Sealing is not required for isolation and control joints to be covered with
finish flooring material. Groove must be left ready to receive filling
material that is provided as part of finish floor covering work.
3.15
3.15.1
INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGE DEVICES

General
Anchorage devices and embedded items required for other work that is
attached to, or supported by, set and build in cast-in-place concrete as
part of the work of this section, using setting drawings, instructions, and
directions for work to be attached thereto.
3.15.2
Placing Anchorage Devices
Anchorage devices and embedded items must be positioned accurately and

supported against displacement. Fill openings in anchorage devices such as
slots and threaded holes with an approved, removable material to prevent
entry of concrete into openings.
3.16
3.16.1
CONCRETE CONVEYING
Transfer of Concrete At Project Site
Handle concrete from point of delivery and transfer to concrete conveying

equipment and to locations of final deposit as rapidly as practical by
methods which prevent segregation and loss of concrete mix materials.
SECTION 03 30 00
3.16.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Mechanical Equipment for Conveying Concrete
Equipment must ensure a continuous flow of concrete at delivery end, as

approved. Provide runways for wheeled concrete-conveying equipment from
concrete delivery point to locations of final deposit. Interior surfaces
of concrete conveying equipment must be free of hardened concrete, debris,
water, snow, ice, and other deleterious substances.
SECTION 03 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 05 12 00A
*1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
11/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

AISC 201
(2006) AISC Certification Program for

Structural Steel Fabricators
AISC 303
(2010) Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges
AISC 325
(2005) Steel Construction Manual
AISC 326
(2009) Detailing for Steel Construction
AISC 810
(1997) Design Guide 10: Erection Bracing

of Low-Rise Structural Steel Buildings
ANSI/AISC 341
(2005; Suppl No. 1 2005) Seismic

Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings
ANSI/AISC 360
(2005) Specification for Structural Steel

Buildings

AWS A2.4
(2007) Standard Symbols for Welding,

Brazing and Nondestructive Examination
AWS D1.1/D1.1M
(2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel

ASME B46.1
(2009) Surface Texture, Surface Roughness,

Waviness and Lay

ASTM A 123/A 123M
(2009) Standard Specification for Zinc

(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
ASTM A 143/A 143M
(2007) Standard Practice for Safeguarding

Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Structural Steel Products and
Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement
ASTM A 153/A 153M

SECTION 05 12 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware
ASTM A 307
(2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon

Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength
ASTM A 325

Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A 36/A 36M
(2008) Standard Specification for Carbon

Structural Steel
ASTM A 490

Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A 501

Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing
ASTM A 563
(2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon

and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A 6/A 6M
(2010) Standard Specification for General

Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel
Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
ASTM A 780/A 780M
(2009) Standard Practice for Repair of

Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A 992/A 992M

Structural Steel Shapes
ASTM C 1107/C 1107M
(2008) Standard Specification for Packaged

Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
ASTM C 827
(2010) Change in Height at Early Ages of

Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious
Mixtures
ASTM F 1554
(2007a) Standard Specification for Anchor

Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield
Strength
ASTM F 436
(20109) Hardened Steel Washers
ASTM F 844
(2007a) Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat),

Unhardened for General Use
ASTM F 959
(2009) Compressible-Washer-Type Direct

Tension Indicators for Use with Structural
Fasteners

SSPC PA 1
(2000; E 2004) Shop, Field, and

SECTION 05 12 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Maintenance Painting of Steel

SSPC PS 13.01
(1982; E 2004) Epoxy Polyamide Painting

System
SSPC Paint 25
(1997; E 2004) Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed

Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned
Steel, Type I and Type II
SSPC SP 3
(1982; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3
(2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning

29 CFR 1926.756
1.2
Steel Erection; Beams and Columns
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide the structural steel system, including shop primer galvanizing,

complete and ready for use. Structural steel systems including design,
materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection,
inspection, quality control, and testing shall be provided in accordance
with ANSI/AISC 360 and ANSI/AISC 341 except as modified in this contract.
1.3
SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Erection Plan, including description of temporary supports;
Fabrication drawings including description of connections;
G, RO
G, RO
SD-03 Product Data

Shop primer
Welding electrodes and rods
Load indicator washers
Non-Shrink Grout
Include test report for Class B primer.
SD-06 Test Reports
Class B coating
Supply the certified manufacturer's mill reports which clearly
show the applicable ASTM mechanical and chemical requirements
SECTION 05 12 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
together with the actual test results for the supplied fasteners.
SD-07 Certificates
Steel
Welding procedures and qualifications
1.4
AISC QUALITY CERTIFICATION
Work shall be fabricated in an AISC certified Category Std fabrication

plant.
1.5
SEISMIC PROVISIONS
The structural steel system shall be provided in accordance with

ANSI/AISC 341.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1
Drawing Requirements
Submit fabrication drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Prepare in

accordance with AISC 326 and AISC 325. Fabrication drawings shall not be
reproductions of contract drawings. Sign and seal fabrication drawings by
a professional engineer registered in the State where the project is
located. Include complete information for the fabrication and erection of
the structure's components, including the location, type, and size of
bolts, welds, member sizes and lengths, connection details, blocks, copes,
and cuts. Double connections that require an erection seat to comply with
OSHA 29 CFR 1926.756(c)(1) shall be shown on the shop drawings, reviewed
and approved by the structural engineer of record. Use AWS A2.4 standard
welding symbols. Shoring and temporary bracing shall be designed and
sealed by a registered professional engineer and submitted for record
purposes as part of the drawings. Member substitutions of details shown on
the contract drawings shall be clearly highlighted on the fabrication
drawings. Explain the reasons for any deviations from the contract
drawings.
1.6.2
1.6.2.1
Certifications
Erection Plan
Submit for record purposes.

shoring and bracing.
1.6.2.2
Indicate the sequence of erection, temporary
Welding Procedures and Qualifications
Prior to welding, submit certification for each welder stating the type of
welding and positions qualified for, the code and procedure qualified
under, date qualified, and the firm and individual certifying the
qualification tests. If the qualification date of the welding operator is
more than one-year old, the welding operator's qualification certificate
shall be accompanied by a current certificate by the welder attesting to
the fact that he has been engaged in welding since the date of
certification, with no break in welding service greater than 6 months.
SECTION 05 12 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Conform to all requirements specified in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STEEL
2.1.1
Structural Steel
ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.1.2
High-Strength Structural Steel
2.1.3
Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing
Wide flange shapes, ASTM A 992/A 992M.

2.1.4
Structural Steel Tubing
ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B ; ASTM A 501.

2.1.5
Steel Pipe
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B, weight class STD (Standard).

2.2
BOLTS, NUTS, AND WASHERS
Provide the following unless indicated otherwise.

2.2.1
2.2.1.1
Structural Steel
Bolts
ASTM A 325, Type 1. The bolt heads and the nuts of the supplied fasteners
must be marked with the manufacturer's identification mark, the strength
grade and type specified by ASTM specifications.
2.2.1.2
Nuts
ASTM A 563, Grade and Style for applicable ASTM bolt standard recommended.
2.2.1.3
Washers
ASTM F 436 washers for ASTM A 325 and ASTM A 490 bolts.
2.2.2
2.2.2.1
High-Strength Structural Steel

Bolts
ASTM A 325, Type 1

2.2.2.2
ASTM A 490, Type 1 or 2.
Nuts
ASTM A 563, Grade and Style as specified in the applicable ASTM bolt
standard.
2.2.2.3
Washers
ASTM F 436, plain carbon steel.
SECTION 05 12 00
2.2.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Foundation Anchorage
2.2.3.1
Anchor Bolts
ASTM F 1554.
2.2.3.2
Anchor Nuts
ASTM A 563, Grade A, hex style.

2.2.3.3
Anchor Washers
ASTM F 844.
2.2.3.4
Anchor Plate Washers
ASTM A 36/A 36M

2.2.4
Load Indicator Washers
ASTM F 959.
2.3
2.3.1
STRUCTURAL STEEL ACCESSORIES

Welding Electrodes and Rods
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
2.3.2
Non-Shrink Grout
ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with no ASTM C 827 shrinkage.

nonmetallic.
2.3.3
Grout shall be
Welded Shear Stud Connectors
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
2.4
SHOP PRIMER
SSPC Paint 25, (alkyd primer) or SSPC PS 13.01 epoxy-polyamide, green

primer (Form 150) type 1, except provide a Class B coating in accordance
with AISC 325 for slip critical joints. Primer shall conform to Federal,
State, and local VOC regulations. If flash rusting occurs, re-clean the
surface prior to application of primer.
2.5
GALVANIZING
ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable, unless specified

otherwise galvanize after fabrication where practicable.
2.6
2.6.1
FABRICATION
Markings
Prior to erection, members shall be identified by a painted erection mark.

Connecting parts assembled in the shop for reaming holes in field
connections shall be match marked with scratch and notch marks. Do not
locate erection markings on areas to be welded . Do not locate match
markings in areas that will decrease member strength or cause stress
SECTION 05 12 00
concentrations.
2.6.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Affix embossed tags to hot-dipped galvanized members.
Shop Primer
Shop prime structural steel, except as modified herein, in accordance with

SSPC PA 1. Do not prime steel surfaces embedded in concrete, galvanized
surfaces, surfaces designed as part of a composite steel concrete section,
or surfaces within 0.5 inch of the toe of the welds prior to welding
(except surfaces on which metal decking is to be welded). Slip critical
surfaces shall be primed with a Class B coating. Prior to assembly, prime
surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible after assembly. Do not
apply primer in foggy or rainy weather; when the ambient temperature is
below 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F; or when the primer may be exposed
to temperatures below 40 degrees F within 48 hours after application,
unless approved otherwise by the Contracting Officer.
2.6.2.1
Cleaning
SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3, except steel exposed in spaces above ceilings, attic
spaces, furred spaces, and chases that will be hidden to view in finished
construction may be cleaned to SSPC SP 3 when recommended by the shop
primer manufacturer. Maintain steel surfaces free from rust, dirt, oil,
grease, and other contaminants through final assembly.
2.6.2.2
Primer
Apply primer to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mil except provide the
Class B coating for slip critical joints in accordance with the coating
manufacturer's recommendations. Repair damaged primed surfaces with an
additional coat of primer.
2.7
DRAINAGE HOLES
Adequate drainage holes shall be drilled to eliminate water traps. Hole

diameter shall be 1/2 inch and location shall be indicated on the detail
drawings. Hole size and location shall not affect the structural integrity.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
FABRICATION
Fabrication shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of

AISC 325. Fabrication and assembly shall be done in the shop to the
greatest extent possible. The fabricating plant shall be certified under
the AISC 201 for Category Conventional Steel Building Structures structural
steelwork.
Compression joints depending on contact bearing shall have a surface
roughness not in excess of 500 micro inch as determined by ASME B46.1, and
ends shall be square within the tolerances for milled ends specified in
ASTM A 6/A 6M.
Structural steelwork, except surfaces of steel to be encased in concrete,
surfaces to be field welded, surfaces to be fireproofed, and contact
surfaces of friction-type high-strength bolted connections shall be
prepared for painting in accordance with endorsement "P" of AISC 201 and
primed with the specified paint.
Shop splices of members between field splices will be permitted only where
SECTION 05 12 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
indicated on the Contract Drawings. Splices not indicated require the

approval of the Contracting Officer.
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.3
ERECTION
a.
For low-rise structural steel buildings ( 60 feet tall or less and a

maximum of 2 stories), the erection plan shall conform to AISC 303 and
the structure shall be erected in accordance withAISC 810.
Provide for drainage in structural steel. After final positioning of steel

members, provide full bearing under base plates and bearing plates using
nonshrink grout. Place nonshrink grout in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.1
STORAGE
Material shall be stored out of contact with the ground in such manner and
location as will minimize deterioration.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
Except as modified in this section, connections not detailed shall be

designed in accordance with ANSI/AISC 360. Build connections into existing
work. Do not tighten anchor bolts set in concrete with impact torque
wrenches. Punch, subpunch and ream, or drill bolt and pin holes
perpendicular to the surface of the member. Holes shall not be cut or
enlarged by burning. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be clean of dirt and
rust, and lubricated immediately prior to installation.
3.4.1
Common Grade Bolts
ASTM A 307 bolts shall be tightened to a "snug tight" fit. "Snug tight" is
the tightness that exists when plies in a joint are in firm contact. If
firm contact of joint plies cannot be obtained with a few impacts of an
impact wrench, or the full effort of a man using a spud wrench, contact the
Contracting Officer for further instructions.
3.4.2
High-Strength Bolts
ASTM A 325 and ASTM A 490 bolts shall be fully tensioned to 70 percent of
their minimum tensile strength.
Bolts shall be installed in connection
holes and initially brought to a snug tight fit. After the initial
tightening procedure, bolts shall then be fully tensioned, progressing from
the most rigid part of a connection to the free edges.
3.4.2.1
Installation of Load Indicator Washers (LIW)
ASTM F 959. Where possible, the LIW shall be installed under the bolt
head and the nut shall be tightened. If the LIW is installed adjacent to
the turned element, provide a flat ASTM F 436 washer between the LIW and
nut when the nut is turned for tightening, and between the LIW and bolt
head when the bolt head is turned for tightening. In addition to the LIW,
provide flat ASTM F 436 washers under both the bolt head and nut when
ASTM A 490 bolts are used.
SECTION 05 12 00
3.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
GAS CUTTING
Use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors

will not be permitted on any major member in the structural framing. Use
of a gas cutting torch will be permitted on minor members not under stress
only after approval has been obtained from the Contracting Officer.
3.6
WELDING
AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Grind exposed welds smooth as indicated. Provide

AWS D1.1/D1.1M qualified welders, welding operators, and tackers.
The Contractor shall develop and submit the Welding Procedure
Specifications (WPS) for all welding, including welding done using
prequalified procedures. Prequalified procedures may be submitted for
information only; however, procedures that are not prequalified shall be
submitted for approval.
3.6.1
Removal of Temporary Welds, Run-Off Plates, and Backing Strips
Remove only from finished areas.

3.7
SHOP PRIMER REPAIR
Repair shop primer in accordance with the paint manufacturer's

recommendation for surfaces damaged by handling, transporting, cutting,
welding, or bolting.
3.7.1
Field Priming
Field priming of steel exposed to the weather, or located in building areas

without HVAC for control of relative humidity. After erection, the field
bolt heads and nuts, field welds, and any abrasions in the shop coat shall
be cleaned and primed with paint of the same quality as that used for the
shop coat.
3.8
GALVANIZING REPAIR
Provide as indicated or specified. Galvanize after fabrication where

practicable. Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A 780/A 780M
zinc rich paint for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting,
welding, or bolting. Do not heat surfaces to which repair paint has been
applied.
3.9
Perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required
for testing, except that electric power for field tests will be furnished
as set forth in Division 1. The Contracting Officer shall be notified in
writing of defective welds, bolts, nuts, and washers within 7 working days
of the date of weld inspection.
3.9.1
3.9.1.1
Welds
Visual Inspection
AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Furnish the services of AWS-certified welding inspectors

for fabrication and erection inspection and testing and verification
inspections. Welding inspectors shall visually inspect and mark welds,
SECTION 05 12 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
including fillet weld end returns.

3.9.1.2
Nondestructive Testing
AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Test locations shall be selected by the Contracting

Officer. If more than 20 percent of welds made by a welder contain defects
identified by testing, then all welds made by that welder shall be tested
by radiographic or ultrasonic testing, as approved by the Contracting
Officer. When all welds made by an individual welder are required to be
tested, magnetic particle testing shall be used only in areas inaccessible
to either radiographic or ultrasonic testing. Retest defective areas after
repair.
3.9.2
3.9.2.1
Load Indicator Washers

Load Indicator Washer Compression
Load indicator washers shall be tested in place to verify that they have
been compressed sufficiently to provide the 0.015 inch gap when the load
indicator washer is placed under the bolt head and the nut is tightened,
and to provide the 0.005 inch gap when the load indicator washer is placed
under the turned element, as required by ASTM F 959.
3.9.3
3.9.3.1
High-Strength Bolts
Testing Bolt, Nut, and Washer Assemblies
Test a minimum of 3 bolt, nut, and washer assemblies from each mill
certificate batch in a tension measuring device at the job site prior to
the beginning of bolting start-up. Demonstrate that the bolts and nuts,
when used together, can develop tension not less than the provisions
specified in ANSI/AISC 360, depending on bolt size and grade. The bolt
tension shall be developed by tightening the nut. A representative of the
manufacturer or supplier shall be present to ensure that the fasteners are
properly used, and to demonstrate that the fastener assemblies supplied
satisfy the specified requirements.
3.9.3.2
Inspection
Inspection procedures shall be in accordance with ANSI/AISC 360. Confirm

and report to the Contracting Officer that the materials meet the project
specification and that they are properly stored. Confirm that the faying
surfaces have been properly prepared before the connections are assembled.
Observe the specified job site testing and calibration, and confirm that
the procedure to be used provides the required tension. Monitor the work
to ensure the testing procedures are routinely followed on joints that are
specified to be fully tensioned.
Inspection by the Government will include proper preparation, size, gaging
location, and acceptability of welds; identification marking; operation and
current characteristics of welding sets in use; and calibration of torque
wrenches for high-strength bolts.
The Contractor shall inspect proper preparation, size, gaging location, and
acceptability of welds; identification marking; operation and current
characteristics of welding sets in use; and calibration of torque wrenches
for high-strength bolts.
SECTION 05 12 00
3.9.3.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Testing
The Government has the option to perform nondestructive tests on 5 percent

of the installed bolts to verify compliance with pre-load bolt tension
requirements. The nondestructive testing will be done in-place using an
ultrasonic measuring device or any other device capable of determining
in-place pre-load bolt tension. The test locations shall be selected by
the Contracting Officer. If more than 10 percent of the bolts tested
contain defects identified by testing, then all bolts used from the batch
from which the tested bolts were taken, shall be tested. Retest new bolts
after installation.
3.9.4
Testing for Embrittlement
ASTM A 143/A 143M for steel products hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
SECTION 05 12 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 05 30 00A
*1 STEEL DECKS
05/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

AISI D100
(1991; R 2008) Cold-Formed Steel Design

Manual
AISI SG03-3
(2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)

Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual Set

AWS D1.1/D1.1M
AWS D1.3/D1.3M
(2008; Errata 2008) Structural Welding

Code - Sheet Steel

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
(2010) Standard Specification for Steel,

Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened
ASTM A 123/A 123M

Steel Products
ASTM A 36/A 36M

Structural Steel
ASTM A 653/A 653M
(2009a) Standard Specification for Steel

Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 780/A 780M

Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A 792/A 792M

Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM D 1056
(2007) Standard Specification for Flexible

Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded
SECTION 05 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Rubber
ASTM D 1149
(2007) Standard Test Method for Rubber

Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in
a Chamber
ASTM D 746
(2007) Standard Test Method for

Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact
ASTM E 84
(2010) Standard Test Method for Surface

Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE
(updated on-line) Approval Guide

http://www.approvalguide.com/CC_host/pages/public/custom
FM DS 1-28
(2002) Design Wind Loads
STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI)

SDI 31
(2007) Design Manual for Composite Decks,

Form Decks, and Roof Decks
SDI DDMO3
(2004; Errata 2006; Add 2006) Diaphragm

Design Manual; 3rd Edition
SDI DDP
(1987; R 2000) Deck Damage and Penetrations
SDI MOC2
(2006) Manual of Construction with Steel

Deck
UFC 3-301-01
(2010) Structural Engineering

UL 580
(2006; R 2009) Tests for Uplift Resistance

of Roof Assemblies
UL Bld Mat Dir
(2010) Building Materials Directory
1.2
SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
SECTION 05 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Cant Strips
Ridge and Valley Plates
SD-03 Product Data
Accessories
Deck Units
Joint Sealant Material
Powder-Actuated Tool Operator

Repair Paint
Welder Qualifications
Welding Equipment
Welding Rods and Accessories
SD-05 Design Data

Deck Units
Submit manufacturer's design calculations, or applicable published
literature for the structural properties of the proposed deck
units.
SD-07 Certificates
.
Welding Procedures
Fire Safety
1.3
1.3.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Deck Units
Furnish deck units and accessory products from a manufacturer regularly

engaged in manufacture of steel decking. Provide manufacturer's
certificates attesting that the decking material meets the specified
requirements.
SECTION 05 30 00
1.3.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Certification of Powder-Actuated Tool Operator
Manufacturer's certificate attesting that the operators are authorized to

use the low velocity powder-actuated tool.
1.3.3
Qualifications for Welding Work
Follows Welding Procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Test

specimens shall be made in the presence of Contracting Officer and shall be
tested by an approved testing laboratory at the Contractor's expense.
Submit qualified Welder Qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
or under an equivalent approved qualification test. Perform tests on test
pieces in positions and with clearances equivalent to those actually
encountered. If a test weld fails to meet requirements, perform an
immediate retest of two test welds until each test weld passes. Failure in
the immediate retest will require the welder be retested after further
practice or training, performing a complete set of test welds.
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for Welding Equipment and Welding Rods
and Accessories.
1.3.4
Regulatory Requirements
1.3.4.1
Fire Safety
Test roof deck as a part of a roof deck construction assembly of the type
used for this project, listing as fire classified in the UL Bld Mat Dir, or
listing as Class I construction in the FM APP GUIDE, and so labeled.
1.3.4.2
Provide roof construction assembly capable of withstanding an uplift

pressure of 60 pounds per square foot when tested in accordance with the
uplift pressure test described in the FM DS 1-28 or as described in UL 580
and in general compliance with UFC 3-301-01.
1.3.5
Show type and location of units, location and sequence of connections,

bearing on supports, methods of anchoring, attachment of accessories,
adjusting plate details, size and location of holes to be cut and
reinforcement to be provided, the manufacturer's erection instructions and
other pertinent details.
1.4
Deliver deck units to the site in a dry and undamaged condition. Store and
handle steel deck in a manner to protect it from corrosion, deformation,
and other types of damage. Do not use decking for storage or as working
platform until units have been fastened into position. Exercise care not
to damage material or overload decking during construction. Must not
exceed the design live load. The maximum uniform distributed storage load.
Stack decking on platforms or pallets and cover with weathertight
ventilated covering. Elevate one end during storage to provide drainage.
Maintain deck finish at all times to prevent formation of rust. Repair
deck finish using touch-up paint. Replace damaged material.
SECTION 05 30 00
1.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
1.5.1
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOF DECKS

Properties of Sections
Properties of metal roof deck sections must comply with engineering design
width as limited by the provisions of AISI D100.
1.5.2
Allowable Loads
Indicate total uniform dead and live load for detailing purposes.
PART 2
2.1
2.1.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Steel Sheet
Flat rolled carbon steel sheets of structural quality, thickness not less
than indicated inch meeting the requirements of AISI SG03-3, except as
modified herein.
2.1.2
Steel Coating
ASTM A 653/A 653M designation G90 galvanized, or ASTM A 792/A 792M

designation AZ55, aluminum-zinc alloy. Apply coating to both sides of
sheet.
2.1.3
Mixes
2.1.4
Galvanized Steel Angles for Roof Decks
Provide hot-rolled carbon steel angles conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M,

merchant quality, Grade Designation SAE/AISI 1023 or SAE/AISI 1025, and
hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.1.5
Joint Sealant Material for Roof Decks
Provide a nonskinning, gun-grade, bulk compound material as recommended by

the manufacturer.
2.1.6
Galvanizing Repair Paint for Roof Decks
Provide a high zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in

galvanized steel and shall conform to ASTM A 780/A 780M.
2.1.7
Flexible Closure Strips for Roof Decks
Provide strips made of elastomeric material specified and premolded to the

configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends and
sides of steel roof decking.
Provide a vulcanized, closed-cell, expanded chloroprene elastomer having
approximately 3.5 psi compressive-deflection at 25 percent deflection
(limits), conforming to ASTM D 1056, Grade No. SCE 41, with the following
additional properties:
Brittleness temperature of minus 40 degrees F when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 746.
SECTION 05 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Flammability resistance with a flame spread rating of less than 25 when

tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Resistance to ozone must be "no cracks" after exposure of a sample kept
under a surface tensile strain of 25 percent to an ozone concentration
of 100 parts per million of air by volume in air for 100 hours at 104
degrees F and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1149.
Provide a elastomeric type adhesive with a chloroprene base as
recommended by the manufacturer of the flexible closure strips.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
Provide accessories of same material as deck, unless specified otherwise.

Provide manufacturer's standard type accessories, as specified.
2.2.1
Adjusting Plates
Provide adjusting plates, or segments of deck units, of same thickness and

configuration as deck units in locations too narrow to accommodate full
size units. Provide factory cut plates of predetermined size where
possible.
2.2.2
End Closures
Fabricated of sheet metal by the deck manufacturer. Provide end closures

minimum 0.028 inch thick to close open ends at end walls, eaves, and
openings through deck.
2.2.3
Partition Closures
Provide closures for closing voids above interior walls and partitions that
are perpendicular to the direction of the configurations. Provide rubber,
plastic, or sheet steel closures above typical partitions.
2.2.4
Sheet Metal Collar
Where deck is cut for passage of pipes, ducts, columns, etc., and deck is
to remain exposed, provide a neatly cut sheet metal collar to cover edges
of deck. Do not cut deck until after installation of supplemental supports.
2.2.5
Access Hole Covers
Sheet metal, minimum 0.0474 inch thick.

2.2.6
Hanger
Provide clips or loops for utility systems of one or more of the following
types:
a.
Lip tabs or integral tabs where noncellular decking or flat plate of

cellular section is 0.0474 inch thick or more, and a structural
concrete fill is used over deck.
b.
Slots or holes punched in decking for installation of pigtails.
d.
Decking manufacturer's standard as approved by the Contracting Officer.

SECTION 05 30 00
2.2.7
W912HN-09-X-1813
Provide mechanical fasteners, such as powder actuated or pneumatically

driven fasteners, for anchoring the deck to structural supports and
adjoining units that are designed to meet the loads indicated. Provide
positive locking-type fasteners listed by the Steel Deck Institute and
ICC-ES, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.2.8
Miscellaneous Accessories
Furnish the manufacturer's standard accessories to complete the deck
installation. Furnish metal accessories of the same material as the deck
and with the minimum design thickness as follows: saddles, 0.0474 inch
welding washers, 0.0598 inch cant strip, 0.0295 inch other metal
accessories, 0.0358 inch unless otherwise indicated. Accessories must
include but not be limited to saddles, welding washers, fasteners, cant
strips, butt cover plates, underlapping sleeves, and ridge and valley
plates.
2.3
FABRICATION
2.3.1
Roof Deck
Conform to ASTM A 792/A 792M or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M for deck used in
conjunction with insulation and built-up roofing. Fabricate roof deck
units of the steel design thickness required by the design drawings and
galvanized in conformance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating class .
2.3.1.1
Cant Strips for Roof Decks
Fabricate cant strips from the specified commercial-quality steel sheets

not less than nominal 0.0359 inch thick before galvanizing. Bend strips to
form a 45-degree cant not less than 5 inch wide, with top and bottom
flanges a minimum 3 inch wide. Length of strips 10 feet.
2.3.1.2
Ridge and Valley Plates for Roof Decks
Fabricate plates from the specified structural-quality steel sheets, not

less than nominal 0.0359 inch thick before galvanizing. Provide plates of
minimum 4-1/2 inch wide and bent to provide tight fitting closures at
ridges and valleys. Provide a minimum length of ridge and valley plates of
10 feet.
2.3.1.3
Metal Closure Strips for Roof Decks
Fabricate strips from the specified commercial-quality steel sheets not

less than nominal 0.0359 inch thick before galvanizing. Provide strips
from the configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open
ends and sides of steel roof decking.
2.3.2
Form Deck
Conform to ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 1008 for deck used as formwork for
concrete. Fabricate form deck of the steel design thickness required by
the design drawings. Paint with one coat of manufacture's standard
paint.
SECTION 05 30 00
2.3.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Venting
To ensure positive venting from the underside, provide slotted or

perforated steel deck to receive concrete fill, overlay, or a poured
concrete deck.
2.3.4
Touch-Up Paint
After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean, and touchup paint the
scarred areas on top and bottom surfaces of metal roof decking. The
scarred areas include welds, weld scars, bruises, and rust spots. Touchup
galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint. Touchup painted
surfaces with repair paint of painted surfaces.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Prior to installation of decking units and accessories, examine worksite to

verify that as-built structure will permit installation of decking system
without modification.
3.2
INSTALLATION
Install steel deck units in accordance with SDI 31 approved shop drawings.
Place units on structural supports, properly adjusted, leveled, and aligned
at right angles to supports before permanently securing in place. Damaged
deck and accessories including material which is permanently stained or
contaminated, deformed, or with burned holes shall not be installed.
Extend deck units over three or more supports unless absolutely
impractical. Report inaccuracies in alignment or leveling to the
Contracting Officer and make necessary corrections before permanently
anchoring deck units. Locate deck ends over supports only. Ends of floor
deck may be lapped or butted. Do not use unanchored deck units as a work
or storage platform. Permanently anchor units placed by the end of each
working day. Do not support suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts,
utilities, or other loads by steel deck unless indicated. Distribute loads
by appropriate means to prevent damage.
3.2.1
Attachment
Immediately after placement and alignment, and after correcting

inaccuracies, permanently fasten steel deck units to structural supports
and to adjacent deck units by welding with normal5/8 inch diameter puddle
welds or fastened with screws, powder-actuated fasteners, or pneumatically
driven fasteners as indicated on the design drawings and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommended procedure and SDI 31. Clamp or weight deck
units to provide firm contact between deck units and structural supports
while performing welding or fastening. Attachment of adjacent deck units
by button-punching is prohibited.
3.2.1.1
Welding
Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M using methods and

electrodes recommended by the manufacturers of the base metal alloys being
used. Ensure only operators previously qualified by tests prescribed in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3/D1.3M make welds. Immediately recertify, or
SECTION 05 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
replace qualified welders, that are producing unsatisfactory welding.

Conform to the recommendations of the Steel Deck Institute and the steel
deck manufacturerfor location, size, and spacing of fastening. Do not use
welding washers at the connections of the deck to supports. Do not use
welding washers at sidelaps. Holes and similar defects will not be
acceptable. Lap 2 inch deck ends. Attach all partial or segments of deck
units to structural supports in accordance with Section 2.5 of SDI DDMO3.
Immediately clean welds by chipping and wire brushing. Heavily coat welds,
cut edges and damaged portions of coated finish with zinc-dust paint
conforming to ASTM A 780/A 780M .
3.2.1.2
Fastening
Anchor deck to structural supports and adjoining units with mechanical

fasteners as listed by the Steel Deck Institute, ICC-ES, the fastener and
steel deck manufacturers, and approved by the Contracting Officer. Drive
the powder-actuated fasteners with a low-velocity piston tool by an
operator authorized by the manufacturer of the powder-actuated tool. Drive
pneumatically fasteners with a low-velocity fastening tool and comply with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2.2
Openings
Cut or drill all holes and openings required and be coordinated with the
drawings, specifications, and other trades. Frame and reinforce openings
through the deck in conformance with SDI DDP. Reinforce holes and openings
6 to 12 inch across by 0.0474 inch thick steel sheet at least 12 inch wider
and longer than the opening and be fastened to the steel deck at each
corner of the sheet and at a maximum of 6 inch on center. Reinforce holes
and openings larger than 12 inch by steel channels or angles installed
perpendicular to the steel joists and supported by the adjacent steel
joists. Install steel channels or angles perpendicular to the deck ribs
and fasten to the channels or angles perpendicular to the steel joists.
3.2.3
Deck Damage
SDI MOC2, for repair of deck damage.

3.2.4
3.2.4.1
Accessory Installation
Adjusting Plates
Provide in locations too narrow to accommodate full-size deck units and

install as shown on shop drawings.
3.2.4.2
End Closures
Provide end closure to close open ends of cells at columns, walls, and
openings in deck.
3.2.4.3
Closures Above Partitions
Provide for closing voids between cells over partitions that are
perpendicular to direction of cells. Provide a one-piece closure strip for
partitions 4 inch nominal or less in thickness and two-piece closure strips
for wider partitions. Provide sheet metal closures above fire-rated
partitions at both sides of partition with space between filled with
fiberglass insulation. Provide flexible rubber closures above
acoustic-rated partitions at both sides of partition with space between
SECTION 05 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
filled with blanket insulation.

3.2.4.4
Access Hole Covers
Provide to seal holes cut in decking to facilitate welding of decking to

structural supports.
3.2.4.5
Hangers
Provide as indicated to support utility system .

provide one device per 6.25 square feet.
3.2.5
Space devices so as to
Concrete Work
Prior to placement of concrete, inspect installed decking to ensure that

there has been no permanent deflection or other damage to decking. Replace
decking which has been damaged or permanently deflected as approved by the
Contracting Officer. Place concrete on metal deck in accordance with
Construction Practice of SDI 31.
3.3
JOINT SEALING FOR ROOF DECKS
Seal sidelaps and endlaps with manufacturer's recommended joint sealing

material. Shop or field apply the material. Before applying the sealing
material, completely remove dust, dirt, moisture, and other foreign
material from the surfaces to which the sealing material is to be applied.
Apply sealing material in strict accordance with the sealing material
manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.4
CANT STRIPS FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide strips to be fusion welded to surface of roof decking, secured to

wood nailers by galvanized screws or to steel framing by galvanized
self-tapping screws or welds. Do not exceed spacing of welds and fasteners
of 12 inch. Lap end joints a minimum 3 inch and secure with galvanized
sheet metal screws spaced a maximum 4 inch on center.
3.5
RIDGE AND VALLEY PLATES FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide plates to be fusion welded to top surface of roof decking. Lap end
joints a minimum 3 inch. For valley plates, provide endlaps to be in the
direction of water flow.
3.6
CLOSURE STRIPS FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide closure strips at open, uncovered ends and edges of the roof
decking and in voids between roof decking and top of walls and partitions
where indicated. Install closure strips in position in a manner to provide
a weathertight installation.
3.7
CLEANING AND PROTECTION FOR ROOF DECKS
Upon completion of the deck, sweep surfaces clean and prepare for
installation of the roofing.
SECTION 05 30 00
3.8
3.8.1
W912HN-09-X-1813

Decks Not Receiving Concrete
Inspect the decking top surface for distortion after installation. For
roof decks not receiving concrete, verify distortion by placing a straight
edge across three adjacent top flanges. The maximum allowable gap between
the straight edge and the top flanges is 1/16 inch; when gap is more than
1/16 inch, provide corrective measures or replacement. Reinspect decking
after performing corrective measures or replacement.
SECTION 05 30 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 05 40 00A
*1 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

AISI SG02-KIT
(2001; Supp 1 2004) North American

Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
AISI SG03-3
(2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)


AWS D1.3/D1.3M
(2008; Errata 2008) Structural Welding

Code - Sheet Steel

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M

ASTM A 1011/A 1011M

Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability and Ultra-High Strength
ASTM A 123/A 123M

Steel Products
ASTM A 153/A 153M

Hardware
ASTM A 370
(2010) Standard Test Methods and

Definitions for Mechanical Testing of
Steel Products
ASTM A 653/A 653M

the Hot-Dip Process
SECTION 05 40 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
ASTM C 1513

Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing Connections
ASTM C 955
(2009a) Load-Bearing (Transverse and

Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and
Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application
of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster
Bases
ASTM E 329
(2009) Standard Specification for Agencies

of Materials Used in Construction
ASTM F 1941

Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded
Fasteners (Unified Inch Screw Threads
(UN/UNR))
ASTM F 1941M

Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded
Fasteners (Metric)

SSPC Paint 25
1.2
(1997; E 2004) Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed

Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned
Steel, Type I and Type II
SUBMITTALS

that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Framing Components; G, RO
a. Cross sections, plans, and/or elevations showing component
types and locations for each framing application; including shop
coatings and material thicknesses for each framing component.
b. Connection details showing fastener type, quantity,
location, and other information to assure proper installation.
c. Drawings depicting panel configuration, dimensions,
components, locations, and construction sequence if the Contractor
elects to install prefabricated/prefinished frames.
SD-03 Product Data
Steel studs,joists, tracks, bracing, bridging and accessories
SD-05 Design Data
Metal framing calculations; G, RO
SECTION 05 40 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SD-07 Certificates
Load-bearing cold-formed metal framing
Mill certificates or test reports from independent testing
agency, qualified in accordance with ASTM E 329, showing that the
steel sheet used in the manufacture of each cold-formed component
complies with the minimum yield strengths and uncoated steel
thickness specified. Test reports shall be based on the results
of three coupon tests in accordance with ASTM A 370.
Welds
Certified copies of welder qualifications test records showing
qualification in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M.
1.3
Deliver materials to job site and store in adequately ventilated, dry

locations. Storage area shall permit easy access for inspection and
handling. If necessary to store materials outside, stack off the ground,
support on a level platform, and protect from the weather as approved.
Handle materials to prevent damage. Finish of the framing members shall be
maintained at all times, using an approved high zinc dust content,
galvanizing repair paint whenever necessary to prevent the formation of
rust. Replace damaged items with new, as directed by the Contracting
Officer.
1.4
LOAD-BEARING COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Include top and bottom tracks, bracing, fastenings, and other accessories
necessary for complete installation. Framing members shall have the
structural properties indicated. Where physical structural properties are
not indicated, they shall be as necessary to withstand all imposed loads.
Design framing in accordance with AISI SG03-3.
1.5
a.
MAXIMUM DEFLECTION
Exterior Studs:
Deflection Criteria
Exterior Finish
L/240
Metal Panels
Wall deflections shall be computed on the basis that studs withstand all
lateral forces independent of any composite action from sheathing materials.
Studs abutting windows or louvers shall also be designed not to exceed 1/4
inch maximum deflection.
b.
Roof Rafters:
L/240 - Live load only
SECTION 05 40 00
1.6
W912HN-09-X-1813
1.6.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Drawing Requirements
Submit framing components to show sizes, thicknesses, layout, material

designations, methods of installation, and accessories.
1.6.2
Design Data Required
Submit metal framing calculations to verify sizes, gages, and spacing of

members and connections. Show methods and practices used in installation.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STEEL STUDS, JOISTS, TRACKS, BRACING, BRIDGING AND ACCESSORIES
Framing components shall comply with ASTM C 955 and the following.
2.1.1
Studs and Joists of 16 Gage (0.0598 Inch) and Heavier
Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, SS Grade 50, G60 ; or carbon steel,
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Grade 50, painted.
2.1.2
Studs and Joists of 18 Gage (0.0478 Inch) and Lighter
Studs and Joists of 18 Gage (0.0478 Inch) and Lighter, Track, and
Accessories (All Gages): Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, SS, Grade 50
33,000 psi G60; or carbon steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Grade C, painted.
2.1.3
Sizes, Gages, Section Modulus, and Other Structural Properties
Size and gage as indicated.

2.2
MARKINGS
Studs and track shall have product markings stamped

section. The markings shall be repeated throughout
member at a maximum spacing of 4 feet on center and
easily read. The product marking shall include the
a.
An ICC number.
b.
Manufacturer's identification.
c.
Minimum delivered uncoated steel thickness.
d.
Protective coating designator.
e.
Minimum yield strength.
2.3
on the web of the

the length of the
shall be legible and
following:
CONNECTIONS
Screws for steel-to-steel connections shall be self-drilling, tapping

screws in compliance with ASTM C 1513 of the type, size and location as
shown on the drawings. Electroplated screws shall have a minimum 5 micron
zinc coating in accordance with ASTM F 1941. Screws, bolts, and anchors
shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M or
ASTM A 153/A 153M as appropriate. Screws bolts, and anchors shall be hot
dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M
SECTION 05 40 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
as appropriate.
2.4
PAINT
Ungalvanized steel, if used, shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphate

treated, and coated with corrosion-inhibiting primer, SSPC Paint 25.
2.5
PLASTIC GROMMETS
Supply plastic grommets, recommended by stud manufacturer, to protect

electrical wires. Prevent metal to metal contact for plumbing pipes.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
FASTENING
Fasten framing members together by welding or by using self-drilling or

self-tapping screws. Electrodes and screw connections shall be as required
and indicated in the design calculations.
3.1.1
Welds
All welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M, as

modified by AISI SG02-KIT. All welders, welding operations, and welding
procedures shall be qualified according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M. All welds shall
be cleaned and coated with rust inhibitive galvanizing paint. Do not field
weld materials lighter than 18 gage.
3.1.2
Screws
Screws shall be self-drilling self-tappingtype, size, and location shown on

the drawings. Screw penetration through joined materials shall not be less
than three exposed threads. Minimum spacings and edge distances for screws
shall be as specified in AISI SG02-KIT. Screws covered by sheathing
materials shall have low profile heads.
3.1.3
Anchors
Anchors shall be of the type, size, and location shown on the drawings.
3.1.4
Powder-Actuated Fasteners
Powder-actuated fasteners shall be of the type, size, and location shown on

the drawings.
3.2
3.2.1
INSTALLATION
Tracks
Provide accurately aligned runners at top and bottom of partitions. Anchor

tracks as indicated in design calculations. Butt weld joints in tracks or
splice with stud inserts. Fasteners shall be at least 3 inches from the
edge of concrete slabs.
3.2.2
Studs
Cut studs square and set with firm bearing against webs of top and bottom
tracks. Position studs vertically in tracks and space as indicated in
design. Do not splice studs. Provide at least two studs at jambs of doors
SECTION 05 40 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
and other openings 2 feet wide or larger. Provide jack studs over
openings, as necessary, to maintain indicated stud spacing. Provide
tripled studs at corners, positioned to receive interior and exterior
finishes. Fasten studs to top and bottom tracks by welding or screwing
both flanges to the tracks. Framed wall openings shall include headers and
supporting components as shown on the drawings. Headers shall be installed
in all openings that are larger than the stud spacing in a wall. In
curtain wall construction, provide for vertical movement where studs
connect to the structural frame. Provide horizontal bracing in accordance
with the design calculations and AISI SG03-3, consisting of, as a minimum,
runner channel cut to fit between and welded to the studs or hot- or
cold-rolled steel channels inserted through cutouts in web of each stud and
secured to studs with welded clip angles. Bracing shall be not less than
the following:
LOAD
3.2.3
HEIGHT
BRACING
Wind load only
Up to 10 feet
Over 10 feet
One row at mid-height

Rows 5'-0" o.c. maximum
Axial load
Up to 10 feet
Over 10 feet
Two rows at 1/3 points

Rows 3'-4" o.c. maximum
Joists, Trusses and Rafters
Locate each joist or rafter directly above a stud. Provide doubled joists
under parallel partitions wherever partition length exceeds 1/2 of joist
span. Joists shall have at least 2.50 inches of bearing on steel, 4 inches
on masonry, and shall be reinforced over bearings where required to prevent
web crippling. Splice joists over bearings only. Lap and weld splices as
indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard bridging which shall not be
less than the following:
CLEAR SPAN
Up
14
20
26
to
to
to
to
14
20
26
32
BRIDGING
feet
feet
feet
feet
One row near center

Two rows at 1/3 points
Three rows at 1/4 points
Four rows at 1/5 points
Temporary bracing shall be provided and remain in place until work is

permanently stabilized.
3.2.4
a.
Erection Tolerances
Framing members which will be covered by finishes such as wallboard,
plaster, or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed, shall be within
the following limits:
(1) Layout of walls and partitions:
position;
(2)
Plates and runners:
(3)
Studs:
1/4 inch from intended
1/4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;
1/4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
(4) Face of framing members:

plane.
1/4 inch in 8 feet from a true
SECTION 05 40 00
b.
W912HN-09-X-1813
Framing members which will be covered by ceramic tile set in dry-set

mortar, latex-portland cement mortar, or organic adhesive shall be
within the following limits:
(1) Layout of walls and partitions:
position;
(2)
Plates and runners:
(3)
Studs:
1/4 inch from intended
1/8 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;
1/8 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
(4) Face of framing members:

plane.
1/8 inch in 8 feet from a true
SECTION 05 40 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 05 50 13A
*1 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
05/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

AISC 303
(2010) Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges
ASSE/SAFE A10.3
(2006) Operations - Safety Requirements

for Powder Actuated Fastening Systems

AWS D1.1/D1.1M

ASME B18.2.1
(2010) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws

(Inch Series)
ASME B18.2.2
(2010) Standard for Square and Hex Nuts
ASME B18.21.1
(2009) Washers: Helical Spring-Lock, Tooth

Lock, and Plain Washers (Inch Series)
ASME B18.6.2
(1998; R 2010) Slotted Head Cap Screws,

Square Head Set Screws, and Slotted
Headless Set Screws: Inch Series
ASME B18.6.3
(2003; R 2008) Machine Screws and Machine

Screw Nuts

ASTM A 123/A 123M

Steel Products
ASTM A 153/A 153M

Hardware
ASTM A 307
(2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon

Strength
SECTION 05 50 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
ASTM A 36/A 36M

Structural Steel
ASTM A 47/A 47M

Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A 500/A 500M

Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
Shapes
ASTM A 53/A 53M
(2010) Standard Specification for Pipe,

Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 653/A 653M

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 780/A 780M

Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A 786/A 786M

Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy,
High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel
Floor Plates
ASTM A 924/A 924M
(2010) Standard Specification for General

Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A924/A924M
(2010a) Standard Specification for General

ASTM C 1513

Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing Connections
ASTM D 1187
(1997; R 2002e1) Asphalt-Base Emulsions

for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal
ASTM E 488
(1996; R 2003) Standard Test Methods for

Strength of Anchors in Concrete and
Masonry Elements

MPI 79
(Oct 2009) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal

Primer
SSPC SP 3
SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3
SECTION 05 50 13
1.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s), connections to

structural system, and anchoring details as specified in AISC 303.
Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating
thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions. Show
construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation
with relation to the building construction.
1.3
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store

items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove
and replace damaged items with new items.
PART 2
2.1
2.1.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Structural Carbon Steel
ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.1.2
Structural Tubing
ASTM A 500/A 500M.

2.1.3
Steel Pipe
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

2.1.4
Fittings for Steel Pipe
Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A 47/A 47M.

2.1.5
Gratings
a.
Plank grating, galvanized mill.

channel depth, 24 inch width.
2.1.6
Floor Plates, Patterned
Floor plate ASTM A 786/A 786M.
2.1.7
ASTM A924/A924M, G90, 11 gauge, 3 inch
Steel plate shall not be less than 14 gage.
Anchor Bolts
ASTM A 307. Where exposed, shall be of the same material, color, and
finish as the metal to which applied.
SECTION 05 50 13
2.1.7.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
Expansion Anchors
Provide 1/2in. diameter expansion anchors. Minimum concrete embedment

shall be 3in. Design values listed shall be as tested according to
ASTM E 488.
a.
Minimum allowable pullout value shall be 250lb.
b.
Minimum allowable shear value shall be 250lb.
2.1.7.2
Lag Screws and Bolts
ASME B18.2.1, type and grade best suited for the purpose.
2.1.7.3
Toggle Bolts
ASME B18.2.1.
2.1.7.4
Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets
ASME B18.2.2 or ASTM A 307.

2.1.7.5
Powder Actuated Fasteners
Follow safety provisions of ASSE/SAFE A10.3.

2.1.7.6
Screws
ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.6.2, ASME B18.6.3 and ASTM C 1513.

2.1.7.7
Washers
Provide plain washers to conform to ASME B18.21.1. Provide beveled washers

for American Standard beams and channels, square or rectangular, tapered in
thickness, and smooth. Provide lock washers to conform to ASME B18.21.1.
2.2
2.2.1
FABRICATION FINISHES
Galvanizing
Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication

where practicable. Galvanizing: ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M,
ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 924/A 924M, G90, as applicable.
2.2.2
Galvanize
Anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices necessary

for proper installation, unless indicated otherwise.
2.2.3
Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces
Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming
to ASTM A 780/A 780M or by application of stick or thick paste material
specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved by Contracting
Officer. Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from welds. Heat
surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied, with a torch to a
temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste; spread
molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe off excess
SECTION 05 50 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
material.
2.2.4
Shop Cleaning and Painting
2.2.4.1
Surface Preparation
Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3. Surfaces that
will be exposed in spaces above ceiling or in attic spaces, crawl spaces,
furred spaces, and chases may be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 3 in
lieu of being blast cleaned. Wash cleaned surfaces which become
contaminated with rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants with
solvents until thoroughly clean. Steel to be embedded in concrete shall be
free of dirt and grease. Do not paint or galvanize bearing surfaces,
including contact surfaces within slip critical joints, but coat with rust
preventative applied in the shop.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's

instructions. Verify all measurements and take all field measurements
necessary before fabrication. Exposed fastenings shall be compatible
materials, shall generally match in color and finish, and harmonize with
the material to which fastenings are applied. Include materials and parts
necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely
shown or specified. Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall be cause
for rejection. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Thickness of metal
and details of assembly and supports shall provide strength and stiffness.
Form joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water. Items
listed below require additional procedures.
3.2
WORKMANSHIP
Provide miscellaneous metalwork that is well formed to shape and size, with
sharp lines and angles and true curves. Drilling and punching shall
produce clean true lines and surfaces. Provide continuous welding along
the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Do not
tack weld exposed connections of work in place and ground smooth. Provide
a smooth finish on exposed surfaces of work in place and unless otherwise
approved, flush exposed riveting. Mill joints where tight fits are
required. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well formed, and in
true alignment. Accurately set work to established lines and elevations
and securely fastened in place. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and details.
3.3
ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items

securely in place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or
indicated slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners,
when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry;
machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag bolts, and screws
for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any material. Provide non-ferrous
attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of compatible
materials, generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are
applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
SECTION 05 50 13
3.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
BUILT-IN WORK
Form for anchorage metal work built-in with concrete or masonry, or provide
with suitable anchoring devices as indicated or as required. Furnish metal
work in ample time for securing in place as the work progresses.
3.5
WELDING
Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance

with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections.
Grind visible welds smooth in the finished installation.
3.6
3.6.1
FINISHES
Dissimilar Materials
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat

conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where
aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster, mortar, masonry, wood, or
absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D 1187,
asphalt-base emulsion.
SECTION 05 50 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 06 10 00A
*1 ROUGH CARPENTRY
02/12
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

AMERICAN FOREST & PAPER ASSOCIATION (AF&PA)
AF&PA T10
(2001) Wood Frame Construction Manual for

One- and Two-Family Dwellings
AF&PA T101
(2005) National Design Specification (NDS)

for Wood Construction
AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE (ALSC)

ALSC PS 20
(2010) American Softwood Lumber Standard
AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

AWPA M2
(2007) Standard for Inspection of Treated

Wood Products
AWPA M6
(2007) Brands Used on Forest Products

APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)
APA E445
(2002) Performance Standards and

Qualification Policy for Structural-Use
Panels (APA PRP-108)
APA F405
(1999) Performance Rated Panels
APA L870
(2010) Voluntary Product Standard, PS

1-09, Structural Plywood
APA S350
(2011) Performance Standard for Wood-Based

Structural-Use Panels
ASME B18.2.1
(2010) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws

(Inch Series)
ASME B18.2.2
(2010) Standard for Square and Hex Nuts
ASME B18.5.2.1M
(2006; R 2011) Metric Round Head Short

Square Neck Bolts
ASME B18.5.2.2M
(1982; R 2010) Metric Round Head Square

Neck Bolts
SECTION 06 10 00
ASME B18.6.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
(1981; R 2008) Wood Screws (Inch Series)

ASTM A153/A153M

Hardware
ASTM A307

Strength
ASTM A653/A653M

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM D6007
(2002; R 2008) Standard Test Method for

Determining Formaldehyde Concentration in
Air from Wood Products Using a Small Scale
Chamber
ASTM E1333
(2010) Determining Formaldehyde

Concentrations in Air and Emission Rates
from Wood Products Using a Large Chamber
ASTM F 547
(2006) Nails for Use with Wood and

Wood-Base Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM 4435
(2004) Roof Perimeter Flashing

INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
ICC IBC
(2009; Errata First Printing)

International Building Code
NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (NHLA)
NHLA Rules
(2007) Rules for the Measurement &

Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress
NORTHEASTERN LUMBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NELMA)

NELMA Grading Rules
(2006) Standard Grading Rules for

Northeastern Lumber
REDWOOD INSPECTION SERVICE (RIS) OF THE CALIFORNIA REDWOOD

ASSOCIATION (CRA)
RIS Grade Use
(1998) Redwood Lumber Grades and Uses
SOUTHERN CYPRESS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SCMA)

SCMA Spec
(1986; Supple. No. 1, Aug 1993) Standard

Specifications for Grades of Southern
Cypress
SECTION 06 10 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)

SPIB 1003
(2002) Standard Grading Rules for Southern

Pine Lumber

DOC/NIST PS56
(1973) Structural Glued Laminated Timber

CID A-A-1923
(Rev A; Notice 2) Shield, Expansion (Lag,

Machine and Externally Threaded Wedge Bolt
Anchors)
CID A-A-1924
(Rev A; Notice 2) Shield, Expansion (Self

Drilling Tubular Expansion Shell Bolt
Anchors
CID A-A-1925
(Rev A; Notice 2) Shield Expansion (Nail

Anchors)
WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU (WCLIB)

WCLIB 17
(2000) Standard Grading Rules

WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)
WWPA G-5
1.2
(1998) Western Lumber Grading Rules
SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Modifications of structural members; G
Drawings of structural laminated members, fabricated wood trusses,
engineered wood joists and rafters, and other fabricated
structural members indicating materials, shop fabrication, and
field erection details; including methods of fastening.
Nailers and Nailing Strips; G
Drawings of field erection details, including materials and
methods of fastening nailers in conformance with Factory Mutual
wind uplift rated systems specified in other Sections of these
specifications.
SD-03 Product Data
Engineered wood products
SECTION 06 10 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SD-06 Test Reports

Preservative-treated
plywood
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates of grade
Manufacturer's certificates (approved by an American Lumber
Standards approved agency) attesting that lumber and material not
normally grade marked meet the specified requirements.
Certificate of Inspection for grade marked material by an American
Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) recognized inspection agency
prior to shipment.
Preservative treatment
Take-back program
Include contact information, summary of procedures, and the
limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate
manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling
and/or reuse.
1.3
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Store, protect,

handle, and install prefabricated structural elements in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified. Store materials off the
ground to provide proper ventilation, with drainage to avoid standing
water, and protection against ground moisture and dampness. Store
materials with a moisture barrier at both the ground level and as a cover
forming a well ventilated enclosure. Adhere to requirements for stacking,
lifting, bracing, cutting, notching, and special fastening requirements.
Timber shall be handled and stored in accordance with AITC 111. Remove
defective and damaged materials and provide new materials. Store separated
reusable wood waste convenient to cutting station and area of work.
1.4
1.4.1
GRADING AND MARKING

Lumber
Mark each piece of framing and board lumber or each bundle of small pieces
of lumber with the grade mark of a recognized association or independent
inspection agency. Such association or agency shall be certified by the
Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade the species
used. Surfaces that are to be exposed to view shall not bear grademarks,
stamps, or any type of identifying mark. Hammer marking will be permitted
on timbers when all surfaces will be exposed to view.
1.4.2
Plywood
Mark each sheet with the mark of a recognized association or independent

inspection agency that maintains continuing control over the quality of the
plywood. The mark shall identify the plywood by species group or span
rating, exposure durability classification, grade, and compliance with
SECTION 06 10 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
APA L870.Surfaces that are to be exposed to view shall not bear grademarks
or other types of identifying marks.
1.4.3
Preservative-Treated Plywood
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of treated wood

products. Each treated piece shall be inspected in accordance with AWPA M2
and permanently marked or branded, by the producer, in accordance with
AWPA M6. The Contractor shall provide Contracting Officer's Representative
(COR) with the inspection report of an approved independent inspection
agency that offered products comply with applicable AWPA Standards. The
appropriate Quality Mark on each piece will be accepted, in lieu of
inspection reports, as evidence of compliance with applicable AWPA
treatment standards.
1.5
SIZES AND SURFACING
ALSC PS 20 for dressed sizes of yard and structural lumber. Lumber shall
be surfaced four sides. Size references, unless otherwise specified, are
nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances
allowed by the standard under which the product is produced. Other
measurements are IP or SI standard.
1.6
MOISTURE CONTENT
Air-dry or kiln-dry lumber. Kiln-dry treated lumber after treatment.

Maximum moisture content of wood products shall be as follows at the time
of delivery to the job site:
a.
Framing lumber and board, 19 percent maximum
b.
Materials other than lumber; moisture content shall be in accordance

with standard under which the product is produced
1.7
PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
Treat
a.
0.25 pcf intended for above ground use.
b.
0.40 pcf intended for ground contact and fresh water use. 0.60 pcf
intended for Ammoniacal Copper Quaternary Compound (ACQ)-treated
foundations. 0.80 to 1.00 pcf intended for ACQ-treated pilings. All
wood shall be air or kiln dried after treatment. Specific treatments
shall be verified by the report of an approved independent inspection
agency, or the AWPA Quality Mark on each piece. Do not incise surfaces
of lumber that will be exposed. Brush coat areas that are cut or
drilled after treatment with either the same preservative used in the
treatment or with a 2 percent copper naphthenate solution. All lumber
and woodwork shall be preservative treated. The following items shall
be preservative treated:
1.
Wood framing, woodwork, and plywood up to and including the

subflooring at the first-floor level of structures having crawl
spaces when the bottoms of such items are 24 inches or less from
the earth underneath.
2.
Wood sills, soles, plates, furring, and sleepers that are less than
24 inches from the ground, furring and nailers that are set into
SECTION 06 10 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
or in contact with concrete or masonry.

3.
1.8
Nailers, edge strips, crickets, curbs, and cants for roof decks.
1.8.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Certificates of Grade
Submit certificates attesting that products meet the grade requirements

specified in lieu of grade markings where appearance is important and grade
marks will deface material.
PART 2
2.1
2.1.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Engineered Wood Products
Products shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde if exposed to interior

spaces. Determine formaldehyde concentrations in air from engineered wood
products under test conditions of temperature and relative humidity in
accordance with ASTM D6007 or ASTM E1333. Products shall not be used if
formaldehyde concentration is found to be greater than 0.
2.2
2.2.1
LUMBER
Structural Lumber
Any of the species and grades listed in AF&PA T101 that have allowable
unit stresses in pounds per square inch (psi) not less than 1050 Fb, 700
Ft, 780 Fc, with 1,200,000 E.
Other stress graded or dimensioned items
such as blocking, carriages, and studs shall be standard or No. 2 grade
except that studs may be Stud grade.
2.2.2
Framing Lumber
Framing lumber such as studs, plates, caps, collar beams, cant strips,
bucks, sleepers, nailing strips, and nailers and board lumber such as
subflooring and wall and roof sheathing shall be one of the species listed
in the table below. Minimum grade of species shall be as listed.
Finger-jointed lumber may be used in the same applications as solid lumber
of an equivalent species and grade, provided the finger-jointed lumber
meets all the requirements of the certification and the quality control
programs of the rules writing agency having jurisdiction and all applicable
requirements of DOC/NIST PS56.
SECTION 06 10 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Table of Grades for Framing and Board Lumber

Grading Rules
Species
Framing
Board Lumber
WWPA G-5 standard

grading rules
Aspen, Douglas
Fir-Larch,
Douglas Fir
South, Engelmann
Spruce-Lodgepole
Pine, Engelmann
Spruce, Hem-Fir,
Idaho White
Pine, Lodgepole
Pine, Mountain
Hemlock,
Mountain
Hemlock-Hem-Fir,
Ponderosa
Pine-Sugar Pine,
Ponderosa
Pine-Lodgepole
Pine, Subalpine
Fir, White
Woods, Western
Woods, Western
Cedars, Western
Hemlock
All Species:
Standard
Light Framing
or No. 3
Structural
Light Framing
(Stud Grade
for 2x4
nominal size,
10 feet and
shorter)
All Species:
No. 3 Common
WCLIB 17 standard
grading rules
Douglas
Fir-Larch,
Hem-Fir,
Mountain
Hemlock, Sitka
Spruce, Western
Cedars, Western
Hemlock
All Species:
Standard
Light Framing
or No. 3
Structural
Light Framing
(Stud Grade
for 2x4
nominal size,
10 feet and
shorter)
All Species:
Standard
SECTION 06 10 00
W912HN-09-X-1813

Grading Rules
Species
Framing
Board Lumber
SPIB 1003 standard Southern Pine

grading rules
All Species:
Standard
Light Framing
or No. 3
Structural
Light Framing
(Stud Grade
for 2x4
nominal size,
10 feet and
shorter)
No. 2 Boards
SCMA Spec standard Cypress

specifications
No. 2 Common
No. 2 Common
NELMA Grading Rules Balsam Fir,

standard grading
Eastern
rules
Hemlock-Tamarack,
Eastern Spruce,
Eastern White
Pine, Northern
Pine, Northern
Pine-Cedar
All Species:
Standard
Light Framing
or No. 3
Structural
Light Framing
(Stud Grade
for 2x4
nominal size,
10 feet and
shorter)
All Species:
No. 3 Common
except
Standard for
Eastern White
and Northern
Pine
RIS Grade Use

standard
specifications
All Species:
Standard
Light Framing
or No. 3
Structural
Light Framing
(Stud Grade
for 2x4
nominal size,
10 feet and
shorter)
Construction
Heart
Redwood
SECTION 06 10 00
W912HN-09-X-1813

Grading Rules
Species
Framing
Board Lumber
NHLA Rules rules

for the
measurement and
inspection of
hardwood and
cypress lumber
Cypress
No. 2
Dimension
No. 2 Common
2.3
PLYWOOD, STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS
APA L870, APA S350, APA E445, and APA F405 respectively.
2.3.1
Wall Sheathing
2.3.1.1
Plywood
C-D Grade, Exposure 1, and a minimum thickness of 3/4 inch, as indicated on

drawings. Provide exterior grade particleboard with phenol resin for
interior and exterior applications.
2.4
OTHER MATERIALS
2.4.1
Miscellaneous Wood Members
2.4.1.1
Nonstress Graded Members
Members shall include bridging, corner bracing, furring, grounds, and

nailing strips. Members shall be as indicated on drawings.
2.4.1.2
Blocking
Blocking shall be standard or number 2 grade.

2.4.1.3
Rough Bucks and Frames
Rough bucks and frames shall be straight standard or number 2 grade.

2.4.2
Adhesives
Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials

and as specified.
2.5
ROUGH HARDWARE
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, rough hardware shall be of the

type and size necessary for the project requirements. Sizes, types, and
spacing of fastenings of manufactured building materials shall be as
recommended by the product manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or
specified. Fasteners shall be fabricated from 100 percent re-melted steel.
Rough hardware exposed to the weather or embedded in or in contact with
preservative treated wood, exterior masonry, or concrete walls or slabs
shall be hot-dip zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
SECTION 06 10 00
2.5.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
Bolts, Nuts, Studs, and Rivets
ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.5.2.1M, ASME B18.5.2.2M and ASME B18.2.2.

2.5.2
Anchor Bolts
ASTM A307, size as indicated, complete with nuts and washers.

2.5.3
Expansion Shields
CID A-A-1923, CID A-A-1924, and CID A-A-1925.

maximum size of devices shall be 3/8 inch.
2.5.4
Except as shown otherwise,
Lag Screws and Lag Bolts
ASME B18.2.1.
2.5.5
Wood Screws
ASME B18.6.1.
2.5.6
Nails and Staples
ASTM F 547, size and type best suited for purpose; staples shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer of the materials to be joined. For
sheathing and subflooring, length of nails shall be sufficient to extend 1
inch into supports. In general, 8-penny or larger nails shall be used for
nailing through 1 inch thick lumber and for toe nailing 2 inch thick
lumber; 16-penny or larger nails shall be used for nailing through 2 inch
thick lumber. Nails used with treated lumber and sheathing shall be
hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Nailing shall be
in accordance with the recommended nailing schedule contained in AF&PA T10.
Where detailed nailing requirements are not specified, nail size and
spacing shall be sufficient to develop an adequate strength for the
connection. The connection's strength shall be verified against the nail
capacity tables in AF&PA T101. Reasonable judgment backed by experience
shall ensure that the designed connection will not cause the wood to
split. If a load situation exceeds a reasonable limit for nails, a
specialized connector shall be used.
2.5.7
Door Buck Anchors
Metal anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/4 inch steel, 12 inches long, with ends bent 2
inches. Anchors shall be screwed to the backs of bucks and built into
masonry or concrete. Locate 8 inches above sills and below heads and not
more than 24 inches intermediately between.
Anchorage of bucks to steel
framing shall be as necessary to suit the conditions.
2.5.8
Metal Framing Anchors
Construct anchors to the configuration shown using hot dip zinc-coated

steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, G90. Steel shall be not lighter than
18 gage. Special nails supplied by the manufacturer shall be used for all
nailing.
SECTION 06 10 00
PART 3
3.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Conform to AF&PA T10 unless otherwise indicated or specified. Select

lumber sizes to minimize waste. Fit framing lumber and other rough
carpentry, set accurately to the required lines and levels, and secure in
place in a rigid manner. Do not splice framing members between bearing
points. Set joists, rafters, and purlins with their crown edge up. Frame
members for the passage of pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not cut or bore
structural members for the passage of ducts or pipes without approval.
Reinforce all members damaged by such cutting or boring by means of
specially formed and approved sheet metal or bar steel shapes, or remove
and provide new, as approved. Provide as necessary for the proper
completion of the work all framing members not indicated or specified.
Spiking and nailing not indicated or specified otherwise shall be in
accordance with the Nailing Schedule contained in ICC IBC; perform bolting
in an approved manner. Spikes, nails, and bolts shall be drawn up tight.
3.2
MISCELLANEOUS
3.2.1
Wood Roof Nailers, Edge Strips, Crickets, Curbs, and Cants
Provide sizes and configurations indicated or specified and anchored

securely to continuous construction.
3.2.1.1
Roof Nailing Strips
Provide roof nailing strips for roof decks as indicated. Apply nailing
strips in straight parallel rows in the direction and spacing indicated.
Strips shall be surface applied.
a.
Surface-Applied Nailers: Shall be 3 inches wide and of thickness to

finish flush with the top of the insulation.
Anchor strips securely
to the roof deck with powder actuated fastening devices or expansion
shields and bolts, spaced not more than 24 inches o.c.
b.
Embedded Nailers: Shall be nominal 2 by 3 with 2 inch sides beveled.

Set and anchor nailers to finish flush with the roof deck surface.
3.2.1.2
Roof Edge Strips and Nailers
Provide at perimeter of roof, around openings through roof, and where roofs
abut walls, curbs, and other vertical surfaces. Except where indicated
otherwise, nailers shall be 6 inches wide and the same thickness as the
insulation. Anchor nailers securely to underlying construction. Anchor
perimeter nailers in accordance with FM 4435. Strips shall be grooved as
indicated for edge venting; install at walls, curbs, and other vertical
surfaces with a 1/4 to 1/2 inch air space.
3.2.1.3
Crickets, Cants, and Curbs
Provide wood saddles or crickets, cant strips, and wood nailers bolted to
tops of concrete or masonry curbs as indicated, specified, or necessary and
of lumber or 3/4 inch thick exterior plywood.
3.2.2
Wood Blocking
Provide proper sizes and shapes at proper locations for the installation
SECTION 06 10 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
and attachment of wood and other finish materials, fixtures, equipment, and
items indicated or specified.
3.2.3
Wood Grounds
Provide for fastening wood trim, finish materials, and other items to
plastered walls and ceilings. Install grounds in proper alignment and true
with an 8 foot straightedge.
3.2.4
Wood Furring
Provide where shown and as necessary for facing materials specified. Except
as shown otherwise, furring strips shall be nominal one by 3, continuous,
and spaced 16 inches o.c. Erect furring vertically or horizontally as
necessary. Nail furring strips to masonry.
Do not use wood plugs.
Provide furring strips around openings, behind bases, and at angles and
corners. Furring shall be plumb, rigid, and level and shall be shimmed as
necessary to provide a true, even plane with surfaces suitable to receive
the finish required. Form furring for offsets and breaks in walls or
ceilings on 1 by 4 wood strips spaced 16 inches o.c.
3.2.5
Shear Walls
Install plywood or structural-use panels with long dimension parallel or

perpendicular to supports. Provide blocking behind edges not located over
supports. Nail panels with 8 -penny nails spaced not more than 16 inches
on centers along panel edges and 6 inches o.c. over intermediate bearings.
3.3
WASTE MANAGEMENT
In accordance with the Waste Management Plan and as specified. Separate

and reuse scrap sheet materials larger than 2 square feet, framing members
larger than 16 inches, and multiple offcuts of any size larger than 12
inches. Clearly separate damaged wood and other scrap lumber for
acceptable alternative uses on site, including bracing, blocking, cripples,
ties, and shims.
Separate composite wood from other wood types and recycle or reuse. Set
aside scrap and return to manufacturer for recycling into new product.
When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought
after to reclaim the materials. Fold up metal banding, flatten, and
recycle.
Separate treated, stained, painted, and contaminated wood and place in
designated area for hazardous materials.
Dispose of according to local
regulations. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, or other wood waste
buried in fill or on the ground, unless for planned future use. Prevent
sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. Do not
burn scrap lumber that has been pressure treated, or lumber that is less
than one year old.
SECTION 06 10 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 07 11 13A
*1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
08/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

ASTM C208
(2008a) Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board
ASTM C728
(2005; R 2010) Perlite Thermal Insulation

Board
ASTM D1187/D1187M
(1997; R 2011e1) Asphalt-Base Emulsions

for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal
ASTM D1227
(1995; R 2007) Emulsified Asphalt Used as

a Protective Coating for Roofing
ASTM D41/D41M
(2011) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,

Dampproofing, and Waterproofing
ASTM D4263
(1983; R 2005) Indicating Moisture in

Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
ASTM D449
(2003; R 2008) Asphalt Used in

Dampproofing and Waterproofing
1.2
SUBMITTALS

SD-07 Certificates
Materials
1.3
Deliver materials in sealed containers bearing manufacturer's original

labels. Labels shall include date of manufacture, contents of each
container, performance standards that apply to the contents and recommended
shelf life.
SECTION 07 11 13
PART 2
W912HN-09-X-1813
2.1
PRODUCTS
ASPHALT
ASTM D449, Type I or Type II.

2.2
ASPHALT PRIMER
ASTM D41/D41M.
2.3
2.3.1
EMULSION-BASED ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

Fibrated Emulsion-Based Asphalt
Fibrated emulsion-based asphalt dampproofing shall be cold-applied type

conforming to ASTM D1227 Type II, Class 1, asbestos-free, manufactured of
refined asphalt, emulsifiers and selected clay, fibrated with mineral
fibers. For spray or brush application, emulsion shall contain a minimum
of 59 percent solids by weight, 56 percent solids by volume. For trowel
application, emulsion shall contain a minimum of 58 percent solids by
weight, 55 percent solids by volume.
2.3.2
Non-Fibrated Emulsion-Based Asphalt
Non-fibrated emulsion-based asphalt dampproofing shall be cold-applied type

conforming to ASTM D1187/D1187M Type II or ASTM D1227 Type III,
manufactured of refined asphalt, emulsifiers and selected clay. Asphalt
shall contain a minimum 58 percent solids by weight, 55 percent solids by
volume.
2.4
2.4.1
SURFACE PROTECTION
Protection Board
Wood Fiber Board, ASTM C208, or Perlite Board, ASTM C728.

PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
SURFACE PREPARATION
Remove or cut form ties and repair all surface defects as required in
Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Clean concrete and masonry
surfaces to receive dampproofing of foreign matter and loose particles.
Apply dampproofing to clean dry surfaces. Moisture test in accordance with
ASTM D4263. If test indicates moisture, allow a minimum of 7 additional
days after test completion for curing. If moisture still exists, redo test
until substrate is dry.
3.1.1
Metal Surfaces
Metal surfaces shall be dry and be free of rust, scale, loose paint, oil,
grease, dirt, frost and debris.
3.2
Protection of Surrounding Areas
Before starting the dampproofing work, the surrounding areas and surfaces
shall be protected from spillage and migration of dampproofing material
onto other work. Drains and conductors shall be protected from clogging
with dampproofing material.
SECTION 07 11 13
3.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
APPLICATION
Use either hot-application or cold-application method. Use

cold-application method in confined spaces where hot bitumen would be
hazardous. Prime surfaces to receive fibrous asphaltic dampproofing unless
recommended otherwise by dampproofing materials manufacturer. Apply
dampproofing after priming coat is dry, but prior to any deterioration of
primed surface, and when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F.
3.3.1
Surface Priming
Prime surfaces to receive asphalt or fibrous asphalt dampproofing with

asphalt primer. Apply primer when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F
and at rate of approximately one gallon per 100 square feet, fully
covering entire surface to be dampproofed.
3.3.2
Hot-Application Method
Apply two mop coats of hot coal-tar pitch or two mop coats of hot asphalt
to surfaces. Apply mop coats uniformly using not less than 25 pounds of
coal-tar pitch or 20 pounds of asphalt per 100 square feet for each coat.
Do not heat asphalt above 450 degrees F. Do not heat coal tar pitch above
400 degrees F. Have kettlemen in attendance at all times during heating to
ensure that maximum temperature specified is not exceeded. Apply hot
asphalt bitumen or coal tar pitch and fully bond to primed surface.
Provide finished surface that is smooth, lustrous, and impervious to
moisture. Recoat dull or porous spots.
3.3.3
Cold-Application Method
3.3.3.1
Fibrous Asphalt
Apply two coats of fibrous asphalt to surfaces to be dampproofed. Apply

each coat uniformly using not less than one gallon fibrous asphalt per 50
square feet. Apply first coat by brush or spray to provide full bond with
primed surface. Brush or spray second coat over thoroughly dry first coat
unless recommended otherwise by dampproofing materials manufacturer.
Provide finished surface that is of uniform thickness and impervious to
moisture. Recoat porous areas.
3.3.3.2
Emulsion-Based Asphalt
Emulsion-based asphalt dampproofing work shall not be performed in

temperatures below 40 degrees F. Emulsions shall have a smooth and uniform
consistency at time of application. Dampproofing materials shall be
applied in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions to produce
a smooth uniform dry film of not less than 12 mils thick without voids or
defects. Dull or porous spots shall be recoated. Dampproofing materials
shall seal tightly around pipes and other items projecting through
dampproofing. Rates of application shall be as follows:
a.
Primer:
1/2 gallon per 100 square feet, cold-applied.
b.
Fibrated Dampproofing:
2 gallons per 100 square feet, cold-applied
with spray, brush or trowel.
c.
Non-fibrated Dampproofing:
2 gallons per 100 square feet,
cold-applied with spray, brush or trowel.
SECTION 07 11 13
3.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
PROTECTIVE COVERING
Protect dampproofed surfaces against which backfill will be placed with one
layer of 15 pound saturated felt conforming to the requirements specified
herein. Use asphalt-saturated felt where the dampproofing material is
asphalt and use coal-tar-saturated felt where the dampproofing material is
coal-tar pitch. Embed felts in the second coating of bitumen and lap edges
and ends not less than one inch .
SECTION 07 11 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 07 42 13A
*1 METAL WALL PANELS
05/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

AAMA 501.1
(2005) Standard Test Method for Water

Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors Using Dynamic Pressure
AAMA 800
(2010) Voluntary Specifications and Test

Methods for Sealants
ANSI/AISC 341
(2005; Suppl No. 1 2005) Seismic

Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings

AISI S100
(2007; Supp 1: 2009; Supp 2: 2010) North

American Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
AISI SG03-3
(2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)


ASCE 7
(2010; Change 2010; Change 2011; Errata

2011; Change 2011) Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures
AWS A5.1/A5.1M
(2004) Specification for Carbon Steel

Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
AWS D1.1/D1.1M
AWS D1.2/D1.2M
(2008) Structural Welding Code - Aluminum

ASTM A1008/A1008M

SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813

ASTM A123/A123M

Steel Products
ASTM A36/A36M

Structural Steel
ASTM A424/A424M

Sheet for Porcelain Enameling
ASTM A463/A463M

Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process
ASTM A606/A606M

Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
ASTM A653/A653M

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A755/A755M

Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip
Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating
Process for Exterior Exposed Building
Products
ASTM A780/A780M

Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A924/A924M

ASTM B117
(2011) Standard Practice for Operating

Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM C286
(1999; R 2009) Standard Terminology

Relating to Porcelain Enamel and
Ceramic-Metal Systems
ASTM C920

ASTM D1056

Rubber
ASTM D1308
(2002; R 2007) Effect of Household

Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic
Finishes
ASTM D1654
(2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated

SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
Specimens Subjected to Corrosive

Environments
ASTM D1667
(2005; R 2011) Flexible Cellular Materials

- Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell)
ASTM D2244
(2011) Calculation of Color Tolerances and

Color Differences from Instrumentally
Measured Color Coordinates
ASTM D2247
(2011) Testing Water Resistance of

Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity
ASTM D2794
(1993; R 2010) Resistance of Organic

Coatings to the Effects of Rapid
Deformation (Impact)
ASTM D3359
(2009e2) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
ASTM D3363
(2005e1; R 2011) Film Hardness by Pencil

Test
ASTM D4214
(2007) Standard Test Method for Evaluating

the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint
Films
ASTM D4587
(2011) Standard Practice for Fluorescent

UV-Condensation Exposures of Paint and
Related Coatings
ASTM D522
(1993a; R 2008) Mandrel Bend Test of

Attached Organic Coatings
ASTM D523
(2008) Standard Test Method for Specular

Gloss
ASTM D5894
(2010) Cyclic Salt Fog/UV Exposure of

Painted Metal, (Alternating Exposures in a
Fog/Dry Cabinet and a UV/Condensation
Cabinet)
ASTM D610
(2008) Evaluating Degree of Rusting on

Painted Steel Surfaces
ASTM D714
(2002; R 2009) Evaluating Degree of

Blistering of Paints
ASTM D822
(2001; R 2006) Filtered Open-Flame

Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related
Coatings
ASTM D968
(2005; R 2010) Abrasion Resistance of

Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive
ASTM E1592
(2005) Structural Performance of Sheet

Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform
Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E283
(2004) Determining the Rate of Air Leakage

SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,

and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen
ASTM E331
(2000; R 2009) Water Penetration of

Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
ASTM E72
(2005) Conducting Strength Tests of Panels

for Building Construction
ASTM E84
(2011b) Standard Test Method for Surface

Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
ASTM G 152
(2006) Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc

Light Apparatus for Exposure of
Nonmetallic Materials
ASTM G 153
(2004; R 2010) Operating Enclosed Carbon

Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of
METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA)

MBMA MBSM
(2002) Metal Building Systems Manual

NAAMM AMP 500
(2006) Metal Finishes Manual
PORCELAIN ENAMEL INSTITUTE (PEI)

PEI 1001
(1996) Specification for Architectural

Porcelain Enamel (ALS-100)
PEI CG-3
(2005) Color Guide for Architectural

Porcelain Enamel
(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1793
(2003) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,

6th Edition

UL Bld Mat Dir
1.2
(2011) Building Materials Directory
DEFINITIONS
Metal Wall Panel: Metal wall panels, attachment system components and
accessories necessary for a complete weather-tight wall system.
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WALL PANEL SYSTEM
Factory color finished, galvanized metal wall panel system with concealed
fastening attachment. Panel profile must be smooth face recessed bead snap
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
lock seam as shown on drawings.

1.3.1
Metal Wall Panel General Performance
Comply with performance requirements, conforming to AISI S100, without

failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction. Wall panels and accessory components must
conform to the following standards:
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
A1008/A1008M
A123/A123M
A36/A36M
A424/A424M, ASTM C286, PEI 1001, PEI CG-3 for Porcelain and Ceramic
Enameling
ASTM A653/A653M
ASTM A463/A463M for aluminum coated steel sheet
ASTM A606/A606M
ASTM A755/A755M for metallic coated steel sheet for exterior coil
pre-painted applications.
ASTM A780/A780M for repair of damage or uncoated areas of hot-dipped
galvanized coating.
ASTM A924/A924M for metallic coated steel sheet
ASTM D522 for applied coatings
UL Bld Mat Dir
1.3.2
Structural Performance
Maximum calculated fiber stress must not exceed the allowable value in the
AISI or AA manuals; a one third overstress for wind is allowed. Midspan
deflection under maximum design loads is limited to L/180. Contract
drawings show the design wind loads and the extent and general assembly
details of the metal siding. Contractor must provide design for members
and connections not shown on the drawings. Siding panels and accessories
must be the products of the same manufacturer.
Provide metal wall panel assemblies complying with the load and stress
requirements in accordance with ASTM E1592. Wind Load force due to wind
action governs the design for panels.
Wall systems and attachments are to resist the wind loads as determined by
ASTM E72 and ASCE 7 in the geographic area where the construction will take
place, in pounds per square foot. Submit five copies of wind load tests
and seismic tests to the Contracting Officer.
Provide metal wall panel assembly for seismic conditions complying with the
applicable requirements of ANSI/AISC 341.
1.3.3
Air Infiltration
Air leakage must conform to the limits through the wall assembly area when
tested according to ASTM E283.
1.3.4
Water Penetration Under Static Pressure
No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E331.

1.3.5
Water Penetration Under Dynamic Pressure
No evidence of water leakage when tested according to AAMA 501.1.

SECTION 07 42 13
1.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
SUBMITTALS

Submit Documentation for the following items:
Qualification of
Qualification of
Qualification of
Sample Warranty;
Manufacturer; G
Installation Contractor; G
Welders; G
G
SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation Drawings ; G
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Wall Panels ; G
Closure Materials
Enamel Repair Paint
Aluminized Steel Repair Paint
Accessories
SD-04 Samples
Submit as required each of the following samples:
Wall Panels, 12 inches long by actual panel width; G
Fasteners; G
Metal Closure Strips, 10 inches long of each type; G
Color chart and chips ; G
Submit manufacturer's color charts and chips, approximately 4 by 4
inches, showing full range of colors, textures and patterns
available for wall panels with factory applied finishes.
SD-05 Design Data
Wind load design analysis ; G
As applicable, submit the following wind load design analysis
data, to include, but not limited to:
wind speed
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
exposure category,co-efficient,importance factor

type of facility
negative pressures for each zone
methods and requirements of attachment
SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports for the following in accordance with the
referenced articles in this section.
Leakage Tests; G
Wind Load Tests; G
Coating Tests; G
Chalking Tests; G
Seismic Tests; G
SD-07 Certificates
Submit certificates for the following items showing conformance
with referenced standards contained in this section:
Coil Stock; G
Fasteners; G
Galvanizing Repair Paint; G
Enamel Repair Paint; G
Include detailed application instructions and standard
manufacturer drawings altered as required by these specifications.
Installation of Wall panels; G
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Submit 2 bound copies of the Manufacturer's Field Reports; G
Warranty; G
Maintenance Instructions; G
20 year "No Dollar Limit" warranty for labor and material
1.5
1.5.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Pre-Installation Conference
Upon notification of submittal receipt and approval by the Contracting

Officer; and prior to the commencement of the work, the Contractor must
attend a pre-installation conference to review the following:
a.
Drawings and Specifications.
b.
Qualification of Installer, Qualification of Welders.
c.
Sustainable acquisition
d.
Approved Warranty
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
e.
Sample wall panels, 12 inches long by actual panel width
f.
Sample metal closure strips, 10 inches long of each type
g.
Color charts and chips
h.
Coatings and base metal tests, chalking tests
i.
Construction schedule, availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment and facilities required to progress with the work
without delay.
j.
Methods and procedures related to installation of wall panels,

including manufacturer's written instructions. Explicitly identify in
writing, differences between manufacturer's instructions and the
specified requirements.
k.
Support conditions for compliance with requirements, including

alignment between and attachment to structural members.
l.
Flashing, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and

condition of other construction that will affect metal wall panels.
m.
Governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and

tests and inspections if applicable.
n.
Temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during

and after installation.
o.
Wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal wall panel
installation. Provide detailed written instructions including copies
of Material Safety Data Sheets for maintenance and repair materials,
and manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
1.5.1.1
Installation Drawings
Installation shop drawings for wall panels, flashing, accessories, and

anchorage systems must indicate completely dimensioned structural frame and
erection layouts, openings in the wall, special framing details, and
construction details at corners, building intersections and flashing,
location and type of mastic and metal filler strips.
1.5.1.2
Wind Load Design Analysis
Wind design analysis must include wall plan delineating dimensions and
attachment patterns for each zone. Wind design analysis must be prepared
and sealed by Licensed Project Engineer in the geographic area where the
construction will take place.
1.5.2
Manufacturer's Technical Representative
The representative must have authorization from manufacturer to approve

field changes and be thoroughly familiar with the products and
installations in the geographical area where construction will take place.
1.5.3
Certify that metal wall panel system manufacturer has a minimum of five (5)
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
years experience in manufacturing metal wall system and accessory products.

Manufacturer must also provide engineering services by an authorized
engineer; currently licensed in the geographical area where construction
will take place, having a minimum of four (4) years experience as an
engineer knowledgeable in wind load design analysis, protocols and
procedures per MBMA MBSM, "Metal Building Systems Manual"; ASCE 7, and
ASTM E1592 and seismic design conforming to ANSI/AISC 341.
Provide certified engineering calculations, using the products submitted,
for Wind load requirements in accordance with ASCE 7.
1.5.3.1
Manufacturer's Certificates
Also provide the following certifications from the manufacturer:

Coil Stock
Fasteners
Enamel Repair Paint
Submit certification from coil stock manufacturer or supplier that the
machinery used will form the provided coil stock without warping, waviness,
or rippling that is not a part of the panel profile, and without damage,
abrasion or marring of the finish coating.
Provide evidence that products used within this specification are
manufactured in the United States.
1.5.4
Certified Qualification of Installation Contractor
The installation contractor must be approved and certified by the metal

wall panel manufacturer prior to beginning the installation of the metal
wall panel system. Subcontracting by Certified Contractor for the metal
wall panel work is not permitted.
1.5.4.1
Qualifications for Welding Work
Qualification of welders and welding must conform to AWS A5.1/A5.1M,

AWS D1.1/D1.1Mfor steel or AWS D1.2/D1.2M for aluminum.
1.5.5
Single Source
Obtain each type of metal wall panels, clips, closure materials and other
accessories from the standard products of the single source from a single
manufacturer to operate as a complete system for the intended use.
1.5.6
Manufacturer's Maintenance Instructions
Provide manufacturer's detailed written instructions including copies of

Material Safety Data Sheets for maintenance and repair materials.
1.6
DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
Deliver and protect package components, sheets, metal wall panels, and
other manufactured items to prevent damage or deformation during
transportation and handling.
Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending,
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
warping, twisting, and surface damage.

Stack and store metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets,
covered with suitable weather-tight and ventilated covering to ensure
dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal
wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting, or other surface damage.
Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel until actual
installation.
1.7
1.7.1
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements
Verify locations of wall framing and opening dimensions by field

measurements before metal wall panel fabrication and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings.
1.7.2
Weather Limitations
Proceed with installation preparation only when existing and forecasted

weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering into wall
system or building.
1.8
WARRANTY
Warranty must conform to the Sample Warranty as reviewed and approved by

the Contracting Officer.
1.8.1
20 Year "No Dollar Limit" Warranty for Labor and Material
Furnish manufacturer's no-dollar-limit warranty for the metal wall panel

system. The warranty period is to be no less than twenty (20) years from
the date of Government acceptance of the work. The warranty is to be
issued directly to the Government. The warranty is to provide that if
within the warranty period the metal wall panel system shows evidence of
corrosion, perforation, rupture or excess weathering due to deterioration
of the wall panel system resulting from defective materials and correction
of the defective workmanship is to be the responsibility of the metal wall
panel system manufacturer. Repairs that become necessary because of
defective materials and workmanship while metal wall panel system is under
warranty are to be performed within 24 hours after notification, unless
additional time is approved by the Contracting Officer. Failure to perform
repairs within 24 hours of notification will constitute grounds for having
emergency repairs performed by others and not void the warranty.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
FABRICATION
Unless approved otherwise, fabricate and finish metal wall panels and
accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated and
specified performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and
with dimensional and structural requirements.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening
ribs, if any, for full length of panel. Fabricate metal wall panel side
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that

provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that
will seal weather-tight and minimize noise from movements within panel
assembly.
2.1.1
Sheet Metal Accessories
Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA 1793

that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of
item indicated:
a.
Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil
canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels
indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
b.
End Seams: fabricate nonmoving end seams with flat-lock seams. Form
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional
strength.
c.
Sealed Joints: form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to

accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA 1793.
d.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed

fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
e.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness

recommended by SMACNA 1793 or by metal wall panel manufacturer for
application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.2
2.2.1
PANEL MATERIALS
Steel Sheet
Roll-form steel wall panels to the specified profile, with fy= 40 ksi, 24
gauge and depth as indicated. Material must be plumb and true, and within
the tolerances listed:
a.
Galvanized Steel Sheet conforming to ASTM A653/A653M and AISI SG03-3.
b.
Individual panels must be continuous length to cover the entire length

of any unbroken wall area with no joints or seams and formed without
warping, waviness, or ripples that are not part of the panel profile
and free of damage to the finish coating system.
c.
Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent with

the type of system specified.
2.2.2
1.
Profile and coverage to be a minimum height and width from

manufacturer's standard for the indicated wall area.
2.
Profile to be a 1-1/2 inch high rib at 12 inches o.c. with small

stiffening ribs, 38 inch overall width with 36 inch coverage and
exposed fasteners.
3.
Smooth, flat Surface Texture.
Comply with NAAMM AMP 500 for recommendations for applying and designating
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
finishes. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are
within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
All panels are to receive a factory-applied polyvinylidene fluoride finish
consisting of a baked-on top-coat with a manufacturer's recommended prime
coat conforming to the following:
2.2.2.1
Metal Preparation
Carefully prepare all metal surface for painting on a continuous process

coil coating line by alkali cleaning, hot water rinsing, application of
chemical conversion coating, cold water rinsing, sealing with acid rinse,
and thorough drying.
2.2.2.2
Prime Coating
Apply a base coat of epoxy paint, specifically formulated to interact with

the top-coat, to the prepared surfaces by roll coating to a dry film
thickness of 0.20 plus 0.05 mils. Prime coat must be oven cured prior to
application of finish coat.
2.2.2.3
Exterior Finish Coating
Roll coat the finish coating over the primer by roll coating to dry film
thickness of 0.80 plus 5 mils (3.80 plus 0.50 mils for Vinyl Plastisol) for
a total dry film thickness of 1.00 plus 0.10 mils (4.00 plus 0.10 mils for
Vinyl Plastisol). Oven-cure finish coat.
2.2.2.4
Interior Finish Coating
Apply a wash-coat on the reverse side over the primer by roll coating to a
dry film thickness of 0.30 plus 0.05 mils for a total dry film thickness of
0.50 plus 0.10 mils. Oven-cured the wash coat.
2.2.2.5
Color
Provide exterior finish color as as indicated on the drawings.

2.2.2.6
Physical Properties
Coating must conform to the industry and manufacturer's standard

performance criteria as listed by the following certified test reports:
General: ASTM D5894 and ASTM D4587.
Abrasion: ASTM D968
Adhesion: ASTM D3359
Chalking: ASTM D4214
Chemical Pollution: ASTM D1308
Color Change and Conformity: ASTM D2244
Creepage: ASTM D1654
Cyclic Corrosion Test: ASTM D5894
Flame Spread: ASTM E84
Flexibility: ASTM D522
Formability: ASTM D522
Gloss at 60 and 85 degrees: ASTM D523
Humidity: ASTM D2247 and ASTM D714
Oxidation: ASTM D610
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363

Reverse Impact: ASTM D2794
Salt Spray: ASTM B117
Weatherometer: ASTM G 152, ASTM G 153 and ASTM D822
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
Cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653/A653M and

specified in Section 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING unless other wise
indicated.
2.3.1
Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing
Type, material, corrosion resistance, size and sufficient length to

penetrate the supporting member a minimum of 1 inch with other properties
required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to supporting
members and substrates in accordance with the wall panel manufacturer's and
ASCE 7 requirements.
2.4
FASTENERS
2.4.1
2.4.1.1
General
Exposed Fasteners
Provide corrosion resistant fasteners for wall panels, made of coated

steel, aluminum, 300 - series corrosion resisting stainless steel, or nylon
capped steel compatible with the sheet panel or flashing and of a type and
size recommended by the manufacturer to meet the performance requirements
and design loads.
Fasteners for accessories must be the manufacturer's standard. Provide an
integral metal washer matching the color of attached material with
compressible sealing EPDM gasket approximately 3/32 inch thick.
2.4.1.2
Hidden Fasteners
Provide corrosion resistant fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to

meet the performance requirements and design loads.
2.4.1.3
Screws
Screws to be corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum and/or 300 - series

stainless steel being the type and size recommended by the manufacturer to
meet the performance requirements.
2.4.1.4
Rivets
Rivets to be closed-end type, corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum or

stainless steel where watertight connections are required.
2.4.1.5
Attachment Clips
Fabricate clips from steel hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with

ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 G 90 or Series 300 stainless steel. Size, shape,
thickness and capacity as required meeting the insulation thickness and
design load criteria specified.
SECTION 07 42 13
2.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
ACCESSORIES
2.5.1
General
All accessories must be compatible with the metal wall panels. Sheet metal
flashing, trim, metal closure strips, caps and similar metal accessories
must not be less than the minimum thickness specified for the wall panels.
Exposed metal accessories/finishes to match the panels furnished, except as
otherwise indicated. Molded foam rib, ridge and other closure strips must
be non-absorbent closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber or pre-molded
neoprene to match configuration of the panels.
2.5.2
Rubber Closure Strips
Provide closed-cell, expanded cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D1056 and

ASTM D1667; extruded or molded to the configuration of the specified wall
panel and in lengths supplied by the wall panel manufacturer.
2.5.3
Provide factory fabricated steel closure strips to be the same gauge,

color, finish and profile of the specified wall panel.
2.5.4
2.5.4.1
Joint Sealants
Provide approved gun type sealants for use in hand- or air-pressure calking
guns at temperatures above 4 degrees C (or frost-free application at
temperatures above 10 degrees F with minimum solid content of 85 percent of
the total volume. Sealants must dry with a tough, durable surface skin
which permit remaining soft and pliable underneath, providing a
weather-tight joint. No migratory staining is permitted on painted or
unpainted metal, stone, glass, vinyl, or wood.
Prime all joints receiving sealants with a compatible one-component or
two-component primer as recommended by the wall panel manufacturer.
2.5.4.2
Shop-Applied
Sealant for shop-applied caulking must be non-curing butyl compliant with

AAMA 800 to ensure the sealant's plasticity at the time of field erection.
2.5.4.3
Field-Applied
Sealant for field-applied caulking must be an approved gun grade, non-sag

one component polysulfide or two-component polyurethane with an initial
maximum Shore A durometer hardness of 25, and conforming to ASTM C920, Type
II. Color to match panel colors.
2.5.4.4
Provide pressure sensitive tape sealant, 100 percent solid with a release
paper backing; permanently elastic, non-sagging, non-toxic and non-staining
as approved by the wall panel manufacturer.
SECTION 07 42 13
2.6
W912HN-09-X-1813
2.6.1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Fabrication
Shop fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim where practicable to comply
with recommendations in SMACNA 1793 that apply to design, dimensions,
metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2.7
REPAIR OF FINISH PROTECTION
Repair paint for color finish enameled wall panel must be compatible paint
of the same formula and color as the specified finish furnished by the wall
panel manufacturer. Provide 3 quarts of repair paint matching the
specified wall panels.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel
supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Examine primary and secondary wall framing to verify that rafters, purlins,
angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages
have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall
panel manufacturer, UL, ASTM, ASCE 7 and as required for the geographical
area where construction will take place.
Examine solid wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported
by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances
required by metal wall panel manufacturer.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall
panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam
locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel installation.
Submit to the Contracting Officer a written report, endorsed by Installer,
listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing

projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment.
Miscellaneous framing installation, including sub-purlins, girts, angles,
furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorage
must be according to metal wall panel manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3
WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
Provide full length metal wall panels, from sill to eave as indicated,
unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor
metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
provisions for thermal and structural movement in accordance with MBMA MBSM.
Erect wall panel system in accordance with the approved erection drawings,
the printed instructions and safety precautions of the manufacturer.
Sheets are not to be subjected to overloading, abuse, or undue impact.
Bent, chipped, or defective sheets shall not be applied.
Sheets must be erected true and plumb and in exact alignment with the
horizontal and vertical edges of the building, securely anchored, and with
the indicated eave, and sill.
Work is to allow for thermal movement of the wall panel, movement of the
building structure, and to provide permanent freedom from noise due to wind
pressure.
Field cutting metal wall panels by torch is not permitted.
3.3.1
Steel Wall Panels
Use stainless-steel fasteners for exterior surfaces and galvanized steel

fasteners for interior surfaces.
3.3.2
Anchor Clips
Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
3.3.3
Metal Protection
Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each
contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal
wall panel manufacturer.
3.3.4
Joint Sealers
Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where
required for weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies.
Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not
indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
3.4
FASTENER INSTALLATION
Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
3.5
3.5.1
FLASHING, TRIM AND CLOSURE INSTALLATION

Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and SMACNA 1793. Provide concealed fasteners where possible,
and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,
joints, and seams to form permanently watertight and weather resistant.
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
Install sheet metal work is to form weather-tight construction without

waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, and allow for
expansion and contraction. Cutting, fitting, drilling, and other
operations in connection with sheet metal required to accommodate the work
of other trades is to be performed by sheet metal mechanics.
3.5.2
Metal Flashing
Install exposed metal flashing at building corners, sills and eaves,

junctions between metal siding and walling. Exposed metal flashing must be
the same material, color, and finish as the specified metal wall panel.
Fasten flashing at a minimum of 8 inches on center, except where flashing
is held in place by the same screws that secure covering sheets.
Flashing is to be furnished in at least 8 foot lengths. Exposed flashing
is to have 1 inch locked and blind-soldered end joints, and expansion
joints at intervals of not more than 16 feet.
Exposed flashing and flashing subject to rain penetration to be bedded in
the specified joint sealant.
Isolate flashing which is in contact with dissimilar metals by means of the
specified asphalt mastic material to prevent electrolytic deterioration.
Form drips to the profile indicated, with the edge folded back 1/2 inch to
form a reinforced drip edge.
3.5.3
Closures
Install metal closure strips at open ends of corrugated or ribbed pattern

walls, and at intersection of wall and wall unless open ends are concealed
with formed eave flashing; and in other required areas.
Install mastic closure strips at intersection of the wall with metal
walling; top and bottom of metal siding; heads of wall openings; and in
other required locations.
3.6
WORKMANSHIP
Make lines, arises, and angles sharp and true. Free exposed surfaces from
visible wave, warp, buckle, and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges neatly
to form a 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal exposed to
the weather watertight with provisions for expansion and contraction.
Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth,
dry, and free of defects and projections which might affect the
application. For installation of items not shown in detail or not covered
by specifications conform to the applicable requirements of SMACNA 1793.
Provide sheet metal flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut
walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes, or other vertical surfaces and wherever
indicated and necessary to make the work watertight.
3.7
3.7.1
ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
Erection Tolerances
Erect metal wall panels straight and true with plumb vertical lines
correctly lapped and secured in accordance with the manufacturer's written
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
instructions.
3.7.2
Leakage Tests
Finished application of metal wall panels are to be subject to inspection

and test for leakage by request of the Contracting Officer,
Architect/Engineer. Conduct inspection and tests at no cost to the
Government.
Inspection and testing is to be made promptly after erection to permit
correction of defects and the removal and replacement of defective
materials.
3.7.3
Repairs to Finish
Scratches, abrasions, and minor surface defects of finish may be repaired

with the specified repair materials. Finished repaired surfaces must be
uniform and free from variations of color and surface texture.
Repaired metal surfaces that are not acceptable to the project requirements
and/or Contracting Officer are to be immediately removed and replaced with
new material.
3.7.4
Paint-Finish Metal Siding
Paint-finish metal siding will be tested for color stability by the

Contracting Officer during the manufacturer's specified guarantee period.
Panels that indicate color changes, fading, or surface degradation,
determined by visual examination, must be removed and replaced with new
panels at no expense to the Government.
New panels will be subject to the specified tests for an additional year
from the date of their installation.
3.8
3.8.1

Construction Monitoring
Make visual inspections as necessary to ensure compliance with specified

requirements. Additionally, verify the following:
a.
Materials comply with the specified requirements.
b.
All materials are properly stored, handled and protected from damage.
Damaged materials are removed from the site.
c.
Framing and substrates are in acceptable condition, in compliance with

specification, prior to application of wall panels.
d.
Panels are installed without buckles, ripples, or waves and in uniform

alignment and modulus.
e.
Side laps are formed, sealed, fastened or seam locked as required.
f.
The proper number, type, and spacing of attachment clips and fasteners
are installed.
g.
Installer adheres to specified and detailed application parameters.

SECTION 07 42 13
h.
W912HN-09-X-1813
Associated flashing and sheet metal are installed in a timely manner in

accord with the specified requirements.
Provide five bound copies of Manufacturer's Field Reports to the

Contracting Officer two weeks prior to project close-out.
3.9
CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL
Clean all exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove

metal shavings, filings, nails, bolts, and wires from work area. Remove
grease and oil films, excess sealants, handling marks, contamination from
steel wool, fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean. Exposed
metal surfaces must be free of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, solder
or weld marks, and damage to the finish coating.
Collect and place scrap/waste materials in containers. Promptly dispose of
demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate
on-site; transport demolished materials from government property and
legally dispose of them.
SECTION 07 42 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 07 53 24A
*1 FABRIC COVER STRUCTURE
08/12
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

ASCE 7-05
(2005) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings

and Other Structures

ASTM A36

Structural Steel
ASTM A325

ASTM A490
(2010ae1) Standard Specification for

Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A500

Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
Shapes
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF FABRIC COVER STRUCTURE
Provide all labor, materials, equipment, incidentals, warranties and

guarantees for the design, manufacture and installation of a removable,
modular, clear span, tension fabric membrane covered truss type frame
structure as indicated on the contract drawings.
The structure will bear on top the foundation stem walls. The foundation
will be coordinated and prepared by the contractor. All work will be
completed prior to material delivery of the fabric structure.
All other work described herein shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor unless otherwise specifically noted.
The interior of the structure below the main trusses shall be clear of any
structural support members and no exterior purlins, guy ropes or cables
shall be used for anchoring the structure.
The specification covers the design, engineering, fabrication, delivery and
erection of a prefabricated membrane-covered frame structure. The building
envelope will include the following principal features:
SECTION 07 53 24
W912HN-09-X-1813
a. Existing at grade concrete foundation to be used for anchoring.

b. Membrane fabric cladding system tensioned over structural
framework and anchored to the building foundation.
1.3
SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Floor and Roof Plan Drawing
Load Calculations and Reactions
Attachment Details to the Foundation of Structure
Bracing Details
Fabric Fastening Details
SD-03 Product Data
Fabric Sheet
Fasteners and Plates
Warranty
1.3.1
Shop Drawings
Floor and roof plan drawing depicting load calculations and reactions and
attachment Details to the Foundation of Structure and Bracing Details, and
fabric fastening details as applicable.
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The structure supplier shall be a reputable manufacturer; shall have a

minimum of five years direct experience in design, manufacture and
installation of structures of the type specified herein and shall operate
according to a comprehensive quality system. The structure shall be
manufactured under factory conditions in a plant specifically arranged for
this type of work. The manufacturer shall provide adequate space,
equipment, personnel, and technical ability to coordinate the assembly and
factory prefabrication of all major components of the work and all
necessary operations in the packing, shipping and installation procedures.
SECTION 07 53 24
1.4.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Structural Loads
The structure shall be designed in accordance with the local building codes
and appropriate standards using methodology from ASCE 7-05 for the minimum
design loads. The Manufacturer will submit a full Structural Load Report
prepared by an independent third party professional engineer licensed in
Georgia with at least 10 years of experience in fabric covered buildings,
certifying that this shelter meets the requirements of the applicable
building codes. Refer to drawing S-001 for design criteria and codes.
All design calculations and drawings shall be submitted to the owner for
approval before commencing fabrication. The structure shall be designed to
withstand a three second gust of 95 mph using an Importance Factor of 1.0
and Exposure C as a minimum. The structure shall be designed to withstand
the following snow loads:
a. Ground Snow Load: 5 p.s.f
The structures framework shall be able to meet design requirements without
regard to the tension of the fabric cover panels.
The structure's cover panels shall not be designed to function as a
structural or bracing member.
1.4.3
Roof Loads
The structure shall be designed to meet the load requirements of the

applicable building codes.
Roof snow and roof live loads shall be calculated in accordance with
ASCE 7-05 requirements or, in the event local building code requirements
impose higher loads, compliance with those higher loads is required. The
structure must be designed to support the full calculated roof snow or live
loads and in no event may it be assumed that the shelter will shed snow
loads.
The structure shall be designed to support the snow or live loads as
required above plus a collateral load of three (3) psf.
1.4.4
Wind Loads
The structure shall be capable of withstanding external wind pressures as

calculated per ASCE 7-05.
1.4.5
Truss Steel
The truss chords and webbing shall be fabricated from pre-galvanized clear
coated steel. The main structure shall consist of welded open web arch
truss with parallel truss chords. Sheared, flattened or distorted tubing
may not be used in the trusses.
All steel tubing used in the structure must have the following minimum
structural and mechanical properties:
ASTM A500: Grade B, Fy= 46 ksi.
All steel plates and tabs and lugs shall be fabricated from hot dipped
galvanized material and have the following minimum structural and
mechanical properties:
SECTION 07 53 24
W912HN-09-X-1813
ASTM A36 Fy= 36 ksi. Refer to section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.

1.4.6
Rainfall
The structure shall be capable of withstanding the effects of rainfall up

to 4 inches per hour for at least two hours.
1.4.7
Pre-Construction Conference
After approval of submittals and before performing roofing system

installation work, hold a pre-construction conference to review the
following:
a.
Drawings, specifications and submittals related to the roof work;
b.
Roof system components installation;
c.
Procedure for the roof manufacturer's technical representative's onsite

inspection and acceptance of the roofing substrate, the name of the
manufacturer's technical representatives, the frequency of the onsite
visits, distribution of copies of the inspection reports from the
manufacturer's technical representative;
d.
Contractor's plan for coordination of the work of the various trades

involved in providing the roofing system and other components secured
to the roofing; and
e.
Quality control plan for the roof system installation;
f.
Safety requirements.
Coordinate pre-construction conference scheduling with the Contracting

Officer. The conference must be attended by the Contractor, the
Contracting Officer's designated personnel, personnel directly responsible
for the installation of roofing, flashing and sheet metal work, mechanical
and electrical work, other trades interfacing with the roof work, and
representative of the roofing materials manufacturer. Before beginning
roofing work, provide a copy of meeting notes and action items to all
attending parties. Note action items requiring resolution prior to start
of roof work.
1.5
1.5.1

Delivery
Deliver materials in their original, unopened containers or wrappings with

labels intact and legible. Where materials are covered by a referenced
specification number, the labels must bear the specification number, type,
class, and shelf life expiration date where applicable. Deliver materials
in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work.
1.5.2
Storage
Store and protect materials from damage and weather in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions, except as specified otherwise. Keep
materials clean and dry. Store and maintain adhesives, sealants, primers
and other liquid materials above 60 degrees F. Insulated hot boxes or
other enclosed warming devices must be required in cold weather. Mark and
SECTION 07 53 24
W912HN-09-X-1813
remove damaged materials from the site. Use pallets to support and canvas
tarpaulins to completely cover material materials stored outdoors. Do not
use polyethylene as a covering. Locate materials temporarily stored on the
roof in approved areas, and distribute the load to stay within the live
load limits of the roof construction. Remove unused materials from the
roof at the end of each days work.
1.5.3
Handling
Prevent damage to edges and ends of roll materials. Do not install damaged
materials in the work. Select and operate material handling equipment so
as not to damage materials or applied roofing. Do not use materials
contaminated by exposure or moisture. Remove contaminated materials from
the site. When hazardous materials are involved, adhere to the special
precautions of the manufacturer. Adhesives may contain petroleum
distillates and may be extremely flammable; prevent personnel from
breathing vapors, and do not use near sparks or open flame.
PART 2
2.1
2.1.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Structural Frames
Profile is Modified Quonset style with shallow arched roof.

Frame consists of 48 inches deep trusses with chords 4" x 4" inches minimum
and webbing 2" x 2" inches minimum. Purlins shall be a minimum of 4" x 4"
inches.
2.1.2
Electrical
Faraday Cage Lightning protection system designed to be certified by UL

labs upon installation.
Refer to the electrical specifications.
2.1.3
Fabric Memebrane
Cladding Membrane- Structure covers shall be fabricated from PVC coated

polyester fabric manufactured by an approved and reputable supplier.
Laminated materials are not acceptable for use as the outer membrane.
Polyethylene or HDPE materials are not acceptable. Approved cover material
manufacturers include: Seamen, Mehler, Ferrari and Naizil. Other cover
material manufacturers may be considered and must be able to demonstrate
ten years experience with PVC coated fabrics used on structures similar in
use and loads.
2.1.4
Truss Steel
The truss chords and webbing shall be fabricated from pre-galvanized clear
coated steel. The main structure shall consist of welded open web arch
truss with parallel truss chords. Sheared, flattened or distorted tubing
may not be used in the trusses.
SECTION 07 53 24
2.1.5
2.1.5.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
Hardware
Bolts
All bolts used at truss connections, wind post connections, purlins and
horizontal braces shall be galvanized ASTM A325 or ASTM A490. All bolts
shall be installed and securely tightened as per AISC requirements.
2.1.5.2
Cable Assemblies
Wind bracing cables shall consist of galvanized "aircraft cable" and shall
be tensioned per specifications on the drawings using forged turnbuckles of
a size appropriate for the cable used in each application. Cable clamps
shall be dropped forged. Thimbles shall be used in each cable termination.
Cables will be terminated at each end of each "X". All cable terminations
shall be to tabs or plates welded to arch truss chords. In no case shall
the cables be terminated by passing around a frame member.
2.1.6
Purlin Bracing
The arch trusses shall be braced laterally by tubular purlins at intervals

required by the truss design. Purlins will brace both inside and outside
truss chords.
2.1.7
Wind and Frame Bracing
The structure shall be stabilized with wind bracing cables, as required by

the design criteria in order to efficiently transfer wind, snow and seismic
induced stresses to the foundation/anchoring system. Cable diameter for
main wind bracing shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch and larger if so required.
The bays at each end of the structure shall be designed to be "X" braced
early during installation to allow for permanent stability of the frame
during installation.
2.1.8
Connecting Joints
Connections between structural elements shall be designed so as to transfer

the compressive and tensile forces present in a given joint. A minimum of
four (4) 5/8" diameter ASTM A325 bolts shall be used at each truss chord
joint. Purlins, end wall wind post and end wall horizontal bracing
connections shall be made with 5/8-inch diameter ASTM A325 bolts.
2.1.9
Roof and Wall Surfaces
To provide for maximum compatibility with standard door, window,

ventilation and other accessory and cladding systems, and the structure
shall be designed such that side wall and end wall surfaces form flat
planes.
2.1.10
Mechanical Equipment Interface
The building framework shall be designed to accept the installation of

electrical and mechanical equipment. In addition, the structure shall
accept penetrations through the membrane for access doors and mechanical
equipment without modification.
2.1.11
Membrane Cladding System
a. The structures fabric membrane shall form a continuous, uninterrupted,

SECTION 07 53 24
W912HN-09-X-1813
weather tight shell over the framework. In order to provide for a good
finished appearance and to insure weather tightness, the membrane shall
be assembled and tensioned, in a manner to eliminate wrinkles in hot
and cold temperatures.
b. The structure shall be clad with Polyester membrane manufactured by an
approved and reputable supplier. The polyester membrane shall be
waterproof and free from defects. All roof, walls, end walls, and
connecting sections shall be weather tight. The material must be UV
stabilized and flame retardant and meet the requirements of NFPA 701.
The fabric shall be covered by a 10- year warranty and have a life
expectancy of more than 15 years.
c. Cladding Membrane- Structure covers shall be fabricated from PVC coated
polyester fabric manufactured by an approved and reputable supplier.
Laminated materials are not acceptable for use as the outer membrane.
Polyethylene or HDPE materials are not acceptable. Approved cover
material manufacturers include: Seamen, Mehler, Ferrari and Naizil.
Other cover material manufacturers may be considered and must be able
to demonstrate ten years experience with PVC coated fabrics used on
structures similar in use and loads to that contemplated here.
d. The membrane panels shall be fabricated using RF (radio frequency)
welding. The use of thermal welding to fabricate the membrane panels is
not acceptable.
e. Overlap fabric welds shall be tiled with the upper panel on top of the
lower panel.
f. The membrane shall be tensioned with load rated hardware which is plated
or hot dip galvanized so as to prevent corrosion. Hardware attached to
the foundation shall allow full and free rotation of the foundation
connection to avoid fatigue failure of threaded assemblies.
2.1.12
Fabric Attachment System
The fabric covers shall be tensioned both vertically and horizontally to

prevent wear and tear and abrasion. Horizontal tension shall be maintained
with 10,000 pound ratchets tensioning the main cover panels laterally to
the arch trusses and mounted on centers of no more than five feet. Vertical
tension shall be maintained using 10,000 pound ratchets anchored to the
stem wall.
2.1.12.1
Multiple Panel Connections
The cover system shall be designed such that adjoining panels are supplied
with overlap joints to allow the panels to be sealed together. Membrane
shall maintain a minimum of 175 lbs/inch connection.
2.1.12.2
Perimeter Cover Tensioning System
The cover system will be provided with a mechanical tensioning system that
allows the membrane to be fully tensioned around the structure perimeter.
The system will be designed such that the membrane can be tightly and
neatly secured over the structural frame and such that the system has
remaining range of adjustment.
SECTION 07 53 24
2.1.12.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Cover Seal at Openings and Base
The structure supplier will provide all materials and methods necessary to
fully tension and seal the membrane material around all doors, ventilation
and other openings, as well as around the structure perimeter below the
main tensioning system. This seal shall provide a neat and finished
appearance and eliminate any loose membrane cladding that could otherwise
be damaged by flapping or abrasion. The membrane base skirt shall be
supplied and attached as the base perimeter to allow a reasonable seal
against air and water intrusion (when required).
The membrane shall not be designed to function as a structural member such
that, should any damage to or penetrations of the membrane occur, the
integrity of the structural framework shall not be affected.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
MATERIALS
All materials used in structures shall be new, without defects and free of
repairs. The quality of the materials used shall be such that the
structure is in conformance with performance requirements specified herein.
3.2
CORROSION PROTECTION
All welds shall be protected by a brush application of high zinc content

two part coating. Spray application of a zinc coating is not acceptable.
3.3
WELDING
All welders shall be AWS certified and shall perform welding in Accordance
with AWS Standards. All welded components shall be prepared prior to the
finish coating.
3.4
WORKMANSHIP
The workmanship of all materials and components of the structure shall be

commensurate with the functional requirements of the item.
3.5
MANUFACTURER
The structure supplier shall be a reputable manufacturer; shall have a

minimum of five years direct experience in design, manufacture and
installation of structures of the type specified herein and shall operate
according to a comprehensive quality system. The structure shall be
manufactured under factory conditions in a plant specifically arranged for
this type of work. The manufacturer shall provide adequate space,
equipment, personnel, and technical ability to coordinate the assembly and
factory prefabrication of all major components of the work and all
necessary operations in the packing, shipping and installation procedures.
3.6
MATERIAL DELIVERY
The building system materials shall be delivered to the project site during
normal business hours on weekdays. The Installation contractor will provide
adequate workers and equipment to promptly unload, inspect and accept
material delivery.
SECTION 07 53 24
3.7
W912HN-09-X-1813
HANDLING
The installation contractor shall be responsible for unloading, field

storage, protection and transfer to the work area of all materials and
equipment required to perform the work. Particular care should be given to
protecting the finish of the components during handling and erection.
Hardware and fabric panels should be protected from the weather until
installation is underway.
3.8
PIECE MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION
All individual parts or bundles and packages of identical parts are to be

clearly marked for identification. The shipping document shall list the
description, quantity and piece mark of the various parts, components and
elements.
3.9
INSTALLATION
a. Installation shall be performed by a contractor experienced in the

erection of truss frame fabric covered buildings. Before installing,
the Contractor shall inspect the components for damage from
transportation and handling. The contractor shall provide field
verified dimensions to the manufacturer, and verify from the
manufacturer, adequacy of structural slab before erection begins.
b. The manufacturer shall furnish an installation and maintenance manual
for safe installation and dismantling and repair procedures for
repairing the cover membrane.
c. Members shall be braced adequately at all stages of installation to hold
them in safe positions until full stability is achieved.
d. Framing shall be installed to manufacturer's suggested tolerances, set
accurately to the required lines and levels, and secured in accordance
with the manufacturers recommendations.
e. Bolting shall be done in an approved manner as recommended by the
manufacturer and all bolts shall be tightened as recommended by the
manufacturer.
f. The structure shall be installed level, square and positioned to drain
properly.
SECTION 07 53 24
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 07 54 50A
*1 TPO THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE-PLY ROOFING
08/09
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Section Includes
Thermoplastic Single-Ply Roofing
Roof Insulation.
1.2
Related Sections
Section 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
1.3
REFERENCES

ASTM C1289
(2011) Standard Specification for Faced

Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board
ASTM D 1179
(2010) Fluoride Ion in Water
1.4
DEFINITIONS
Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1179 and the glossary of the National
Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) Roofing and Waterproofing Manual for
definitions of roofing terms related to this section
1.5
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Provide an installed roofing membrane and base flashing system that does
not permit the passage of water, and will withstand the design pressures
calculated in accordance with the most current revision of ASCE 7.
Provide all primary roofing materials that are physically and chemically
compatible when installed in accordance with manufacturers current
application requirements
1.6
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL

PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Provide manufacturers standard details and approved shop drawing
for the roof system specified.
SECTION 07 54 50
W912HN-09-X-1813
SD-03 Product Data

Product Data: Provide Product Data sheets for each type of product
indicated in this section.
SD-04 Samples
Samples: Provide samples of insulations, fasteners, membrane
materials and accessories for verification of quality.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall provide a roofing
system that meets or exceeds all criteria listed in this section
Installer Minimum Qualifications:
Installer shall be classified as a Master Select Contractor as
defined and certified by TPO manufacturer.
Installer shall be classified as an Approved Contractor as defined
and certified by TPO manufacturer.
Source Limitations: Components listed shall be provided by a single
manufacturer or approved by the primary roofing manufacturer
Final Inspection: Manufacturer's representative shall provide a
comprehensive final inspection after completion of the roof system.
All application errors shall be addressed and final punch list completed
1.8
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
Prior to scheduled commencement of the roofing installation and associated

work, conduct a meeting at the project site with the installer, architect,
owner, roof manufacturer representative and any other persons directly
involved with the performance of the work. The installer shall record
conference discussions to include decisions, agreements, and open issues
and furnish copies of recorded discussions to each attending party. The
primary purpose of the meeting is to review foreseeable methods and
procedures related to roofing work.
1.9
Work shall be performed in a safe, professional manner, conforming to

federal, state and local codes.
Exterior Fire Test Exposure: Provide a roofing system achieving a UL Class
rating for roof slopes indicated:
UL Class A rating.
1.10

Deliver roofing materials to the site in original containers, with
factory seals intact. Products shall carry roof manufacturer label.
Store pail goods in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry
location within their specified temperature range.
SECTION 07 54 50
W912HN-09-X-1813
Do not expose materials to moisture in any form before, during, or

after delivery to the site. Reject delivery of materials that show
evidence of contact with moisture.
Remove manufacturer supplied plastic covers from materials provided
with such. Use "breathable" type covers such as canvas tarpaulins to
allow venting and protection from weather and moisture. Cover and
protect materials at the end of each work day. Do not remove any
protective tarpaulins until immediately before the material will be
installed.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with
solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction
1.11
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Weather:
Proceed with roofing only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit.
Ambient temperatures shall be above 45 degrees F (7.2 degrees C) when
heat welding, applying hot asphalt or water based adhesives.
1.12
WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's Guarantee with single source coverage and no

monetary limitation where the manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components in the roofing system, which cause a leak due to a failure in
materials or workmanship, for a period of 20 years.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
INSULATION
Rigid polyisocyanurate board, with a strong white or black fibrous glass

facer conforming to or exceeding the requirements of ASTM C1289, with the
following characteristics:
Board Thickness:
As indicated on drawings.
Thermal Resistance (LTTR value):

2.2
As indicated on drawings.
ROOF BOARD
Underlayment or overlayment board with a water-resistant and silicone

treated gypsum core with glass fiber facers embedded on both sides, and
pre-primed on one side.
Board Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
2.3
MEMBRANE MATERIALS
Fully adhered, smooth surfaced, polyester scrim reinforced thermoplastic

polyolefin membrane with a nominal 0.060 inch (60 mil) thickness, and a 3"
lap designed to be hot air welded. For use as a single ply roofing
membrane. Use maximum width roll material.
SECTION 07 54 50
Color:
2.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Tan
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND PRIMERS
Low VOC solvent-based Bonding Adhesive: Solvent based rubberized adhesive

for use with TPO membranes.
2.5
2.5.1
ACCESSORIES
Plates and Fasteners
Standard Screws: Standard duty alloy steel insulation fastener with CR-10
coating with a .215" diameter thread. Factory Mutual Standard 4470
Approved, #3 Phillips head for use on steel and wood decks
2.6
FLASHING ACCESSORIES
A smooth type, unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin based membrane for use

as an alternative flashing/reinforcing material for penetrations and
corners. Required whenever preformed vent boots cannot be used, available
in Tan, 0.055 inches (55 mils) nominal thickness and sheet size: 24in x
50ft.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that the surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive
work.
B.
Verify that the deck is supported and secured.
C. Verify that the deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions,

waves, or projections, and properly sloped to drains, valleys, eaves,
scuppers or gutters.
D.
Verify that the deck surfaces are dry and free of ice or snow.
E. Verify that all roof openings or penetrations through the roof are
solidly set, and that all flashings are tapered.
3.2
SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Steel Deck:
1. Metal decks shall be a minimum uncoated thickness of 22 gauge
(0.8 mm) and shall have a G-90 galvanized finish on all panels.
GENERAL INSTALLATION
Install TPO roofing system according to all current application

requirements in addition to those listed in this section.
Start the application of membrane plies at the low point of the roof or at
the drains, so that the flow of water is over or parallel to, but never
against the laps.
SECTION 07 54 50
3.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
GENERAL INSULATION
A. Do not apply roof insulation or roofing until all other work trades
have completed jobs that require them to traverse the deck on foot or
with equipment.
B.
Do not install wet, damaged or warped insulation boards.
C. Install insulation boards with staggered board joints in one

direction (unless taping joint).
D. Install insulation boards snug. Gaps between board joints shall not
exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm). All gaps in excess of 1/4 inch (6 mm) shall be
filled with like insulation material.
E. Wood nailers shall be 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) minimum width or 1 inch
(25 mm) wider than metal flange. They shall be of equal thickness as
the insulation with a minimum 1 inch (25 mm) thickness. All nailers
shall be securely fastened to the deck.
F. Galvanized steel roof edge nailers shall be pre-formed and a
minimum 16 gauge. The shapes are as shown on the drawings.
G.
Do not kick insulation boards into place.
H. Miter and fill the edges of the insulation boards at ridges,

valleys and other changes in plane to prevent open joints or irregular
surfaces. Avoid breaking or crushing of the insulation at the corners.
I. Roof tape, if required over insulation joints, shall be laid
evenly, smoothly and embedded in a uniform coating of hot steep asphalt
with 4 inches (102 mm) end laps. Care shall be taken to assure smooth
application of tape, and full embedment of the tape in the asphalt.
J. Do not install any more insulation than will be completely
waterproofed each day.
3.5
MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A.
Fully Adhered:
1. Place membrane so that wrinkles and buckles are not formed.
Any wrinkles or buckles must be removed from the sheet prior to
permanent attachment. Roof membrane shall be fully adhered
immediately after it is rolled out, followed by welding to
adjacent sheets.
2. Overlap roof membrane a minimum of 3" for side laps and 3" for
end laps.
3.
All exposed sheet corners shall be rounded a minimum of 1".
4.
Use full width rolls in the field and perimeter region of roof.
5. Fully adhere membrane sheets to the substrate with hot roofing

asphalt at a rate of 25 lbs per 100 square feet.
6. Prevent seam contamination by keeping the asphalt application
a few inches back from the seam area.
SECTION 07 54 50
W912HN-09-X-1813
7. Adhere approximately one half of the membrane sheet at a

time. One half of the sheet's length shall be folded back in turn
to allow for asphalt application. Lay membrane into asphalt
immediately after application.
8. Roll membrane with a weighted roller to ensure complete
bonding between asphalt and membrane.
9. Membrane laps shall be hot-air-welded together. All welds
shall be continuous, without voids or partial welds. Welds shall
be free of burns and scorch marks.
10. Weld shall be a minimum of 1-1/2" in width for automatic
machine welding and a minimum 2" in width for hand welding.
11. All cut edges of reinforced membrane must be sealed with TPO
cut edge sealant.
12. Supplemental membrane attachment is required at the base of
all walls and curbs, and where the angle of the substrate changes
by more than five (5) degrees (1" in 12"). Roofing membrane shall
be secured to the structural deck with appropriate screws and
plates spaced every 12" o.c. The screws and plates must be
installed no less than 1/2" from the membrane edge.
Alternatively, the roofing membrane may be turned up the vertical
plane a minimum of 3" and secured with screws and termination
bar. Fastener spacing is the same as is used for in-lap
attachment. The termination bar must be installed within 1-1/2"
to 2" of the plane of the roof membrane, with a minimum of 1" of
membrane extending above the termination bar.
13. Supplemental membrane attachment to the structural deck is
required at all penetrations unless the insulation substrate is
fully adhered to the deck. Roofing membrane shall be secured to
the deck with appropriate screws and plates.
14. Fasteners must be installed to achieve the proper embedment
depth. install fasteners without lean or tilt.
15. Install fasteners so that the
drawn down tightly to the membrane
fasteners will not allow the plate
(underdriving), but will not cause
(overdriving).
3.6
plate or termination bar is

surface. Properly installed
or termination bar to move
wrinkling of the membrane
FLASHINGS
A. All penetrations shall be at least 2 feet (610 mm) from the curbs,
walls, and edges to provide adequate space for proper flashing.
B. Flash all perimeter, curb, and penetration conditions with coated
metal, membrane flashing, and flashing accessories as appropriate to
the site condition.
C. All coated metal and membrane flashing corners shall be reinforced
with preformed corners or non-reinforced membrane.
D.
Hot-air weld all flashing membranes, accessories, and coated

SECTION 07 54 50
W912HN-09-X-1813
metal. A minimum 2" wide hand weld or minimum 1 - 1/2" automatic

machine weld is required.
E. Non-coated metal edge details shall be installed in accordance with
current EverGuard construction details and requirements.
F. Twenty (20) year systems require the use of coated metal edges
where applicable. Bonding adhesive and/or cover tape is not acceptable.
G. All cut edges of reinforced membrane shall be sealed with TPO cut
edge sealant.
3.6.1
General
A.
3.7
Roof Edges
1. Roof edge flashings are applicable for gravel stop and drip
edge conditions as well as for exterior edges of parapet walls.
2. Flash roof edges with metal flanges nailed 4 inches (102 mm)
O.C. to pressure-treated wood nailers. Where required, hot-air
weld roof membrane to coated metal flanges.
3. When the fascia width exceeds 4 inches (102 mm), coated metal
roof edging must be attached with a continuous cleat to secure the
lower fascia edge. The cleat must be secured to the building no
less than 12 inches (305 mm) O.C.
4. Alternatively, roof edges may be flashed with a 2-piece snap
on fascia system, adhering the roof membrane to a metal cant and
face nailing the membrane 8" on center prior to installing a
snap-on fascia.
5. Flash roof edge scuppers with a coated metal insert that is
mechanically attached to the roof edge and integrated as a part of
the metal edging.
ROOF PROTECTION
A. Protect all partially and fully completed roofing work from other
trades until completion.
B. Whenever possible, stage materials in such a manner that foot
traffic is minimized over completed roof areas.
C. When it is not possible to stage materials away from locations
where partial or complete installation has taken place, temporary
walkways and platforms shall be installed in order to protect all
completed roof areas from traffic and point loading during the
application process.
C. Temporary tie-ins shall be installed at the end of each workday and
removed prior to commencement of work the following day.
3.8
CLEAN-UP
A. All work areas are to be kept clean, clear and free of debris at
all times.
B. Do not allow trash, waste, or debris to collect on the roof.
items shall be removed from the roof on a daily basis.
These
C. All tools and unused materials shall be collected at the end of

each workday and stored properly off of the finished roof surface and
SECTION 07 54 50
W912HN-09-X-1813
protected from exposure to the elements.

D. Dispose of or recycle all trash and excess material in a manner
conforming to current EPA regulations and local laws.
E. Properly clean the finished roof surface after completion, and make
sure the drains and gutters are not clogged.
F.
3.9
Clean and restore all damaged surfaces to their original condition.
MAINTENANCE
A. Inspections to the roof shall be performed annually by a roof
contractor.
B. Submit copies of the roof inspection form, accompanying photographs
(a minimum of 6 photos showing the condition of the roof and critical
details), and a record of all roofing system maintenance to the
contracting office and the roofing manufacturer within sixty (60) days
of the anniversary date of the completion of the roofing system.
Annual roof inspections must be started within the first two (2) years
of the guarantee term.
SECTION 07 54 50
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 07 60 00A
*1 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

ASTM A653/A653M

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B221
(2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum

and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM D1784
(2011) Standard Specification for Rigid

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Compounds
ASTM D4586
(2007) Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1793
1.2

6th Edition
Finished sheet metalwork will form a weathertight construction without

waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, which allows for
expansion and contraction. Sheet metal mechanic is responsible for
cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet
metal required to accommodate the work of other trades. Coordinate
installation of sheet metal items used in conjunction with roofing with
roofing work to permit continuous roofing operations.
1.3
SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Covering on flat, sloped, or curved surfaces; G
SECTION 07 60 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Gutters; G
Downspouts; G
Gravel stops and fascias; G
Drip edge; G
Indicate thicknesses, dimensions, fastenings and anchoring
methods, expansion joints, and other provisions necessary for
thermal expansion and contraction. Scaled manufacturer's catalog
data may be submitted for factory fabricated items.
Quality Control Plan
Submit for sheet metal work in accordance with paragraph entitled
"Field Quality Control."
1.4
DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
Package and protect materials during shipment. Uncrate and inspect

materials for damage, dampness, and wet-storage stains upon delivery to the
job site. Remove from the site and replace damaged materials that cannot
be restored to like-new condition. Handle sheet metal items to avoid
damage to surfaces, edges, and ends. Store materials in dry,
weather-tight, ventilated areas until immediately before installation.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Do not use lead, lead-coated metal, or galvanized steel. Use any metal
listed by SMACNA Arch. Manual for a particular item, unless otherwise
specified or indicated. Conform to the requirements specified and to the
thicknesses and configurations established in SMACNA Arch. Manual for the
materials. Different items need not be of the same metal, except that if
copper is selected for any exposed item, all exposed items must be copper.
Furnish sheet metal items in 8 to 10 foot lengths. Single pieces less than
8 feet long may be used to connect to factory-fabricated inside and outside
corners, and at ends of runs. Factory fabricate corner pieces with minimum
12 inch legs.
2.1.1
Exposed Sheet Metal Items
Must be of the same material. Consider the following as exposed sheet

metal: gutters, including hangers; downspouts; gravel stops and fascias;
cap, valley, steeped, base, and eave flashings and related accessories.
2.1.2
Drainage
Do not use copper for an exposed item if drainage from that item will pass
over exposed masonry, stonework or other metal surfaces. In addition to
the metals listed in Table I, lead-coated copper may be used for such items.
SECTION 07 60 00
2.1.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
ASTM A653/A653M.
2.1.3.1
Finish
Exposed exterior items of zinc-coated steel sheet must have a baked-on,

factory-applied color coating of polyvinylidene fluoride or other
equivalent fluorocarbon coating applied after metal substrates have been
cleaned and pretreated. Provide finish coating dry-film thickness of 0.8
to 1.3 mils and color as indicated on the drawings.
2.1.4
Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
2.1.4.1
Finish
Exposed exterior sheet metal items of aluminum must have a baked-on,

factory-applied color coating of polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF2) or other
equivalent fluorocarbon coating applied after metal substrates have been
cleaned and pretreated. Provide finish coating dry-film thickness of 0.8
to 1.3 mils and color as indicated on the drawings.
2.1.5
Aluminum Alloy, Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes
ASTM B221.
2.1.6
Polyvinyl Chloride Reglet
ASTM D1784, Type II, Grade 1, Class 14333-D, 0.075 inch minimum thickness.
2.1.7
Bituminous Plastic Cement
ASTM D4586, Type I.

2.1.8
Fasteners
Use the same metal or a metal compatible with the item fastened.
stainless steel fasteners to fasten dissimilar materials.
PART 3
3.1
3.1.1
Use
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Workmanship
Make lines and angles sharp and true. Free exposed surfaces from visible
wave, warp, buckle, and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges neatly to form
a 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal exposed to the
weather watertight with provisions for expansion and contraction.
Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth,
dry, and free of defects and projections. For installation of items not
shown in detail or not covered by specifications conform to the applicable
requirements of SMACNA 1793, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Provide
sheet metal flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut walls,
curbs, ventilators, pipes, or other vertical surfaces and wherever
indicated and necessary to make the work watertight. Join sheet metal
items together as shown in Table II.
SECTION 07 60 00
3.1.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Nailing
Confine nailing of sheet metal generally to sheet metal having a maximum

width of 18 inch. Confine nailing of flashing to one edge only. Space
nails evenly not over 3 inch on center and approximately 1/2 inch from edge
unless otherwise specified or indicated. Face nailing will not be
permitted. Where sheet metal is applied to other than wood surfaces,
include in shop drawings, the locations for sleepers and nailing strips
required to secure the work.
3.1.3
Cleats
Provide cleats for sheet metal 18 inch and over in width. Space cleats
evenly not over 12 inch on center unless otherwise specified or indicated.
Unless otherwise specified, provide cleats of 2 inch wide by 3 inch long
and of the same material and thickness as the sheet metal being installed.
Secure one end of the cleat with two nails and the cleat folded back over
the nailheads. Lock the other end into the seam. Where the fastening is
to be made to concrete or masonry, use screws and drive in expansion
shields set in concrete or masonry. Pretin cleats for soldered seams.
3.1.4
Bolts, Rivets, and Screws
Install bolts, rivets, and screws where indicated or required. Provide

compatible washers where required to protect surface of sheet metal and to
provide a watertight connection. Provide mechanically formed joints in
aluminum sheets 0.040 inch or less in thickness.
3.1.5
Seams
Straight and uniform in width and height with no solder showing on the face.
3.1.5.1
Flat-lock Seams
Finish not less than 3/4 inch wide.

3.1.5.2
Lap Seams
Finish soldered seams not less than one inch wide.

soldered, not less than 3 inch.
3.1.5.3
Overlap seams not
Loose-Lock Expansion Seams
Not less than 3 inch wide; provide minimum one inch movement within the
joint. Completely fill the joints with the specified sealant, applied at
not less than 1/8 inch thick bed.
3.1.5.4
Standing Seams
Not less than one inch high, double locked without solder.
3.1.5.5
Flat Seams
Make seams in the direction of the flow.
SECTION 07 60 00
3.1.6
3.1.6.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
Protection from Contact with Dissimilar Materials

Copper or Copper-bearing Alloys
Paint with heavy-bodied bituminous paint surfaces in contact with

dissimilar metal, or separate the surfaces by means of moistureproof
building felts.
3.1.6.2
Aluminum
Do not allow aluminum surfaces in direct contact with other metals except
stainless steel, zinc, or zinc coating. Where aluminum contacts another
metal, paint the dissimilar metal with a primer followed by two coats of
aluminum paint. Where drainage from a dissimilar metal passes over
aluminum, paint the dissimilar metal with a non-lead pigmented paint.
3.1.6.3
Metal Surfaces
Paint surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials

with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.1.6.4
Wood or Other Absorptive Materials
Paint surfaces that may become repeatedly wet and in contact with metal
with two coats of aluminum paint or a coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.1.7
Expansion and Contraction
Provide expansion and contraction joints at not more than 32 foot intervals
for aluminum and at not more than 40 foot intervals for other metals.
Provide an additional joint where the distance between the last expansion
joint and the end of the continuous run is more than half the required
interval. Space joints evenly. Join extruded aluminum gravel stops and
fascias by expansion and contraction joints spaced not more than 12 feet
apart.
3.1.8
Base Flashing
Extend up vertical surfaces of the flashing not less than 8 inch and not
less than 4 inch under the roof covering. Where finish wall coverings form
a counterflashing, extend the vertical leg of the flashing up behind the
applied wall covering not less than 6 inch. Overlap the flashing strips
with the previously laid flashing not less than 3 inch. Fasten the strips
at their upper edge to the deck. Horizontal flashing at vertical surfaces
must extend vertically above the roof surface and fastened at their upper
edge to the deck a minimum of 6 inch on center with hex headed, galvanized
shielded screws a minimum of 2-inch lap of any surface. Solder end laps
and provide for expansion and contraction. Extend the metal flashing over
crickets at the up-slope side of vertical surfaces extending through
sloping roofs, the metal flashings. Extend the metal flashings onto the
roof covering not less than 4.5 inch at the lower side of vertical surfaces
extending through the roof decks. Install and fit the flashings so as to
be completely weathertight. Provide factory-fabricated base flashing for
interior and exterior corners.
3.1.9
Gravel Stops and Fascias
Prefabricate in the shapes and sizes indicated and in lengths not less that
8 feet. Extend flange at least 4 inch onto roofing. Provide
SECTION 07 60 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
prefabricated, mitered corners internal and external corners. Install

gravel stops and fascias after all plies of the roofing membrane have been
applied, but before the flood coat of bitumen is applied. Prime roof
flange of gravel stops and fascias on both sides with an asphalt primer.
After primer has dried, set flange on roofing membrane and strip-in.Nail
flange securely to wood nailer with large-head, barbed-shank roofing nails
1.5 inch long spaced not more than 3 inch on center, in two staggered rows.
3.1.10
Metal Drip Edge
Provide a metal drip edge, designed to allow water run-off to drip free of
underlying construction, at eaves and rakes prior to the application of
roofing shingles. Apply directly on the wood deck at the eaves and over
the underlay along the rakes. Extend back from the edge of the deck not
more than 3 inch and secure with compatible nails spaced not more than 10
inch on center along upper edge.
3.1.11
Gutters
The hung type of shape indicated and supported on underside by brackets

that permit free thermal movement of the gutter. Provide gutters in sizes
indicated complete with mitered corners, end caps, outlets, brackets, and
other accessories necessary for installation. Bead with hemmed edge or
reinforce the outer edge of gutter with a stiffening bar not less than 3/4
by 3/16 inch of material compatible with gutter. Fabricate gutters in
sections not less than 8 feet. Lap the sections a minimum of one inch in
the direction of flow or provide with concealed splice plate 6 inch
minimum. Join the gutters, by riveted and soldered joints. Provide
expansion-type slip joints midway between outlets. Install gutters below
slope line of the roof so that snow and ice can slide clear. Support
gutters on adjustable hangers spaced not more than 30 inch on center by
cleats spaced not less than 36 inch apart. Adjust gutters to slope
uniformly to outlets, with high points occurring midway between outlets.
Fabricate hangers and fastenings from metals.
3.1.12
Downspouts
Space supports for downspouts according to the manufacturer's

recommendation for the or steel substrate. Types, shapes and sizes are
indicated. Provide complete including elbows and offsets. Provide
downspouts in approximately 10 foot lengths. Provide end joints to
telescope not less than 1/2 inch and lock longitudinal joints. Provide
gutter outlets with wire ball strainers for each outlet. Provide strainers
to fit tightly into outlets and be of the same material used for gutters.
Keep downspouts not less than one inch away from walls. Fasten to the
walls at top, bottom, and at an intermediate point not to exceed 5 feet on
center with leader straps or concealed rack-and-pin type fasteners. Form
straps and fasteners of metal compatible with the downspouts.
3.1.12.1
Terminations
Provide downspouts terminating in splash blocks with elbow-type fittings.

Provide concrete splash pans as specified.
3.1.13
Splash Pans
Install splash pans where downspouts discharge on roof surfaces and at

other locations as indicated.
SECTION 07 60 00
3.1.14
W912HN-09-X-1813
Eave Flashing
One piece in width, applied in 8 to 10 foot lengths with expansion joints

spaced as specified in paragraph entitled "Expansion and Contraction."
Provide a 3/4 inch continuous fold in the upper edge of the sheet to engage
cleats spaced not more than 10 inch on center. Locate the upper edge of
flashing not less than 18 inch from the outside face of the building,
measured along the roof slope. Fold lower edge of the flashing over and
loose-lock into a continuous edge strip on the fascia. Where eave flashing
intersects metal valley flashing, secure with one inch flat locked joints
with cleats that are 10 inch on center.
3.1.15
Sheet Metal Covering on Flat, Sloped, or Curved Surfaces
Except as specified or indicated otherwise, cover and flash all minor flat,
sloped, or curved surfaces with metal sheets of the material used for
flashing; maximum size of sheets, 16 by 18 inch. Fasten sheets to
sheathing with metal cleats. Lock seams and solder. Lock aluminum seams
as recommended by aluminum manufacturer. Provide an underlayment of
roofing felt for all sheet metal covering.
3.2
PAINTING
Field-paint sheet metal for separation of dissimilar materials.

3.3
CLEANING
Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove

grease and oil films, handling marks, contamination from steel wool,
fittings and drilling debris, and scrub-clean. Free the exposed metal
surfaces of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, and solder or weld marks.
3.4
REPAIRS TO FINISH
Scratches, abrasions, and minor surface defects of finish may be repaired

in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and as approved.
Repair damaged surfaces caused by scratches, blemishes, and variations of
color and surface texture. Replace items which cannot be repaired.
3.5
Establish and maintain a Quality Control Plan for sheet metal used in
conjunction with roofing to assure compliance of the installed sheet
metalwork with the contract requirements. Remove work that is not in
compliance with the contract and replace or correct. Include quality
control, but not be limited to, the following:
a.
Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of

sheet metal workers; condition of substrate.
b.
Verification that specified material is provided and installed.
c.
Inspection of sheet metalwork, for proper size(s) and thickness(es),

fastening and joining, and proper installation.
3.5.1
Procedure
Submit for approval prior to start of roofing work. Include a checklist of

points to be observed. Document the actual quality control observations
SECTION 07 60 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
and inspections. Furnish a copy of the documentation to the Contracting

Officer at the end of each day.
TABLE I.
SHEET METAL WEIGHTS, THICKNESSES, AND GAGES
ZincCoated
Stainless
Steel,
Sheet Metal Items
Aluminum,
Steel,
U.S.
Inch
Inch
Std.
Gage
___________________________________________________________________________
Covering on minor flat,
pitched or curved
surfaces ............
Downspouts and
leaders .............
Downspout clips
and anchors .........
.040
.018
.032
.015
24
.040 clip
.125 anchor
Downspout straps,
2-inch ..............
.060
.050
Flashings:
Base ................
.040
.018
24
Gravel stops and

fascias:
Extrusions ..........
.075
Sheets, smooth ......

Edge strip ..........
Gutters:
Gutter section.......
Continuous cleat.....
Hangers,
dimensions .........
.050
.050
.018
.025
24
-
.032
.032
.015
.015
24
24
Joint Cover plates...

(See Table II)
.032
1 inch by
.080 inch
(c)
1 inch by
.037 inch
.015
24
TABLE II. SHEET METAL JOINTS

TYPE OF JOINT
Item
Designation
Steel, Zinc-Coated
Steel and
Stainless
Steel
Aluminum
Remarks
______________________________________________________________________
Joint cap
for
building
1.25 inch
single lock,
standing
1.25 inch
single lock,
standing
SECTION 07 60 00
- - -
W912HN-09-X-1813

TYPE OF JOINT
Item
Designation
Steel, Zinc-Coated
Steel and
Stainless
Steel
Aluminum
Remarks
______________________________________________________________________
expansion
seam, cleated
seam, cleated
joint at
roof
Flashings
Base
One inch
3 inch lap
for expansion
joint
One inch
flat locked,
soldered; sealed;
3 inch lap for
expansion joint
Aluminum producer's
recommended hard
setting sealant for
locked aluminum
joints. Fill
each metal
expansion joint
with a joint
sealing compound
compound.
Eave
One inch flat

locked, cleated
One inch
loose locked,
expansion
joint cleated
One inch flat

locked, locked,
cleated one inch
loose locked, sealed
expansion joints,
cleated
Same as base
flashing.
Edge
strip
Butt
Butt
- - -
Gravel
stops:
Extrusions
- - -
Butt with 1/2 inch

space
Use sheet flashing

beneath and a cover
plate.
Sheet,
smooth
Butt with 1/4 inch

space
Butt with 1/4 inch

space
Use sheet flashing

backup plate.
Gutters
1.5 inch lap,

riveted and
soldered
One inch flat locked,

riveted, and sealed
Aluminum producers
recommended hard
setting sealant for
locked aluminum
joints.
(a)
Provide a 3 inch lap elastomeric flashing with manufacturer's

SECTION 07 60 00
W912HN-09-X-1813

TYPE OF JOINT
Item
Designation
Steel, Zinc-Coated
Steel and
Stainless
Steel
Aluminum
Remarks
______________________________________________________________________
recommended sealant.
(b)
Seal polyvinyl chloride reglet with manufacturer's

recommended sealant.
SECTION 07 60 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20A

*1 STEEL STANDING SEAM ROOFING
05/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

AISI SG03-3
(2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)


ASTM A1008/A1008M

ASTM A1011/A1011M

Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability and Ultra-High Strength
ASTM A36/A36M

Structural Steel
ASTM A653/A653M

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A792/A792M

Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B117
(2011) Standard Practice for Operating

ASTM D1654

Environments
ASTM D2244
(2011) Calculation of Color Tolerances and

Color Differences from Instrumentally
Measured Color Coordinates
ASTM D2247
(2011) Testing Water Resistance of

Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
W912HN-09-X-1813
ASTM D4214
(2007) Standard Test Method for Evaluating

the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint
Films
ASTM D522
(1993a; R 2008) Mandrel Bend Test of

Attached Organic Coatings
ASTM D523

Gloss
ASTM D714
(2002; R 2009) Evaluating Degree of

Blistering of Paints
ASTM D968
(2005; R 2010) Abrasion Resistance of

Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive
ASTM E1592
(2005) Structural Performance of Sheet

Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform
Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM G 152
(2006) Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc

Light Apparatus for Exposure of
ASTM G 153
(2004; R 2010) Operating Enclosed Carbon

Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1793
1.2
1.2.1

6th Edition
DEFINITIONS
Field-Formed Seam
Seams of panels so configured that when adjacent sheets are installed the
seam is sealed utilizing mechanical or hand seamers. Crimped (45 degree
bend), roll formed (180 degree bend), double roll formed (2 - 180 degree
bends), and roll and lock systems are types of field-formed seam systems.
1.2.2
Snap Together Seam
Panels so configured that the male and female portions of the seam
interlock through the application of foot pressure or tamping with a
mallet. Snap-on cap configurations are a type of snap together system.
1.2.3
Pre-Formed
Formed to the final, less field-formed seam, profile and configuration in

the factory.
1.2.4
Field-Formed
Formed to the final, less field-formed seam, profile and configuration at

the site of work prior to installation.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
1.2.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
Roofing System
The roofing system is defined as the assembly of roofing components,

including roofing panels, flashing, fasteners, and accessories which, when
assembled properly result in a watertight installation.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3.1
Design Requirements
a.
Panels shall be continuous lengths up to manufacturer's standard

longest lengths, with no joints or seams, except where indicated or
specified. Ribs of adjoining sheets shall be in continuous contact
from eave to ridge. Individual panels of snap together type systems
shall be removable for replacement of damaged material.
b.
There shall be no exposed or penetrating fasteners except where shown

on approved shop drawings. Fasteners into steel shall be stainless
steel, zinc cast head, or cadmium plated steel screws inserted into
predrilled holes. There shall be a minimum of two fasteners per clip.
Single fasteners will be allowed when supporting structural members are
prepunched or predrilled.
c.
Snap together type systems shall have a capillary break and a positive
side lap locking device. Field-formed seam type systems shall be
mechanically locked closed by the manufacturer's locking tool. The
seam shall include a continuous factory applied sealant when required
by the manufacturer to withstand the wind loads specified.
d.
Roof panel anchor clips shall be concealed and designed to allow for
longitudinal thermal movement of the panels, except where specific
fixed points are indicated. Provide for lateral thermal movement in
panel configuration or with clips designed for lateral and longitudinal
movement.
1.3.2
Design Conditions
The system shall be designed to resist positive and negative loads

specified herein in accordance with the AISI SG03-3. Panels shall support
walking loads without permanent distortion or telegraphing of the
structural supports.
1.3.2.1
Wind Uplift
The design uplift pressures for the roof system shall be computed and
applied using a basic wind speed of 95 miles per hour (mph). Roof system
and attachments shall resist the wind loads, in pounds per square foot
(psf) per the structural drawings.
The design uplift force for each connection assembly shall be that pressure
given for the area under consideration, multiplied by the tributary load
area of the connection assembly, and multiplied by the appropriate factor
of safety, as follows:
a.
Single fastener in a connection:
3.0
b.
Two or more fasteners in each connection:
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
2.25
1.3.2.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Roof Live Loads
Loads shall be applied on the horizontal projection of the roof structure.

The minimum roof design live load shall be 20 psf.
1.3.2.3
Thermal Movement
System shall be capable of withstanding thermal movement based on a

temperature range of 10 degrees F below design low temperature and 140
degrees F for mill finish and light colors and 180 degrees F for dark
colors.
1.3.2.4
Deflection
Panels shall be capable of supporting design loads between unsupported

spans with deflection of not greater than L/180 of the span.
1.3.3
Structural Performance
The structural performance test methods and requirements of the Standing

Seam Roofing Systems (SSRS) shall be in accordance with ASTM E1592.
1.4
SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Roofing; G
Submit roofing drawings to supplement the instructions and
diagrams. Drawings shall include design and erection drawings
containing an isometric view of the roof showing the design uplift
pressures and dimensions of edge, ridge and corner zones; and show
typical and special conditions including flashings, materials and
thickness, dimensions, fixing lines, anchoring methods, sealant
locations, sealant tape locations, fastener layout, sizes, and
spacing, terminations, penetrations, attachments, and provisions
for thermal movement. Details of installation shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's Standard Instructions and
details or the SMACNA 1793. Prior to submitting shop drawings,
have drawings reviewed and approved by the manufacturer's
technical engineering department.
SD-03 Product Data
Roofing panels; G
Attachment clips
Closures
Accessories
Fasteners
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
W912HN-09-X-1813
Sealants
Insulation, including joint sealing measures for vapor barrier
facing
Sample warranty certificate; G
Submit for materials to be provided. Submit data sufficient to
indicate conformance to specified requirements.
SD-04 Samples
Roofing panel
For color selection, submit 2 by 4 inch metal samples in color,
finish and texture specified.
SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Inspection; G
Submit manufacturer's technical representative's field
inspection reports as specified in paragraph entitled
"Manufacturer's Field Inspection."
Structural performance tests
Finish tests
SD-07 Certificates
Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Qualifications
Statement of Installer's Qualifications
Submit documentation from roofing manufacturer proving the
manufacturer's technical representative meets below specified
requirements. Include name, address, telephone number, and
experience record.
Submit documentation proving the installer is factory-trained,
has the specified experience, and authorized by the manufacturer
to install the products specified.
Coil stock compatibility; G
Provide certification of coil compatibility with roll forming
machinery to be used for forming panels without warping, waviness,
and rippling not part of panel profile; to be done without damage,
abrasion or marking of finish coating.
Installation manual; G
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
W912HN-09-X-1813
Submit manufacturers printed installation manual, instructions,

and standard details.
Information card
For each roofing installation, submit a typewritten card or
photoengraved aluminum card containing the information listed on
Form 1 located at the end of this section.
1.5
DESIGN CALCULATIONS
Provide design calculations prepared by a professional engineer

specializing in structural engineering verifying that system supplied and
any additional framing meets design load criteria indicated. Coordinate
calculations with manufacturer's test results. Include calculations for:
Wind load uplift design pressure at roof locations specified in paragraph
entitled "Wind Uplift."
Clip spacing and allowable load per clip.
Fastening of clips to structure or intermediate supports.
Intermediate support spacing and framing and fastening to structure when
required.
Allowable panel span at anchorage spacing indicated.
Safety factor used in design loading.
Governing code requirements or criteria.
Edge and termination details.
1.6
1.6.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Preroofing Conference
After submittals are received and approved but before roofing and
insulation work, including associated work, is performed, the Contracting
Officer will hold a preroofing conference to review the following:
a.
The drawings and specifications
b.
Procedure for on site inspection and acceptance of the roofing

substrate and pertinent structural details relating to the roofing
system
c.
Contractor's plan for coordination of the work of the various trades

involved in providing the roofing system and other components secured
to the roofing
d.
Safety requirements
The preroofing conference shall be attended by the Contractor and personnel

directly responsible for the roofing installation, electrical work, and
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
W912HN-09-X-1813
the roofing manufacturer's technical representative. Conflicts among those

attending the preroofing conference shall be resolved and confirmed in
writing before roofing work, including associated work, is begun. Prepare
written minutes of the preroofing conference and submit to the Contracting
Officer.
1.6.2
Manufacturer
The SSMRS shall be the product of a metal roofing industry - recognized

manufacturer who has been in the practice of manufacturing SSMRS for a
period of not less than 5 years and who has been involved in at least 5
projects similar in size and complexity to this project.
1.6.3
Manufacturer's Technical Representative
The representative shall have authorization from manufacturer to approve

field changes and be thoroughly familiar with the products and with
installations in the geographical area where construction will take place.
The manufacturer's representative shall be an employee of the manufacturer
with at least 5 years experience in installing the roof system. The
representative shall be available to perform field inspections and attend
meetings as required herein, and as requested by the Contracting Officer.
1.6.4
Installer's Qualifications
The roofing system installer shall be factory-trained, approved by the

metal roofing system manufacturer to install the system, and shall have a
minimum of three years experience as an approved applicator with that
manufacturer. The applicator shall have applied five installations of
similar size and scope as this project within the previous 3 years.
1.6.5
Single Source
Roofing panels, clips, closures, and other accessories shall be standard

products of the same manufacturer; shall be the latest design by the
manufacturer; and shall have been designed by the manufacturer to operate
as a complete system for the intended use.
1.6.6
Laboratory Tests For Panel Finish
The term "appearance of base metal" refers to the metal coating on steel.
Panels shall meet the following test requirements:
a.
Formability Test: When subjected to a 180 degree bend over a 1/8 inch
diameter mandrel in accordance with ASTM D522, exterior coating film
shall show only slight microchecking and no loss of adhesion.
b.
Accelerated Weathering Test: Withstand a weathering test for a minimum

of 2000 hours in accordance with ASTM G 152 and ASTM G 153, Method 1
without cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of the
protective coating, or corrosion of the base metal. Protective coating
that can be readily removed from the base metal with a penknife blade
or similar instrument shall be considered to indicate loss of adhesion.
c.
Chalking Resistance: After the 2000-hour weatherometer test, exterior

coating shall not chalk greater than No. 8 rating when measured in
accordance with ASTM D4214 test procedures.
d.
Color Change Test:

SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
W912HN-09-X-1813
After the 2000 -hour weatherometer test, exterior coating color change
shall not exceed 2 NBS units when measured in accordance with ASTM D2244
test procedure.
e.
Salt Spray Test: Withstand a salt spray test for a minimum of 1000
hours in accordance with ASTM B117, including the scribe requirement in
the test. Immediately upon removal of the panel from the test, the
coating shall receive a rating of 8, few blisters in field as
determined by ASTM D714; and an average rating of 7, 1/16 inch failure
at scribe, as determined by ASTM D1654. Rating Schedule No. 1.
f.
Abrasion Resistance Test for Color Coating: When subjected to the

falling sand test in accordance with ASTM D968, coating system shall
withstand a minimum of 100 liters of sand per mil thickness before
appearance of base metal.
g.
Humidity Test: When subjected to a humidity cabinet test in accordance

with ASTM D2247 for 1000 hours, a scored panel shall show no signs of
blistering, cracking, creepage, or corrosion.
h.
Gloss Test: The gloss of the finish shall be 30 plus or minus 5 at an

angle of 60 degrees, when measured in accordance with ASTM D523.
i.
Glare Resistance Test:
Surfaces of panels that will be exposed to the exterior shall have a

specular reflectance of not more than 10 when measured in accordance
with ASTM D523 at an angle of 85 degrees. Specular reflectance may be
obtained with striations or embossing. Requirements specified under
"Formability Test" will be waived if necessary to conform to this
requirement.
1.7
WARRANTY
Furnish manufacturer's no-dollar-limit materials and workmanship warranty

for the roofing system. The warranty period shall be not less than 20
years from the date of Government acceptance of the work. The warranty
shall be issued directly to the Government. The warranty shall provide
that if within the warranty period the metal roofing system becomes
non-watertight or shows evidence of corrosion, perforation, rupture or
excess weathering due to deterioration of the roofing system resulting from
defective materials or installed workmanship the repair or replacement of
the defective materials and correction of the defective workmanship shall
be the responsibility of the roofing system manufacturer. Repairs that
become necessary because of defective materials and workmanship while
roofing is under warranty shall be performed within 7 days after
notification, unless additional time is approved by the Contracting
Officer. Failure to perform repairs within the specified period of time
will constitute grounds for having the repairs performed by others and the
cost billed to the manufacturer. The Contractor shall also provide a 2
year contractor installation warranty.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Deliver, store, and handle preformed panels, bulk roofing products and
other manufactured items in a manner to prevent damage or deformation.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
1.8.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
Delivery
Provide adequate packaging to protect materials during shipment. Crated

materials shall not be uncrated until ready for use, except for inspection.
Immediately upon arrival of materials at the jobsite, inspect materials for
damage, dampness, and staining. Damaged or permanently stained materials
that cannot be restored to like-new condition shall be replaced with
satisfactory material. If materials are wet, remove the moisture and
re-stack and protect the panels until used.
1.8.2
Storage
Stack materials on platforms or pallets and cover with tarpaulins or other

suitable weathertight covering which prevents water trapping or
condensation. Store materials so that water which might have accumulated
during transit or storage will drain off. Do not store the panels in
contact with materials that might cause staining, such as mud, lime,
cement, fresh concrete or chemicals. Protect stored panels from wind
damage.
1.8.3
Handling
Handle material carefully to avoid damage to surfaces, edges and ends.

PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
ROOFING PANELS
Panels shall have interlocking ribs for securing adjacent sheets. System
for securing the roof covering to structural framing members shall be
concealed clip fastening system with no fasteners penetrating the panels
except at the ridge or eave, rakes, penetrations, and end laps. Backing
plates and ends of panels at end laps shall be predrilled or prepunched;
factory prepare ends of panels to be lapped by trimming part of seam,
die-setting or swaging ends of panels. Length of sheets shall be
sufficient to cover the entire length of any unbroken roof slope when such
slope is 30 feet or less. When length of run exceeds 30 feet, each sheet
in the run shall extend over two or more spans. Sheets longer than 30 feet
may be furnished if approved by the Contracting Officer. Width of sheets
shall provide not less than 12 inches of coverage in place. Height of
corrugations of adjacent roof sheets shall be not less than 1.75 inches
(nominal). Make provisions for expansion and contraction at either ridge
or eave, consistent with the type of system to be used. Panels from coil
stock shall be formed without warping, waviness or ripples not part of the
panel profile and shall be free of damage to the finish coating system.
2.1.1
Material
Zinc-coated steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation or

aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel conforming to ASTM A792/A792M, AZ 55
coating. Minimum thickness to be 0.023 inch thick (24 gage) minimum except
when mid field of roof is subject to design wind uplift pressures of 60 psf
or greater, entire roof system shall have a minimum thickness of 0.030 inch
(22 gage). Prior to shipment, treat mill finish panels with a passivating
chemical and oil to inhibit the formation of oxide corrosion products.
Dry, retreat, and re-oil panels that have become wet during shipment or
storage but have not started to oxidize.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
2.1.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Texture
Smooth with raised intermediate ribs for added stiffness.

2.1.3
Finish
Factory color finish.

2.1.3.1
Provide factory applied, thermally cured coating to exterior and interior

of metal roof and wall panels and metal accessories. Provide exterior
finish top coat of 70 percent resin polyvinylidene fluoride with not less
than 0.8 mil dry film thickness. Provide exterior primer standard with
panel manufacturer with not less than 0.8 mil dry film thickness. Interior
finish shall consist of the same coating and dry film thickness as the
exterior coating. Provide exterior coating meeting test requirements
specified below. Tests shall have been performed on the same factory
finish and thickness provided. Provide clear factory edge coating on all
factory cut or unfinished edges.
2.2
INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS
Fabricate panel subgirts, subpurlins, T-bars, Z-bars and tracks from

galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, G90, Grade D (16 gage and
heavier), Grade A (18 gage and lighter); or steel conforming to
ASTM A36/A36M, ASTM A1011/A1011M, or ASTM A1008/A1008M prime painted with
zinc-rich primer. Size, shape, thickness and capacity as required to meet
the load, insulation thickness and deflection criteria specified.
2.3
ATTACHMENT CLIPS
Fabricate clips from ASTM A1011/A1011M, or ASTM A1008/A1008M steel hot-dip

galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G 90, or Series 300
stainless steel. Size, shape, thickness and capacity as required to meet
the load, insulation thickness and deflection criteria specified.
2.4
ACCESSORIES
Sheet metal flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips,

pre-formed crickets, caps, equipment curbs, and other similar sheet metal
accessories used in conjunction with preformed metal panels shall be of the
same material as used for the panels. Provide metal accessories with a
factory color finish to match the roofing panels, except that such items
which will be concealed after installation may be provided without the
finish if they are stainless steel. Metal shall be of a thickness not less
than that used for the panels. Thermal spacer blocks and other thermal
barriers at concealed clip fasteners shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer except that wood spacer blocks are not allowed.
2.4.1
2.4.1.1
Closures
Rib Closures
Corrosion resisting steel, closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber,

neoprene or polyvinyl chloride pre-molded to match configuration of rib
opening. Material for closures shall not absorb water.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
2.4.1.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Ridge Closures
Metal-clad foam or metal closure with foam secondary closure matching panel
configuration for installation on surface of roof panel between panel ribs
at ridge and headwall roof panel flashing conditions and terminations.
Foam material shall not absorb water.
2.4.2
Fasteners
Zinc-coated steel, corrosion resisting steel, zinc cast head, or nylon

capped steel, type and size specified below or as otherwise approved for
the applicable requirements. Design the fastening system to withstand the
design loads specified. Exposed fasteners shall be gasketed or have
gasketed washers on the exterior side of the covering to waterproof the
penetration. Washer material shall be compatible with the covering; have a
minimum diameter of 3/8 inch for structural connections; and gasketed
portion of fasteners or washers shall be neoprene or other equally durable
elastomeric material approximately 1/8 inch thick.
2.4.2.1
Screws
Not smaller than No. 14 diameter if self-tapping type and not smaller than
No. 12 diameter if self-drilling and self-tapping.
2.4.2.2
Bolts
Not smaller than 1/4 inch diameter, shouldered or plain shank as required,
with proper nuts.
2.4.2.3
Automatic End-Welded Studs
Automatic end-welded studs shall be shouldered type with a shank diameter

of not smaller than 3/16 inch and cap or nut for holding covering against
the shoulder.
2.4.2.4
Explosive Driven Fasteners
Fasteners for use with explosive actuated tools shall have a shank diameter
of not smaller than 0.145 inch with a shank length of not smaller than 1/2
inch for fastening to steel and not smaller than one inch for fastening to
concrete.
2.4.2.5
Rivets
Blind rivets shall be stainless steel with 1/8 inch nominal diameter shank.
Rivets shall be threaded stem type if used for other than the fastening of
trim. Rivets with hollow stems shall have closed ends.
2.4.3
Sealants
Elastomeric type containing no oil or asphalt. Exposed sealant shall cure

to a rubberlike consistency. Concealed sealant shall be the non-hardening
type. Seam sealant shall be factory-applied, non-skinning, non-drying, and
shall conform to the roofing manufacturer's recommendations.
Silicone-based sealants shall not be used in contact with finished metal
panels and components unless approved otherwise by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
2.4.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
GASKETS AND INSULATING COMPOUNDS
Nonabsorptive and suitable for insulating contact points of incompatible

materials. Insulating compounds shall be nonrunning after drying.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine surfaces to receive standing seam metal roofing and flashing.

Ensure that surfaces are plumb and true, clean, even, smooth, as dry and
free from defects and projections which might affect the installation.
3.2
3.2.1
PROTECTION FROM CONTACT WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

Cementitious Materials
Paint metal surfaces which will be in contact with mortar, concrete, or

other masonry materials with one coat of alkali-resistant coating such as
heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.2.2
Contact with Wood
Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material

subject to wetting, seal joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of
3.3
INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with the approved manufacturer's erection

instructions, shop drawings, and diagrams. Panels shall be in full and
firm contact with attachment clips. Where prefinished panels are cut in
the field, or where any of the factory applied coverings or coatings are
abraded or damaged in handling or installation, they shall, after necessary
repairs have been made with material of the same color as the weather
coating, be approved before being installed. Seal completely openings
through panels. Correct defects or errors in the materials. Replace
materials which cannot be corrected in an approved manner with nondefective
materials. Provide molded closure strips where indicated and where
necessary to provide weathertight construction. Use shims as required to
ensure attachment clip line is true. Use a spacing gage at each row of
panels to ensure that panel width is not stretched or shortened.
3.3.1
Roof Panels
Apply roofing panels with the standing seams parallel to the slope of the
roof. Provide roofing panels in longest practical lengths from ridge to
eaves (top to eaves on shed roofs), with no transverse joints except at the
junction of ventilators, curbs, skylights, chimneys, and similar openings.
Install flashing to assure positive water drainage away from roof
penetrations. Locate panel end laps such that fasteners do not engage
supports or otherwise restrain the longitudinal thermal movement of
panels. Form field-formed seam type system seams in the field with an
automatic mechanical seamer approved by the manufacturer. Attach panels to
the structure with concealed clips incorporated into panel seams. Clip
attachment shall allow roof to move independently of the structure, except
at fixed points as indicated.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
3.3.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Flashings
Provide flashing, related closures and accessories as indicated and as

necessary to provide a weathertight installation. Install flashing to
ensure positive water drainage away from roof penetrations. Flash and seal
the roof at the ridge, eaves and rakes, and projections through the roof.
Place closure strips, flashing, and sealing material in an approved manner
that will assure complete weathertightness. Details of installation which
are not indicated shall be in accordance with the SMACNA 1793, panel
manufacturer's approved printed instructions and details, or the approved
shop drawings. Allow for expansion and contraction of flashing.
3.3.3
Flashing Fasteners
Fastener spacings shall be in accordance with the panel manufacturer's

recommendations and as necessary to withstand the design loads indicated.
Install fasteners in roof valleys as recommended by the manufacturer of the
panels. Install fasteners in straight lines within a tolerance of 1/2 inch
in the length of a bay. Drive exposed penetrating type fasteners normal to
the surface and to a uniform depth to seat gasketed washers properly and
drive so as not to damage factory applied coating. Exercise extreme care
in drilling pilot holes for fastenings to keep drills perpendicular and
centered. Do not drill through sealant tape. After drilling, remove metal
filings and burrs from holes prior to installing fasteners and washers.
Torque used in applying fasteners shall not exceed that recommended by the
manufacturer. Remove panels deformed or otherwise damaged by over-torqued
fastenings, and provide new panels.
3.3.4
Rib and Ridge Closure/Closure Strips
Set closure/closure strips in joint sealant material and apply sealant to

mating surfaces prior to adding panel.
3.4
PROTECTION OF APPLIED ROOFING
Do not permit storing, walking, wheeling, and trucking directly on applied

roofing materials. Provide temporary walkways, runways, and platforms of
smooth clean boards or planks as necessary to avoid damage to applied
roofing materials, and to distribute weight to conform to indicated live
load limits of roof construction.
3.5
CLEANING
Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove metal

shavings, filings, nails, bolts, and wires from roofs. Remove grease and
oil films, excess sealants, handling marks, contamination from steel wool,
fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean. Exposed metal
surfaces shall be free of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, solder or
weld marks and damage to the finish coating.
3.6
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD INSPECTION
Manufacturer's technical representative shall visit the site as necessary

during the installation process to assure panels, flashings, and other
components are being installed in a satisfactory manner. Manufacturer's
technical representative shall perform a field inspection during the first
20 squares of roof panel installation and at substantial completion prior
to issuance of warranty, as a minimum, and as otherwise requested by the
Contracting Officer. Additional inspections shall not exceed one for 100
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
W912HN-09-X-1813
squares of total roof area with the exception that follow-up inspections of
previously noted deficiencies or application errors shall be performed as
requested by the Contracting Officer. Each inspection visit shall include
a review of the entire installation to date. After each inspection, a
report, signed by the manufacturer's technical representative, shall be
submitted to the Contracting Officer noting the overall quality of work,
deficiencies and any other concerns, and recommended corrective actions in
detail. Notify Contracting Officer a minimum of 2 working days prior to
site visit by manufacturer's technical representative.
3.7
COMPLETED WORK
Completed work shall be plumb and true without oil canning, dents, ripples,
abrasion, rust, staining, or other damage detrimental to the performance or
aesthetics of the completed roof assembly.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
3.8
W912HN-09-X-1813
FORM ONE
FORM 1
PREFORMED STEEL STANDING SEAM ROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1.
Contract Number:
2.
Building Number & Location:
3.
NAVFAC Specification Number:
4.
Deck/Substrate Type:
5.
Slopes of Deck/Roof Structure:
6.
Insulation Type & Thickness:
7.
Insulation Manufacturer:
8.
Vapor Retarder:
9.
Vapor Retarder Type:
( )Yes
( )No
10. Preformed Steel Standing Seam Roofing Description:

a.
b.
e.
Manufacturer (Name, Address, & Phone No.):

Product Name:
c. Width:
d. Gage:
Base Metal:
f. Method of Attachment:
11. Repair of Color Coating:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Coating Manufacturer (Name, Address & Phone No.):

Product Name:
Surface Preparation:
Recoating Formula:
Application Method:
12. Statement of Compliance or Exception:_________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
13. Date Roof Completed:
14. Warranty Period:
From_______________
To_______________
15. Roofing Contractor (Name & Address):

16. Prime Contractor (Name & Address):
Contractor's Signature _________________________
Date:
Inspector's Signature
Date:
_________________________
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 07 92 00A
*1 JOINT SEALANTS
01/07
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

ASTM C920

ASTM D1056

Rubber
ASTM D2452

Extrudability of Oil- and Resin-Base
Caulking Compounds
ASTM D2453

Shrinkage and Tenacity of Oil- and
Resin-Base Caulking Compounds
1.2
SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Sealants
Primers
Bond breakers
Backstops
Manufacturer's descriptive data including storage requirements,
shelf life, curing time, instructions for mixing and application,
and primer data (if required). Provide a copy of the Material
Safety Data Sheet for each solvent, primer or sealant material.
SD-07 Certificates
Sealant
Certificates of compliance stating that the materials conform to
SECTION 07 92 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
the specified requirements.

1.3
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Apply sealant when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 90 degrees F.

1.4
Deliver materials to the job site in unopened manufacturers' external

shipping containers, with brand names, date of manufacture, color, and
material designation clearly marked thereon. Label elastomeric sealant
containers to identify type, class, grade, and use. Carefully handle and
store materials to prevent inclusion of foreign materials or subjection to
sustained temperatures exceeding 90 degrees F or less than 0 degrees F.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1
Compatibility with Substrate
Verify that each of the sealants are compatible for use with joint
substrates.
1.5.2
Joint Tolerance
Provide joint tolerances in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions.
1.5.3
Mock-Up
Project personnel is responsible for installing sealants in mock-up

prepared by other trades, using materials and techniques approved for use
on the project.
1.6
SPECIAL WARRANTY
Guarantee sealant joint against failure of sealant and against water

penetration through each sealed joint for five years.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
SEALANTS
Provide sealant that has been tested and found suitable for the substrates
to which it will be applied.
2.1.1
Interior Sealant
Provide ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 12.5..

color(s) of sealant for the following:
LOCATION
Location(s) and
COLOR
a.
Small voids between walls or partitions and

door frames and similar items.
Match adjacent
wall color
b.
Perimeter of frames at doors, windows,

and access panels which adjoin exposed
interior concrete and masonry surfaces.
Match adjacent
wall color
SECTION 07 92 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
LOCATION
COLOR
Interior locations, not otherwise indicated
Match adacent
or specified, where small voids exist between wall color
materials specified to be painted.
c.
2.1.2
Exterior Sealant
For joints in vertical surfaces, provide ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS,
Class 25, Use NT. For joints in horizontal surfaces, provide ASTM C920,
Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Provide location(s) and color(s) of
sealant as follows:
LOCATION
COLOR
a.
Joints and recesses formed where frames

and subsills of doors, louvers,
and vents or metal frames.
Use sealant at both exterior
and interior surfaces of exterior wall
penetrations.
Match adjacent
wall color
e.
Expansion and control joints.
Gray
f.
Interior face of expansion joints in

Gray
exterior concrete or masonry walls where
metal expansion joint covers are not required.
g.
Voids where items pass through exterior

walls.
Match adjacent
wall
i.
Metal-to-metal joints where sealant is

indicated or specified.
Match adjacent
wall color
j.
Joints between ends of gravel stops, fascias,

copings, and adjacent walls.
Match adjacent
wall color
color
2.1.3
Floor Joint Sealant
ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T.

color(s) of sealant as follows:
LOCATION
a.
b.
2.2
Provide location(s) and
COLOR
Seats of metal thresholds for

exterior doors.
Gray
Control and expansion joints in floors,

slabs, and walkways.
Gray
PRIMERS
Provide a nonstaining, quick-drying type and consistency recommended by the

sealant manufacturer for the particular application.
2.3
BOND BREAKERS
Provide the type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer to

prevent adhesion of the sealant to backing or to bottom of the joint.
SECTION 07 92 00
2.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
BACKSTOPS
Provide glass fiber roving or neoprene, butyl, polyurethane, or

polyethylene foams free from oil or other staining elements as recommended
by sealant manufacturer. Provide 25 to 33 percent oversized backing for
closed cell and 40 to 50 percent oversized backing for open cell material,
unless otherwise indicated. Make backstop material compatible with
sealant. Do not use oakum and other types of absorptive materials as
backstops.
2.4.1
Rubber
Conform to ASTM D1056, Type 2, closed cell, Class A , Grade , round cross
section for cellular rubber sponge backing.
2.5
CAULKING
Conform to ASTM D2452 and ASTM D2453, Type 2, for

caulking.
2.6
Oil- and resin-based
CLEANING SOLVENTS
Provide type(s) recommended by the sealant manufacturer except for aluminum

and bronze surfaces that will be in contact with sealant.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
SURFACE PREPARATION
Clean surfaces from dirt frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint,
or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion.
Remove oil and grease with solvent. Surfaces must be wiped dry with clean
cloths. When resealing an existing joint, remove existing caulk or sealant
prior to applying new sealant. For surface types not listed below, contact
sealant manufacturer for specific recommendations.
3.1.1
Steel Surfaces
Remove loose mill scale by sandblasting or, if sandblasting is impractical

or would damage finish work, scraping and wire brushing. Remove protective
coatings by sandblasting or using a residue-free solvent.
3.1.2
Aluminum or Bronze Surfaces
Remove temporary protective coatings from surfaces that will be in contact

with sealant. When masking tape is used as a protective coating, remove
tape and any residual adhesive just prior to sealant application. For
removing protective coatings and final cleaning, use nonstaining solvents
recommended by the manufacturer of the item(s) containing aluminum or
bronze surfaces.
3.1.3
Concrete and Masonry Surfaces
Where surfaces have been treated with curing compounds, oil, or other such
materials, remove materials by sandblasting or wire brushing. Remove
laitance, efflorescence and loose mortar from the joint cavity.
SECTION 07 92 00
3.1.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Wood Surfaces
Keep wood surfaces to be in contact with sealants free of splinters and

sawdust or other loose particles.
3.2
SEALANT PREPARATION
Do not add liquids, solvents, or powders to the sealant. Mix

multicomponent elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3
3.3.1
a.
APPLICATION
Joint Width-To-Depth Ratios
Acceptable Ratios:
JOINT WIDTH
JOINT DEPTH
Minimum
Maximum
For metal, glass, or other

nonporous surfaces:
1/4 inch (minimum)
over 1/4 inch
1/4 inch
1/2 of
width
1/4 inch
Equal to
width
1/4 inch (minimum)

Over 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch
1/4 inch
1/4 inch
1/4 inch
Equal to
width
Over 1/2 inch to 2 inch

Over 2 inch.
1/2 inch
5/8 inch
(As recommended by sealant
manufacturer)
For wood, or concrete:
b.
3.3.2
Unacceptable Ratios: Where joints of acceptable width-to-depth ratios

have not been provided, clean out joints to acceptable depths and grind
or cut to acceptable widths without damage to the adjoining work.
Grinding is not required on metal surfaces.
Masking Tape
Place masking tape on the finish surface on one or both sides of a joint
cavity to protect adjacent finish surfaces from primer or sealant smears.
Remove masking tape within 10 minutes after joint has been filled and
tooled.
3.3.3
Backstops
Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes. Tightly pack the back or
bottom of joint cavities with backstop material to provide a joint of the
depth specified. Install backstops in the following locations:
a.
Where indicated.
b.
Where backstop is not indicated but joint cavities exceed the

acceptable maximum depths specified in paragraph entitled, "Joint
SECTION 07 92 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Width-to-Depth Ratios".
3.3.4
Primer
Immediately prior to application of the sealant, clean out loose particles

from joints. Where recommended by sealant manufacturer, apply primer to
joints in concrete masonry units, wood, and other porous surfaces in
accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply primer
to exposed finish surfaces.
3.3.5
Bond Breaker
Provide bond breakers to the back or bottom of joint cavities, as

recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type of joint and sealant
used, to prevent sealant from adhering to these surfaces. Carefully apply
the bond breaker to avoid contamination of adjoining surfaces or breaking
bond with surfaces other than those covered by the bond breaker.
3.3.6
Sealants
Provide a sealant compatible with the material(s) to which it is applied.

Do not use a sealant that has exceeded shelf life or has jelled and can not
be discharged in a continuous flow from the gun. Apply the sealant in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions with a gun having a
nozzle that fits the joint width. Force sealant into joints to fill the
joints solidly without air pockets. Tool sealant after application to
ensure adhesion. Make sealant uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles. Upon
completion of sealant application, roughen partially filled or unfilled
joints, apply sealant, and tool smooth as specified. Apply sealer over the
sealant when and as specified by the sealant manufacturer.
3.4
3.4.1
PROTECTION AND CLEANING

Protection
Protect areas adjacent to joints from sealant smears. Masking tape may be
used for this purpose if removed 5 to 10 minutes after the joint is filled.
3.4.2
Final Cleaning
Upon completion of sealant application, remove remaining smears and stains

and leave the work in a clean and neat condition.
a.
Masonry and Other Porous Surfaces: Immediately scrape off fresh

sealant that has been smeared on masonry and rub clean with a solvent
as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Allow excess sealant to
cure for 24 hour then remove by wire brushing or sanding.
b.
Metal and Other Non-Porous Surfaces:

solvent-moistened cloth.
Remove excess sealant with a
SECTION 07 92 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 08 11 13A
*1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
02/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
AWS D1.1/D1.1M

ASTM A653/A653M

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A879/A879M

Sheet, zinc Coated by the Electrolytic
Process for Applications Requiring
Designation of the Coating Mass on Each
Surface
ASTM A924/A924M

ASTM C578
(2011a) Standard Specification for Rigid,

Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
ASTM C591
(2011) Standard Specification for Unfaced

Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C612
(2010) Mineral Fiber Block and Board

Thermal Insulation
ASTM D2863
(2010) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen

Concentration to Support Candle-Like
Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)

ANSI/BHMA A156.115
(2006) Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors

and Steel Frames

NAAMM HMMA HMM
(1999; R2000) Hollow Metal Manual
SECTION 08 11 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)

SDI/DOOR 111
(2009) Recommended Selection and Usage

Guide for Standard Steel Doors, Frames and
Accessories
SDI/DOOR 113
(2001; R2006) Standard Practice for

Determining the Steady State Thermal
Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame
Assemblies
SDI/DOOR A250.11
(2001) Recommended Erection Instructions

for Steel Frames
SDI/DOOR A250.6
(2003; R2009) Recommended Practice for

Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel
Doors and Frames
SDI/DOOR A250.8
(2003; R2008) Recommended Specifications

for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
1.2
SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors; G
Frames; G
Accessories
Weatherstripping
Show elevations, construction details, metal gages, hardware
provisions, method of glazing, and installation details.
Schedule of doors; G
Schedule of frames; G
Submit door and frame locations.
SD-03 Product Data
Doors; G
Frames; G
Accessories
Weatherstripping
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for doors, frames,
SECTION 08 11 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
and accessories. Include data and details on door construction,

panel (internal) reinforcement, insulation, and door edge
construction. When "custom hollow metal doors" are provided in
lieu of "standard steel doors," provide additional details and
data sufficient for comparison to SDI/DOOR A250.8 requirements.
SD-04 Samples
Factory-applied enamel finish; G
Where colors are not indicated, submit manufacturer's standard
colors and patterns for selection.
1.3
Deliver doors, frames, and accessories undamaged and with protective

wrappings or packaging. Strap knock-down frames in bundles. Provide
temporary steel spreaders securely fastened to the bottom of each welded
frame. Store doors and frames on platforms under cover in clean, dry,
ventilated, and accessible locations, with 1/4 inch airspace between
doors. Remove damp or wet packaging immediately and wipe affected surfaces
dry. Replace damaged materials with new.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STANDARD STEEL DOORS
SDI/DOOR A250.8, except as specified otherwise. Prepare doors to receive

door hardware as indicated on drawings. Undercut where indicated.
Exterior doors shall have top edge closed flush and sealed to prevent water
intrusion. Doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2.1.1
Classification - Level, Performance, Model
2.1.1.1
Maximum Duty Doors
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 4, physical performance Level A, Model with core

construction as required by the manufacturer for indicated exterior doors,
of size(s) and design(s) indicated. Where vertical stiffener cores are
required, the space between the stiffeners shall be filled with mineral
board insulation. Provide Level 4 where indicated on the drawings.
2.2
CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL DOORS
Provide custom hollow metal doors where nonstandard steel doors are
indicated. At the Contractor's option, custom hollow metal doors may be
provided in lieu of standard steel doors. Door size(s), design(s),
materials, construction, gages, and finish shall be as specified for
standard steel doors and shall comply with the requirement of NAAMM HMMA HMM.
Fill all spaces in doors with insulation. Close top and bottom edges with
steel channels not lighter than 16 gage. Close tops of exterior doors
flush with an additional channel and seal to prevent water intrusion.
Prepare doors to receive hardware specified on the drawings. Doors shall be
1-3/4 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
INSULATION CORES
Insulated cores shall be of type specified, and provide an apparent

U-factor of .48 in accordance with SDI/DOOR 113 and shall conform to:
SECTION 08 11 13
2.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
a.
Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Foam: ASTM C591, Type I or II,

foamed-in-place or in board form, with oxygen index of not less
than 22 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D2863; or
b.
Rigid Polystyrene Foam Board:
c.
Mineral board:
ASTM C578, Type I or II; or
ASTM C612, Type I.
STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 4, except as otherwise specified. Form frames to

sizes and shapes indicated, with welded corners. Provide steel frames for
doors, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4.1
Welded Frames
Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints. Mechanically interlock or

continuously weld stops and rabbets. Grind welds smooth.
Weld frames in accordance with the recommended practice of the Structural
Welding Code Sections 1 through 6, AWS D1.1/D1.1M and in accordance with
the practice specified by the producer of the metal being welded.
2.4.2
Stops and Beads
Form stops and beads from 20 gage steel. Provide for glazed and other
openings in standard steel frames. Secure beads to frames with oval-head,
countersunk Phillips self-tapping sheet metal screws or concealed clips and
fasteners. Space fasteners approximately 12 to 16 inch on center. Miter
molded shapes at corners. Butt or miter square or rectangular beads at
corners.
2.4.3
Anchors
Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide

steel anchors, zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not
lighter than 18 gage.
2.4.3.1
Wall Anchors
Provide at least three anchors for each jamb. For frames which are more
than 7.5 feet in height, provide one additional anchor for each jamb for
each additional 2.5 feet or fraction thereof.
a.
Masonry: Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps

or 3/16 inch diameter steel wire, adjustable or T-shaped;
b.
Stud partitions: Weld or otherwise securely fasten anchors to

backs of frames. Design anchors to be fastened to closed steel
studs with sheet metal screws, and to open steel studs by wiring
or welding;
c.
Completed openings: Secure frames to previously placed concrete

or masonry with expansion bolts in accordance with SDI/DOOR 111
2.4.3.2
Floor Anchors
Provide floor anchors drilled for 3/8 inch anchor bolts at bottom of each
SECTION 08 11 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
jamb member.
2.5
WEATHERSTRIPPING
As specified on the drawings.

2.6
HARDWARE PREPARATION
Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gages as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.6.

Drill and tap doors and frames to receive finish hardware. Prepare doors
and frames for hardware in accordance with the applicable requirements of
SDI/DOOR A250.8 and SDI/DOOR A250.6. For additional requirements refer to
ANSI/BHMA A156.115. Drill and tap for surface-applied hardware at the
project site. Build additional reinforcing for surface-applied hardware
into the door at the factory. Locate hardware in accordance with the
requirements of SDI/DOOR A250.8, as applicable. Punch door frames , with
the exception of frames that will have weatherstripping gasketing, to
receive a minimum of two rubber or vinyl door silencers on lock side of
single doors and one silencer for each leaf at heads of double doors. Set
lock strikes out to provide clearance for silencers.
2.7
2.7.1
FINISHES
Factory-Primed Finish
All surfaces of doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned, chemically

treated and factory primed with a rust inhibiting coating as specified in
SDI/DOOR A250.8, or paintable A25 galvannealed steel without primer. Where
coating is removed by welding, apply touchup of factory primer.
2.7.2
Hot-Dip Zinc-Coated and Factory-Primed Finish
Fabricate exterior scheduled doors and frames from hot dipped zinc coated
steel, alloyed type, that complies with ASTM A924/A924Mand ASTM A653/A653M.
The coating weight shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements for
coatings having 0.4 ounces per square foot, total both sides, i.e., A40.
Repair damaged zinc-coated surfaces by the application of zinc dust paint.
Thoroughly clean and chemically treat to insure maximum paint adhesion.
Factory prime as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.
2.7.3
Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Anchors and Accessories
Provide electrolytically deposited zinc-coated steel in accordance with

ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Quality, Coating Class A. Phosphate treat and
factory prime zinc-coated surfaces as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.
2.8
FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP
Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance,
and free from defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp,
and buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight, and true, with
joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Dress exposed
welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame sections for use with
the wall construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well formed and in
true alignment. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
SECTION 08 11 13
PART 3
3.1
3.1.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Frames
Set frames in accordance with SDI/DOOR A250.11. Plumb, align, and brace
securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with
expansion bolts or powder-actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall
anchors to adjoining construction.
3.1.2
Doors
Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.

After erection and glazing, clean and adjust hardware.
3.2
PROTECTION
Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames
prior to completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as
directed. Wire brush rusted frames until rust is removed. Clean
thoroughly. Apply an all-over coat of rust-inhibitive paint of the same
type used for shop coat.
3.3
CLEANING
Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly.

Remove mastic smears and other unsightly marks.
SECTION 08 11 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 08 91 00A
*1 METAL WALL LOUVERS
05/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)
AMCA 500-D
(2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing

Dampers for Rating
AMCA 511
(2010) Certified Ratings Program for Air

Control Devices
AAMA 2603
(2002) Voluntary Specification,

Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings
on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

ASTM B209
1.2

and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Wall louvers
SD-03 Product Data
Metal Wall Louvers
SD-04 Samples
Wall louvers; G
1.3
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Carefully store

materials off the ground to provide proper ventilation, drainage, and
protection against dampness. Louvers shall be free from nicks, scratches,
SECTION 08 91 00
and blemishes.
1.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
DETAIL DRAWINGS
Show all information necessary for fabrication and installation of wall

louvers. Indicate materials, sizes, thicknesses, fastenings, and profiles.
1.5
COLOR SAMPLES
Colors of finishes for wall louvers and door louvers shall closely
approximate colors indicated. Where color is not indicated, submit the
manufacturer's standard colors to the Contracting Officer for selection.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
2.1.1
Aluminum Sheet
ASTM B209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming.
2.2
METAL WALL LOUVERS
Weather resistant type, with bird screens and made to withstand a wind load
of not less than 30 pounds per square foot. Wall louvers shall bear the
AMCA certified ratings program seal for air performance and water
penetration in accordance with AMCA 500-D and AMCA 511. The rating shall
show a water penetration of 0.20 or less ounce per square foot of free area
at a free velocity of 800 feet per minute.
2.2.1
Formed Metal Louvers
Formed of steel sheet not thinner than 16 U.S. gage, or aluminum sheet not
less than 0.08 inch thick.
2.2.2
Screens and Frames
For aluminum louvers, provide 1/2 inch square mesh, 14 or 16 gage aluminum
or 1/4 inch square mesh, 16 gage aluminum bird screening. Mount screens in
removable, rewirable frames of same material and finish as the louvers.
2.3
FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES
Provide stainless steel screws and fasteners for aluminum louvers and
zinc-coated or stainless steel screws and fasteners for steel louvers.
Provide other accessories as required for complete and proper installation.
2.4
FINISHES
2.4.1
Aluminum
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be factory finished with an organic

coating. Color shall be as indicated. Louvers for each building shall
have the same finish.
2.4.1.1
Organic Coating
Clean and prime exposed aluminum surfaces. Provide a baked enamel finish
conforming to AAMA 2603, with total dry film thickness not less than 0.8 mil,
SECTION 08 91 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
color as indicated on the drawings.

PART 3
3.1
3.1.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Wall Louvers
Install using stops or moldings, flanges, strap anchors, or jamb fasteners

as appropriate for the wall construction and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.2
Screens and Frames
Attach frames to louvers with screws or bolts.

3.2
3.2.1
PROTECTION FROM CONTACT OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

Copper or Copper-Bearing Alloys
Paint copper or copper-bearing alloys in contact with dissimilar metal with

heavy-bodied bituminous paint or separate with inert membrane.
3.2.2
Aluminum
Where aluminum contacts metal other than zinc, paint the dissimilar metal
with a primer and two coats of aluminum paint.
3.2.3
Metal
Paint metal in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials

with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.2.4
Wood
Paint wood or other absorptive materials that may become repeatedly wet and
in contact with metal with two coats of aluminum paint or a coat of
SECTION 08 91 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 09 90 00A
*1 PAINTS AND COATINGS
05/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)
ACGIH 0100
(2001; Supplements 2002-2008)

Documentation of the Threshold Limit
Values and Biological Exposure Indices

ASTM D235
(2002; R 2007) Mineral Spirits (Petroleum

Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent)
ASTM D4444
(2008) Use and Calibration of Hand-Held

Moisture Meters
ASTM D523

Gloss
ASTM D6386
(2010) Standard Practice for Preparation

of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron
and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces
for Painting

MPI 107
(Oct 2009) Rust Inhibitive Primer

(Water-Based)
MPI 23
(Oct 2009) Surface Tolerant Metal Primer
MPI 47
(Oct 2009) Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 5
MPI 48
(Oct 2009) Interior Alkyd, Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 6
MPI 79
(Oct 2009) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal

Primer
MPI 9
(Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd, Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 6
MPI 94
(Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 5
SECTION 09 90 00
W912HN-09-X-1813

SSPC PA Guide 3
(1982; E 1995) A Guide to Safety in Paint

Application
SSPC QP 1
(1998; E 2004) Standard Procedure for

Evaluating Painting Contractors (Field
Application to Complex Industrial
Structures)
SSPC SP 1
(1982; E 2004) Solvent Cleaning
SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2
(2007) Near-White Blast Cleaning
SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5
(2002) Surface Preparation and Cleaning of

Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating
SSPC SP 2
(1982; E 2004) Hand Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 3
SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3
SSPC SP 7/NACE No.4
(2007) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
SSPC VIS 1
(2002; e 2004) Guide and Reference

Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by
Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning
SSPC VIS 3
(2004) Guide and Reference Photographs for

Steel Surfaces Prepared by Hand and Power
Tool Cleaning
SSPC VIS 4/NACE VIS 7
(1998; E 2000; E 2004) Guide and Reference

Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by
Waterjetting

EM 385-1-1
(2008; Errata 1-2010; Changes 1-3 2010;

Requirements Manual

EPA Method 24
(2000) Determination of Volatile Matter

Content, Water Content, Density, Volume
Solids, and Weight Solids of Surface
Coatings

29 CFR 1910.1000
1.2
Air Contaminants
SUBMITTALS

SECTION 09 90 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
The current MPI, "Approved Product List" which lists paint by brand, label,
product name and product code as of the date of contract award, will be
used to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this
specification. The Contractor may choose to use a subsequent MPI "Approved
Product List", however, only one list may be used for the entire contract
and each coating system is to be from a single manufacturer. All coats on
a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer. No variation
from the MPI Approved Products List is acceptable.
Samples of specified materials may be taken and tested for compliance with
specification requirements.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit color stencil codes
SD-03 Product Data
Coating; G
Sealant
SD-04 Samples
Color; G
Submit manufacturer's samples of paint colors.
color samples to color scheme as indicated.
1.3
1.3.1
Cross reference
APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
Contractor Qualification
Submit the name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address
of the contractor that will be performing all surface preparation and
coating application. Submit evidence that key personnel have successfully
performed surface preparation and application of coatings on a minimum of
three similar projects within the past three years. List information by
individual and include the following:
a.
Name of individual and proposed position for this work.
b.
Information about each previous assignment including:

Position or responsibility
Employer (if other than the Contractor)
Name of facility owner
Mailing address, telephone number, and telex number (if non-US) of
facility owner
Name of individual in facility owner's organization who can be
contacted as a reference
SECTION 09 90 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Location, size and description of structure

Dates work was carried out
Description of work carried out on structure
1.3.2
SSPC QP 1 Certification
All contractors and subcontractors that perform surface preparation or

coating application shall be certified by the Society for Protective
Coatings (formerly Steel Structures Painting Council) (SSPC) to the
requirements of SSPC QP 1 prior to contract award, and shall remain
certified while accomplishing any surface preparation or coating
application. The painting contractors and painting subcontractors must
remain so certified for the duration of the project. If a contractor's or
subcontractor's certification expires, the firm will not be allowed to
perform any work until the certification is reissued. Requests for
extension of time for any delay to the completion of the project due to an
inactive certification will not be considered and liquidated damages will
apply. Notify the Contracting Officer of any change in contractor
certification status.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1
Field Samples and Tests
The Contracting Officer may choose up to two coatings that have been
delivered to the site to be tested at no cost to the Government. Take
samples of each chosen product as specified in the paragraph "Sampling
Procedures." Test each chosen product as specified in the paragraph
"Testing Procedure." Products which do not conform, shall be removed from
the job site and replaced with new products that conform to the referenced
specification. Testing of replacement products that failed initial testing
shall be at no cost to the Government.
1.4.1.1
Sampling Procedure
The Contracting Officer will select paint at random from the products that
have been delivered to the job site for sample testing. The Contractor
shall provide one quart samples of the selected paint materials. The
samples shall be taken in the presence of the Contracting Officer, and
labeled, identifying each sample. Provide labels in accordance with the
paragraph "Packaging, Labeling, and Storage" of this specification.
1.4.1.2
Testing Procedure
Provide Batch Quality Conformance Testing for specified products, as

defined by and performed by MPI. As an alternative to Batch Quality
Conformance Testing, the Contractor may provide Qualification Testing for
specified products above to the appropriate MPI product specification,
using the third-party laboratory approved under the paragraph
"Qualification Testing" laboratory for coatings. The qualification testing
lab report shall include the backup data and summary of the test results.
The summary shall list all of the reference specification requirements and
the result of each test. The summary shall clearly indicate whether the
tested paint meets each test requirement. Note that Qualification Testing
may take 4 to 6 weeks to perform, due to the extent of testing required.
SECTION 09 90 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Submit name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address of
the independent third party laboratory selected to perform testing of
coating samples for compliance with specification requirements. Submit
documentation that laboratory is regularly engaged in testing of paint
samples for conformance with specifications, and that employees performing
testing are qualified. If the Contractor chooses MPI to perform the Batch
Quality Conformance testing, the above submittal information is not
required, only a letter is required from the Contractor stating that MPI
will perform the testing.
1.5
1.5.1
Environmental Protection
In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental

protection, provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of
the local Air Pollution Control District and regional jurisdiction.
Notify Contracting Officer of any paint specified herein which fails to
conform.
1.5.2
Lead Content
Do not use coatings having a lead content over 0.06 percent by weight of
nonvolatile content.
1.5.3
Chromate Content
Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate.

1.5.4
Asbestos Content
Materials shall not contain asbestos.

1.5.5
Mercury Content
Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.

1.5.6
Silica
Abrasive blast media shall not contain free crystalline silica.

1.5.7
Human Carcinogens
Materials shall not contain ACGIH 0100 confirmed human carcinogens (A1) or
suspected human carcinogens (A2).
1.6
PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORAGE
Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract

specification number, designation name, formula or specification number,
batch number, color, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's
formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any warnings and
special precautions, and name and address of manufacturer. Pigmented
paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons. Paints
and thinners shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written
directions, and as a minimum, stored off the ground, under cover, with
sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors, and at
temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F.
SECTION 09 90 00
1.7
W912HN-09-X-1813
SAFETY AND HEALTH
Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance

with the following:
Work shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and local laws and
regulations, and with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including the Activity
Hazard Analysis as specified in Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS and in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1. The Activity Hazard Analysis
shall include analyses of the potential impact of painting operations on
painting personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the work zone.
1.7.1
Safety Methods Used During Coating Application
Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA Guide 3.

1.7.2
Toxic Materials
To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials, conform to the

most stringent guidance of:
a.
The applicable manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or

local regulation.
b.
29 CFR 1910.1000.
c.
ACGIH 0100, threshold limit values.
1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Comply, at minimum, with manufacturer recommendations for space ventilation

during and after installation. Isolate area of application from rest of
building when applying high-emission paints or coatings.
1.8.1
Coatings
Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:

a.
Less than 5 degrees F above dew point;
b.
Below 50 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless specifically

pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product manufacturer.
Under no circumstances shall application conditions exceed manufacturer
recommendations.
1.9
1.9.1
LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED

Painting Included
Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following

unless indicated otherwise.
a.
Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles readily

detachable by removal of fasteners, such as screws and bolts.
b.
New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color

coding and factory finished surfaces that are damaged during
performance of the work.
SECTION 09 90 00
c.
W912HN-09-X-1813
Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of the

work.
1.9.1.1
Exterior Painting
Includes new surfaces of the buildings and appurtenances. Also included

are existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations.
1.9.1.2
Interior Painting
Includes new surfaces of the buildings and appurtenances as indicated and

existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations. Where a space
or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items, unless
indicated otherwise.
a.
Exposed columns, girders, beams, joists, and metal deck; and
b.
Other contiguous surfaces.
1.9.2
Painting Excluded
Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise.

a.
Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards, fixed

ductwork, machinery, and equipment fixed in place.
b.
Surfaces in concealed spaces. Concealed spaces are defined as enclosed

spaces above suspended ceilings, furred spaces, attic spaces, crawl
spaces, elevator shafts and chases.
c.
Steel to be embedded in concrete.
d.
Copper, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, and lead except existing

coated surfaces.
e.
Hardware, fittings, and other factory finished items.
1.9.3
Mechanical and Electrical Painting
Includes field coating of interior and exterior new surfaces.

a.
b.
Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the

following items unless indicated otherwise.
(1)
Exposed piping, conduit, and ductwork;
(2)
Supports, hangers, air grilles, and registers;
(3)
Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings.
Do not paint the following, unless indicated otherwise:

(1)
New zinc-coated, aluminum, and copper surfaces under insulation
(2)
New aluminum jacket on piping
(3)
New interior ferrous piping under insulation.
SECTION 09 90 00
1.9.4
1.9.4.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
Definitions and Abbreviations

Qualification Testing
Qualification testing is the performance of all test requirements listed in

the product specification. This testing is accomplished by MPI to qualify
each product for the MPI Approved Product List, and may also be
accomplished by Contractor's third party testing lab if an alternative to
Batch Quality Conformance Testing by MPI is desired.
1.9.4.2
Batch Quality Conformance Testing
Batch quality conformance testing determines that the product provided is

the same as the product qualified to the appropriate product
specification. This testing shall only be accomplished by MPI testing lab.
1.9.4.3
Coating
A film or thin layer applied to a base material called a substrate. A

coating may be a metal, alloy, paint, or solid/liquid suspensions on
various substrates (metals, plastics, wood, paper, leather, cloth, etc.).
They may be applied by electrolysis, vapor deposition, vacuum, or
mechanical means such as brushing, spraying, calendaring, and roller
coating. A coating may be applied for aesthetic or protective purposes or
both. The term "coating" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels,
stains, varnishes, sealers, epoxies, and other coatings, whether used as
primer, intermediate, or finish coat. The terms paint and coating are used
interchangeably.
1.9.4.4
DFT or dft
Dry film thickness, the film thickness of the fully cured, dry paint or
coating.
1.9.4.5
DSD
Degree of Surface Degradation, the MPI system of defining degree of surface

degradation. Five (5) levels are generically defined under the Assessment
sections in the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual.
1.9.4.6
EPP
Environmentally Preferred Products, a standard for determining

environmental preferability in support of Executive Order 13101.
1.9.4.7
EXT
MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system.

1.9.4.8
INT
MPI short term designation for an interior coating system.

1.9.4.9
micron / microns
The metric measurement for 0.001 mm or one/one-thousandth of a millimeter.
SECTION 09 90 00
1.9.4.10
W912HN-09-X-1813
mil / mils
The English measurement for 0.001 in or one/one-thousandth of an inch,

equal to 25.4 microns or 0.0254 mm.
1.9.4.11
mm
The metric measurement for millimeter, 0.001 meter or one/one-thousandth of

a meter.
1.9.4.12
MPI Gloss Levels
MPI system of defining gloss. Seven (7) gloss levels (G1 to G7) are
generically defined under the Evaluation sections of the MPI Manuals.
Traditionally, Flat refers to G1/G2, Eggshell refers to G3, Semigloss
refers to G5, and Gloss refers to G6.
Gloss levels are defined by MPI as follows:
Gloss Level
Description
Units at 60
degrees
Units at 85
degrees
G1
Matte or Flat 0 to 5
10 max
G2
Velvet
0 to 10
10 to 35
G3
Eggshell
10 to 25
10 to 35
G4
Satin
20 to 35
35 min
G5
Semi-Gloss
35 to 70
G6
Gloss
70 to 85
G7
High Gloss
Gloss is tested in accordance with ASTM D523. Historically, the Government

has used Flat (G1 / G2), Eggshell (G3), Semi-Gloss (G5), and Gloss (G6).
1.9.4.13
MPI System Number
The MPI coating system number in each Division found in either the MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the Maintenance Repainting
Manual and defined as an exterior (EXT/REX) or interior system (INT/RIN).
The Division number follows the CSI Master Format.
1.9.4.14
Paint
See Coating definition.

1.9.4.15
REX
MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system used in

repainting projects or over existing coating systems.
SECTION 09 90 00
1.9.4.16
W912HN-09-X-1813
RIN
MPI short term designation for an interior coating system used in

repainting projects or over existing coating systems.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3.

PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or

otherwise protect, hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces,
radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures, public and private property,
and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to
be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in the trades
involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces contaminated by
coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged items.
3.2
3.2.1
PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES

Existing and New Ferrous Surfaces
a.
Ferrous Surfaces including Shop-coated Surfaces and Small Areas That

Contain Rust, Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances: Solvent clean
or detergent wash in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to remove oil and
grease. Where shop coat is missing or damaged, clean according to
SSPC SP 2, SSPC SP 3, SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3, or SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2.
Brush-off blast remaining surface in accordance with SSPC SP 7/NACE No.4;
Water jetting to SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5 WJ-4 may be used to remove loose
coating and other loose materials. Use inhibitor as recommended by
coating manufacturer to prevent premature rusting. Shop-coated ferrous
surfaces shall be protected from corrosion by treating and touching up
corroded areas immediately upon detection.
b.
Surfaces With More Than 20 Percent Rust, Mill Scale, and Other Foreign
Substances: Clean entire surface in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3
/SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5 WJ-3SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2/SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5
WJ-2.
3.2.2
Final Ferrous Surface Condition:
For tool cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 2 and
SSPC SP 3. As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to
photographs in SSPC VIS 3.
For abrasive blast cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in
SSPC SP 7/NACE No.4, SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3, and SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2. As a
visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in
SSPC VIS 1.
For waterjet cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in
SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5. As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be
similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 4/NACE VIS 7.
SECTION 09 90 00
3.2.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Galvanized Surfaces
a.
New Galvanized Surfaces With Only Dirt and Zinc Oxidation Products:
Clean with solvent, steam, or non-alkaline detergent solution in
accordance with SSPC SP 1. If the galvanized metal has been passivated
or stabilized, the coating shall be completely removed by brush-off
abrasive blast. New galvanized steel to be coated shall not be
"passivated" or "stabilized" If the absence of hexavalent stain
inhibitors is not documented, test as described in ASTM D6386, Appendix
X2, and remove by one of the methods described therein.
b.
Galvanized with Slight Coating Deterioration or with Little or No

Rusting: Water jetting to SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5 WJ3 to remove loose
coating from surfaces with less than 20 percent coating deterioration
and no blistering, peeling, or cracking. Use inhibitor as recommended
by the coating manufacturer to prevent rusting.
c.
Galvanized With Severe Deteriorated Coating or Severe Rusting: Water

jet to SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5 WJ3 degree of cleanliness. Spot abrasive
blast rusted areas as described for steel in SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3, and
waterjet to SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5, WJ3 to remove existing coating.
3.2.4
Non-Ferrous Metallic Surfaces
Aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead, copper, and other nonferrous metal

surfaces.
Surface Cleaning: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and wash with
mild non-alkaline detergent to remove dirt and water soluble contaminants.
3.2.5
Terne-Coated Metal Surfaces
Solvent clean surfaces with mineral spirits, ASTM D235.

clean, dry cloths.
3.2.6
Wipe dry with
Existing Surfaces with a Bituminous or Mastic-Type Coating
Remove chalk, mildew, and other loose material by washing with a solution of
1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, one quart 5
percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water.
3.3
3.3.1
a.
PREPARATION OF WOOD AND PLYWOOD SURFACES

New Plywood and Wood Surfaces:
Wood surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign matter.
Surface Cleaning: Surfaces shall be free from dust and other
deleterious substances and in a condition approved by the Contracting
Officer prior to receiving paint or other finish. Do not use water to
clean uncoated wood. Scrape to remove loose coatings. Lightly sand to
roughen the entire area of previously enamel-coated wood surfaces.
c.
Moisture content of the wood shall not exceed 12 percent as measured by

a moisture meter in accordance with ASTM D4444, Method A, unless
otherwise authorized.
d.
Wood surfaces adjacent to surfaces to receive water-thinned paints

shall be primed and/or touched up before applying water-thinned paints.
SECTION 09 90 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
e.
Cracks and Nailheads: Set and putty stop nailheads and putty cracks
after the prime coat has dried.
f.
Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects:
g.
3.4
3.4.1
(1)
Knots and Resinous Wood : Prior to application of coating, cover

knots and stains with two or more coats of 3-pound-cut shellac
varnish, plasticized with 5 ounces of castor oil per gallon.
Scrape away existing coatings from knotty areas, and sand before
treating. Prime before applying any putty over shellacked area.
(2)
Open Joints and Other Openings: Fill with whiting putty, linseed
oil putty. Sand smooth after putty has dried.
(3)
Checking: Where checking of the wood is present, sand the

surface, wipe and apply a coat of pigmented orange shellac. Allow
to dry before paint is applied.
Prime Coat For New Exterior Surfaces: Prime coat frames, and trim
before wood becomes dirty, warped, or weathered.
APPLICATION
Coating Application
a.
Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the coating

manufacturer, to permit thorough drying, but not to present topcoat
adhesion problems. Provide each coat in specified condition to receive
next coat.
b.
Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or intermediate

coats to dry more than 30 days, or longer than recommended by
manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats. Follow manufacturer's
recommendations for surface preparation if primers or intermediate
coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of
subsequent coatings. Each coat shall cover surface of preceding coat
or surface completely, and there shall be a visually perceptible
difference in shades of successive coats.
c.
Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs, drops,

ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in colors.
d.
Thermosetting Paints: Topcoats over thermosetting paints (epoxies and

urethanes) should be applied within the overcoating window recommended
by the manufacturer.
3.4.2
Mixing and Thinning of Paints
Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when

thinning is mandatory to suit surface, temperature, weather conditions,
application methods, or for the type of paint being used. Obtain written
permission from the Contracting Officer to use thinners. The written
permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use.
When thinning is allowed, paints shall be thinned immediately prior to
application with not more than 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon. The
use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete
hiding, full film thickness, or required gloss. Thinning shall not cause
SECTION 09 90 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
the paint to exceed limits on volatile organic compounds.

different manufacturers shall not be mixed.
3.4.3
Paints of
Two-Component Systems
Two-component systems shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Any thinning of the first coat to ensure proper penetration
and sealing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of
substrate.
3.4.4
a.
Coating Systems
Systems by Substrates: Apply coatings that conform to the respective
specifications listed in the following Tables:
Table
EXTERIOR
Division 3.
Exterior Concrete Paint Table
Division 4.
Exterior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table
Division 5.
Exterior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table
Division 6.
Exterior Wood; Dressed Lumber, Paneling, Decking, Shingles

Paint Table
Division 9.
Exterior Stucco Paint Table
Division 10. Exterior Cloth Coverings and Bituminous Coated Surfaces Paint
Table
INTERIOR
Division 3.
Interior Concrete Paint Table
Division 4.
Interior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table
Division 5.
Interior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table
Division 6.
Interior Wood Paint Table
Division 10. Interior Plaster, Gypsum Board, Textured Surfaces Paint Table
b.
Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers, varnishes,

enamels, undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mil each coat unless specified otherwise in the Tables. Coating
thickness where specified, refers to the minimum dry film thickness.
c.
Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise: Coat surfaces which

have not been specified, the same as surfaces having similar conditions
of exposure.
d.
Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work, Including New

Patches In Existing Surfaces: Coat surfaces with the following:
SECTION 09 90 00
e.
3.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
(1)
One coat of primer.
(2)
One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat.
(3)
One topcoat to match adjacent surfaces.
Existing Coated Surfaces To Be Painted: Apply coatings conforming to

the respective specifications listed in the Tables herein, except that
pretreatments, sealers and fillers need not be provided on surfaces
where existing coatings are soundly adhered and in good condition. Do
not omit undercoats or primers.
COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL
Apply coatings of Tables in Division 5 for Exterior and Interior.

a.
Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface is
cleaned, to surfaces that meet all specified surface preparation
requirements at time of application.
b.
Inaccessible Surfaces: Prior to erection, use one coat of specified

primer on metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection.
c.
Shop-primed Surfaces: Touch up exposed substrates and damaged coatings

to protect from rusting prior to applying field primer.
d.
Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane: Apply MPI 101, 1.5
mils DFT immediately prior to application of epoxy or urethane coatings.
e.
Pipes and Tubing: The semitransparent film applied to some pipes and
tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat, but shall be
overcoated with the specified ferrous-metal primer prior to application
of finish coats.
f.
Exposed Nails, Screws, Fasteners, and Miscellaneous Ferrous Surfaces.

On surfaces to be coated with water thinned coatings, spot prime
exposed nails and other ferrous metal with latex primer MPI 107.
3.6
PAINT TABLES
All DFT's are minimum values. Use only materials having a minimum MPI
"Environmentally Friendly" rating based on VOC (EPA Method 24) content
levels. Acceptable products are listed in the MPI Green Approved Products
List, available at http://www.specifygreen.com/APL/ProductIdxByMPInum.asp.
3.6.1
EXTERIOR PAINT TABLES
DIVISION 5:
EXTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES

A. New Steel that has been hand or power tool cleaned to SSPC SP 2 or
SSPC SP 3
SECTION 09 90 00
DIVISION 5:
1.
W912HN-09-X-1813
EXTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
Alkyd
New; MPI EXT 5.1Q-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G5

Primer: MPI 23
System DFT:
Intermediate: MPI 94
Topcoat: MPI 94
5.25 mils
New; MPI EXT 5.1Q-G6 (Gloss) / Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G6

Primer: MPI 23
System DFT:
Intermediate: MPI 9
Topcoat: MPI 9
5.25 mils
B.
New Steel that has been blast-cleaned to SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3:
1.
Alkyd
New; MPI EXT 5.1D-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G5

Primer: MPI 79
System DFT:
Topcoat: MPI 94
5.25 mils
New; MPI EXT 5.1D-G6 (Gloss) / Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G6

Primer: MPI 79
System DFT:
3.6.2
Intermediate: MPI 9
Topcoat: MPI 9
5.25 mils
INTERIOR PAINT TABLES
DIVISION 5:
INTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
INTERIOR STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES

C. Metal in high-humidity areas not otherwise
specified except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new prefinished
equipment:
MPI INT 5.1T-G5 (Semigloss)
SECTION 09 90 00
DIVISION 5:
W912HN-09-X-1813
INTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
INTERIOR STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES

Primer:
MPI 23
System DFT:
Topcoat: MPI 47
5.25 mils
MPI INT 5.1T-G6 (Gloss)

Primer:
MPI 23
System DFT:
Topcoat: MPI 48
5.25 mils
SECTION 09 90 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 13 12 50A
*1 ANGLE FRAME BLEACHERS
05/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
References

ASCE 7
(2010; Change 2010; Change 2011; Errata

2011; Change 2011) Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures
ASTM A 325

ASTM A 572/A 572M

High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel
ASTM B 209

and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
1.2
SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as
otherwise designated. The following shall be submitted in accordance with
Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Manufacturer's standard details for each applicable
condition found on the project.
SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
Installation methods.
SECTION 13 12 50
PART 2
2.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
Section includes:
1.
2.2
2.2.1
Permanent Angle Frame Bleachers.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Design Loads
1. Design to withstand, with or without live loads, the horizontal and
uplift pressures due to the wind based on the most current revision of
ASCE 7.
2. Live Load - Seat and foot boards: Not less than 120 lbs per lineal
foot.
3. Horizontal swaying force - parallel to the length of the seats: 24
lbs per lineal foot.
4. Guard rails: Vertical load of 100 per lineal foot and a horizontal
thrust of 50 per square foot acting outwardly at the top of the rail.
2.3
2.3.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications
All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single

manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years experience.
2.3.2
Installer Qualifications
All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single

installer with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in
installing products of the same type and scope as specified.
2.3.3
Comply with all federal, state and local building codes.

2.4
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for

installation.
Store and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with requirements of
local authorities having jurisdiction.
2.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)

within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not
install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's
absolute limits.
SECTION 13 12 50
2.6
W912HN-09-X-1813
WARRANTY
At project closeout, provide to the owner or owner's representative an

executed copy of the manufacturer's warranty, with terms, conditions and
exclusions.
2.6.1
Duration
One year against defects in materials and workmanship starting after

completion of the project.
2.7
2.7.1
MATERIALS
Steel
Meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM A 572/A 572M-50 (Hot-Dipped

Galvanized).
2.7.2
Aluminum
Meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM B 209; Extruded alloy 6063-T6.

2.7.3
2.8
2.8.1
Hardware
1.
High Strength Bolts and Nuts - ASTM A 325 steel.
2.
Hold-Down Clip Assemblies - ASTM B 209 Aluminum alloy 6063-T6.
3.
End Caps - ASTM B 209 Channel aluminum alloy 6063-T6.
ANGLE FRAME BLEACHER FABRICATION

Shop Connections
Welded and capable of carrying calculated stresses per AWS standards.

2.8.2
Supporting Members (Framework)
1 3/4 inch by 1 3/4 inch welded steel angle frame spaced no greater than 6
feet centers and cross-braced to laterally support adjacent frames.
2.8.3
Decking Footboard Support Angles
2 1/2 inch by 2 inch by 3/16 inch meeting loading requirements and for
strength.
2.8.4
Cross Bracing
Structural aluminum angle 1 3/4 inch by 1 3/4 inch by 3/16 inch, bolted at
ends and centers to the adjacent frame.
2.8.5
Decking
Full Plank Deck.

1.
Maintenance free, corrosion resistant all aluminum deck.
2. Non-slip, anti-skid, fluted tread surface and a concealed fastening

system.
SECTION 13 12 50
W912HN-09-X-1813
3. The decking system is comprised of various

extrusions.
3/4 inch high aluminum
4. When projected on a horizontal plane, horizontal gaps shall not

exceed 0.25 inch between footboards and seat boards.
5. All hardware used for attachment of seats, footboards, riser,

mid-aisles rails and all other components to be hot-dipped galvanized
steel.
2.8.6
Seating
2.8.6.1
Bench
10 inch flat aluminum bench seats.

2.8.7
Guardrails/Handrails
1. 1 5/8" 0.D. anodized aluminum pipe with end plugs and elbows at
corners. Secure to angle rail posts with galvanized fasteners.
2. Furnish on sides of the bleacher including stairs, ramps, portals
and landings.
3. Provide guardrails at the back and sides of the bleacher 42 inches
high measured above the center of the seat board surface.
4. Install guardrails at least 42 inches above the elevated front
footrests.
5. 2 inch by 9 gauge galvanized chain link fencing fastened with
aluminum ties and galvanized tension bars and aluminum rail clamps on
all sides of the bleacher.
6.
2.8.8
1 1/2 inch aluminum handrial 36 inches high as shown on drawings.
Stairs
Fence and Pipe Rail System that conforms to applicable codes as shown on
the Contract Drawings.
2.8.9
1.
2 x 12 inches aluminum plank with a maximum rise of 7 inches.
2.
Top guardrail 42 inches above the leading edge of the treads.
Anchoring
Stand must be anchored to a level concrete slab.

2.9.1
2.9
FINISHES
Steel Frame Components
Galvanized Finish.
2.9.2
Aluminum Decking and Seating Components

1. Seat Planks, Riser Boards, Backrest and Stanchions: 204R1,
AA-M10C22A31, Class II Clear Anodized.
SECTION 13 12 50
W912HN-09-X-1813
2. Stanchions: Electrostatically applied, baked -on siliconized

acrylic or siliconized polyester enamel paint.
3.
PART 3
3.1
Foot boards: Mill Finish.

EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

Inspect footings and slabs for proper level and location.
Confirm appropriate compressive strength of concrete prior to commencing
work.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify
Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2
PREPARATION
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

Allow concrete footings and slabs to cure at least 28 days before
commencement of work.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3
INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.4
PROTECTION
Protect installed products until completion of project.

Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
SECTION 13 12 50
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 26 20 00A
*1 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

ASTM B1

Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
ASTM B8

Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
ASTM D709
(2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting

Materials

IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative

Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE 81
(1983) Guide for Measuring Earth

Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System
IEEE C2
(2012) National Electrical Safety Code

ANSI C12.7
(2005) Requirements for Watthour Meter

Sockets
ANSI C80.1
(2005) American National Standard for

Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)
ANSI C80.3

Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA FU 1
(2002; R 2007) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses
NEMA ICS 1
(2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for

Industrial Control and Systems: General
Requirements
NEMA ICS 6
(1993; R 2011) Enclosures
SECTION 26 20 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
NEMA KS 1
(2001; R 2006) Enclosed and Miscellaneous

Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V
Maximum)
NEMA TC 2
(2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Conduit
NEMA TC 3
(2004) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride

(PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC
Conduit and Tubing
NEMA WD 1
(1999; R 2005; R 2010) Standard for

General Color Requirements for Wiring
Devices
NEMA WD 6
(2002; R 2008) Wiring Devices Dimensions

Specifications
NEMA Z535.4

Product Safety Signs and Labels

NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2;

Code
NFPA 70E
(2012) Standard for Electrical Safety in

the Workplace
NFPA 780
(2011) Standard for the Installation of

Lightning Protection Systems
UL 1
(2005; Reprint Jul 2007) Standard for

Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 1242
(2006; Reprint Jul 2007) Standard for

Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -Steel
UL 20
(2010) General-Use Snap Switches
UL 360
(2009; Reprint Jun 2009) Liquid-Tight

Flexible Steel Conduit
UL 4248
(2007) UL Standard for Safety Fuseholders
UL 467
(2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 486A-486B
(2003; Reprint Feb 2010) Wire Connectors
UL 486C
(2004; Reprint Feb 2010) Splicing Wire

Connectors
UL 489
(2009; Reprint Jun 2011) Molded-Case

Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches,
and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
SECTION 26 20 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
UL 498
(2001; Reprint Apr 2010) Attachment Plugs

and Receptacles
UL 50
(2007) Enclosures for Electrical

Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations
UL 510
(2005; Reprint Apr 2008) Polyvinyl

Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber
Insulating Tape
UL 514B
(2004; Reprint Nov 2009) Conduit, Tubing

and Cable Fittings
UL 6
(2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid

Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 651
(2011) Standard for Schedule 40 and 80

Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings
UL 67
(2009; Reprint Sep 2010) Standard for

Panelboards
UL 797
(2007) Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel
UL 83
(2008) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and

Cables
UL 869A
(2006) Reference Standard for Service

Equipment
UL 870
(2008) Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary

Gutters, and Associated Fittings
UL 943
(2006; Reprint May 2010) Ground-Fault

Circuit-Interrupters
1.2
DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms

used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in
IEEE 100.
1.3
SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Panelboards
Wireways
SD-03 Product Data
Receptacles
SECTION 26 20 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Circuit breakers
Switches
SD-06 Test Reports
600-volt wiring test
Grounding system test
Transformer tests
Ground-fault receptacle test
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.4.2
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.4.2.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.4.2.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site

shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.5
WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are

reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
SECTION 26 20 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
during the warranty period of the contract.

PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Materials, equipment, and devices shall, as a minimum, meet requirements of

UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of
NFPA 70.
2.2
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
Shall conform to the following:

2.2.1
Rigid Metallic Conduit
2.2.1.1
Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit
ANSI C80.1, UL 6.
2.2.2
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
PVC Type EPC-40 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651.

2.2.3
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.

2.2.4
Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)
UL 797, ANSI C80.3.

2.2.5
Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 1.
2.2.5.1
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel
UL 360.
2.2.6
Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 514B. Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance

with UL 514B.
2.2.6.1
Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC
Threaded-type.
2.2.6.2
Split couplings unacceptable.
Fittings for EMT
Die cast compression type.

2.2.7
Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B.
SECTION 26 20 00
2.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES
Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet
steel.
2.4
WIRES AND CABLES
Wires and cables shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for
type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Wires
and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to
site shall not be used.
2.4.1
Conductors
Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter shall be stranded. Conductors No.
10 AWG and smaller diameter shall be solid. Conductor sizes and capacities
shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise. All conductors
shall be copper.
2.4.1.1
Equipment Manufacturer Requirements
When manufacturer's equipment requires copper conductors at the

terminations or requires copper conductors to be provided between
components of equipment, provide copper conductors or splices, splice
boxes, and other work required to satisfy manufacturer's requirements.
2.4.1.2
Aluminum Conductors
Aluminum conductors are not acceptable.

2.4.1.3
Minimum Conductor Sizes
Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG; for Class 1
remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG; for Class 2 low-energy,
remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG; and for Class 3 low-energy,
remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 22 AWG.
2.4.2
Color Coding
Provide for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit

conductors. Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for
neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in
same raceway or box, other neutrals shall be white with a different colored
(not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different
voltage systems shall be as follows:
a.
2.4.3
120/240 volt, single phase:
Black and red
Insulation
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, power and

lighting wires shall be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83,
except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83. Where
lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C) conductors, provide only
conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.
2.4.4
Bonding Conductors
ASTM B1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter;
SECTION 26 20 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
ASTM B8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger
diameter.
2.5
SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS
UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes.

Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires shall be insulated,
pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing
connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.
2.6
DEVICE PLATES
Provide UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices
installed.
2.7
2.7.1
SWITCHES
Toggle Switches
NEMA WD 1, UL 20, single pole, double pole, three-way, totally enclosed

with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with
grounding screw. Handles shall be ivory thermoplastic. Wiring terminals
shall be screw-type, side-wired. Contacts shall be silver-cadmium and
contact arm shall be one-piece copper alloy. Switches shall be rated
quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, with current rating and number of poles
indicated.
2.7.2
Breakers Used as Switches
For 120- and 277-Volt fluorescent fixtures, mark breakers "SWD" in

accordance with UL 489.
2.7.3
Disconnect Switches
NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches Fused switches shall utilize

Class R fuseholders and fuses, unless indicated otherwise. Switches
serving as motor-disconnect means shall be horsepower rated. Provide
switches in NEMA 3R, enclosure per NEMA ICS 6.
2.8
FUSES
NEMA FU 1. Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch.

shall have voltage rating not less than circuit voltage.
2.8.1
Fuses
Fuseholders
Provide in accordance with UL 4248.

2.8.2
Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R)
UL 198M, Class RK-5.

2.8.3
Associated fuseholders shall be Class R only.
Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class T)
UL 198M, Class T for zero to 1,200 amperes, 300 volts; and zero to 800
amperes, 600 volts.
SECTION 26 20 00
2.9
W912HN-09-X-1813
RECEPTACLES
UL 498, hard use, heavy-duty, grounding-type. Ratings and configurations

shall be as indicated. Bodies shall be of ivory as per NEMA WD 1. Face
and body shall be thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap.
Dimensional requirements shall be per NEMA WD 6. Provide screw-type,
side-wired wiring terminals. Connect grounding pole to mounting strap.
The receptacle shall contain triple-wipe power contacts and double or
triple-wipe ground contacts.
2.9.1
Weatherproof Receptacles
Provide in cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof, cast-metal cover

plate and gasketed cap over each receptacle opening. Provide caps with a
spring-hinged flap. Receptacle shall be UL listed for use in "wet
locations with plug in use."
2.9.2
Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles
UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Device shall be
capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping
per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFCI devices. Provide screw-type,
side-wired wiring terminals.
2.10
PANELBOARDS
UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating of 10,000 amperes

symmetrical minimum. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means
shall additionally conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be circuit
breaker-equipped. Design shall be such that individual breakers can be
removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing
supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as
required by UL. "Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to
match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the
drawings. Main breaker shall be "separately" mounted "above" or "below"
branch breakers. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for
future installation of breakers. Directories shall indicate load served by
each circuit in panelboard. Directories shall also indicate source of
service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP). Provide new
directories for existing panels modified by this project as indicated.
Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective
covering. Panelboards shall be listed and labeled for their intended use.
Panelboard shall have nameplates in accordance with paragraph FIELD
FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.
2.10.1
Enclosure
Enclosures shall meet the requirements of UL 50. All cabinets shall be

fabricated from sheet steel of not less than No. 10 gauge if flush-mounted
or mounted outdoors, and not less than No. 12 gauge if surface-mounted
indoors, with full seam-welded box ends. Cabinets mounted outdoors or
flush-mounted shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Cabinets
shall be painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING. Outdoor cabinets
shall be of NEMA 3R raintight with a removable steel plate 1/4 inch thick
in the bottom for field drilling for conduit connections. Front edges of
cabinets shall be form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or
riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard front. All
cabinets shall be so fabricated that no part of any surface on the finished
cabinet shall deviate from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch. Flush doors
SECTION 26 20 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
shall be mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the
door is closed. Each door shall be fitted with a combined catch and lock,
except that doors over 24 inches long shall be provided with a three-point
latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a cylinder lock. Two keys shall
be provided with each lock, and all locks shall be keyed alike.
Finished-head cap screws shall be provided for mounting the panelboard
fronts on the cabinets.
2.10.2
Panelboard Buses
Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Main buses and
back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed without
machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each
panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate
ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting
grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet.
2.10.3
Circuit Breakers
UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating

equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the
circuit breaker shall be mounted. Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as
suitable for type of conductor provided. Series rated circuit breakers and
plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable.
2.10.3.1
Multipole Breakers
Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Breaker design

shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to
open.
2.11
2.11.1
GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT

Ground Rods
UL 467. Ground rods shall be sectional type, copper-clad steel, with

minimum diameter of 3/4 inch and minimum length of 10 feet.
2.12
MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
2.13
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment

enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the
drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when
applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch
thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish.
Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the
core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering
shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.
2.14
WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and
SECTION 26 20 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
NEMA Z535.4 for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and

motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are
likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while
energized. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of
potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by
the manufacturer. The marking shall be clearly visible to qualified
persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the
equipment.
2.15
WIREWAYS
UL 870. Material shall be steel galvanized 16 gauge for heights and depths
up to 6 by 6 inches, and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by 12
inches. Provide in length required for the application with screw- cover
NEMA 3R enclosure per NEMA ICS 6.
2.16
METER BASE ONLY
ANSI C12.7. Provide NEMA Type 3R, box-mounted socket, ringless, having
jaws compatible with requirements of a class: Flint Electric EMC self
contained watthour meter. Provide gray plastic closing cover and bypass
links. Provide manufacturers standard enclosure color unless otherwise
indicated.
2.17
FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which

shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test and the additional requirements as specified herein. Interior and
exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned
and then receive a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment
prior to painting. Exterior surfaces shall be free from holes, seams,
dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections. Interior surfaces
shall receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in
accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Exterior surfaces
shall be primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats
baked enamel with semigloss finish. Equipment located outdoors shall be
ANSI Dark Gray. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as
specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations

and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces, shall conform to
requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.
3.1.1
Underground Service
Underground service conductors and associated conduit shall be continuous

from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection.
3.1.2
Service Entrance Identification
Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures shall be

labeled and identified as such.
SECTION 26 20 00
3.1.2.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
Labels
Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than

one enclosure, as permitted by NFPA 70, each enclosure, new and existing,
shall be labeled as one of several enclosures containing service entrance
disconnect devices. Label, at minimum, shall indicate number of service
disconnect devices housed by enclosure and shall indicate total number of
enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated
plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use
lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and engrave on black-on-white
matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one
enclosure, shall be provided only as permitted by NFPA 70.
3.1.3
Wiring Methods
Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid

nonmetallic conduit, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or
specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise.
Grounding conductor shall be separate from electrical system neutral
conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for
circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways. Minimum conduit size shall be
1/2 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits.
3.1.3.1
Pull Wire
Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire shall be plastic having
minimum 200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack
at each end of pull wire.
3.1.4
Conduit Installation
3.1.4.1
Restrictions Applicable to EMT
a.
Do not install underground.
b.
Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious

materials.
c.
Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not
limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could
physically damage the EMT.
d.
Do not use outdoors.
3.1.4.2
a.
Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit
PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80

(1)
3.1.4.3
Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage.

Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit
Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS.

3.1.4.4
Service Entrance Conduit, Overhead
Rigid steel or IMC from service entrance to service entrance fitting or

weatherhead outside building.
SECTION 26 20 00
3.1.4.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
Service Entrance Conduit, Underground
PVC, Type-EPC 40, galvanized rigid steel or steel IMC. Underground portion
shall be encased in minimum of 3 inches of concrete and shall be installed
minimum 18 inches below slab or grade.
3.1.4.6
Underground Conduit Other Than Service Entrance
Type EPC-40. Convert nonmetallic conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or

80, to plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before rising through
floor slab.
3.1.4.7
Conduit Support
Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze.

Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by
concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine
screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work.
Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld
conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Load applied to fasteners
shall not exceed one-fourth proof test load. Fasteners attached to
concrete ceiling shall be vibration resistant and shock-resistant. Holes
cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to
depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joints shall not cut main
reinforcing bars. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel
construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction,
run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support
system. Conduit and box systems shall be supported independently of both
(a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system
into which ceiling panels are placed. Supporting means shall not be shared
between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Installation
shall be coordinated with above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure
maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used
for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry
locations. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide
suitable expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by
bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches
inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the
equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the
downward direction.
3.1.4.8
Directional Changes in Conduit Runs
Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal

fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending
machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped
conduits. Prevent dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes,
fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of
obstructions.
3.1.4.9
Locknuts and Bushings
Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where
required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings
cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least
minimum single locknut and bushing. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for
digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of
conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.
SECTION 26 20 00
3.1.4.10
W912HN-09-X-1813
Flexible Connections
Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed
and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration,
noise transmission, or movement. Install flexible conduit to allow 20
percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size shall be 1/2 inch
diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations
for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement.
Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
3.1.5
Boxes, Outlets, and Supports
Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling
of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes
for metallic raceways shall be cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet
locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, and when
specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel.
Each box shall have volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors
enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be minimum 4
inches square, or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be installed as
required by fixture configurations, as approved. Boxes for use in
masonry-block shall be square-cornered, tile-type, or standard boxes having
square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes
installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of
exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures
when required by fixture terminal operating temperature; fixtures shall be
readily removable for access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are
provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on
suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten boxes and
supports with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle
bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on
steel. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be
separately supported except where used for fixture support sheet metal
boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers.
When
penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting reinforcing steel.
3.1.5.1
Boxes
Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall be minimum 4 inches
square, except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway
enters outlet. Telecommunications outlets shall be a minimum of 4 inches
square by 2 1/8 inches deep. Mount outlet boxes flush in finished walls.
3.1.5.2
Pull Boxes
Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge

galvanized sheet steel, except where cast-metal boxes are required in
locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers.
Where several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate
clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.
3.1.6
Mounting Heights
Mount panelboards and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle

at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount lighting
switches 48 inches above finished floor or surface. Mount receptacles 18
inches above finished floor or surface, unless otherwise indicated. Mount
other devices as indicated. Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and
outletsto center of device or outlet.
SECTION 26 20 00
3.1.7
W912HN-09-X-1813
Conductor Identification
Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice,

or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter,
color coding shall be by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation.
For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, color coding shall be by
plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates;
or heat shrink-type sleeves.
3.1.7.1
Marking Strips
White or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to

each terminal block, shall be provided for wire designations. The wire
numbers shall be made with permanent ink. The marking strips shall be
reversible to permit marking both sides, or two marking strips shall be
furnished with each block. Marking strips shall accommodate the two sets
of wire numbers. Each device to which a connection is made shall be
assigned a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and each device
terminal to which a connection is made shall be marked with a distinct
terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the
Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams. The wire (terminal point)
designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on
terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard
practice; however, additional wire and cable designations for
identification of remote (external) circuits shall be provided for the
Government's wire designations. Prints of the marking strips drawings
submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for
addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along
with any rearrangement of points required.
3.1.8
Splices
Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10

AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make
splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless
connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor
insulation.
3.1.9
Covers and Device Plates
Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces

without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not
permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of
sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates
installed in wet locations.
3.1.10
Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated

walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings.
3.1.11
Grounding and Bonding
Provide In accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 780. Ground exposed,

non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic
raceway systems, grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways,
telecommunications system grounds, and neutral conductor of wiring
systems. Make ground connection at main service equipment, and extend
SECTION 26 20 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
grounding conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service.

Make
ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building.
Interconnect all grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common
ground potential. This shall include lightning protection, electrical
service and telecommunications system grounds. Use main size lightning
conductors for interconnecting these grounding systems to the lightning
protection system. In addition to the requirements specified herein,
provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA J-STD-607.
Where ground fault protection is employed, ensure that connection of ground
and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection.
3.1.11.1
Ground Rods
Provide cone pointed ground rods. The resistance to ground shall be

measured using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. The
maximum resistance of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under
normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a
single rod, two additional rods not less than 6 feet on centers. If the
resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after
rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of
ground rods to add.
3.1.11.2
Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally

inaccessible, by exothermic weld or compression connector.
a.
Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld

manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or
which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not
acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.
b.
Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to

provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies shall be
as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other
standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has
been adequately compressed on the ground wire.
3.1.11.3
Resistance
Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system shall not exceed 5 ohms

under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms, contact
Contracting Officer for further instructions.
3.2
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as

indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.3
WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible

side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.
3.4
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces

or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Where field
SECTION 26 20 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
painting of enclosures for panelboards, load centers or the like is to

correct damage to the manufacturer's factory applied coatings, or to meet
the indicated or specified safety criteria, provide manufacturer's
recommended coatings and apply in accordance to manufacturer's instructions.
3.5
3.5.1

Devices Subject to Manual Operation
Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least five

times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.
3.5.2
600-Volt Wiring Test
Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or
accidental grounds exist. 3.5.3
Ground-Fault Receptacle Test
Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to
verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed.
3.5.4
Grounding System Test
Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground

is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before
making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for
resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not
earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test
to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance
and soil conditions at time measurements were made.
SECTION 26 20 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10A

*1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
11/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

IEEE C135.30
(1988) Standard for Zinc-Coated Ferrous

Ground Rods for Overhead or Underground
Line Construction

NFPA 70
(2011) National Electrical Code
NFPA 780
(2011) Standard for the Installation of

Lightning Protection Systems
UL 467
UL 96
(2005) Standard for Lightning Protection

Components
UL 96A
(2007) Standard for Installation

Requirements for Lightning Protection
Systems
UL Electrical Constructn
(2009) Electrical Construction Equipment

Directory
1.2
SUBMITTALS

approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies
the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the
following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings
Detail drawings, as specified.
SD-07 Certificates
Materials
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
Proof of compliance with requirements of UL, where material or

equipment is specified to comply. The label of or listing in
UL Electrical Constructn will be acceptable evidence. In lieu of
the label or listing, a written certificate from an approved
nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform
such services, stating that the items have been tested and conform
to the requirements and testing methods of Underwriters
Laboratories may be submitted.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of material, including

manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts,
drawings, and installation instructions. Detail drawings shall demonstrate
that the system has been coordinated and will function as a unit. Drawings
shall show proposed layout and mounting and relationship to other parts of
the work.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide a system consisting of the standard products of a manufacturer

regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and
which is the manufacturer's latest UL approved design. The lightning
protection system shall conform to NFPA 70 and NFPA 780, UL 96 and UL 96A,
except where requirements in excess thereof are specified herein. The
entire system shall be provided with UL Master Label certification.
2.2
MATERIALS
2.2.1
Do not use any combination of materials that form an electrolytic couple of

such nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture,
unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals.
Where unusual conditions exist, which would cause corrosion of conductors,
use conductors with protective coatings or oversize conductors. Where a
mechanical hazard is involved, increase the conductor size to compensate
for the hazard or protect the conductors by covering them with molding or
tubing made of wood or nonmagnetic material. When metallic conduit or
tubing is used, the conductor shall be electrically connected at the upper
and lower ends.
2.2.2
Main and Secondary Conductors
Conductors shall be in accordance with NFPA 780 and UL 96 for Class I,

Class II, or Class II modified materials as applicable.
2.2.2.1
Copper
Copper conductorsshall be provided except aluminum is acceptable for use

above ground on fabric covered structures. Counterpoise shall be copper
conductors not smaller than No. 1/0 AWG.
2.2.2.2
Aluminum
Aluminum shall not be allowed except for use above ground on fabric covered
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
structures.
2.2.3
Air Terminals
Terminals shall be in accordance with UL 96 and NFPA 780 and maximum

18-inches in length.
2.2.4
Ground Rods
Rods made of copper-clad steel shall conform to UL 467 and galvanized

ferrous rods shall conform to IEEE C135.30. Ground rods shall be not less
than 3/4 inch in diameter and 10 feet in length.
2.2.5
Connectors
Clamp-type connectors for splicing conductors shall conform to UL 96, class

as applicable, and, Class 2, style and size as required for the
installation. Clamp-type connectors shall only be used for the connection
of the roof conductor to the air terminal and to the guttering. All other
connections, bonds, and splices shall be done by exothermic welds or by
high compression fittings. The exothermic welds and high compression
fittings shall be listed for the purpose. The high compression fittings
shall be the type which require a hydraulically operated mechanism to apply
a minimum of 10,000 psi.
2.2.6
Lightning Protection Components
Lightning protection components, such as bonding plates, air terminal

supports, clips, and fasteners shall conform to UL 96, classes as
applicable.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work. No departures shall be made without the prior
approval of the Contracting Officer.
3.2
INTEGRAL SYSTEM
3.2.1
Provide a lightning protection system consisting of air terminals, roof

conductors, down conductors, ground connections, and grounds, electrically
interconnected to form the shortest distance to ground. All conductors on
the structures shall be exposed except where conductors are in protective
sleeves exposed on the outside walls. Secondary conductors shall
interconnect with grounded metallic parts within the building.
Interconnections made within side-flash distances shall be at or above the
level of the grounded metallic parts.
3.2.1.1
Air Terminals
Air terminal design and support shall be in accordance with NFPA 780.
Terminals shall be rigidly connected to, and made electrically continuous
with, roof conductors by means of pressure connectors or crimped joints of
T-shaped malleable metal and connected to the air terminal by a dowel or
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
threaded fitting. Air terminals at the ends of the structure shall be set
not more than 2 feet from the ends of the ridge or edges and corners of
roofs. Spacing of air terminals less than 2 feet in height on ridges,
parapets, and around the perimeter of buildings with flat roofs shall not
exceed 20 feet. On large, flat or gently sloping roofs, as defined in
NFPA 780, air terminals shall be placed at points of the intersection of
imaginary lines dividing the surface into rectangles having sides not
exceeding 50 feet in length. Air terminals shall be secured against
overturning either by attachment to the object to be protected or by means
of a substantial tripod or other braces permanently and rigidly attached to
the building or structure. Metal projections and metal parts of buildings
and other metal objects that do not contain hazardous materials and that
may be struck but not appreciably damaged by lightning, need not be
provided with air terminals. However, these metal objects shall be bonded
to the lightning conductor through a metal conductor of the same unit
weight per length as the main conductor.
3.2.1.2
Roof Conductors
Roof conductors shall be connected directly to the roof or ridge roll.

Sharp bends or turns in conductors shall be avoided. Necessary turns shall
have a radius of not less than 8 inches. Conductors shall preserve a
downward or horizontal course and shall be rigidly fastened every 3 feet
along the roof and down the building to ground.
All connections shall be
electrically continuous. Roof conductors shall be coursed along the
contours of flat roofs, ridges, parapets, and edges; and where necessary,
over flat surfaces, in such a way as to join each air terminal to all the
rest. Roof conductors surrounding flat surfaces, and flat roofs shall be
connected to form a closed loop.
3.2.1.3
Down Conductors
Down conductors shall be electrically continuous from air terminals and

roof conductors to grounding electrodes. Down conductors shall be coursed
over extreme outer portions of the building, such as corners, with
consideration given to the location of ground connections and air
terminals. Each building or structure shall have not less than two down
conductors located as widely separated as practicable, at diagonally
opposite corners. On rectangular structures having gable, hip, or gambrel
roofs more than 110 feet long, there shall be at least one additional down
conductor for each additional 50 feet of length or fraction thereof. On
rectangular structures having French, flat, or sawtooth roofs exceeding 250
feet in perimeter, there shall be at least one additional down conductor
for each 100 feet of perimeter or fraction thereof. On an L- or T-shaped
structure, there shall be at least one additional down conductor; on an
H-shaped structure, at least two additional down conductors; and on a
wing-built structure, at least one additional down conductor for each
wing. On irregularly shaped structures, the total number of down
conductors shall be sufficient to make the average distance between them
along the perimeter not greater than 100 feet. On structures exceeding 50
feet in height, there shall be at least one additional down conductor for
each additional 60 feet of height or fraction thereof, except that this
application shall not cause down conductors to be placed about the
perimeter of the structure at intervals of less than 50 feet. Additional
down conductors shall be installed when necessary to avoid "dead ends" or
branch conductors ending at air terminals, except where the air terminal is
on a roof below the main protected level and the "dead end" or branch
conductor is less than 16 feet in length and maintains a horizontal or
downward coursing. Down conductors shall be equally and symmetrically
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
spaced about the perimeter of the structure. Down conductors shall be

protected by placing in schedule 40 pvc conduit for a minimum distance of
72 inch above finished grade level.
3.2.1.4
Interconnection of Metallic Parts
Gutters shall be connected directly to the grounds or down conductors using

not smaller than No. 6 copper conductor, or equivalent. Conductors placed
where there is probability of unusual wear, mechanical injury, or corrosion
shall be of greater electrical capacity than would normally be used, or
shall be protected.
3.2.1.5
Ground Connections
Ground connections comprising continuations of down conductors from the

structure to the grounding electrode shall securely connect the down
conductor and ground in a manner to ensure electrical continuity between
the two. All connections shall be listed for the purpose. There shall be
a ground connection for each down conductor. Ground connections shall be
protected from mechanical injury. In making ground connections, advantage
shall be taken of all permanently moist places where practicable, although
such places shall be avoided if the area is wet with waste water that
contains chemical substances, especially those corrosive to metal.
3.2.1.6
Grounding Electrodes
A grounding electrode shall be provided for each down conductor located as

shown. A driven ground shall extend into the earth for a distance of not
less than 10 feet. Ground rods shall be set not less than 3 feet, nor more
than 8 feet, from the structures foundation. The complete installation
shall have a total resistance to ground of not more than 15 ohms if a
counterpoise is not used. Ground rods shall be tested individually prior
to connection to the system and the system as a whole shall be tested not
less than 48 hours after rainfall. When the resistance of the complete
installation exceeds the specified value or two ground rods individually
exceed 25 ohms, the Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately. A
counterpoise, where required, shall be of No. 2/0 copper cable minimum
shall be laid around the perimeter of the structure in a trench not less
than 2 feet deep at a distance not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet
from the nearest point of the structure. All connections between ground
connectors and grounds or counterpoise, and between counterpoise and
grounds shall be electrically continuous.
3.2.2
Metal Roofs
Metal roofs which are in the form of sections insulated from each other
shall be made electrically continuous by bonding. Air terminals shall be
connected to, and made electrically continuous with, the metal roof as well
as the roof conductors and down conductors. Ridge cables and roof
conductors shall be bonded to the roof at the upper and lower edges of the
roof and at intervals not to exceed 100 feet. The down conductors shall be
bonded to roof conductors and to the lower edge of the metal roof. Where
the metal of the roof is in small sections, the air terminals and down
conductors shall have connections made to at least four of the sections.
All connections shall have electrical continuity and have a surface contact
of at least 3 square inch.
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10
3.2.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Steel Frame Building
The steel framework shall be made electrically continuous. Electrical

continuity may be provided by bolting, riveting, or welding steel frame,
unless a specific method is noted on the drawings.
Connections to
structural framework shall be by means of nut and bolt or welding. All
connections between columns and ground connections shall be made at the
bottom of the steel columns. Ground connections to grounding electrodes or
counterpoise shall be run from not less than one-half of all the columns
distributed equally around the perimeter of the structure at intervals
averaging not more than 60 feet.
3.3
INSPECTION
The lightning protection system will be inspected by the Contracting

Officer to determine conformance with the requirements of this
specification. No part of the system shall be concealed until so
authorized by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 26 51 00A
*1 INTERIOR LIGHTING
07/07
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

ASTM E2129
(2010) Standard Practice for Data

Collection for Sustainability Assessment
of Building Products
CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)

CEC Title 24
(1978; R 2005) California's Energy

Efficiency Standards for Residential and
Nonresidential Buildings
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)

IESNA HB-9
(2000; Errata 2004; Errata 2005; Errata

2006) IES Lighting Handbook

IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative

Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE C2
(2012) National Electrical Safety Code
IEEE C62.41.1
(2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges

Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41.2
(2002) Recommended Practice on

Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA ANSLG C82.11
(2011) Lamp Ballasts - High-Frequency

Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
NEMA C136.10

Roadway and Area Lighting
Equipment-Locking-Type Photocontrol
Devices and Mating Receptacles--Physical
and Electrical Interchangeability and
SECTION 26 51 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Testing
NEMA LL 1
(1997; R 2002) Procedures for Linear

Fluorescent Lamp Sample Preparation and
the TCLP Extraction

NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2;

Code
Energy Star
(1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy

Efficiency Labeling System

UL 1598
(2008; Reprint Jan 2010) Luminaires
UL 773
(1995; Reprint Mar 2002) Standard for

Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for
Use with Area Lighting
UL 773A
(2006; Reprint Mar 2011) Standard for

Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for
Lighting Control
UL 935
(2001; Reprint Nov 2011) Standard for

Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture

accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of
buildings are specified in this section.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
a.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics

terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as
defined in IEEE 100.
b.
Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50
percent will have survived under normal conditions.
c.
Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all
the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current.
1.4
1.4.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Lighting Control System
Provide lighting control system as indicated. Lighting control equipment

shall include, if indicated: control modules, power packs, dimming
ballasts, occupancy sensors, and light level sensors.
SECTION 26 51 00
1.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
SUBMITTALS

approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications,
and methods prescribed by the IESNA HB-9, as applicable, for the lighting
system specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Fluorescent lighting fixtures
Fluorescent electronic ballasts
Fluorescent lamps
Light Emitting Diode Lighting fixture
Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility
and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin
from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of
local/regional materials to total dollar value of products
included in project.
Environmental Data
Energy Efficiency
SD-06 Test Reports
Operating test
Submit test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality
Control."
Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section
01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein,
showing all light fixtures, control modules, control zones,
occupancy sensors, light level sensors, power packs, dimming
ballasts, schematic diagrams and all interconnecting control
wire, conduit, and associated hardware.
1.6
1.6.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts
Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled

"Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" contained herein. As an option,
submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer's electronic ballast
SECTION 26 51 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer's

catalog data. This information shall include published specifications and
sketches, which covers the information required by the paragraph entitled
"Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" herein. This information may be
supplemented by catalog data if required, and shall contain a list of
vendors with vendor part numbers.
1.6.2
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.6.3
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.6.3.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.6.3.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site

shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.6.3.3
Energy Efficiency
Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for
lighting products. Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications for
equipment provided under this section. Submit data indicating lumens per
watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source.
1.7
WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are

reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
SECTION 26 51 00
1.7.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
Electronic Ballast Warranty
Furnish the electronic ballast manufacturer's warranty. The warranty

period shall not be less than 5 years from the date of manufacture of the
electronic ballast. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture,
transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed 12 months, thereby
permitting 4 years of the ballast 5 year warranty to be in service and
energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall
be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using
Government facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an
improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast.
1.8
1.8.1
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as

manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources.
1.8.2
Environmental Data
Submit Table 1 of ASTM E2129 for the following products: lighting.

PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
UL 1598.
2.1.1
Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts.
Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts
The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following

characteristics:
a.
Ballast shall comply with UL 935, NEMA ANSLG C82.11, NFPA 70, and
CEC Title 24 unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall be 100 percent
electronic high frequency type with no magnetic core and coil
components. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by
IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast shall be designed for the
wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall
be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are
connected.
b.
Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum).
c.
Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum).

Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the
operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems.
Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.
d.
Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen

output with a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation.
Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker (maximum) using any compatible
lamp.
e.
Ballast factor shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum).

Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).
SECTION 26 51 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
f.
Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A."
g.
Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on

the ballast.
h.
Ballasts shall be programmed start unless otherwise indicated.

Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series circuit
configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start
ballasts where available.
i.
Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a

minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.
j.
Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years

from date of manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled "Electronic
Ballast Warranty" herein.
2.1.1.1
T-8 Lamp Ballast
a.
Total harmonic distortion (THD):
b.
Input wattage.
2.1.2
a.
Shall be 20 percent (maximum).
1.
32 watts (maximum) when operating one F32T8 lamp
2.
62 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps
3.
92 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps
4.
114 watts (maximum) when operating four F32T8 lamps
Fluorescent Lamps
T-8 rapid start low mercury lamps shall be rated 32 watts (maximum),
2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature
of 3500 K, and an average rated life of 20,000 hours. Low mercury
lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate
Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation
procedure described in NEMA LL 1.
Average rated life is based on 3 hours operating per start.

2.2
2.2.1
SWITCHES
Toggle Switches
Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.3
PHOTOCELL SWITCH
UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode

type cell rated 120 volts ac, 60 Hz with single-throw contacts. Switch
shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and off at 2 to 10 footcandles.
time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light
sources. Provide switch:
a.
In a high-impact-resistant, noncorroding and nonconductive molded

plastic housing with a locking-type receptacle conforming to
SECTION 26 51 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
NEMA C136.10, rated 1800 VA, minimum.

2.4
2.4.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
2.4.2
Labels
Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. All

luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and
ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp characteristics
shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":
a.
Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin,
quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and
compact fluorescent luminaires.
b.
Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent.
c.
Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for
all luminaires.
All markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily
visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when
lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating
multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.
2.5
FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which

shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the
requirements specified herein.
3.1.1
Lamps
Lamps of the type, wattage, and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered
to the project in the original cartons and installed just prior to project
completion. Lamps installed and used for working light during construction
shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more than 15
percent of their rated life has been used. Lamps shall be tested for
proper operation prior to turn-over and shall be replaced if necessary with
new lamps from the original manufacturer. Provide 10 percent spare lamps
of each type from the original manufacturer.
3.1.2
Lighting Fixtures
Set lighting fixtures level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with
SECTION 26 51 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with manufacturers'

directions and approved drawings. Installation shall meet requirements of
NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of
fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for
wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting
fixtures on the job before commencing installation and, where applicable,
after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being
installed.
3.1.3
Ballasts
3.1.3.1
Electronic Dimming Ballasts
All electronic dimming ballasts controlled by the same controller shall be

of the same manufacturer. All fluorescent lamps on electronic dimming
ballast control shall be seasoned or burned in at full light output for 100
hours before dimming.
3.1.4
Photocell Switch Aiming
Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces

or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.3
Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly

installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that
equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section.
3.3.1
Electronic Dimming Ballast
Test for full range of dimming capability.

flicker over full dimming range.
Observe for visually detectable
SECTION 26 51 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 31 00 00A
*1 EARTHWORK
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

(AASHTO)
AASHTO T 180

(18-in.) Drop
AASHTO T 224

Correction for Coarse Particles in the
Soil Compaction Test
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C600
(2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water

Mains and Their Appurtenances

ASTM C136
(2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve

Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C33/C33M

Concrete Aggregates
ASTM D1140
(2000; R 2006) Amount of Material in Soils

Finer than the No. 200 (75-micrometer)
Sieve
ASTM D1556
(2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in

Place by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1557

ASTM D1883
(2007e2) CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of

Laboratory-Compacted Soils
ASTM D2487
(2011) Soils for Engineering Purposes

(Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D422
(1963; R 2007) Particle-Size Analysis of

SECTION 31 00 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Soils
ASTM D4318
(2010) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and

Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D6938
(2010) Standard Test Method for In-Place

Density and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
ASTM D698
(2007e1) Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard
Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (600
kN-m/cu. m.))

EPA 600/4-79/020
(1983) Methods for Chemical Analysis of

Water and Wastes
EPA SW-846.3-3
(1999, Third Edition, Update III-A) Test

Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste:
Physical/Chemical Methods
1.2
1.2.1
DEFINITIONS
Satisfactory Materials
Satisfactory materials comprise any materials classified by ASTM D2487 as

GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, SC, CL, ML, CL-ML, . Satisfactory materials
for grading comprise stones less than 8 inches, except for fill material
for pavements and railroads which comprise stones less than 3 inches in any
dimension.
1.2.2
Unsatisfactory Materials
Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory

materials are unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include
man-made fills; trash; refuse; backfills from previous construction; and
material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic
matter or frozen material. Notify the Contracting Officer when
encountering any contaminated materials.
1.2.3
Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials
Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D2487 as GW,

GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC, SC,
ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified
as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic. Perform testing,
required for classifying materials, in accordance with ASTM D4318, ASTM C136,
ASTM D422, and ASTM D1140.
1.2.4
Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is

expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test
procedure presented in ASTM D1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory
maximum density. Since ASTM D1557 applies only to soils that have 30
percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch
SECTION 31 00 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
sieve, express the degree of compaction for material having more than 30
percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve as a
percentage of the maximum density in accordance with AASHTO T 180 and
corrected with AASHTO T 224. To maintain the same percentage of coarse
material, use the "remove and replace" procedure as described in NOTE 8 of
Paragraph 7.2 in AASHTO T 180.
1.2.5
Topsoil
Material suitable for topsoils obtained from offsite areas is defined as:
Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in
the area, free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than one inch diameter,
brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material detrimental to plant
growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.
1.2.6
Hard/Unyielding Materials
Hard/Unyielding materials comprise weathered rock, dense consolidated

deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included in the
definition of "rock" with stones greater than 3 inch in any dimension or as
defined by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller. These materials
usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or
jack hammers for removal.
1.2.7
Rock
Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented,

laminated, or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits, neither of which
can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting, drilling and the
use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-mounted
pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried
masonry, or concrete other than pavement exceeding 1/2 cubic yard in
volume. Removal of hard material will not be considered rock excavation
because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to
increase production.
1.2.8
Unstable Material
Unstable materials are too wet to properly support the utility pipe,
conduit, or appurtenant structure.
1.2.9
1.2.9.1
Select Granular Material

Select granular material consist of materials classified as GW, GP, SW, SP,
by ASTM D2487 where indicated. The liquid limit of such material must not
exceed 35 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. The
plasticity index must not be greater than 12 percent when tested in
accordance with ASTM D4318, and not more than 35 percent by weight may be
finer than No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D1140.
1.2.9.2
California Bearing Ratio Values
Bearing Ratio: At 0.1 inch penetration, provide a bearing ratio of 14

percent at 95 percent ASTM D1557 maximum density as determined in
accordance with ASTM D1883 for a laboratory soaking period of not less than
4 days.
SECTION 31 00 00
1.2.10
W912HN-09-X-1813
Initial Backfill Material
Initial backfill consists of select granular material or satisfactory

materials free from rocks 3 inches or larger in any dimension or free from
rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is
smaller. When the pipe is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection, free
the initial backfill material of stones larger than 3 inches in any
dimension or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller.
1.2.11
Expansive Soils
Expansive soils are defined as soils that have a plasticity index equal to
or greater than 12 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Subsurface soil boring logs are shown on the drawings . These data
represent the best subsurface information available; however, variations
may exist in the subsurface between boring locations.
1.3.1
Classification of Excavation
No consideration will be given to the nature of the materials, and all

excavation will be designated as unclassified excavation.
1.3.1.1
Common Excavation
Include common excavation with the satisfactory removal and disposal of all
materials not classified as rock excavation.
1.3.1.2
Rock Excavation
Submit notification of encountering rock in the project. Include rock

excavation with blasting, excavating, grading, disposing of material
classified as rock, and the satisfactory removal and disposal of boulders
1/2 cubic yard or more in volume; solid rock; rock material that is in
ledges, bedded deposits, and unstratified masses, which cannot be removed
without systematic drilling and blasting; firmly cemented conglomerate
deposits possessing the characteristics of solid rock impossible to remove
without systematic drilling and blasting; and hard materials (see
Definitions). Include the removal of any concrete or masonry structures,
except pavements, exceeding 1/2 cubic yard in volume that may be
encountered in the work in this classification. If at any time during
excavation, including excavation from borrow areas, the Contractor
encounters material that may be classified as rock excavation, uncover such
material and notify the Contracting Officer. Do not proceed with the
excavation of this material until the Contracting Officer has classified
the materials as common excavation or rock excavation and has taken cross
sections as required. Failure on the part of the Contractor to uncover
such material, notify the Contracting Officer, and allow ample time for
classification and cross sectioning of the undisturbed surface of such
material will cause the forfeiture of the Contractor's right of claim to
any classification or volume of material to be paid for other than that
allowed by the Contracting Officer for the areas of work in which such
deposits occur.
1.3.2
Blasting
Blasting will not be permitted.

SECTION 31 00 00
1.3.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Dewatering Work Plan
Submit procedures for accomplishing dewatering work.

1.4
SUBMITTALS

Shoring; G, RO
Dewatering Work Plan; G, RO
SD-03 Product Data
Utilization of Excavated Materials; G, RO
Rock Excavation
Opening of any Excavation or Borrow Pit
Shoulder Construction
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
Borrow Site Testing
SD-07 Certificates
Testing
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSITE SOILS
Test offsite soils brought in for use as backfill for Total Petroleum
Hydrocarbons (TPH), Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and
full Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) including
ignitability, corrosivity and reactivity. Backfill shall contain a maximum
of 100 parts per million (ppm) of total petroleum hydrocarbons (TPH) and a
maximum of 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene
(BTEX) and shall pass the TCPL test. Determine TPH concentrations by using
EPA 600/4-79/020 Method 418.1. Determine BTEX concentrations by using
EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 5030/8020. Perform TCLP in accordance with
EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 1311. Provide Borrow Site Testing for TPH, BTEX and
TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow site, with at
least one test from each borrow site. Within 24 hours of conclusion of
physical tests, submit 2 copies of test results, including calibration
curves and results of calibration tests. Do not bring material onsite
until tests have been approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.2
BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant,

polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and
identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3 inches
SECTION 31 00 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with
warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously
over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION,
BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Provide
permanent color and printing, unaffected by moisture or soil.
Warning Tape Color Codes
2.2.1
Red:
Electric
Orange:
Telephone and Other

Communications
Green:
Sewer Systems
Warning Tape for Metallic Piping
Provide acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to

the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum
thickness of 0.003 inch and a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and
1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.
2.2.2
Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping
Provide polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and

printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.004
inch, and a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi
crosswise. Manufacture tape with integral wires, foil backing, or other
means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3
feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or
provide with other means of corrosion protection.
2.3
DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
Insulate a single strand, solid copper detection wire with a minimum of 12

AWG.
2.4
MATERIAL FOR RIP-RAP
Provide Bedding material and rock conforming to GA DOT State Standard for
construction indicated.
2.4.1
Bedding Material
Provide bedding material consisting of sand, gravel, or crushed rock, well

graded, with a maximum particle size of 2 inches. Compose material of
tough, durable particles. Allow fines passing the No. 200 standard sieve
with a plasticity index less than six.
2.4.2
Rock
Provide rock fragments sufficiently durable to ensure permanence in the

structure and the environment in which it is to be used. Use rock
fragments free from cracks, seams, and other defects that would increase
the risk of deterioration from natural causes. Provide fragments sized so
that no individual fragment exceeds a weight of 150 pounds and that no more
than 10 percent of the mixture, by weight, consists of fragments weighing 2
pounds or less each. Provide rock with a minimum specific gravity of
SECTION 31 00 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
2.50. Do not permit the inclusion of more than trace 1 percent quantities
of dirt, sand, clay, and rock fines.
2.5
CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER
Provide capillary water barrier of clean, poorly graded crushed rock,

crushed gravel, or uncrushed gravel placed beneath a building slab with or
without a vapor barrier to cut off the capillary flow of pore water to the
area immediately below. Conform to ASTM C33/C33M for fine aggregate
grading with a maximum of 3 percent by weight passing ASTM D1140, No. 200
sieve, or coarse aggregate Size 57, 67, or 77.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
Where indicated or directed, strip topsoil to a depth of 4 inches. Spread

topsoil on areas already graded and prepared for topsoil, or transported
and deposited in stockpiles convenient to areas that are to receive
application of the topsoil later, or at locations indicated or specified.
Keep topsoil separate from other excavated materials, brush, litter,
objectionable weeds, roots, stones larger than 2 inches in diameter, and
other materials that would interfere with planting and maintenance
operations. Remove from the site any surplus of topsoil from excavations
and gradings.
3.2
GENERAL EXCAVATION
Perform excavation of every type of material encountered within the limits

of the project to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and as
specified. Perform the grading in accordance with the typical sections
shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph FINISHING. Transport
satisfactory excavated materials and place in fill or embankment within the
limits of the work. Excavate unsatisfactory materials encountered within
the limits of the work below grade and replace with satisfactory materials
as directed. Include such excavated material and the satisfactory material
ordered as replacement in excavation. Dispose surplus satisfactory
excavated material not required for fill or embankment in areas approved
for surplus material storage or designated waste areas. Dispose
unsatisfactory excavated material in designated waste or spoil areas.
During construction, perform excavation and fill in a manner and sequence
that will provide proper drainage at all times. Excavate material required
for fill or embankment in excess of that produced by excavation within the
grading limits from the borrow areas indicated or from other approved areas
selected by the Contractor as specified.
3.2.1
Ditches, and Channel Changes
Finish excavation of ditches, and channel changes by cutting accurately to

the cross sections, grades, and elevations shown on Drawings. Do not
excavate ditches and gutters below grades shown. Backfill the excessive
open ditch excavation with satisfactory, thoroughly compacted, material or
with suitable stone or cobble to grades shown. Dispose excavated material
as shown or as directed, except in no case allow material be deposited a
maximum 4 feet from edge of a ditch. Maintain excavations free from
detrimental quantities of leaves, brush, sticks, trash, and other debris
until final acceptance of the work.
SECTION 31 00 00
3.2.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Drainage Structures
Make excavations to the lines, grades, and elevations shown, or as

directed. Provide trenches and foundation pits of sufficient size to
permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of
structure footings and foundations as shown. Clean rock or other hard
foundation material of loose debris and cut to a firm, level, stepped, or
serrated surface. Remove loose disintegrated rock and thin strata. Do not
disturb the bottom of the excavation when concrete or masonry is to be
placed in an excavated area. Do not excavate to the final grade level
until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed.
3.2.3
Drainage
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water
encountered during construction. Completely drain construction site during
periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. Construct
storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site
development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to
provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity
and provide temporary ditches, swales, and other drainage features and
equipment as required to maintain dry soils. When unsuitable working
platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for
subsequent construction features develop, remove unsuitable material and
provide new soil material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by
the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit
construction to proceed.
3.2.4
Trench Excavation Requirements
Excavate the trench as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be

installed. Slope trench walls below the top of the pipe, or make vertical,
and of such width as recommended in the manufacturer's printed installation
manual. Provide vertical trench walls where no manufacturer's printed
installation manual is available. Shore trench walls more than 5 feet
high, cut back to a stable slope, or provide with equivalent means of
protection for employees who may be exposed to moving ground or cave in.
Excavate trench walls which are cut back to at least the angle of repose of
the soil. Give special attention to slopes which may be adversely affected
by weather or moisture content. Do not exceed the trench width below the
pipe top of 24 inches plus pipe outside diameter (O.D.) for pipes of less
than 24 inches inside diameter, and do not exceed 36 inches plus pipe
outside diameter for sizes larger than 24 inches inside diameter. Where
recommended trench widths are exceeded, provide redesign, stronger pipe, or
special installation procedures by the Contractor. The Contractor is
responsible for the cost of redesign, stronger pipe, or special
installation procedures without any additional cost to the Government.
3.2.4.1
Bottom Preparation
Grade the bottoms of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and

support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Excavate bell
holes to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point
bearing. Remove stones of 3 inch or greater in any dimension, or as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, to avoid point
bearing.
SECTION 31 00 00
3.2.4.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Removal of Unyielding Material
Where overdepth is not indicated and unyielding material is encountered in

the bottom of the trench, remove such material 12 inch below the required
grade and replaced with suitable materials as provided in paragraph
BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION.
3.2.4.3
Removal of Unstable Material
Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove

such material to the depth directed and replace it to the proper grade with
select granular material as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND
COMPACTION. When removal of unstable material is required due to the
Contractor's fault or neglect in performing the work, the Contractor is
responsible for excavating the resulting material and replacing it without
3.2.4.4
Excavation for Appurtenances
Provide excavation for manholes, catch-basins, inlets, or similar

structures sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear between the outer
structure surfaces and the face of the excavation or support members Clean
rock or loose debris and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped, or
serrated, as shown or as directed. Remove loose disintegrated rock and
thin strata. Specify removal of unstable material. When concrete or
masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, take special care not to
disturb the bottom of the excavation. Do not excavate to the final grade
level until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed.
3.2.5
Underground Utilities
The Contractor is responsible for movement of construction machinery and

equipment over pipes and utilities during construction. Perform work
adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with
procedures outlined by utility company. Excavation made with power-driven
equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Government-owned
utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or
for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by
hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and
continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new
grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected
by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the
Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface
construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.
3.2.6
Structural Excavation
Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the
Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement. Excavate to bottom of
pile cap prior to placing or driving piles, unless authorized otherwise by
the Contracting Officer. Backfill and compact over excavations and changes
in grade due to pile driving operations to 95 percent of ASTM D698 maximum
density.
3.3
SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL
Select borrow material to meet the requirements and conditions of the

particular fill or embankment for which it is to be used. Obtain borrow
material from the borrow areas provided on plans. Unless otherwise
SECTION 31 00 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
provided in the contract, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining the

right to procure material, pay royalties and other charges involved, and
bear the expense of developing the sources, including rights-of-way for
hauling from the owners. Borrow material from approved sources on
Government-controlled land may be obtained without payment of royalties.
Unless specifically provided, do not obtain borrow within the limits of the
project site without prior written approval. Consider necessary clearing,
grubbing, and satisfactory drainage of borrow pits and the disposal of
debris thereon related operations to the borrow excavation.
3.4
OPENING AND DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATION AND BORROW PITS
Except as otherwise permitted, excavate borrow pits and other excavation

areas providing adequate drainage. Transport overburden and other spoil
material to designated spoil areas or otherwise dispose of as directed.
Provide neatly trimmed and drained borrow pits after the excavation is
completed. Ensure that excavation of any area, operation of borrow pits,
or dumping of spoil material results in minimum detrimental effects on
natural environmental conditions.
3.5
3.5.1
SHORING
Submit a Shoring and Sheeting plan for approval 15 days prior to starting
work. Submit drawings and calculations, certified by a registered
professional engineer, describing the methods for shoring and sheeting of
excavations. Finish shoring, including sheet piling, and install as
necessary to protect workmen, banks, adjacent paving, structures, and
utilities. Remove shoring, bracing, and sheeting as excavations are
backfilled, in a manner to prevent caving.
3.5.2
Geotechnical Engineer
Hire a Professional Geotechnical Engineer to provide inspection of

excavations and soil/groundwater conditions throughout construction. The
Geotechnical Engineer is responsible for performing pre-construction and
periodic site visits throughout construction to assess site conditions.
The Geotechnical Engineer is responsible for updating the excavation,
sheeting and dewatering plans as construction progresses to reflect
changing conditions and submit an updated plan if necessary. Submit a
monthly written report, informing the Contractor and Contracting Officer of
the status of the plan and an accounting of the Contractor's adherence to
the plan addressing any present or potential problems. The Contracting
Officer is responsible for arranging meetings with the Geotechnical
Engineer at any time throughout the contract duration.
3.6
GRADING AREAS
Where indicated, divide work into grading areas within which satisfactory
excavated material will be placed in embankments, fills, and required
backfills. Do not haul satisfactory material excavated in one grading area
to another grading area except when so directed in writing. Place and
grade stockpiles of satisfactory as specified. Keep stockpiles in a neat
and well drained condition, giving due consideration to drainage at all
times. Clear, grub, and seal by rubber-tired equipment, the ground surface
at stockpile locations; separately stockpile excavated satisfactory and
unsatisfactory materials. Protect stockpiles of satisfactory materials
from contamination which may destroy the quality and fitness of the
SECTION 31 00 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
stockpiled material. If the Contractor fails to protect the stockpiles,

and any material becomes unsatisfactory, remove and replace such material
with satisfactory material from approved sources at no additional cost to
the government.
3.7
FINAL GRADE OF SURFACES TO SUPPORT CONCRETE
Do not excavate to final grade until just before concrete is to be placed.

Only use excavation methods that will leave the foundation rock in a solid
and unshattered condition. Roughen the level surfaces, and cut the sloped
surfaces, as indicated, into rough steps or benches to provide a
satisfactory bond. Protect shales from slaking and all surfaces from
erosion resulting from ponding or water flow.
3.8
3.8.1
GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION

Remove and replace unsatisfactory material with satisfactory materials, as

directed by the Contracting Officer, in surfaces to receive fill or in
excavated areas. Scarify the surface to a depth of 6 inches before the
fill is started. Plow, step, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper
than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that the fill material will bond with
the existing material. When subgrades are less than the specified density,
break up the ground surface to a minimum depth of 6 inches, pulverizing,
and compacting to the specified density. When the subgrade is part fill
and part excavation or natural ground, scarify the excavated or natural
ground portion to a depth of 12 inches and compact it as specified for the
adjacent fill.
3.8.2
Frozen Material
Do not place material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers,
steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved equipment well suited to the soil
being compacted. Moisten material as necessary to provide the moisture
content that will readily facilitate obtaining the specified compaction
with the equipment used.
3.9
UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
Dispose unsatisfactory materials removing from excavations into designated

waste disposal or spoil areas. Use satisfactory material removed from
excavations, insofar as practicable, in the construction of fills,
embankments, subgrades, shoulders, bedding (as backfill), and for similar
purposes. Submit procedure and location for disposal of unused
satisfactory material. Submit proposed source of borrow material. Do not
waste any satisfactory excavated material without specific written
authorization. Dispose of satisfactory material, authorized to be wasted,
in designated areas approved for surplus material storage or designated
waste areas as directed. Clear and grub newly designated waste areas on
Government-controlled land before disposal of waste material thereon.
Stockpile and use coarse rock from excavations for constructing slopes or
embankments adjacent to streams, or sides and bottoms of channels and for
protecting against erosion. Do not dispose excavated material to obstruct
the flow of any stream, endanger a partly finished structure, impair the
efficiency or appearance of any structure, or be detrimental to the
completed work in any way.
SECTION 31 00 00
3.10
W912HN-09-X-1813
BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE
3.10.1
Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape
12 inches below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6
inches below top of subgrade.
3.10.2
Buried Detection Wire
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to

exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe. Extend the wire continuously and
unbroken, from manhole to manhole. Terminate the ends of the wire inside
the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 3 feet of wire,
coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. Furnish insulated wire over
it's entire length. Install wires at manholes between the top of the
corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the
frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, terminate the wire in the
valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.
3.11
BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
Place backfill adjacent to any and all types of structures, and compact to
at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95
percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials, to prevent
wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the structure. Prepare
ground surface on which backfill is to be placed and provide compaction
requirements for backfill materials in conformance with the applicable
portions of paragraphs GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION. Finish compaction by
sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers,
vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.
3.11.1
Trench Backfill
Backfill trenches to the grade shown.

specified tests are performed.
3.11.1.1
Do not backfill the trench until all
Replacement of Unyielding Material
Replace unyielding material removed from the bottom of the trench with
select granular material or initial backfill material.
3.11.1.2
Replacement of Unstable Material
Replace unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or

excavation with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 6
inches loose thickness.
3.11.1.3
Bedding and Initial Backfill
Place initial backfill material and compact it with approved tampers to a

height of at least one foot above the utility pipe or conduit. Bring up
the backfill evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the
pipe. Take care to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the
haunches of the pipe. Except as specified otherwise in the individual
piping section, provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with
AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified herein. Compact backfill to top of
pipe to 95 percent of ASTM D698 maximum density. Provide plastic piping
with bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide materials as follows:
SECTION 31 00 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
a. Class I: Angular, 0.25 to 1.5 inch, graded stone, including a

number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral,
slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed shells.
b. Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of
1.5 inch, including various graded sands and gravels containing small
percentages of fines, generally granular and noncohesive, either wet or
dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are included in this class as
specified in ASTM D2487.
3.11.1.4
Final Backfill
Fill the remainder of the trench, except for special materials for
roadways, railroads and airfields, with satisfactory material. Place
backfill material and compact as follows:
a. Sidewalks, Turfed or Seeded Areas and Miscellaneous Areas: Deposit
backfill in layers of a maximum of 12 inches loose thickness, and
compact it to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils and 90
percent maximum density for cohesionless soils. Do not permit
compaction by water flooding or jetting. Apply this requirement to all
other areas not specifically designated above.
3.11.2
Backfill for Appurtenances
After the manhole, catchbasin, inlet, or similar structure has been

constructed , place backfill in such a manner that the structure is not be
damaged by the shock of falling earth. Deposit the backfill material,
compact it as specified for final backfill, and bring up the backfill
evenly on all sides of the structure to prevent eccentric loading and
excessive stress.
3.12
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the

specific utilities are as follows:
3.12.1
Electrical Distribution System
Provide a minimum cover of 24 inches from the finished grade to direct

burial cable and conduit or duct line, unless otherwise indicated.
3.12.2
Rip-Rap Construction
Construct rip-rap on bedding material in accordance with GA DOT State

Standard in the areas indicated. Trim and dress indicated areas to conform
to cross sections, lines and grades shown within a tolerance of 0.1 foot.
3.12.2.1
Bedding Placement
Spread bedding material uniformly to a thickness of at least 6 inches on

prepared subgrade as indicated. Compaction of bedding is not required.
Finish bedding to present even surface free from mounds and windrows.
3.12.2.2
Stone Placement
Place rock for rip-rap on prepared bedding material to produce a well

graded mass with the minimum practicable percentage of voids in conformance
SECTION 31 00 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
with lines and grades indicated. Distribute larger rock fragments, with
dimensions extending the full depth of the rip-rap throughout the entire
mass and eliminate "pockets" of small rock fragments. Rearrange individual
pieces by mechanical equipment or by hand as necessary to obtain the
distribution of fragment sizes specified above.
3.13
3.13.1
EMBANKMENTS
Earth Embankments
Construct earth embankments from satisfactory materials free of organic or

frozen material and rocks with any dimension greater than 3 inches. Place
the material in successive horizontal layers of loose material not more than
6 inches in depth. Spread each layer uniformly on a soil surface that has
been moistened or aerated as necessary, and scarified or otherwise broken
up so that the fill will bond with the surface on which it is placed.
After spreading, plow, disk, or otherwise brake up each layer; moisten or
aerate as necessary; thoroughly mix; and compact to at least 90 percent
laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95 percent laboratory
maximum density for cohesionless materials. Compaction requirements for
the upper portion of earth embankments forming subgrade for pavements are
identical with those requirements specified in paragraph SUBGRADE
PREPARATION. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired
rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved
equipment.
3.14
3.14.1
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
Proof Rolling
Finish proof rolling on an exposed subgrade free of surface water (wet

conditions resulting from rainfall) which would promote degradation of an
otherwise acceptable subgrade. After stripping, proof roll the existing
subgrade with six passes of a 15 ton, pneumatic-tired roller. Operate the
roller in a systematic manner to ensure the number of passes over all
areas, and at speeds between 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 mph. When proof rolling,
provide one-half of the passes made with the roller in a direction
perpendicular to the other passes. Notify the Contracting Officer a
minimum of 3 days prior to proof rolling. Perform proof rolling in the
presence of the Contracting Officer. Undercut rutting or pumping of
material as directed by the Contracting Officer and replace with select
material.
3.14.2
Construction
Shape subgrade to line, grade, and cross section, and compact as

specified. Include plowing, disking, and any moistening or aerating
required to obtain specified compaction for this operation. Remove soft or
otherwise unsatisfactory material and replace with satisfactory excavated
material or other approved material as directed. Excavate rock encountered
in the cut section to a depth of 6 inches below finished grade for the
subgrade. Bring up low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory
material or excavation of rock to required grade with satisfactory
materials, and shape the entire subgrade to line, grade, and cross section
and compact as specified. Do not vary the elevation of the finish subgrade
more than 0.05 foot from the established grade and cross section.
SECTION 31 00 00
3.14.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Compaction
Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers,

steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.
Except for paved areas and railroads, compact each layer of the embankment
to at least 90 percent of laboratory maximum density.
3.14.3.1
Subgrade for Gravel Drive
Compact subgrade for gravel drive to at least 95 percentage laboratory

maximum density for the depth below the surface of gravel drive shown.
3.15
FINISHING
Finish the surface of excavations, embankments, and subgrades to a smooth

and compact surface in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross
sections or elevations shown. Provide the degree of finish for graded
areas within 0.1 foot of the grades and elevations indicated except that
the degree of finish for subgrades specified in paragraph SUBGRADE
PREPARATION. Finish gutters and ditches in a manner that will result in
effective drainage. Finish the surface of areas to be turfed from
settlement or washing to a smoothness suitable for the application of
turfing materials. Repair graded, topsoiled, or backfilled areas prior to
acceptance of the work, and re-established grades to the required
elevations and slopes.
3.15.1
Subgrade and Embankments
During construction, keep embankments and excavations shaped and drained.

Maintain ditches and drains along subgrade to drain effectively at all
times. Do not disturb the finished subgrade by traffic or other
operation. Protect and maintain the finished subgrade in a satisfactory
condition until ballast, subbase, base, or pavement is placed. Do not
permit the storage or stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade.
Do not lay subbase, base course, ballast, or pavement until the subgrade
has been checked and approved, and in no case place subbase, base,
surfacing, pavement, or ballast on a muddy, spongy, or frozen subgrade.
3.15.2
Capillary Water Barrier
Place a capillary water barrier under concrete floor and area-way slabs
grade directly on the subgrade and compact with a minimum of two passes of
a hand-operated plate-type vibratory compactor.
3.15.3
Grading Around Structures
Construct areas within 5 feet outside of each structure line true-to-grade,

shape to drain, and maintain free of trash and debris until final
inspection has been completed and the work has been accepted.
3.16
PLACING TOPSOIL
On areas to receive topsoil, prepare the compacted subgrade soil to a 2

inches depth for bonding of topsoil with subsoil. Spread topsoil evenly to
a thickness of 4 inch and grade to the elevations and slopes shown. Do not
spread topsoil when frozen or excessively wet or dry. Obtain material
required for topsoil in excess of that produced by excavation within the
grading limits from areas indicated.
SECTION 31 00 00
3.17
W912HN-09-X-1813
TESTING
Perform testing by a Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or the

Contractor's validated testing facility. Submit qualifications of the
Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or the Contractor's validated
testing facilities. If the Contractor elects to establish testing
facilities, do not permit work requiring testing until the Contractor's
facilities have been inspected, Corps validated and approved by the
a. Determine field in-place density in accordance with ASTM D1556 or
ASTM D6938. When ASTM D6938 is used, check the calibration curves and
adjust using only the sand cone method as described in ASTM D1556.
ASTM D6938 results in a wet unit weight of soil in determining the
moisture content of the soil when using this method.
b. Check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges
along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D6938; check
the calibration of both the density and moisture gauges at the
beginning of a job on each different type of material encountered and
at intervals as directed by the Contracting Officer. When test results
indicate, as determined by the Contracting Officer, that compaction is
not as specified, remove the material, replace and recompact to meet
specification requirements.
c. Perform tests on recompacted areas to determine conformance with
specification requirements. Appoint a registered professional civil
engineer to certify inspections and test results. These certifications
shall state that the tests and observations were performed by or under
the direct supervision of the engineer and that the results are
representative of the materials or conditions being certified by the
tests. The following number of tests, if performed at the appropriate
time, will be the minimum acceptable for each type operation.
3.17.1
Fill and Backfill Material Gradation
One test per 500 cubic yards stockpiled or in-place source material.
Determine gradation of fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM
D422 or ASTM D1140.
3.17.2
In-Place Densities
a. One test per 2500 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of
fill or backfill areas compacted by other than hand-operated machines.
b. One test per 100 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of
fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.
3.17.3
Check Tests on In-Place Densities
If ASTM D6938 is used, check in-place densities by ASTM D1556 as follows:

a. One check test per lift for each 2500 square feet, or fraction
thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill compacted by other than
hand-operated machines.
b. One check test per lift for each 100 square feet, of fill or
backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.
SECTION 31 00 00
3.17.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Moisture Contents
In the stockpile, excavation, or borrow areas, perform a minimum of two

tests per day per type of material or source of material being placed
during stable weather conditions. During unstable weather, perform tests
as dictated by local conditions and approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.17.5
Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density
Perform tests for each type material or source of material including borrow
material to determine the optimum moisture and laboratory maximum density
values. One representative test per 500 cubic yards of fill and backfill,
or when any change in material occurs which may affect the optimum moisture
content or laboratory maximum density.
3.17.6
Tolerance Tests for Subgrades
Perform continuous checks on the degree of finish specified in paragraph

SUBGRADE PREPARATION during construction of the subgrades.
3.18
DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
Provide surplus material or other soil material not required or suitable

for filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber as
removed from Government property as directed by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 31 00 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 32 11 23A
*1 AGGREGATE AND/OR GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
designation only.
(AASHTO)
AASHTO T 180

(18-in.) Drop
AASHTO T 224

Correction for Coarse Particles in the
Soil Compaction Test

ASTM C117
(2004) Standard Test Method for Materials

Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C127
(2007) Standard Test Method for Density,

Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and
Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
ASTM C128
(2007a) Standard Test Method for Density,

Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and
Absorption of Fine Aggregate
ASTM C131
(2006) Standard Test Method for Resistance

to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the
Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C136
(2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve

Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C88
(2005) Standard Test Method for Soundness

of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM D1556

Place by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1557

SECTION 32 11 23
W912HN-09-X-1813

ASTM D2167

Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D2487
(2011) Soils for Engineering Purposes

(Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D422
(1963; R 2007) Particle-Size Analysis of

Soils
ASTM D4318
(2010) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and

Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D5821

Determining the Percentage of Fractured
Particles in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D6938

Depth)
ASTM D75/D75M

Aggregates
ASTM E11
(2009e1) Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing

Purposes
1.2
DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply.

1.2.1
Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course
Graded-crushed aggregate (GCA) base course is well graded, crushed, durable

aggregate uniformly moistened and mechanically stabilized by compaction.
GCA is similar to ABC, but it has more stringent requirements and it
produces a base course with higher strength and stability.
1.2.2
Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is

expressed as a percentage of the maximum laboratory dry density obtained by
the test procedure presented in ASTM D1557 abbreviated as a percent of
laboratory maximum dry density. Since ASTM D1557 applies only to soils
that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the
3/4 inch sieve, the degree of compaction for material having more than 30
percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve are
expressed as a percentage of the laboratory maximum dry density in
accordance with AASHTO T 180 Method D and corrected with AASHTO T 224.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
All plant, equipment, and tools used in the performance of the work will be
subject to approval before the work is started and shall be maintained in
satisfactory working condition at all times. Submit a list of proposed
equipment, including descriptive data. Provide adequate equipment having
the capability of producing the required compaction, meeting grade
SECTION 32 11 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
controls, thickness control, and smoothness requirements as set forth

herein.
1.4
SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Plant, Equipment, and Tools
SD-06 Test Reports
Sampling and Testing; G, RO
Field Density Tests; G, RO
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Sampling and testing are the responsibility of the Contractor and performed
by a testing laboratory approved in accordance with Section 01 45 00.00 10
QUALITY CONTROL. Work requiring testing will not be permitted until the
testing laboratory has been inspected and approved. Test the materials to
establish compliance with the specified requirements; perform testing at
the specified frequency. The Contracting Officer may specify the time and
location of the tests. Furnish copies of test results to the Contracting
Officer within 24 hours of completion of the tests.
1.5.1
Sampling
Take samples for laboratory testing in conformance with ASTM D75/D75M.

When deemed necessary, the sampling will be observed by the Contracting
Officer.
1.5.2
Tests
Perform the following tests in conformance with the applicable standards

listed.
1.5.2.1
Sieve Analysis
Make sieve analysis in conformance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136. Sieves
shall conform to ASTM E11. Particle-size analysis of the soils shall also
be completed in conformance with ASTM D422.
1.5.2.2
Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index
Determine liquid limit and plasticity index in accordance with ASTM D4318.
1.5.2.3
Moisture-Density Determinations
Determine the laboratory maximum dry density and optimum moisture content
in accordance with ASTM D1557.
SECTION 32 11 23
1.5.2.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Field Density Tests
Measure field density in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167 or

ASTM D6938. For the method presented in ASTM D1556 use the base plate as
shown in the drawing. For the method presented in ASTM D6938 check the
calibration curves and adjust them, if necessary, using only the sand cone
method as described in paragraph Calibration, of the ASTM publication.
Tests performed in accordance with ASTM D6938 result in a wet unit weight
of soil, and ASTM D6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of
the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall
also be checked along with density calibration checks as described in
ASTM D6938. The calibration checks of both the density and moisture gauges
shall be made by the prepared containers of material method, as described
in paragraph Calibration of ASTM D6938, on each different type of material
being tested at the beginning of a job and at intervals as directed.
a.
Submit certified copies of test results for approval not less than 30
days before material is required for the work.
b.
Submit calibration curves and related test results prior to using the
device or equipment being calibrated.
c.
Submit copies of field test results within 24 hours after the tests are
performed.
1.5.2.5
Wear Test
Perform wear tests on GCA course material in conformance with ASTM C131.
1.5.2.6
Soundness
Perform soundness tests on GCA in accordance with ASTM C88.

1.5.3
Testing Frequency
1.5.3.1
Initial Tests
Perform one of each of the following tests, on the proposed material prior
to commencing construction, to demonstrate that the proposed material meets
all specified requirements when furnished. If materials from more than one
source are going to be utilized, this testing shall be completed for each
source.
a.
Sieve Analysis.
b.
Liquid limit and plasticity index.
c.
Moisture-density relationship.
d.
Wear.
e.
Soundness.
1.5.3.2
In Place Tests
Perform each of the following tests on samples taken from the placed and
compacted GCA. Samples shall be taken and tested at the rates indicated.
a.
Perform density tests on every lift of material placed and at a

SECTION 32 11 23
frequency of one set of tests for every

thereof, of completed area.
W912HN-09-X-1813
250 square yards, or portion
b.
Perform sieve analysis on every lift of material placed and at a

frequency of one sieve analysis for every 500 square yards, or portion
thereof, of material placed.
c.
Perform liquid limit and plasticity index tests at the same frequency
as the sieve analysis.
d.
Measure the total thickness of the base course at intervals, in such a

manner as to ensure one measurement for each 500 square yards of base
course. Measurements shall be made in 3 inch diameter test holes
penetrating the base course.
1.5.4
Approval of Material
Select the source of the material 30 days prior to the time the material
will be required in the work. Tentative approval of material will be based
on initial test results. Final approval of the materials will be based on
sieve analysis, liquid limit, and plasticity index tests performed on
samples taken from the completed and fully compacted course(s).
1.6
Perform construction when the atmospheric temperature is above 35 degrees F.

When the temperature falls below 35 degrees F, protect all completed areas
by approved methods against detrimental effects of freezing. Correct
completed areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions
to meet specified requirements.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
AGGREGATES
Provide GCA consisting of clean, sound, durable particles of crushed stone,

crushed gravel, angular sand, or other approved material. GCA shall be
free of silt and clay as defined by ASTM D2487, organic matter, and other
objectionable materials or coatings. The portion retained on the No. 4
sieve is known as coarse aggregate; that portion passing the No. 4 sieve is
known as fine aggregate.
2.1.1
Coarse Aggregate
Provide coarse aggregates with angular particles of uniform density. When

the coarse aggregate is supplied from more than one source, aggregate from
each source shall meet the specified requirements and shall be stockpiled
separately.
a.
Crushed Gravel: Crushed gravel shall be manufactured by crushing

gravels, and shall meet all the requirements specified below.
b.
Crushed Stone: Provide crushed stone consisting of freshly mined

quarry rock, meeting all the requirements specified below.
2.1.1.1
GCA coarse aggregate shall not show more than 40 percent loss when
subjected to the Los Angeles abrasion test in accordance with ASTM C131.
SECTION 32 11 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
GCA coarse aggregate shall not exhibit a loss greater than 18 percent
weighted average, at five cycles, when tested for soundness in magnesium
sulfate, or 12 percent weighted average, at five cycles, when tested in
sodium sulfate in accordance with ASTM C88. The amount of flat and
elongated particles shall not exceed 20 percent for the fraction retained
on the 1/2 inch sieve nor 20 percent for the fraction passing the 1/2 inch
sieve. A flat particle is one having a ratio of width to thickness greater
than 3; an elongated particle is one having a ratio of length to width
greater than 3. In the portion retained on each sieve specified, the
crushed aggregate shall contain at least 90 percent by weight of crushed
pieces having two or more freshly fractured faces determined in accordance
with ASTM D5821. When two fractures are contiguous, the angle between
planes of the fractures must be at least 30 degrees in order to count as
two fractured faces. Crushed gravel shall be manufactured from gravel
particles 90 percent of which by weight are retained on the maximum size
sieve listed in TABLE 1.
2.1.2
Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregates shall be angular particles of uniform density. When the

fine aggregate is supplied from more than one source, aggregate from each
source shall meet the specified requirements.
2.1.2.1
Aggregate Base Course
ABC fine aggregate shall consist of screenings, angular sand, crushed

recycled concrete fines, or other finely divided mineral matter processed
or naturally combined with the coarse aggregate.
2.1.2.2
Provide GCA fine aggregate consisting of angular particles produced by

crushing stone, or gravel that meets the requirements for wear and
soundness specified for GCA coarse aggregate. Fine aggregate shall be
produced by crushing only particles larger than No. 4 sieve in size. The
fine aggregate shall contain at least 90 percent by weight of particles
having two or more freshly fractured faces in the portion passing the No. 4
sieve and retained on the No. 10 sieve, and in the portion passing the No.
10 sieve and retained on the No. 40 sieve.
2.1.3
Gradation Requirements
Apply the specified gradation requirements to the completed base course.

The aggregates shall be continuously well graded within the limits
specified in TABLE 1. Sieves shall conform to ASTM E11.
TABLE 1.
GRADATION OF AGGREGATES
Percentage by Weight Passing Square-Mesh Sieve

Sieve
Designation
No. 3
------------------------------------------------------2 inch
---1-1/2 inch
---1 inch
100
1/2 inch
40-70
No. 4
20-50
No. 10
15-40
SECTION 32 11 23
TABLE 1.
W912HN-09-X-1813
GRADATION OF AGGREGATES
Percentage by Weight Passing Square-Mesh Sieve

Sieve
Designation
No. 3
------------------------------------------------------No. 40
5-25
No. 200
0-8
NOTE 1: Particles having diameters less than No. 635 shall not be in
excess of 3 percent by weight of the total sample tested.
NOTE 2: The values are based on aggregates of uniform specific gravity.
If materials from different sources are used for the coarse and fine
aggregates, they shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C127 and ASTM C128
to determine their specific gravities. If the specific gravities vary by
more than 10 percent, the percentages passing the various sieves shall be
corrected as directed by the Contracting Officer.
2.2
LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTICITY INDEX
Apply liquid limit and plasticity index requirements to the completed

course and to any component that is blended to meet the required
gradation. The portion of any component or of the completed course passing
the No. 40 sieve shall be either nonplastic or have a liquid limit not
greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 5.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
When the GCA is constructed in more than one layer, clean the previously
constructed layer of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power
sweepers or power brooms, except that hand brooms may be used in areas
where power cleaning is not practicable. Provide adequate drainage during
the entire period of construction to prevent water from collecting or
standing on the working area. Provide line and grade stakes as necessary
for control. Grade stakes shall be in lines parallel to the centerline of
the area under construction and suitably spaced for string lining.
3.2
OPERATION OF AGGREGATE SOURCES
Clearing, stripping, and excavating are the responsibility of the

Contractor. Operate the aggregate sources to produce the quantity and
quality of materials meeting the specified requirements in the specified
time limit. Aggregate sources on private lands shall be conditioned in
agreement with local laws or authorities.
3.3
STOCKPILING MATERIAL
Clear and level storage sites prior to stockpiling of material. Stockpile

all materials, including approved material available from excavation and
grading, in the manner and at the locations designated. Aggregates shall
be stockpiled on the cleared and leveled areas designated by the
Contracting Officer to prevent segregation. Materials obtained from
different sources shall be stockpiled separately.
SECTION 32 11 23
3.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE
Prior to constructing the base course(s), the underlying course or subgrade

shall be cleaned of all foreign substances. At the time of construction of
the base course(s), the underlying course shall contain no frozen
material. The surface of the underlying course or subgrade shall meet
specified compaction and surface tolerances. The underlying course shall
conform to Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Ruts or soft yielding spots in the
underlying courses, areas having inadequate compaction, and deviations of
the surface from the requirements set forth herein shall be corrected by
loosening and removing soft or unsatisfactory material and by adding
approved material, reshaping to line and grade, and recompacting to
specified density requirements. For cohesionless underlying courses
containing sands or gravels, as defined in ASTM D2487, the surface shall be
stabilized prior to placement of the base course(s). Stabilization shall
be accomplished by mixing GCA into the underlying course and compacting by
approved methods. The stabilized material shall be considered as part of
the underlying course and shall meet all requirements of the underlying
course. The finished underlying course shall not be disturbed by traffic
or other operations and shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition
until the base course is placed.
3.5
3.5.1
INSTALLATION
Mixing the Materials
Mix the coarse and fine aggregates in a stationary plant, or in a traveling

plant or bucket loader on an approved paved working area. Make adjustments
in mixing procedures or in equipment, as directed, to obtain true grades,
to minimize segregation or degradation, to obtain the required water
content, and to insure a satisfactory base course meeting all requirements
of this specification.
3.5.2
Placing
Place the mixed material on the prepared subgrade or subbase in layers of

uniform thickness with an approved spreader. When a compacted layer 6
inches or less in thickness is required, place the material in a single
layer. When a compacted layer in excess of 6 inches is required, place the
material in layers of equal thickness. No layer shall be thicker than 6
inches or thinner than 3 inches when compacted. The layers shall be so
placed that when compacted they will be true to the grades or levels
required with the least possible surface disturbance. Where the base
course is placed in more than one layer, the previously constructed layers
shall be cleaned of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power
sweepers, power brooms, or hand brooms, as directed. Such adjustments in
placing procedures or equipment shall be made as may be directed to obtain
true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to adjust the water
content, and to insure an acceptable base course.
3.5.3
Grade Control
The finished and completed base course shall conform to the lines, grades,
and cross sections shown. Underlying material(s) shall be excavated and
prepared at sufficient depth for the required base course thickness so that
the finished base course and the subsequent surface course will meet the
designated grades.
SECTION 32 11 23
3.5.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Compaction
Compact each layer of the base course, as specified, with approved

compaction equipment. Maintain water content during the compaction
procedure to within plus or minus 2 percent of the optimum water content
determined from laboratory tests as specified in this Section. Begin
rolling at the outside edge of the surface and proceed to the center,
overlapping on successive trips at least one-half the width of the roller.
Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly different lengths. Speed
of the roller shall be such that displacement of the aggregate does not
occur. In all places not accessible to the rollers, the mixture shall be
compacted with hand-operated power tampers. Continue compaction until each
layer has a degree of compaction that is at least 100 percent of laboratory
maximum density through the full depth of the layer. Make such adjustments
in compacting or finishing procedures as may be directed to obtain true
grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to reduce or increase
water content, and to ensure a satisfactory base course. Any materials
that are found to be unsatisfactory shall be removed and replaced with
satisfactory material or reworked, as directed, to meet the requirements of
this specification.
3.5.5
Thickness
Construct the compacted thickness of the base course as indicated. No

individual layer shall be thicker than 6 inches nor be thinner than 3 inches
in compacted thickness. The total compacted thickness of the base
course(s) shall be within 1/2 inch of the thickness indicated. Where the
measured thickness is more than 1/2 inch deficient, correct such areas by
scarifying, adding new material of proper gradation, reblading, and
recompacting as directed. Where the measured thickness is more than 1/2
inch thicker than indicated, the course shall be considered as conforming
to the specified thickness requirements. Average job thickness shall be
the average of all thickness measurements taken for the job, but shall be
within 1/4 inch of the thickness indicated. The total thickness of the
base course shall be measured at intervals in such a manner as to ensure
one measurement for each 500 square yards of base course. Measurements
shall be made in 3 inch diameter test holes penetrating the base course.
3.5.6
Finishing
The surface of the top layer of base course shall be finished after final
compaction by cutting any overbuild to grade and rolling with a
steel-wheeled roller. Thin layers of material shall not be added to the
top layer of base course to meet grade. If the elevation of the top layer
of base course is 1/2 inch or more below grade, then the top layer should
be scarified to a depth of at least 3 inches and new material shall be
blended in and compacted to bring to grade. Adjustments to rolling and
finishing procedures shall be made as directed to minimize segregation and
degradation, obtain grades, maintain moisture content, and insure an
acceptable base course. Should the surface become rough, corrugated,
uneven in texture, or traffic marked prior to completion, the
unsatisfactory portion shall be scarified, reworked and recompacted or it
shall be replaced as directed.
3.5.7
Smoothness
The surface of the top layer shall show no deviations in excess of 3/8 inch
when tested with a 12 foot straightedge. Take measurements in successive
positions parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved. Measurements
SECTION 32 11 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
shall also be taken perpendicular to the centerline at 50 foot intervals.

Deviations exceeding this amount shall be corrected by removing material
and replacing with new material, or by reworking existing material and
compacting it to meet these specifications.
3.6
TRAFFIC
Completed portions of the base course may be opened to limited traffic,

provided there is no marring or distorting of the surface by the traffic.
Heavy equipment shall not be permitted except when necessary to
construction, and then the area shall be protected against marring or
damage to the completed work.
3.7
MAINTENANCE
Maintain the base course in a satisfactory condition until the full

pavement section is completed and accepted. Maintenance shall include
immediate repairs to any defects and shall be repeated as often as
necessary to keep the area intact. Any base course that is not paved over
prior to the onset of winter, shall be retested to verify that it still
complies with the requirements of this specification. Any area of base
course that is damaged shall be reworked or replaced as necessary to comply
with this specification.
3.8
DISPOSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS
Any unsuitable materials that must be removed shall be disposed of outside

the limits of Government-controlled land. No additional payments will be
made for materials that must be replaced.
SECTION 32 11 23
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 32 16 13A
*1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS
04/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 182

Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and
Cotton Mats

ASTM C143/C143M
(2010a) Standard Test Method for Slump of

Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C171
(2007) Standard Specification for Sheet

ASTM C172/C172M

Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C173/C173M
(2010b) Standard Test Method for Air

Volumetric Method
ASTM C231/C231M
(2010) Standard Test Method for Air

Pressure Method
ASTM C309
(2011) Standard Specification for Liquid

Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
ASTM C31/C31M

Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C920

ASTM D1752

PVC Expansion
ASTM D5893/D5893M
(2010) Cold Applied, Single Component,

Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant
for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
SECTION 32 16 13
1.2
1.2.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work subject to
approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times.
The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product,
meeting grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as
specified. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces
unsatisfactory results. The Contracting Officer shall have access at all
times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance
with specifications.
1.2.2
Slip Form Equipment
Slip form paver or curb forming machine, will be approved based on trial
use on the job and shall be self-propelled, automatically controlled,
crawler mounted, and capable of spreading, consolidating, and shaping the
plastic concrete to the desired cross section in 1 pass.
1.3
SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Concrete
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control
1.4
1.4.1
Placing During Cold Weather
Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 40 degrees F and is
falling, or is already below that point. Placement may begin when the air
temperature reaches 35 degrees F and is rising, or is already above 40
degrees F. Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during
the specified curing period. If necessary to place concrete when the
temperature of the air, aggregates, or water is below 35 degrees F,
placement and protection shall be approved in writing. Approval will be
contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions. The
underlying material shall be prepared and protected so that it is entirely
free of frost when the concrete is deposited. Mixing water and aggregates
shall be heated as necessary to result in the temperature of the in-place
concrete being between 50 and 85 degrees F. Methods and equipment for
heating shall be approved. The aggregates shall be free of ice, snow, and
frozen lumps before entering the mixer. Covering and other means shall be
provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50
degrees F for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature
above freezing for the remainder of the curing period.
SECTION 32 16 13
1.4.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Placing During Warm Weather
The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed85 degrees F

except where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water and/or
aggregates shall be cooled, if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory
placing temperature. The placing temperature shall not exceed95 degrees F
at any time.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
CONCRETE
Provide concrete conforming to the applicable requirements of Section

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE except as otherwise specified. Concrete
shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days. Maximum
size of aggregate shall be 1-1/2 inches. Submit copies of certified
delivery tickets for all concrete used in the construction.
2.1.1
Air Content
Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent,

based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer.
2.1.2
Slump
The concrete slump shall be 2 inches plus or minus 1 inch where determined
in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M.
2.2
2.2.1
CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS

Impervious Sheet Materials
Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C171, type optional,

except that polyethylene film, if used, shall be white opaque.
2.2.2
Burlap
Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182.

2.2.3
White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C309,

Type 2.
2.3
CONCRETE PROTECTION MATERIALS
Concrete protection materials shall be a linseed oil mixture of equal

parts, by volume, of linseed oil and either mineral spirits, naphtha, or
turpentine. At the option of the Contractor, commercially prepared linseed
oil mixtures, formulated specifically for application to concrete to
provide protection against the action of deicing chemicals may be used,
except that emulsified mixtures are not acceptable.
2.4
2.4.1
JOINT FILLER STRIPS

Contraction Joint Filler for Sidewalks
Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter shall consist of hard-pressed
fiberboard.
SECTION 32 16 13
2.5
W912HN-09-X-1813
JOINT SEALANTS
Joint sealant, cold-applied shall conform to ASTM C920 or ASTM D5893/D5893M.

2.6
FORM WORK
Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will
conform accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and
within the tolerances specified. Forms shall be of wood or steel,
straight, of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and
consolidating concrete. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 2 inches
nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits
or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet.
Radius bends may be formed with 3/4 inch boards, laminated to the required
thickness. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top
surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two
intermediate points. Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and
self-aligning. Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius
forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Steel forms shall have
a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per
form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and
pointed tips designed for use with steel forms.
2.6.1
Sidewalk Forms
Sidewalk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the finished
sidewalk.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
The subgrade shall be constructed to the specified grade and cross section
prior to concrete placement. Subgrade shall be placed and compacted in
conformance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.1.1
Sidewalk Subgrade
The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template
extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms.
3.1.2
Maintenance of Subgrade
The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in

conformity with the required section and established grade until the
concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when
concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be prepared and protected to
produce a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited.
3.2
FORM SETTING
Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions. Hold forms
rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not
to exceed 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have
additional stakes and braces, as required. Clamps, spreaders, and braces
shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms. Forms shall
be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools shall not be
used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete found
SECTION 32 16 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily

repaired. Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before
concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with
water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing
temperatures, oiling is mandatory.
3.2.1
Sidewalks
Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an
allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 foot long section. After forms
are set, grade and alignment shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge.
Forms shall have a transverse slope as indicated. Side forms shall not be
removed for 12 hours after finishing has been completed.
3.3
3.3.1
SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

Formed Sidewalks
Place concrete in the forms in one layer. When consolidated and finished,
the sidewalks shall be of the thickness indicated. After concrete has been
placed in the forms, a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to
bring the surface to proper section to be compacted. The concrete shall be
consolidated by tamping and spading or with an approved vibrator, and the
surface shall be finished to grade with a strike off.
3.3.2
Concrete Finishing
After straightedging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and
just before the concrete hardens, finish the surface with a wood or
magnesium float or darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy
texture free of waves, irregularities, or tool marks. A scored surface
shall be produced by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction
transverse to that of the traffic, followed by edging.
3.3.3
Edge and Joint Finishing
All slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be finished with an
edger having a radius of 1/8 inch. Transverse joint shall be edged before
brooming, and the brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by the
surface face of the edger. Corners and edges which have crumbled and areas
which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned and
filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then
finished.
3.3.4
Surface and Thickness Tolerances
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 5/16 inch from the testing edge
of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness
will be up to 1/4 inch.
3.4
SIDEWALK JOINTS
Sidewalk joints shall be constructed to divide the surface into rectangular

areas. Transverse contraction joints shall be spaced at a distance equal
to the sidewalk width or 5 feet on centers, whichever is less, and shall be
continuous across the slab. Longitudinal contraction joints shall be
constructed along the centerline of all sidewalks 10 feet or more in
width. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at sidewalk returns
and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. Where the sidewalk is
SECTION 32 16 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
not in contact with the curb, transverse expansion joints shall be

installed as indicated. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures
and features which project through or into the sidewalk pavement, using
joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated. Expansion joints
are not required between sidewalks and curb that abut the sidewalk
longitudinally.
3.4.1
Sidewalk Contraction Joints
The contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete by cutting a

groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of
the sidewalk slab thickness, using a jointer to cut the groove, or by
sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw, unless
otherwise approved. Sawed joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove
in the concrete with a 1/8 inch blade to the depth indicated. An ample
supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete
placement is started, and at least one standby sawing unit in good working
order shall be available at the jobsite at all times during the sawing
operations.
3.4.2
Sidewalk Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be formed with 1/2 inch joint filler strips. Joint
filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the
sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D1752
or building paper. Joint filler shall be held in place with steel pins or
other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and
finishing. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, joint
edges shall be rounded with an edging tool having a radius of 1/8 inch, and
concrete over the joint filler shall be removed. At the end of the curing
period, expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with cold-applied
joint sealant. Joint sealant shall be gray or stone in color. The joint
opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed.
Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete.
Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete
temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of
joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed surfaces of the
concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned.
3.5
CURING AND PROTECTION
3.5.1
Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for
at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation. Protect
unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water. All equipment needed for
adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready
for use before actual concrete placement begins. Protection shall be
provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to
temperature changes during the curing period.
3.5.1.1
Mat Method
The entire exposed surface shall be covered with 2 or more layers of

burlap. Mats shall overlap each other at least 6 inches. The mat shall be
thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and shall
be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with
concrete for not less than 7 days.
SECTION 32 16 13
3.5.1.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Impervious Sheeting Method
The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and
then covered with impervious sheeting material. Sheets shall be laid
directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and
overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing
medium shall not be less than 18-inches wider than the concrete surface to
be cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or a
bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets. Sheets
shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged
during curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to
be cured for not less than 7 days.
3.5.1.3
Membrane Curing Method
A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound shall be

applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after
finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface.
Formed surfaces shall be coated immediately after the forms are removed and
in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms. Concrete shall
not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane. If any
drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete shall be moistened with a
fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the free
water disappears. Curing compound shall be applied in two coats by
hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square
feet/gallon for the total of both coats. The second coat shall be applied
in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of
application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform,
continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be
free from pinholes or other imperfections. If pinholes, abrasion, or other
discontinuities exist, an additional coat shall be applied to the affected
areas within 30 minutes. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy
rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be
resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above. Areas where
the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within
the curing period shall be resprayed. Necessary precautions shall be taken
to insure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints, and that no
curing compound enters the joints. The top of the joint opening and the
joint groove at exposed edges shall be tightly sealed before the concrete
in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound. The method
used for sealing the joint groove shall prevent loss of moisture from the
joint during the entire specified curing period. Approved standby
facilities for curing concrete pavement shall be provided at a location
accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the
spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct
application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time. Concrete
surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be
adequately protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and
vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and
surface tests, and from any other possible damage to the continuity of the
membrane.
3.5.2
Backfilling
After curing, debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete
shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding
area in accordance with lines and grades indicated.
SECTION 32 16 13
3.5.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Protection
Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accepted. Repair

damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction.
Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire
length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion
will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as
directed.
3.6
Submit copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the test.
3.6.1
Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified
requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing. Based upon
the results of these inspections and tests, take the action and submit
reports as required below, and any additional tests to insure that the
requirements of these specifications are met.
3.6.2
3.6.2.1
Concrete Testing
Strength Testing
Provide molded concrete specimens for strength tests. Samples of concrete

placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once
for every 250 cubic yards of concrete. The samples for strength tests
shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M. Cylinders for
acceptance shall be molded in conformance with ASTM C31/C31M by an approved
testing laboratory. Each strength test result shall be the average of 2
test cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days, unless
otherwise specified or approved. Concrete specified on the basis of
compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all
sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the
specified strength, and no individual strength test result falls below the
specified strength by more than 500 psi.
3.6.2.2
Air Content
Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M or ASTM C231/C231M.

ASTM C231/C231M shall be used with concretes and mortars made with
relatively dense natural aggregates. Two tests for air content shall be
made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed during
each shift. Additional tests shall be made when excessive variation in
concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the Government
inspector. If results are out of tolerance, the placing foreman shall be
notified and he shall take appropriate action to have the air content
corrected at the plant. Additional tests for air content will be performed
on each truckload of material until such time as the air content is within
the tolerance specified.
3.6.2.3
Slump Test
Two slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of
concrete for every 250 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of concrete placed
during each shift. Additional tests shall be performed when excessive
variation in the workability of the concrete is noted or when excessive
crumbling or slumping is noted along the edges of slip-formed concrete.
SECTION 32 16 13
3.6.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Thickness Evaluation
The anticipated thickness of the concrete shall be determined prior to

placement by passing a template through the formed section or by measuring
the depth of opening of the extrusion template of the curb forming
machine. If a slip form paver is used for sidewalk placement, the subgrade
shall be true to grade prior to concrete placement and the thickness will
be determined by measuring each edge of the completed slab.
3.6.4
Surface Evaluation
The finished surface of each category of the completed work shall be

uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks.
3.7
3.7.1
SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS

Thickness Deficiency
When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient

in thickness by more than 1/4 inch the deficient section will be removed,
between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.
3.7.2
High Areas
In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements, high
areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with
carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours old or
by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine
after the concrete is 36 hours old or more. The area corrected by grinding
the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 5 percent of the area
of any integral slab, and the depth of grinding shall not exceed 1/4 inch.
Pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess
of the limits specified above shall be removed and replaced.
3.7.3
Appearance
Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government

and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified. Areas which exhibit
excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or tool marks or which are
otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be
removed and replaced.
SECTION 32 16 13
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 32 92 19A
*1 SEEDING
10/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

ASTM C602
(2007) Agricultural Liming Materials
ASTM D4427
(2007) Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing
ASTM D4972
(2001; R 2007) pH of Soils
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

AMS Seed Act
(1940; R 1988; R 1998) Federal Seed Act
DOA SSIR 42
(1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report

No. 42, Soil Survey Laboratory Methods
Manual, Version 3.0
1.2
1.2.1
DEFINITIONS
Stand of Turf
95 percent ground cover of the established species.

1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK applies to this section for pesticide use and

plant establishment requirements, with additions and modifications herein.
1.4
SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Wood cellulose fiber mulch
Fertilizer
Include physical characteristics, and recommendations.
SD-06 Test Reports
SECTION 32 92 19
W912HN-09-X-1813
Topsoil composition tests (reports and recommendations).

SD-07 Certificates
State certification and approval for seed
Erosion Control Materials
1.5
1.5.1
Delivery
1.5.1.1
Seed Protection
Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery, on-site
storage, and handling.
1.5.1.2
Fertilizer and Lime Delivery
Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's

chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark, and indication of
conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer
iron and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the
above information.
1.5.2
Storage
1.5.2.1
Seed, Fertilizer and Lime Storage
Store in cool, dry locations away from contaminants.

1.5.2.2
Topsoil
Prior to stockpiling topsoil, treat growing vegetation with application of

appropriate specified non-selective herbicide. Clear and grub existing
vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil.
1.5.2.3
Handling
Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.

1.6
1.6.1
TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS

Restrictions
Do not plant when the ground is frozen, muddy, or when air temperature
exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit.
1.7
1.7.1
TIME LIMITATIONS
Seed
Apply seed within twenty four hours after seed bed preparation.
SECTION 32 92 19
PART 2
2.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
PRODUCTS
SEED
2.1.1
Classification
Provide State-certified seed of the latest season's crop delivered in

original sealed packages, bearing producer's guaranteed analysis for
percentages of mixtures, purity, germination, weedseed content, and inert
material. Label in conformance with AMS Seed Act and applicable state seed
laws. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will be rejected. Field mixes
will be acceptable when field mix is performed on site in the presence of
the Contracting Officer.
2.1.2
Planting Dates
Planting Season
2.1.3
Planting Dates
Season 1
February 15 - August 31
Season 2
September 1 - February 14
Seed Purity
Botanical
Name
Min.
Percent
Pure Seed
Common
Name
Cynodon Dactylon Bermuda Grass

Lolium Multiflorum Annual Ryegrass
2.1.4
Min. Percent
Germination
and Hard Seed
90
90
Max.
Percent
Weed Seed
70
70
2
2
Seed Mixture by Weight

Planting Season
Variety
Percent (by Weight)
Season 1
Bermuda Grass
75
Season 2
Annual Ryegrass
75
Temporary Seeding
Annual Ryegrass
75
Proportion seed mixtures by weight. Temporary seeding must later be

replaced by Season 1 plantings for a permanent stand of grass. The same
requirements of turf establishment for Season 1 apply for temporary seeding.
2.2
2.2.1
TOPSOIL
On-Site Topsoil
Surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site and modified as necessary to

meet the requirements specified for topsoil in paragraph entitled
"Composition." When available topsoil shall be existing surface soil
stripped and stockpiled on-site in accordance with Section 31 00 00
EARTHWORK.
SECTION 32 92 19
2.2.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Off-Site Topsoil
Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition."

Additional topsoil shall be obtained from topsoil borrow areas indicated.
2.2.3
Composition
Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil

composition tests of the Organic Carbon, 6A, Chemical Analysis Method
described in DOA SSIR 42. Maximum particle size, 3/4 inch, with maximum 3
percent retained on 1/4 inch screen. The pH shall be tested in accordance
with ASTM D4972. Topsoil shall be free of sticks, stones, roots, and other
debris and objectionable materials. Other components shall conform to the
following limits:
Silt
Clay
Sand
pH
Soluble Salts
2.3
7 to 17 percent
4 to 12 percent
70 to 82 percent
5.5 to 7.0
600 ppm maximum
SOIL CONDITIONERS
Add conditioners to topsoil as required to bring into compliance with

"composition" standard for topsoil as specified herein.
2.3.1
Lime
Commercial grade limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent

(C.C.E.) as specified in ASTM C602 of not less than 80 percent.
2.3.2
Peat
Natural product of peat moss derived from a freshwater site and conforming
to ASTM D4427. Shred and granulate peat to pass a 1/2 inch mesh screen and
condition in storage pile for minimum 6 months after excavation.
2.3.3
Sand
Clean and free of materials harmful to plants.

2.3.4
Composted Derivatives
Ground bark, nitrolized sawdust, humus or other green wood waste material
free of stones, sticks, and soil stabilized with nitrogen and having the
following properties:
2.3.4.1
Particle Size
Minimum percent by weight passing:

No. 4 mesh screen
No. 8 mesh screen
2.3.4.2
95
80
Nitrogen Content
Minimum percent based on dry weight:

Fir Sawdust
0.7
SECTION 32 92 19
Fir or Pine Bark

2.4
2.4.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
1.0
FERTILIZER
Granular Fertilizer
Contractor shall test the soil through the local agriculture county
extension service office, and obtain fertilizer recommendation. For
bidding purposes, use the following:
Synthetic, granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following
minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients:
10 percent available nitrogen
10 percent available phosphorus
10 percent available potassium
2.4.2
Hydroseeding Fertilizer
Controlled release fertilizer, to use with hydroseeding and composed of

pills coated with plastic resin to provide a continuous release of
nutrients for at least 6 months and containing the following minimum
percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients.
10 percent available nitrogen
10 percent available phosphorus
10 percent available potassium
2.5
MULCH
Mulch shall be free from noxious weeds, mold, and other deleterious
materials.
2.5.1
Straw
Stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, or rice. Furnish in air-dry

condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch
blowing equipment. Straw shall contain no fertile seed.
2.5.2
Hay
Air-dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial

mulch blowing equipment. Hay shall be sterile, containing no fertile seed.
2.5.3
Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch
Use recovered materials of either paper-based (100 percent) or wood-based

(100 percent) hydraulic mulch. Processed to contain no growth or
germination-inhibiting factors and dyed an appropriate color to facilitate
visual metering of materials application. Composition on air-dry weight
basis: 9 to 15 percent moisture, pH range from 5.5 to 8.2 . Use with
hydraulic application of grass seed and fertilizer.
2.6
WATER
Source of water shall be approved by Contracting Officer and of suitable

quality for irrigation, containing no elements toxic to plant life.
SECTION 32 92 19
2.7
W912HN-09-X-1813
EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS
Erosion control material shall conform to the following:

2.7.1
Erosion Control Blanket
70 percent agricultural straw/30 percent coconut fiber matrix stitched with

a degradable nettings, designed to degrade within 24 months.
2.7.2
Erosion Control Fabric
Fabric shall be knitted construction of polypropylene yarn with uniform

mesh openings 3/4 to 1 inch square with strips of biodegradable paper.
Filler paper strips shall have a minimum life of 6 months.
2.7.3
Erosion Control Net
Net shall be heavy, twisted jute mesh, weighing approximately 1.22 pounds
per linear yard and 4 feet wide with mesh openings of approximately 1 inch
square.
2.7.4
Hydrophilic Colloids
Hydrophilic colloids shall be physiologically harmless to plant and animal

life without phytotoxic agents. Colloids shall be naturally occurring,
silicate powder based, and shall form a water insoluble membrane after
curing. Colloids shall resist mold growth.
2.7.5
Erosion Control Material Anchors
Erosion control anchors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
3.1.1
EXTENT OF WORK
Provide soil preparation (including soil conditioners as required),

fertilizing, seeding, and surface topdressing of all newly graded finished
earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or
outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's
operations.
3.1.1.1
Topsoil
Provide 4 inches of off-site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade. After

areas have been brought to indicated finish grade, incorporate fertilizer
pH adjusters soil conditioners into soil a minimum depth of 4 inches by
disking, harrowing, tilling or other method approved by the Contracting
Officer. Remove debris and stones larger than 3/4 inch in any dimension
remaining on the surface after finish grading. Correct irregularities in
finish surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished topsoil areas
from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic.
3.1.1.2
Soil Conditioner Application Rates
Apply soil conditioners at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis

of the soils at the job site.
SECTION 32 92 19
3.1.1.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Fertilizer Application Rates
Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the

soils at the job site. For bidding purposes only apply at rates for the
following:
Organic Granular Fertilizer
Hydroseeding Fertilizer
3.2
1200 pounds per acre
1200 pounds per acre
SEEDING
3.2.1
Seed Application Seasons and Conditions
Immediately before seeding, restore soil to proper grade. Do not seed when
ground is muddy frozen snow covered or in an unsatisfactory condition for
seeding. If special conditions exist that may warrant a variance in the
above seeding dates or conditions, submit a written request to the
Contracting Officer stating the special conditions and proposed variance.
Apply seed within twenty four hours after seedbed preparation. Sow seed by
approved sowing equipment. Sow one-half the seed in one direction, and sow
remainder at right angles to the first sowing.
3.2.2
Seed Application Method
Seeding method shall be broadcasted and drop seeding or hydroseeding.

3.2.2.1
Broadcast and Drop Seeding
Seed shall be uniformly broadcast at the manufacturer's specified rate.

Use broadcast or drop seeders. Sow one-half the seed in one direction, and
sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing. Cover seed uniformly to
a maximum depth of 1/4 inch in clay soils and 1/2 inch in sandy soils by
means of spike-tooth harrow, cultipacker, raking or other approved devices.
3.2.2.2
Hydroseeding
First, mix water and fiber. Wood cellulose fiber, paper fiber, or recycled
paper shall be applied as part of the hydroseeding operation. Fiber shall
be added at 1,000 pounds, dry weight, per acre. Then add and mix seed and
fertilizer to produce a homogeneous slurry. Seed shall be mixed to ensure
broadcasting at the rate of 1500 pounds per 1000 acres.
When
hydraulically sprayed on the ground, material shall form a blotter like
cover impregnated uniformly with grass seed. Spread with one application
with no second application of mulch.
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
Mulching
Hay or Straw Mulch
Hay or straw mulch shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 2 tons per acre.
Mulch shall be spread by hand, blower-type mulch spreader, or other
approved method. Mulching shall be started on the windward side of
relatively flat areas or on the upper part of steep slopes, and continued
uniformly until the area is covered. The mulch shall not be bunched or
clumped. Sunlight shall not be completely excluded from penetrating to the
ground surface. All areas installed with seed shall be mulched on the same
day as the seeding. Mulch shall be anchored immediately following
SECTION 32 92 19
W912HN-09-X-1813
spreading.
3.2.3.2
Mechanical Anchor
Mechanical anchor shall be a V-type-wheel land packer; a scalloped-disk

land packer designed to force mulch into the soil surface; or other
suitable equipment.
3.2.3.3
Non-Asphaltic Tackifier
Hydrophilic colloid shall be applied at the rate recommended by the

manufacturer, using hydraulic equipment suitable for thoroughly mixing with
water. A uniform mixture shall be applied over the area.
3.2.4
Rolling
Immediately after seeding, firm entire area except for slopes in excess of
3 to 1 with a roller not exceeding 65 pounds for each foot of roller width.
If seeding is performed with cultipacker-type seeder or by hydroseeding,
rolling may be eliminated.
3.2.5
Erosion Control Material
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, where indicated or

as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.2.6
Watering
Start watering areas seeded as required by temperature and wind

conditions.
Apply water at a rate sufficient to insure thorough wetting
of soil to a depth of 2 inches without run off. During the germination
process, seed is to be kept actively growing and not allowed to dry out.
3.3
PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS
Immediately after turfing, protect area against traffic and other use.
3.4
3.4.1
RENOVATION OF EXISTING TURF AREA

Aeration
Upon completion of weed eradication operations and Contracting Officer's

approval to proceed, aerate turf areas indicated , by approved device.
Core, by pulling soil plugs, to a minimum depth of 2 inches. Leave all
soil plugs, that are produced, in the turf area. Keep clean at all times at
least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access
route to each building. Clean all soil plugs off of other paving when work
is complete.
3.4.2
Vertical Mowing
Upon completion of aerating operation and Contracting Officer's approval to

proceed, vertical mow turf areas indicated, by approved device, to a depth
of 1/4 inch above existing soil level, to reduce thatch build-up, grain,
and surface compaction. Keep clean at all times at least one paved
pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each
building. Clean other paving when work is complete. Remove all debris
generated during this operation off site.
SECTION 32 92 19
3.4.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Overseeding
Apply seed in accordance with applicable portions of paragraph entitled

"Seed Application Method" at rates in accordance with paragraph entitled
"Seed Composition."
3.5
RESTORATION
Restore to original condition existing turf areas which have been

during turf installation operations at the Contractor's expense.
clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and
vehicular access route to each building. Clean other paving when
adjacent areas is complete.
damaged
Keep
one paved
work in
SECTION 32 92 19
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 33 40 00A
*1 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
02/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 198
(2010) Standard Specification for Joints

for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast
Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible
Joint Sealants

ASTM A123/A123M

Steel Products
ASTM A48/A48M

Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A536

Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM B26/B26M

Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings
ASTM C231/C231M
(2010) Standard Test Method for Air

Pressure Method
ASTM C270
(2010) Standard Specification for Mortar

for Unit Masonry
ASTM C32
(2011) Standard Specification for Sewer

and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale)
ASTM C443

for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using
Rubber Gaskets
ASTM C478
(2009) Standard Specification for Precast

Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
ASTM C55
(2011) Concrete Brick
ASTM C62
(2010) Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units

Made from Clay or Shale)
SECTION 33 40 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
ASTM C76

Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain,
and Sewer Pipe
ASTM C923

Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced
Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and
Laterals
ASTM D1557

ASTM D1751

Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types)
ASTM D1752

PVC Expansion
ASTM D2167

Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D2321
(2011) Standard Practice for Underground

Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
ASTM D3212

for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D6938

Depth)
1.2
SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Placing Pipe
SD-04 Samples
Pipe for Culverts and Storm Drains
SD-07 Certificates
SECTION 33 40 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
Resin Certification
Pipeline Testing
Hydrostatic Test on Watertight Joints
1.3
1.3.1

Delivery and Storage
Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and

stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly
on the ground. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept free of dirt
and debris. Before, during, and after installation, plastic pipe and
fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in
damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's
instructions available at the construction site at all times and follow
these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer.
Solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any
similar materials required to install plastic pipe shall be stored in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be discarded
if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use
shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded.
1.3.2
Handling
Materials shall be handled in a manner that ensures delivery to the trench

in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe shall be carried to the trench, not
dragged.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
PIPE FOR CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS
Pipe for culverts and storm drains shall be of the sizes indicated and
shall conform to the requirements specified.
2.1.1
Concrete Pipe
Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C76, Class III .

2.1.2
PVC Pipe
Submit the pipe manufacturer's resin certification, indicating the cell

classification of PVC used to manufacture the pipe, prior to installation
of the pipe.
2.2
2.2.1
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Concrete
Unless otherwise specified, concrete and reinforced concrete shall conform

to the requirements for 4000 psi concrete under Section 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. The concrete mixture shall have air content by
volume of concrete, based on measurements made immediately after discharge
from the mixer, of 5 to 7 percent when maximum size of coarse aggregate
exceeds 1-1/2 inches. Air content shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM C231/C231M. The concrete covering over steel reinforcing shall not be
less than 1 inch thick for covers and not less than 1-1/2 inches thick for
SECTION 33 40 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
walls and flooring. Concrete covering deposited directly against the

ground shall have a thickness of at least 3 inches between steel and
ground. Expansion-joint filler material shall conform to ASTM D1751, or
ASTM D1752, or shall be resin-impregnated fiberboard conforming to the
physical requirements of ASTM D1752.
2.2.2
Mortar
Mortar for pipe joints, connections to other drainage structures, and brick
or block construction shall conform to ASTM C270, Type M, except that the
maximum placement time shall be 1 hour. The quantity of water in the
mixture shall be sufficient to produce a stiff workable mortar. Water
shall be clean and free of harmful acids, alkalies, and organic
impurities. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after the
ingredients are mixed with water. The inside of the joint shall be wiped
clean and finished smooth. The mortar head on the outside shall be
protected from air and sun with a proper covering until satisfactorily
cured.
2.2.3
Brick
Brick shall conform to ASTM C62, Grade SW; ASTM C55, Grade S-I or S-II; or
ASTM C32, Grade MS. Mortar for jointing and plastering shall consist of
one part portland cement and two parts fine sand. Lime may be added to the
mortar in a quantity not more than 25 percent of the volume of cement. The
joints shall be filled completely and shall be smooth and free from surplus
mortar on the inside of the structure. Brick structures shall be plastered
with 1/2 inch of mortar over the entire outside surface of the walls. For
square or rectangular structures, brick shall be laid in stretcher courses
with a header course every sixth course. For round structures, brick shall
be laid radially with every sixth course a stretcher course.
2.2.4
Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes
Conform to ASTM C478. Joints between precast concrete risers and tops
shall be made with flexible watertight, rubber-type gaskets meeting the
requirements of paragraph JOINTS.
2.2.5
Submit certification on the ability of frame and cover or gratings to carry

the imposed live load. Frame and cover for gratings shall be cast gray
iron, ASTM A48/A48M, Class 35B; cast ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade
65-45-12; or cast aluminum, ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy 356.OT6. Weight, shape,
size, and waterway openings for grates and curb inlets shall be as
indicated on the plans. The word "Storm Sewer" shall be stamped or cast
into covers so that it is plainly visible.
2.2.6
Joints
2.2.6.1
a.
Flexible Watertight Joints
Materials: Flexible watertight joints shall be made with plastic or

rubber-type gaskets for concrete pipe. The design of joints and the
physical requirements for plastic gaskets shall conform to AASHTO M 198,
and rubber-type gaskets shall conform to ASTM C443. Gaskets shall have
not more than one factory-fabricated splice, except that two
factory-fabricated splices of the rubber-type gasket are permitted if
the nominal diameter of the pipe being gasketed exceeds 54 inches.
SECTION 33 40 00
b.
W912HN-09-X-1813
Test Requirements: Watertight joints shall be tested and shall meet

test requirements of paragraph HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS.
Rubber gaskets shall comply with the oil resistant gasket requirements
of ASTM C443. Certified copies of test results shall be delivered to
the Contracting Officer before gaskets or jointing materials are
installed. Alternate types of watertight joint may be furnished, if
specifically approved.
2.2.6.2
PVC Plastic Pipes
Joints shall be solvent cement or elastomeric gasket type in accordance

with the specification for the pipe and as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
2.3
STEEL LADDER
Steel ladder shall be provided where the depth of the storm drainage
structure exceeds 12 feet. These ladders shall be not less than 16 inches
in width, with 3/4 inch diameter rungs spaced 12 inches apart. The two
stringers shall be a minimum 3/8 inch thick and 2-1/2 inches wide. Ladders
and inserts shall be galvanized after fabrication in conformance with
ASTM A123/A123M.
2.4
RESILIENT CONNECTORS
Flexible, watertight connectors used for connecting pipe to manholes and

inlets shall conform to ASTM C923.
2.5
2.5.1
HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS

Concreteand PVC Pipe
A hydrostatic test shall be made on the watertight joint types as

proposed. Only one sample joint of each type needs testing; however, if
the sample joint fails because of faulty design or workmanship, an
additional sample joint may be tested. During the test period, gaskets or
other jointing material shall be protected from extreme temperatures which
might adversely affect the performance of such materials. Performance
requirements for joints in reinforced and nonreinforced concrete pipe shall
conform to AASHTO M 198 or ASTM C443. Test requirements for joints in PVC
and PE plastic pipe shall conform to ASTM D3212.
2.6
EROSION CONTROL RIPRAP
Provide nonerodible rock not exceeding 15 inches in its greatest dimension

and choked with sufficient small rocks to provide a dense mass with a
minimum thickness ofas indicated.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXCAVATION FOR PIPE CULVERTS, STORM DRAINS, AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Excavation of trenches, and for appurtenances and backfilling for culverts

and storm drains, shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of
Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK and the requirements specified below.
SECTION 33 40 00
3.1.1
W912HN-09-X-1813
Trenching
The width of trenches at any point below the top of the pipe shall be not
greater than the outside diameter of the pipe plus 12 inches to permit
satisfactory jointing and thorough tamping of the bedding material under
and around the pipe. Sheeting and bracing, where required, shall be placed
within the trench width as specified, without any overexcavation. Where
trench widths are exceeded, redesign with a resultant increase in cost of
stronger pipe or special installation procedures will be necessary. Cost
of this redesign and increased cost of pipe or installation shall be borne
by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.
3.1.2
Removal of Rock
Rock in either ledge or boulder formation shall be replaced with suitable

materials to provide a compacted earth cushion having a thickness between
unremoved rock and the pipe of at least 8 inches or 1/2 inch for each foot
of fill over the top of the pipe, whichever is greater, but not more than
three-fourths the nominal diameter of the pipe. Where bell-and-spigot pipe
is used, the cushion shall be maintained under the bell as well as under
the straight portion of the pipe. Rock excavation shall be as specified
and defined in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.1.3
Removal of Unstable Material
Where wet or otherwise unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the

pipe, as determined by the Contracting Officer, is unexpectedly encountered
in the bottom of a trench, such material shall be removed to the depth
required and replaced to the proper grade with select granular material,
compacted as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING. When removal of unstable
material is due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor while performing
shoring and sheeting, water removal, or other specified requirements, such
removal and replacement shall be performed at no additional cost to the
Government.
3.2
BEDDING
The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform
density throughout the entire length of the pipe.
3.2.1
Concrete Pipe Requirements
When no bedding class is specified or detailed on the drawings, concrete

pipe shall be bedded in granular material minimum 4 inch in depth in
trenches with soil foundation. Depth of granular bedding in trenches with
rock foundation shall be 1/2 inch in depth per foot of depth of fill,
minimum depth of bedding shall be 8 inch up to maximum depth of 24 inches.
The middle third of the granular bedding shall be loosely placed. Bell
holes and depressions for joints shall be removed and formed so entire
barrel of pipe is uniformly supported. The bell hole and depressions for
the joints shall be not more than the length, depth, and width required for
properly making the particular type of joint.
3.2.2
Plastic Pipe
Bedding for PVC and PE pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321.
Bedding, haunching, and initial backfill shall be either Class IB or II
material.
SECTION 33 40 00
3.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
PLACING PIPE
Submit printed copies of the manufacturer's recommendations for

installation procedures of the material being placed, prior to installation.
Each pipe shall be thoroughly examined before being laid; defective or
damaged pipe shall not be used. Plastic pipe shall be protected from
exposure to direct sunlight prior to laying, if necessary to maintain
adequate pipe stiffness and meet installation deflection requirements.
Pipelines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated. Proper
facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches.
Lifting lugs in vertically elongated metal pipe shall be placed in the same
vertical plane as the major axis of the pipe. Pipe shall not be laid in
water, and pipe shall not be laid when trench conditions or weather are
unsuitable for such work. Diversion of drainage or dewatering of trenches
during construction shall be provided as necessary. Deflection of
installed flexible pipe shall not exceed the following limits:
TYPE OF PIPE
Plastic (PVC & HDPE)
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
DEFLECTION (%)
5
Note post installation requirements of paragraph 'Deflection Testing' in

PART 3 of this specification for all pipe products including deflection
testing requirements for flexible pipe.
3.3.1
Concrete, and PVC Pipe
Laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe and
tongue ends of tongue-and-groove pipe pointing in the direction of the flow.
3.4
JOINTING
3.4.1
Concrete and Clay Pipe
3.4.1.1
Flexible Watertight Joints
Gaskets and jointing materials shall be as recommended by the particular

manufacturer in regard to use of lubricants, cements, adhesives, and other
special installation requirements. Surfaces to receive lubricants,
cements, or adhesives shall be clean and dry. Gaskets and jointing
materials shall be affixed to the pipe not more than 24 hours prior to the
installation of the pipe, and shall be protected from the sun, blowing
dust, and other deleterious agents at all times. Gaskets and jointing
materials shall be inspected before installing the pipe; any loose or
improperly affixed gaskets and jointing materials shall be removed and
replaced. The pipe shall be aligned with the previously installed pipe,
and the joint pushed home. If, while the joint is being made the gasket
becomes visibly dislocated the pipe shall be removed and the joint remade.
3.5
3.5.1
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Manholes and Inlets
Construction shall be of reinforced concrete or precast reinforced

concrete; complete with frames and covers or gratings; and with fixed
galvanized steel ladders where indicated. Pipe connections to concrete
manholes and inlets shall be made with flexible, watertight connectors.
SECTION 33 40 00
3.5.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Walls and Headwalls
Construction shall be as indicated.

3.6
STEEL LADDER INSTALLATION
Ladder shall be adequately anchored to the wall by means of steel inserts

spaced not more than 6 feet vertically, and shall be installed to provide
at least 6 inches of space between the wall and the rungs. The wall along
the line of the ladder shall be vertical for its entire length.
3.7
3.7.1
BACKFILLING
Backfilling Pipe in Trenches
After the pipe has been properly bedded, selected material from excavation
or borrow, at a moisture content that will facilitate compaction, shall be
placed along both sides of pipe in layers not exceeding 6 inches in
compacted depth. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of
pipe for the full length of pipe. The fill shall be thoroughly compacted
under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted
with mechanical tampers or rammers. This method of filling and compacting
shall continue until the fill has reached an elevation equal to the
midpoint (spring line) of RCP or has reached an elevation of at least 12
inches above the top of the pipe for flexible pipe. The remainder of the
trench shall be backfilled and compacted by spreading and rolling or
compacted by mechanical rammers or tampers in layers not exceeding 6 inches.
Tests for density shall be made as necessary to ensure conformance to the
compaction requirements specified below. Where it is necessary, in the
opinion of the Contracting Officer, that sheeting or portions of bracing
used be left in place, the contract will be adjusted accordingly.
Untreated sheeting shall not be left in place beneath structures or
pavements.
3.7.2
Backfilling Pipe in Fill Sections
For pipe placed in fill sections, backfill material and the placement and
compaction procedures shall be as specified below. The fill material shall
be uniformly spread in layers longitudinally on both sides of the pipe, not
exceeding 6 inches in compacted depth, and shall be compacted by rolling
parallel with pipe or by mechanical tamping or ramming. Prior to
commencing normal filling operations, the crown width of the fill at a
height of 12 inches above the top of the pipe shall extend a distance of
not less than twice the outside pipe diameter on each side of the pipe or
12 feet, whichever is less. After the backfill has reached at least 12
inches above the top of the pipe, the remainder of the fill shall be placed
and thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 6 inches. Use select
granular material for this entire region of backfill for flexible pipe
installations.
3.7.3
Movement of Construction Machinery
When compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with the

pipe, displacement of or injury to the pipe shall be avoided. Movement of
construction machinery over a culvert or storm drain at any stage of
construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Any damaged pipe shall be
repaired or replaced.
SECTION 33 40 00
3.7.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
Compaction
3.7.4.1
Cohesionless materials include gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, sands, and

gravelly sands. Cohesive materials include clayey and silty gravels,
gravel-silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand-clay mixtures, clays,
silts, and very fine sands. When results of compaction tests for
moisture-density relations are recorded on graphs, cohesionless soils will
show straight lines or reverse-shaped moisture-density curves, and cohesive
soils will show normal moisture-density curves.
3.7.4.2
Minimum Density
Backfill over and around the pipe and backfill around and adjacent to
drainage structures shall be compacted at the approved moisture content to
the following applicable minimum density, which will be determined as
specified below.
a.
3.7.5
Under unpaved or turfed traffic areas, density shall not be less than
90 percent of maximum density for cohesive material and 95 percent of
maximum density for cohesionless material.
Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor and performed at no

additional cost to the Government. Testing shall be performed by an
approved commercial testing laboratory or by the Contractor subject to
approval. Tests shall be performed in sufficient number to ensure that
specified density is being obtained. Laboratory tests for moisture-density
relations shall be made in accordance with ASTM D1557 except that
mechanical tampers may be used provided the results are correlated with
those obtained with the specified hand tamper. Field density tests shall
be determined in accordance with ASTM D2167 or ASTM D6938. When ASTM D6938
is used, the calibration curves shall be checked and adjusted, if
necessary, using the sand cone method as described in paragraph Calibration
of the referenced publications. ASTM D6938 results in a wet unit weight of
soil and ASTM D6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the
soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall be
checked along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D6938.
Test results shall be furnished the Contracting Officer. The calibration
checks of both the density and moisture gauges shall be made at the
beginning of a job on each different type of material encountered and at
intervals as directed.
3.8
3.8.1
PIPELINE TESTING
Post-Installation Inspection
One hundred percent of all reinforced concrete pipe installations shall be

checked for joint separations, soil migration through the joint, cracks
greater than 0.01 inches, settlement and alignment. One hundred percent of
all flexible pipes (HDPE, PVC, CMP) shall be checked for rips, tears, joint
separations, soil migration through the joint, cracks, localized bucking,
bulges, settlement and alignment.
a.
Replace pipes having cracks greater than 0.1 inches in width or

deflection greater than 5 percent deflection. An engineer shall
evaluate all pipes with cracks greater than 0.01 inches but less than
SECTION 33 40 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
0.10 inches to determine if any remediation or repair is required. RCP

with crack width less than 0.10 inches and located in a non-corrosive
environment (pH 5.5) are generally acceptable. Repair or replace any
pipe with crack exhibiting displacement across the crack, exhibiting
bulges, creases, tears, spalls, or delamination.
b.
Reports: The deflection results and finial post installation

inspection report shall include: a copy of all video taken, pipe
location identification, equipment used for inspection, inspector name,
deviation from design, grade, deviation from line, deflection and
deformation of flexible pipe systems, inspector notes, condition of
joints, condition of pipe wall (e.g. distress, cracking, wall damage
dents, bulges, creases, tears, holes, etc.).
SECTION 33 40 00
W912HN-09-X-1813
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10A

*1 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND
11/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES

ASTM A 123/A 123M

Steel Products
ASTM A 153/A 153M

Hardware
ASTM B 117
(2009) Standing Practice for Operating

ASTM B 3

Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM B 8

Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
ASTM D 1654

Environments

IEEE 81
(1983) Guide for Measuring Earth

Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System
IEEE C2
(2007; TIA 2007-1; TIA 2007-2; TIA 2007-3;

TIA 2007-4; TIA 2007-5; Errata 2006-1;
Errata 2007-2; Errata 2009-3) National
Electrical Safety Code
ANSI C119.1
(2006) Electric Connectors - Sealed

Insulated Underground Connector Systems
Rated 600 Volts
ANSI C80.1

Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
ANSI/NEMA FB 1
W912HN-09-X-1813
(2007) Standard for Fittings, Cast Metal

Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,
Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable

NFPA 70
(2011) National Electrical Code

UL 1242
(2006; R 2006;R 2007) Standard for

Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -Steel
UL 467
UL 486A-486B
(2003; R 2004 - R 2010) Wire Connectors
UL 514A
(2004; R 2005 ; R 2007; R 2009; R 2010)

Metallic Outlet Boxes
UL 6
(2007) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 651
(2005; R thru 2010) Standard for Schedule

40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Items provided under this section shall be specifically suitable for the
following service conditions.
a.
Altitude 400 feet.
b.
Ambient Summer Temperature 91 degrees F.(Avg.)
c.
Frequency 60
1.3
SUBMITTALS

approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings
As-Built Drawings
Drawings, as specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Nameplates
Catalog cuts, brochures, circulars, specifications, product
data, and printed information in sufficient detail and scope to
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
verify compliance with the requirements of the contract documents.

A complete itemized listing of equipment and materials proposed
for incorporation into the work. Each entry shall include an item
number, the quantity of items proposed, and the name of the
manufacturer of each such item.
Installation Requirements
As a minimum, installation procedures for transformers,
substations, switchgear, and splices. Procedures shall include
cable pulling plans, diagrams, instructions, and precautions
required to install, adjust, calibrate, and test the devices and
equipment.
SD-06 Test Reports
Factory Tests
Certified factory test reports shall be submitted when the
manufacturer performs routine factory tests, including tests
required by standards listed in paragraph REFERENCES. Results of
factory tests performed shall be certified by the manufacturer, or
an approved testing laboratory, and submitted within 7 days
following successful completion of the tests. The manufacturer's
pass-fail criteria for tests specified in paragraph FIELD TESTING
shall be included.
Field Testing
A proposed field test plan, 20 days prior to testing the
installed system. No field test shall be performed until the test
plan is approved. The test plan shall consist of complete field
test procedures including tests to be performed, test equipment
required, and tolerance limits.
Operating Tests
Six copies of the tests report in 8-1/2 by 11 inch binders
having a minimum of three rings, including a separate section for
each test. Sections shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers
with tabs.
SD-07 Certificates
Where materials or equipment are specified to conform to the
standards of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or to be
constructed or tested, or both, in accordance with the standards
of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), the Institute
of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), or the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), submit proof that the
items provided conform to such requirements. The label of, or
listing by, UL will be acceptable as evidence that the items
conform. Either a certification or a published catalog
specification data statement, to the effect that the item is in
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
accordance with the referenced ANSI or IEEE standard, will be

acceptable as evidence that the item conforms. A similar
certification or published catalog specification data statement to
the effect that the item is in accordance with the referenced NEMA
standard, by a company listed as a member company of NEMA, will be
acceptable as evidence that the item conforms. In lieu of such
certification or published data, the Contractor may submit a
certificate from a recognized testing agency equipped and
competent to perform such services, stating that the items have
been tested and that they conform to the requirements listed,
including methods of testing of the specified agencies.
Compliance with above-named requirements does not relieve the
Contractor from compliance with any other requirements of the
specifications.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Six copies of operation and maintenance manuals, within 7
calendar days following the completion of tests and including
assembly, installation, operation and maintenance instructions,
spare parts data which provides supplier name, current cost,
catalog order number, and a recommended list of spare parts to be
stocked. Manuals shall also include data outlining detailed
procedures for system startup and operation, and a troubleshooting
guide which lists possible operational problems and corrective
action to be taken. A brief description of all equipment, basic
operating features, and routine maintenance requirements shall
also be included. Documents shall be bound in a binder marked or
identified on the spine and front cover. A table of contents page
shall be included and marked with pertinent contract information
and contents of the manual. Tabs shall be provided to separate
different types of documents, such as catalog ordering
information, drawings, instructions, and spare parts data. Index
sheets shall be provided for each section of the manual when
warranted by the quantity of documents included under separate
tabs or dividers. Three additional copies of the instructions
manual shall be provided within 30 calendar days following the
manuals.
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Detail Drawings
Submit detail drawings consisting of equipment drawings, illustrations,

schedules, instructions, diagrams manufacturers standard installation
drawings and other information necessary to define the installation and
enable the Government to check conformity with the requirements of the
contract drawings.
a.
If departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the

Contractor, complete details of such departures shall be included with
the detail drawings. Approved departures shall be made at no
b.
Detail drawings shall show how components are assembled, function

together and how they will be installed on the project. Data and
drawings for component parts of an item or system shall be coordinated
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
and submitted as a unit. Data and drawings shall be coordinated and

included in a single submission. Multiple submissions for the same
equipment or system are not acceptable except where prior approval has
been obtained from the Contracting Officer. In such cases, a list of
data to be submitted later shall be included with the first
submission. Detail drawings shall consist of the following:
1.4.2
(1)
Detail drawings showing physical arrangement, construction

details, connections, finishes, materials used in fabrication,
provisions for conduit or busway entrance, access requirements for
installation and maintenance, physical size, electrical
characteristics, foundation and support details, and equipment
weight. Drawings shall be drawn to scale and/or dimensioned. All
optional items shall be clearly identified as included or excluded.
(2)
Internal wiring diagrams of equipment showing wiring as actually

provided for this project. External wiring connections shall be
clearly identified.
As-Built Drawings
The as-built drawings shall be a record of the construction as installed.

The drawings shall include the information shown on the contract drawings
as well as deviations, modifications, and changes from the contract
drawings, however minor. The as-built drawings shall be a full sized set
of prints marked to reflect deviations, modifications, and changes. The
as-built drawings shall be complete and show the location, size,
dimensions, part identification, and other information. Additional sheets
may be added. The as-built drawings shall be jointly inspected for
accuracy and completeness by the Contractor's quality control
representative and by the Contracting Officer prior to the submission of
each monthly pay estimate. Upon completion of the work, provide three full
sized sets of the marked prints to the Contracting Officer for approval.
If upon review, the as-built drawings are found to contain errors and/or
omissions, they will be returned to the Contractor for correction. Correct
and return the as-built drawings to the Contracting Officer for approval
within 10 calendar days from the time the drawings are returned to the
Contractor.
1.5
Visually inspect devices and equipment when received and prior to

acceptance from conveyance. Protect stored items from the environment in
accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Damaged items
shall be replaced.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STANDARD PRODUCT
Provide material and equipment which are the standard product of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and that
essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
2 years prior to bid opening. Items of the same classification shall be
identical including equipment, assemblies, parts, and components.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
2.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
NAMEPLATES
2.2.1
General
Each major component of this specification shall have the manufacturer's

name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on
a nameplate securely attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be made
of noncorrosive metal. Equipment containing liquid dielectrics shall have
the type of dielectric on the nameplate.
2.3
CORROSION PROTECTION
2.3.1
Ferrous Metal Materials
2.3.1.1
Hardware
Ferrous metal hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with

ASTM A 153/A 153M and ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.3.1.2
Equipment
Equipment and component items, including but not limited to ferrous metal
luminaries not hot-dip galvanized or porcelain enamel finished, shall be
provided with corrosion-resistant finishes which shall withstand 120 hours
of exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 without loss of
paint or release of adhesion of the paint primer coat to the metal surface
in excess of 1/16 inch from the test mark. The scribed test mark and test
evaluation shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1654 with a rating of not
less than 7 in accordance with TABLE 1, (procedure A). Cut edges or
otherwise damaged surfaces of hot-dip galvanized sheet steel or mill
galvanized sheet steel shall be coated with a zinc rich paint conforming to
the manufacturer's standard.
2.4
CABLES
Cables shall be single conductor type unless otherwise indicated.

2.4.1
Low-Voltage Cables
Cables shall be rated 600 volts and shall conform to the requirements of
NFPA 70, and must be UL listed for the application or meet the applicable
section of either ICEA or NEMA standards.
2.4.1.1
Conductor Material
Underground cables shall be annealed copper complying with ASTM B 3 and

ASTM B 8.
2.4.1.2
Insulation
Insulation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, and shall be UL listed for
the application or meet the applicable sections of either ICEA, or NEMA
standards.
2.4.1.3
Jackets
Multiconductor cables shall have an overall PVC outer jacket.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
2.4.1.4
W912HN-09-X-1813
In Duct
Cables shall be single-conductor cable, in accordance with NFPA 70.

2.5
CABLE JOINTS, TERMINATIONS, AND CONNECTORS
2.5.1
Low-Voltage Cable Splices
Low-voltage cable splices and terminations shall be rated at not less than
600 Volts. Splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be made with
an insulated, solderless, pressure type connector, conforming to the
applicable requirements of UL 486A-486B. Splices in conductors No. 8 AWG
and larger shall be made with noninsulated, solderless, pressure type
connector, conforming to the applicable requirements of UL 486A-486B.
Splices shall then be covered with an insulation and jacket material
equivalent to the conductor insulation and jacket. Splices below grade or
in wet locations shall be sealed type conforming to ANSI C119.1 or shall be
waterproofed by a sealant-filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable,
thermosetting tubing or by pouring a thermosetting resin into a mold that
surrounds the joined conductors.
2.6
CONDUIT AND DUCTS
Duct lines shall be nonencased direct-burial, thick-wall type.

2.6.1
Metallic Conduit
Intermediate metal conduit shall comply with UL 1242. Rigid galvanized

steel conduit shall comply with UL 6 and ANSI C80.1. Metallic conduit
fittings and outlets shall comply with UL 514A and ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.6.2
Nonmetallic Ducts
2.6.2.1
Direct Burial
UL 651 Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 as indicated.

2.6.3
Conduit Sealing Compound
Compounds for sealing ducts and conduit shall have a putty-like consistency
workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 35 degrees F, shall
neither slump at a temperature of 300 degrees F, nor harden materially when
exposed to the air. Compounds shall adhere to clean surfaces of fiber or
plastic ducts; metallic conduits or conduit coatings; concrete, masonry, or
lead; any cable sheaths, jackets, covers, or insulation materials; and the
common metals. Compounds shall form a seal without dissolving, noticeably
changing characteristics, or removing any of the ingredients. Compounds
shall have no injurious effect upon the hands of workmen or upon materials.
2.7
2.7.1
GROUNDING AND BONDING

Driven Ground Rods
Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel conforming to UL 467 not less than
3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length. Sectional type rods may be
used.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
2.7.2
W912HN-09-X-1813
Grounding Conductors
Grounding conductors shall be bare, except where installed in conduit with

associated phase conductors. Insulated conductors shall be of the same
material as phase conductors and green color-coded, except that conductors
shall be rated no more than 600 volts. Bare conductors shall be ASTM B 8
soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated. Aluminum is not acceptable.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the
field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing any work.
3.2
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Equipment and devices shall be installed and energized in accordance with

the manufacturer's published instructions. Steel conduits installed
underground shall be installed and protected from corrosion in conformance
with the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
Except as covered herein, excavation, trenching, and backfilling shall
conform to the requirements of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.2.1
Conformance to Codes
The installation shall comply with the requirements and recommendations of

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable.
3.3
CABLE AND BUSWAY INSTALLATION
3.3.1
3.3.1.1
Direct-Burial
Trenching
Trenches for direct-burial cables shall be excavated to depths required to

provide the minimum necessary cable cover. Bottoms of trenches shall be
smooth and free of stones and sharp objects. Where bottoms of trenches
comprise materials other than sand, a 3 inch layer of sand shall be laid
first and compacted to approximate densities of surrounding firm soil.
3.3.1.2
Cable Burial
Cables shall be unreeled along the sides of or in trenches and carefully

placed on sand or earth bottoms. Pulling cables into direct-burial
trenches from a fixed reel position will not be permitted, except as
required to pull cables through conduits under paving or railroad tracks.
Where cables cross, a separation of at least 3 inches shall be provided,
unless each cable circuit is protected by a nonmetallic conduit sleeve at
the crossing. Where single-conductor cable is installed, all 3 phases and
the neutral shall be installed in the same sleeve. Bend radius of any
cable shall be not less than 8 times the diameter of the cable. In no case
shall cables be left under longitudinal tension. The first 6 inch layer of
backfill shall be of sand. Machine compaction shall not be used within 6
inches of the cable.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
3.3.1.3
W912HN-09-X-1813
Other Requirements
Where direct-burial cables cross under roads or other paving exceeding 5

feet in width, such cables shall be installed in concrete-encased ducts.
Ducts shall extend at least 1 foot beyond each edge of any paving and at
least 5 feet beyond each side of any railroad tracks. Cables may be pulled
into duct from a fixed reel where suitable rollers are provided in the
trench. Where direct burial cable transitions to duct-enclosed cable,
direct-burial cables shall be centered in duct entrances, and a waterproof
nonhardening mastic compound shall be used to facilitate such centering.
If paving or railroad tracks are in place where cables are to be installed,
coated rigid steel conduits driven under the paving or railroad tracks may
be used in lieu of concrete-encased ducts. Damage to conduit coatings
shall be prevented by providing ferrous pipe jackets or by predrilling.
Where cuts are made in any paving, the paving and subbase shall be restored
to their original condition.
3.3.1.4
Cable Joints or Splices
Cable joints or splices in direct-burial cables are not permitted. Cable

joints or splices in direct burial installations shall be installed in
above-ground junction boxes or in cast metal splice boxes suitable for
direct burial use. Cable joints or splices in duct banks shall be made
only in manholes, handholes, or pullboxes.
3.3.1.5
Cable Markers
Markers shall be located near the ends of cable runs, at each cable joint
or splice, at approximately every 500 feet along cable runs, and at changes
in direction of cable runs. In addition to markers, a 5 mil, brightly
colored plastic tape not less than 3 inches in width and suitably inscribed
at not more than 10 feet on centers, or other approved dig-in warning
indication, shall be placed approximately 12 inches below finished grade
levels of trenches.
3.4
CONNECTIONS TO FACILITIES
Cables shall be extended into the various facilities as indicated, and

shall be connected to the first applicable termination point at each
facility. Interfacing with facility conduit systems shall be at conduit
stubouts terminating 5 feet outside of a facility and 2 feet below finished
grade as specified and provided under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. After installation of cables, conduits shall be
sealed with caulking compound to prevent entrance of moisture or gases.
3.5
GROUNDING
A ground ring consisting of the indicated configuration of bare copper

conductors and driven ground rods shall be installed as shown. Equipment
frames of metal-enclosed equipment, and other noncurrent-carrying metal
parts shall be grounded.
3.5.1
Grounding Electrodes
Grounding electrodes shall be installed as shown on the drawings and as

follows:
a.
Driven rod electrodes - Unless otherwise indicated, ground rods shall

be driven into the earth until the tops of the rods are approximately 1
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
foot below finished grade.

b.
Ground ring - A ground ring shall be installed as shown consisting of

bare copper conductors installed not less than 30 inches below finished
top of soil grade. Ground ring conductors shall be sized as shown.
c.
Additional electrodes
additional electrodes
conductors to achieve
electrodes will be up
feet apart.
3.5.2
- When the required ground resistance is not met,

shall be provided interconnected with grounding
the specified ground resistance. The additional
to three, 10 feet rods spaced a minimum of 10
Grounding and Bonding Connections
Connections above grade shall be made by the fusion-welding process or with

bolted solderless connectors, in compliance with UL 467, and those below
grade shall be made by a fusion-welding process. Where grounding
conductors are connected to aluminum-composition conductors, specially
treated or lined copper-to-aluminum connectors suitable for this purpose
shall be used.
3.5.3
Grounding and Bonding Conductors
Grounding and bonding conductors include conductors used to bond

transformer enclosures and equipment frames to the grounding electrode
system. Grounding and bonding conductors shall be sized as shown, and
located to provide maximum physical protection. Bends greater than 45
degrees in ground conductors are not permitted. Routing of ground
conductors through concrete shall be avoided. When concrete penetration is
necessary, nonmetallic conduit shall be cast flush with the points of
concrete entrance and exit so as to provide an opening for the ground
conductor, and the opening shall be sealed with a suitable compound after
installation.
3.6
3.6.1
FIELD TESTING
General
Field testing shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting

Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer 10 days prior to conducting
tests. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to conduct
field tests. Perform all tests and inspections recommended by the
manufacturer unless specifically waived by the Contracting Officer.
Maintain a written record of all tests which includes date, test performed,
personnel involved, devices tested, serial number and name of test
equipment, and test results. Field test reports shall be signed and dated
by the Contractor.
3.6.2
Safety
Provide and use safety devices such as rubber gloves, protective barriers,
and danger signs to protect and warn personnel in the test vicinity.
Replace any devices or equipment which are damaged due to improper test
procedures or handling.
3.6.3
Ground-Resistance Tests
The resistance of each grounding electrode and each grounding electrode

system shall be measured using the fall-of-potential method defined in
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
W912HN-09-X-1813
IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the

electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally
dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance
measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before
the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of
separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the
specified number of electrodes must still be provided.
a.
Single rod electrode - 25 ohms.
b.
Multiple rod electrodes - 15 ohms.
c.
Ground ring - 15 ohms.
3.6.4
Circuit Breaker Tests
The following field tests shall be performed on circuit breakers.

Pass-fail criteria shall be in accordance with the circuit breaker
manufacturer's specifications.
a.
3.6.5
Manual operation of the breaker.

Operating Tests
After the installation is completed, and at such times as the Contracting

Officer may direct, conduct operating tests for approval. The equipment
shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements
herein. An operating test report shall be submitted including the
following:
a.
The dates of testing.
b.
The test results, signed and dated.
c.
A description of adjustments made.
3.7
ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance of the facility will not be given until the Contractor has
successfully completed all tests and after all defects in installation,
material or operation have been corrected.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
Fort Benning Booker Range 75th Ranger Regiment

Merrick & Company
August 16, 2012

Contour Project: G12MEC01
1.0 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

This executive summary presents an overview of pertinent findings, conclusions, and
recommendations.
The subject Site is located within the Booker Range 75th Ranger Regiment on the Fort
Benning Army Installation Base. More specifically, the Site is situated along the southern
side of 1st Division Road, approximately 1- miles west of its intersection with Lindsey
Creek Parkway in Fort Benning, Chattahoochee County, Georgia.
The Site improvements will consist of the construction of various lightly-loaded structures
including: a latrine facility; enhancement of an existing classroom structure; various bleacher
enclosures; overhead cover structures; a berm and concrete overhang as well as an access
roadway. Based on provided information, minimal cuts and/or fills will be required during
mass grading and construction.
The soil test borings encountered fill/disturbed soils and naturally occurring Coastal Plain
soils, extending to their respective termination depths ranging from 10 to 35 feet below the
ground surface. The encountered soils were described as silty sands (SM), poorly graded
sands (SP), clayey sands (SC) and clayey silts (ML) with Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
values ranging from 4 to 45 blows per foot (bpf). Groundwater, partially weathered rock
(PWR) and/or auger refusal material (rock) were not encountered in any of the soil test
borings to their respective termination depths.
Based on the initial results of the Level III Soil Survey performed for the Latrine Septic
Field, a percolation rate of 45 minutes per inch is recommended for use in the design of the
Latrine. Due to a perched water table restriction at a depth of 45-inches, we recommend that
the bottom trench depth for the septic field system does not exceed 21-inches. Additionally,
the soils are further identified as Hydrologic Group C.
Fill/disturbed soils were encountered in the upper 3 to 6 feet throughout the area of
exploration, with the exception of Borings B-4 and B-5 (located adjacent to the existing berm
in the central portion of the Site). The encountered fill/disturbed soils appeared to be free of
organic debris and trash; however, poor consistency soils (SPT values of 8 bpf or less) were
encountered in the upper 5 feet within Borings B-6, B-7 and B-8. Poor consistency soils will
require in-place densification and/or removal, recompaction and proofrolling prior to
construction of footings, building slabs, pavement sections and/or additional fill placement.
Based on the boring data, our analyses and after completion of the recommended subgrade
preparation, the various lightly-loaded structures may be supported on shallow foundation
systems, bearing on approved soil subgrades. For the design of the shallow foundation
systems, a maximum allowable net bearing pressure of 2,500 pounds per square foot may be
used.
Fort Benning Booker Range 75th Ranger Regiment

Merrick & Company
August 16, 2012

Contour Project: G12MEC01
Building slabs may be supported directly on naturally occurring Coastal Plain soils or well
compacted structural fill. Provided the slab subgrade is prepared in accordance with our
recommendations, a subgrade modulus reaction (K) of 100 pounds per cubic inch (pci,
pounds per square inch per inch of deflection) may be used for slab design. Placing a 4 to 6inch layer of compacted crushed aggregate base (meeting the requirements of GDOT Section
815) directly beneath the building slabs will increase the moduli of subgrade reactions (K) to
120 and 140 pci, respectively.
To reduce the possibility of shear failure, wall bearing and column foundations should be
designed with a minimum width of 18 and 24 inches, respectively. According to the
Department of Defense Structural Load Data obtained from UFC-3-310-01 (Table C.1), the
frost penetration depth for Fort Benning Military Base in Georgia is estimated at 0 to
6-inches; however, we recommend that the exterior wall bearing and column foundations be
designed with a minimum embedment depth of 18 inches. The interior foundations should be
designed with a minimum embedment depth of 12 inches. The embedment depth should be
measured from the base of the foundation to lowest adjacent outside grade.
The recommended lateral earth pressure parameters for design of below grade/concrete
retaining walls in naturally occurring Coastal Plain soils or structural fill are as follows:
Earth Pressure
Coefficient
At-Rest (KO)
Active (KA)
Passive (KP)
Earth Pressure Value

0.53
0.36
2.77
Equivalent Fluid Density

(pcf)
64
43
332
These values assume that the wall has horizontal backfill and no surcharge loads such as
from adjacent structures. A moist soil unit weight of 120 pounds cubic foot, a phi angle of 28
degrees, and a sliding coefficient of friction equal to 0.53 may be used in the design of
retaining walls. The equivalent fluid densities above do not include a safety factor; however,
a factor of safety of 1.5 may be used for the passive earth pressure and coefficient of friction.
Based on the known geological features of the Coastal Plain soils, the site data, and as per
Section 1613.5.2 of the 2006 International Building Code, it is our opinion that the Site Class
definition for the site is D. In addition, the United States Geologic Survey (USGS)
Earthquake Hazards Program on-line latitude/longitude search (Earthquake Ground Motion
Parameter Java Application Version 5.0.9a) was utilized to review the mapped coefficients
based on site location. Based on these sources, a value of 15.0 and 7.0 percent relative to the
acceleration of gravity (g) for Ss and S1, respectively, are recommended.

Revision 1 Specs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Revision 1 Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fort Benning

Task Order Request Number

U.S. ARMY ENGINEER DISTRICT, SAVANNAH

This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

August 31, 2012

Tyler Construction Group, Inc.

BASE - Erosion Control and Sediment Control

BASE 400 M Range Renovation

BASE 400 M Range with all Ancillary

BASE 100 M Covered Range Renovation

BASE 100 M Covered Range with all Ancillary

OPTION 1 100 M Flat Range Renovation

OPTION 2 100 M Flat Range with all Ancillary

OPTION 3 50 M Flat Range Renovation

OPTION 4 50 M Flat Range with all Ancillary

TOTAL BASE OFFER BID (Items 0001-0005)

TOTAL OPTION OFFER BID (Items 0006-0009)

NOTES FOR BID SCHEDULE A

BASE - Design and Construct

0001A Design Classroom

0001B Construct Classroom

BASE Design and Construct

0002A Design Concrete Pad for Arms

TOTAL BASE OFFER BID (Items 0001-0002)

NOTES FOR BID SCHEDULE B

Superseded General Decision Number: GA20100251

ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST

FOOTNOTES: Work on bar joists, walk logs, exposed steel and

IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 24.04

PAINTER: Brush, Roller, Spray...$ 18.00

CARPENTER, Includes Cabinet

CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$

DRYWALL HANGER...................$ 13.50

IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 11.05

METAL BUILDING ERECTOR...........$ 11.28

PIPEFITTER, Excludes HVAC

PLUMBER, Includes HVAC Pipe

ROOFER, Excludes Installation

SHEET METAL WORKER, Includes

SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire

TILE SETTER......................$ 15.00

TRUCK DRIVER.....................$ 7.25

cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage

an existing published wage determination

On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests

200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.

Wage Decision GA120071

Superseded General Decision Number: GA20100143

Crawford, Monroe, and Muscogee Counties

PAINTER: Brush, Roller and

CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 11.75

IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 11.50

TRUCK DRIVER.....................$ 9.50

operation to which welding is incidental.

5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union rates, LA

an existing published wage determination

On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests

Wage and Hour Administrator

BUILDING FUNCTION AND AESTHETICS

This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.

Booker Range 75th Ranger Regiment

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS